Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutCLE202300028 Application 2023-03-10 (2)2 3 4 5 0 7 0 0 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 x! 0 3 NI MI LI Do HI GI FI EI u CI GENERAL NOTES 1. PRIOR TO THE ISSUANCE OF A BUILDING PERMIT, THE APPLICATION SHALL HAVE 26. USE ACOUSTICAL SEALANT AROUND ALL PIPES, DUCTS, CONDUITS, OUTLETS, 50. PROVIDE FIREPROOFING OF STRUCTURAL BEAMS AND CEILINGS, ETC., AS REQUIRED EVIDENCE OF CURRENT WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE ON FILE SWITCHES, ETC. ON BOTH SIDES OF CROSSING/ PENETRATING WALLS WITH THERMAL BY LANDLORD OR AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. WITH THE DEPARTMENT IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE LOCAL LABOR CODE. AND ACOUSTIC INSULATION. 51. ANY WOOD CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED. 2. AFTER OBTAINING BUILDING PERMIT AND BEFORE COMMENCING WITH THE WORK, GC 27. EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL LEAVE THE SITE IN A NEAT, CLEAN AND ORDERLY 52. ALL NOISE BARRIER BATTS (SOUND INSULATION) SHALL BE NONCOMBUSTIBLE. SHALL SHOW EVIDENCE THAT ALL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS HAVE BEEN MET. GC TO CONDITION UPON THE CONCLUSION OF HIS WORK ON A DAILY BASIS. ALL WASTE, 53. ANY DECORATIONS USED SHALL BE NON-COMBUSTIBLE OR BE FLAME PROOFED IN AN FORWARD ALL INSURANCE INFORMATION TO CSCM AND LANDLORD. RUBBISH AND EXCESS MATERIALS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE SITE PROMPTLY. APPROVED MANNER. 3. ALL REQUIRED PERMITS MUST BE OBTAINED FROM THE REQUIRED AUTHORITIES THE GC SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF ALL TRASH, 54. ALL REQUIRED EMERGENCY EXITS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH EXIT SIGNS HAVING HAVING JURISDICTION BEFORE BUILDINGS ARE OCCUPIED. INCLUDING OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS AND TRASH GENERATED BY OWNERS GCS FOR LETTERS SIX (6) INCHES HIGH AND 3/4" WIDE IN CONTRASTING COLORS. SEE PLANS 4. GC SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR AND OBTAIN ALL PERMITS AND LICENSES AND PAY THE DURATION OF THE PROJECT. FOR LOCATIONS. SEE SPECIFICATIONS SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION. REQUIRED FEES. COPIES SHALL BE ISSUED TO CSCM AND LANDLORD. 28. SAFETY: ALL CONDUCT, WORK EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS SHALL BE IN FULL 55. ANY MATERIALS FOUND TO BE DEFECTIVE SHALL BE REMOVED AND REPLACED AT NO 5. GC SHALL BE FAMILIAR WITH ALL LANDLORD REQUIREMENTS AND CRITERIA, AND SHALL ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST SAFETY RULES AND REGULATIONS OF ALL ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE WITH SAME. GC SHALL INVESTIGATE LOCAL CODES AUTHORITIES AND AGENCIES HAVING JURISDICTION OVER THE WORK. 56. WORK COMPLETED BY OTHERS SHALL BE PROTECTED. IF OTHER TRADES CAUSE ANY AND PROCEDURES AND SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS. 29. CONSULT BUILDING UTILITY PLANS AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS BEFORE SAW DAMAGE IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF SAID TRADE TO COORDINATE REPAIRS WITH NO 6. CSCM SHALL ARRANGE FOR GC TO MEET WITH LANDLORD TO CAPTURE ANY LANDLORD CUTTING/CHOPPING CONCRETE SLAB OR CORE DRILLING CONCRETE SLAB. SPECIAL ADDITIONAL COST OR SCHEDULE CHANGES TO THE OWNER. COSTS (SECURITY/ENGINEER, DUMPSTER, ETC.) PRIOR TO BID. ATTENTION AND PRECAUTION MUST BE GIVEN BY THE GC TO COORDINATE AROUND 57. GC TO SCHEDULE AND COMPLETE A FULL CONSTRUCTION CLEAN OF THE ENTIRE 7. REMOVE ALL ABANDONED IMPROVEMENTS INCLUDING ELECTRICAL LOW VOLTAGE THE EXISTING MECHANICAL WORK LOCATED IN THE CEILING BELOW THE DEMISED SPACE ON THE FRIDAY BEFORE FFE WEEK. MECHANICAL AS WELL AS ALL ASSOCIATED CONDITIONS LION. PREMISES. GC SHALL RECEIVE SEPARATE WRITTEN APPROVAL BY LANDLORD AFTER 58. FIREBLOCKING AND DRAFT STOPPING SHALL COMPLY WITH LOCAL BUILDING CODES 8. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. WRITTEN DIMENSIONS PREVAIL IN ALL INSTANCES. TENANT SUBMITS A COORDINATED LAYOUT THAT IS APPROVED BY A STRUCTURAL AND AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. 9. IF / AS REQUIRED BY AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION GC MUST KEEP AN ORIGINAL ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE STATE APPLICABLE. 59. INTERIOR FLOOR FINISHES SHALL COMPLY WITH LOCAL BUILDING CODES. STAMPED COPY OF APPROVED PLANS ON SITE AT ALL TIMES DURING CONSTRUCTION. 30. GC TO PROVIDE POWER AND INTERNAL BLOCKING FOR SIGNAGE CONTIGUOUS TO THE 60. PENETRATIONS OF MEMBRANES THAT ARE PART OF A FIRE-RESISTANT RATED 10. INSPECT SITE, VERIFY FIELD DIMENSIONS BEFORE COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION. NEW SPACE AS NECESSARY. GC TO COORDINATE WITH CSCM AS EARLY AS POSSIBLE HORIZONTAL ASSEMBLY SHALL COMPLY WITH LOCAL BUILDING CODES. NOTIFY CSCM, ARCHITECT AND LANDLORD IMMEDIATELY OF ANY SIGNIFICANT FOR SIGNAGE PACKAGE AND REQUIREMENTS. 61. FOR FIRE -RATED WALLS OR PARTITIONS, THE SURFACE AREA OF INDIVIDUAL METALLIC DISCREPANCIES. 31. THE SCOPE OF THE WORK AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS IS FOR INTERIOR OUTLET OR SWITCH BOXES SHALL NOT EXCEED 16 SQ. INCHES. THE AGGREGATE 11. DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON PLANS ARE TO FACE OF EXTERIOR MASONRY, CONCRETE IMPROVEMENTS ONLY. OTHER BASE BUILDING SPACES AND CONSTRUCTION ARE NOT SURFACE OF THE BOXES SHALL NOT EXCEED 100 SQ. INCHES PER 100 SQ. FT. OF WALL COLUMN OR GRID LINES AND FACE OF GWB UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED OR DETAILED. IN THIS CONTRACT AND ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY (I.E. STRUCTURAL WORK, SURFACE. BOXES LOCATED ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF WALLS OR PARTITIONS SHALL BE HEIGHTS ARE DIMENSIONED FROM TOP OF FINISHED FLOOR. GC SHALL NOT ADJUST EXIT STAIRS, ELEVATORS, TOILET ROOMS, TELEPHONE AND ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES, SEPARATED BY A MINIMUM HORIZONTAL DISTANCE OF 24 INCHES. DIMENSIONS MARKED "CLEAR," "CLR,' OR "HOLD" WITHOUT ACCEPTANCE FROM THE ETC.) 62. GC TO PROTECT AND MAINTAIN EXISTING FIRE RATED STRUCTURE AND PATCH AND ARCHITECT. 32. A CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY MUST BE OBTAINED BY THE GC PRIOR TO OCCUPYING REPAIR AS NECESSARY. 12. FOR SIZE AND LOCATIONS OF ALL OPENINGS FOR MECHANICAL DUCT WORK, REFER TO ANY BUILDINGS OR PORTIONS OF BUILDINGS. 63. GC TO INSPECT EXISTING CONDITION OF EXTERIOR GLAZING, STOREFRONT SYSTEMS, MECHANICAL DRAWINGS. 33. GC TO PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS AS REQUIRED THROUGHOUT SPACE INCLUDING DOORS, HARDWARE, ETC. AND REPORT ANY NOTABLE DAMAGE TO CSCM. CSCM TO 13. WHERE FACTORY FINISHED OR FACTORY PRIMED ITEMS OCCUR SUCH AS GRILLES EQUIPMENT ACCESSIBILITY DRAIN CLEANOUTS AND J-BOXES. ANY ACCESS PANELS COORDINATE THE NECESSARY REPAIRS TO SUCH AREAS. DIFFUSERS, METAL TRIM AND ACCESSORIES, ETC., THEY SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH REQUIRED BUT NOT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS NEED TO BE COORDINATED AND IDENTIFIED 64. ALL WORK, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE GUARANTEED FOR A MINIMUM THE ADJACENT SURFACE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. TO ARCHITECT AND CSCM PRIOR TO WORK. ALL ACCESS PANELS ARE TO BE A METAL, PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE. THE GC SHALL PROVIDE 14. GC SHALL, IN THE WORK OF ALL TRADES, PERFORM ANY AND ALL CUTTING, PATCHING, CONCEALED DRYWALL FLANGE STYLE. THE OWNER WITH ALL EQUIPMENT MANUALS, WARRANTIES AND OPERATING REPAIRING, RESTORING AND THE LIKE NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK AND TO 34. WHERE LANDLORD REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING LOUD/DISRUPTIVE WORK ARE IN INSTRUCTIONS UPON FINAL ACCEPTANCE. RESTORE ANY DAMAGED OR AFFECTED SURFACES RESULTING FROM THE WORK OF PLACE GC AND ALL VENDORS WILL BE REQUIRED TO PERFORM THIS WORK DURING 65. DURING ALL CONSTRUCTION, THE GC IS TO PROTECT ANY AND ALL EXISTING THIS CONTRACT TO THEIR ORIGINAL CONDITION TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE TENANT NON -BUSINESS HOURS. GC IS TO BID THE PROJECT APPROPRIATELY AS NO CHANGE COMPUTERS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FROM DUST AND DAMAGE DURING AND THE LANDLORD. ALL ROOF PATCHING AND REPAIRS SHALL RETURN AREA TO "LIKE ORDERS WILL BE ISSUED FOR TIME PREMIUMS. THIS ALSO APPLIES TO RENOVATIONS ALL PHASES OF DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING THE EXISTING NEW CONDITION. ALL ROOFING WORK IS TO BE DONE BY THE LANDLORD'S ROOFER, AND EXPANSIONS WHEN AN EXISTING BRANCH SPACE IS TO REMAIN OCCUPIED DURING EQUIPMENT ROOM. GC SHALL COORDINATE THE PROTECTION OR RELOCATION OF ANY SHOULD THIS BE A REQUIREMENT OF THE LANDLORD, AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. CONSTRUCTION. BEFORE COMMENSING ANY SUCH WORK GC IS TO PROVIDE A EXISTING EQUIPMENT WITH THE CSCM PRIOR TO PROTECTION/RELOCATION EFFORTS. 15. THERE SHALL BE NO EXPOSED PIPE, CONDUITS, DUCTS, VENTS, ETC., IN PUBLIC AREAS. SCHEDULE WHICH IS TO BE REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY CSCM AND LANDLORD. DAMAGE TO ANY EXISTING EQUIPMENT CAUSED BY NEGLECT OF THE GC SHALL BE THE 16. GC SHALL COORDINATE WORK PERFORMED BY OTHER CONTRACTORS. 35. THE GC SHALL HAVE DAILY ACCESS TO EMAIL AND CELL PHONE SERVICE ON SITE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GC TO REIMBURSE THE CSCM THE AMOUNT REQUIRED FOR DISCREPANCIES, IF ANY, SHOULD BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE CSCM FOR THROUGHOUT THE ENTIRE CONSTRUCTION PERIOD. REPAIRS OR REPLACEMENT. RESOLUTION BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. 36. THE GC SHALL PROVIDE SUPERVISION VIA AN ON -SITE FULL TIME NON -TRADE WORKING 66. BUILDING ELEMENTS (I.E. BEARING WALLS, NONBEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS, 17. SHOULD THE DRAWINGS DISAGREE WITH THEMSELVES OR WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS SUPERINTENDENT FOR THE DURATION OF THE CONSTRUCTION PROJECT UNTIL ALL FLOOR CONSTRUCTION, ETC.) SHALL BE OF NONCOMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS EXCEPT AS OR SHOULD THE SPECIFICATIONS DISAGREE WITH THEMSELVES, THE BETTER QUALITY PUNCH LIST ITEMS ARE COMPLETED AND SIGNED OFF BY SCHWAB PM AND THROUGH PERMITTED IN CBC 603. AND/ OR GREATER QUANTITY OF WORK OR MATERIALS SHALL BE ESTIMATED UPON THE BRANCH OPENING AT WHICH TIME THE FURNITURE AND TECHNOLOGY ARE 67. GC IS TO BE FURNISHED WITH A COPY OF THE LANDLORD'S GENERAL NOTES, AND SHOULD BE SUBMITTED TO ARCHITECT AS A REQUEST FOR INFORMATION. COMPLETED AND SIGNED OFF ON BY SCHWAB CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. SPECIFICATIONS, ASI'S, ETC. BY THE CSCM BEFORE STARTING WORK. 18. IF ANY ERROR OR OMISSION APPEARS IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, GC SHALL NOTIFY 37. GC SHALL RECEIVE AND SAFEGUARD ANY AND ALL PACKAGES, SHIPMENTS AND 68. CONTRACTOR REQUIRED TO KEEP DUMPSTER ON SITE UNTIL DAY BEFORE OPENING ARCHITECT IN WRITING OF SUCH ERROR OR OMISSION BY COMPLETING A REQUEST DELIVERIES ADDRESSED TO CHARLES SCHWAB. GC SHALL NOTIFY CSCM VIA EMAIL FOR TENANTS TRASH. FOR INFORMATION (RFI) FORM, AND SUBMITTING IT TO THE CSCM AND ARCHITECT WHEN SUCH DELIVERIES ARRIVE. 69. UPON OWNER TURN -OVER OF A NEW SPACE, AS WELL AS AFTER A PREVIOUSLY USED IMMEDIATELY. 38 T PROVIDE DAILY DIGITAL PROGRESS PHOTOS T THE M VIA EMAIL. GC 0 0 G OG SS 0 OS 0 CSC SPACE HAS BEEN FULLY DEMO'D THE GC AND THE CSCM ARE TO WALK THE ENTIRE 19. GC TO VERIFY PRIOR TO INSTALLATION THAT ALL ASSEMBLIES WITHIN THE SPACE 39. GC COORDINATE WITH CSCM FOR THE PROVISION OF ACCESSIBILITY AND/OR SPACE AND CAREFULLY INSPECT FOR ANY PRE-EXISTING DAMAGES OR DEFICIENCIES OPERATE PROPERLY INDIVIDUALLY AND IN CONJUNCTION WITH ADJACENT SYSTEMS OCCUPANCY SIGNS CONFORMING TO APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS. TO THE CONSTRUCTION ASSEMBLIES. ANYTHING FOUND TO BE IN NEED OF AND REPORT ANY CONFLICTS TO THE CSCM AND ARCHITECT PRIOR TO FINAL REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. CORRECTION SHOULD BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE BUILDING OWNER BY INSTALLATION. 40. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL EXIT SIGNS AND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS IN TYPE, NUMBER AND THE CSCM PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH CONSTRUCTION. THE CONTRACT TO CORRECT 20. NO SUBSTITUTIONS ARE PERMITTED WITHOUT ARCHITECTS WRITTEN APPROVAL. LOCATION A DIRE DIRECTED BY THE FIRE DEPARTMENT FIELD INSPECTOR. S C ANY PRE-EXISTING CONDITIONS THROUGHOUT THE SPACE WHICH WOULD AFFECT THE 21. GC IS TO SUBMIT COMPLETE SHOP DRAWINGS TO ARCHITECT, VIA EMAIL WHENEVER 41. INTERIOR FINISHES SHALL NOT EXCEED A FLAME SPREAD RATING OF 25 AT EXIT FUNCTIONALITY OR APPEARANCE OF THE FINAL TENANT SPACE IS TO BE COORDINATED POSSIBLE, FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL OF ALL PRODUCTS BEING USED FOR THIS CORRIDORS (WALLS AND CEILING). BETWEEN THE CSCM, THE LANDLORD, AND THE GC. PROJECT. GC IS ALSO TO SUBMIT COMPLETE SHOP DRAWINGS TO ARCHITECT FOR 42. GC AND/OR THEIR RESPECTIVE SUB -CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY, COORDINATE 70. ALL ROOF WORK AND/OR SPRINKLER MODIFICATIONS ARE TO BE COMPLETED BY REVIEW AND APPROVAL ON ANY AND ALL CUSTOM BUILT MILLWORK, CABNETRY, AND/OR INSTALL ANY SMOKE DETECTION AND/OR FIRE ALARM CONNECTORS AS LANDLORD'S CONTRACTOR AT TENANT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE, UNLESS OTHER FIXTURES, ETC. THIS INCLUDES BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO BACK OFFICE/PANTRY REQUIRED PER LANDLORD AND CITY. ARRANGEMENTS HAVE BEEN MADE IN ADVANCE. MILLWORK, LOBBY WEB TRADER FIXTURE, PLASMA SCREEN SURROUND, ETC. AND 43. GC AND/OR THEIR RESPECTIVE SUB -CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY, COORDINATE 71. ALL ROOF WORK SHALL COMPLY WITH MEMBRANE MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS MUST BE DONE IN EVERY CASE REGARDLESS OF HOW MANUFACTURER MATCHES AND/OR INSTALL ANY FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS AS REQUIRED PER LANDLORD AND AS TO NOT VOID THE WARRANTY. ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. CITY. GC MUST USE LANDLORD'S SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR PER LANDLORD'S GENERAL 22. THE GC SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE TIMELY ARRIVAL OF ALL SPECIFIED FINISH CONDITIONS. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, LIGHT FIXTURES AND ANY OTHER SUCH MATERIAL(S) TO BE 44. ANY REQUIRED FIRE DAMPER ASSEMBLIES INCLUDING SLEEVES AND INSTALLATION UTILIZED ON THIS PROJECT. THE GC SHALL NOTIFY THE CSCM IN WRITING WITHIN 10 PROCEDURES SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE BUILDING INSPECTOR PRIOR TO DAYS OF DATE OF CONTRACT OF THOSE SPECIFIED ITEMS THAT MAY NOT BE READILY INSTALLATION. AVAILABLE. IF NOTIFICATION IS NOT RECEIVED BY THE CSCM, THE GC ACCEPTS 45. PROVIDE FIRE DAMPER WITH FUSIBLE LOUVER WHEREVER DUCT WORK PENETRATES RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE PROPER ORDERING AND FOLLOW-UP OF SPECIFIED ITEMS 1-HR, CEILING OR WALL, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. AND WILL PURSUE WHATEVER MEANS NECESSARY AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO 46. GC MUST OBTAIN ALL REQUIRED APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATES FROM THE FIRE CHARLES SCHWAB, INSURE AVAILABILITY OF ALL SPECIFIED ITEMS SO AS NOT TO DEPARTMENT BEFORE SPACE IS OCCUPIED. COPIES SHALL BE ISSUED TO CSCM AND CREATE A HARDSHIP ON THE OWNER AND NOT DELAY PROGRESS OF TO CREATE A HARDSHIP ON THE OWNER AND NOT CONTRACT WILL BE ALLOWED. 47. LANDLORD. DURING CONSTRUCTION THE GC IS TO PROVIDE A PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER ALL CONTRACTORS SHALL BUILD 23. GC SHALL VERIFY EXACT DIMENSIONS WITH EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS. GC SHALL VERIFY ALL SIZES AND LOCATIONS OF DUCT OPENINGS BEFORE INSTALLATION AND WITH A RATING OF NOT LESS THAN 2-A WITHIN (75 FT.) FOOT TRAVEL DISTANCE TO ALL PORTIONS OF THE BUILDING ON EACH FLOOR. FROM SETS STAMPED SET O F 24. VERIFY DISCREPANCIES WITH THE ARCHITECT, IF ANY. ALL EXTERIOR WALL OPENINGS, FLASHING, COUNTER FLASHING, COPING AND 48. DOORS OPENING INTO REQUIRED ONE HOUR FIRE RESISTIVE CORRIDORS SHALL BE PROTECTED WITH SMOKE OR DRAFT STOP FIRE ASSEMBLY HAVING A 20 MINUTE FIRE APPROVED DRAWINGS VC C 109.5 EXPANSION JOINTS SHALL BE WATERPROOF. RATING WITH SELF -CLOSERS. 25. CAULKING AND SEALANTS: ALL OPEN JOINTS, PENETRATIONS AND OTHER OPENINGS IN 49. MECHANICAL DUCT AND PIPE SHAFTS SHALL BE OF ONE HOUR FIRE RESISTANT THE BUILDING ENVELOPE SHALL BE SEALED, CAULKED, GASKETED, AND/OR CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING TOP AND BOTTOM OF ENCLOSURES. WEATHERSTRIPPED TO LIMIT AIR LEAKAGE TO MEET CODE REQUIREMENTS. SYMBOLS ABBREVIATIONS ACT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILE INCAN INCANDESCENT 1 ADAAG AMERICAN WITH DISABILITIES INFO INFORMATION SECTION ACT ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES INSUL INSULATE, INSULATION 101 SECTION NUMBER AFF ABOVE FINISH FLOOR INT INTERIOR SHEET NUMBER ABV ABOVE AHU AIR HANDLING UNIT JST JOIST ALT ALTERNATE ALUM ALUMINUM LAM LAMINATE APPROX APPROXIMATE LAV LAVATORY 1 ELEVATION LT LIGHT ELEVATION NUMBER BD BOARD 101 SHEET NUMBER BLDG BUILDING MDF MEDIUM DENSITY BLKG BLOCKING FIBERBOARD BO BOTTOM OF MATL MATERIAL MAX MAXIMUM CL CENTER LINE MECH MECHANICAL DETAIL 9'. CAB CABINET MFR MANUFACTURER DETAIL NUMBER CLG CEILING MIN MINIMUM SHEET NUMBER CLR CLEAR MISC MISCELLANEOUS - CMU CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT MTL METAL COL COLUMN MLWK MILLWORK 1 FLOOR COVERING DETAIL CONC CONCRETE CONF CONFERENCE NIC NOT IN CONTRACT CONSTR CONSTRUCTION NTS NOT TO SCALE 101 DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER CONT CONTINUOUS NO NUMBER CSCM CHARLES SCHWAB CONSTRUCTION MANAGER OC ON CENTER CSDM CHARLES SCHWAB OPNG OPENING ROOM DESIGN MANAGER OPP OPPOSITE ROOM IDENTIFICATION CSWK CASEWORK Q CTR CENTER PLYWD PLYWOOD O DOOR IDENTIFICATION DEMO DEMOLISH, DEMOLITION R RADIUS DF DRINKING FOUNTAIN RO ROUGH OPENING DIA DIAMETER RCP REFLECTED CEILING KEYNOTE O DIM DIMENSION PLAN DN DOWN RD ROOF DRAIN DET DETAIL REQ REQUIRED Q REVISION IDENTIFICATION DWG(S) DRAWING(S) REV REVISION RM ROOM EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR m FINISH IDENTIFIER EQ EQUAL SCHED SCHEDULE EA EACH SECT SECTION EIFS EXTERIOR INSULATION SIM SIMILAR 9PARTITION TYPE AND FINISH SYSTEM SPEC SPECIFICATION EJ EXPANSION JOINT SQ SQUARE ELEC ELECTRIC, ELECTRICAL STD STANDARD DATUM POINT ELEV ELEVATION STL STEEL EQUIP EQUIPMENT STRUCT STRUCTURE FLOOR EXIST EXISTING SUSP SUSPENDED ELEVATION MARKER �0_p" EXP EXPOSED EXT EXTERIOR TEMP TEMPERATURE THRU THROUGH PLANT1 PLANT IDENTIFIER FC FIXTURE CONTRACTOR TO TOP OF EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIER O FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER TPM TECHNICAL PROJECT FEC FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET MANAGER FO FINISHED OPENING TYP TYPICAL FIR FIRE RATED FRP FIBERGLASS REINFORCED LION UNLESS OTHERWISE GRAPHICS IDENTIFIER El PLASTIC NOTED FD FLOOR DRAIN UPS UNINTERRUPTED POWER FIN FINISH SUPPLY FL FLOOR FLUOR FLUORESCENT VAV VARIABLE AIR VOLUME FRT FIRE RETARDANT TREATED VIF VERIFY IN FIELD FT FOOT VERT VERTICAL GC GC WC WATER CLOSET GWB GYPSUM WALL BOARD WD WOOD GA GAUGE WIC WOOD INSTITUTE OF CALIFORNIA HOF HIGH DENSITY FIBERBOARD WO WHERE OCCURS HORIZ HORIZONTAL WR WATER RESISTANT HR HOUR W/ WITH HT HEIGHT W/o WITHOUT ■ 1 ,o 220 Tx en,Vr,n,M1 P1 © ` o e - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - �i SITE MAP IO % EXISTING PARKING MANAGED BY LANDLORD I I _ LU - - - - - Q SO40 EXISTING TENANT OFFICE Z I O I z I XISTING TENANT MERCINTILE ` O i SO10 5030 EXISTING TENANT OFFICE S020 ok& scHWAB SUITE LOCATION I \ -1 �' EXISTING PARKING MANAGED BY LANDLORD NOTE: ALL EXISTI-1 ENAN 16 1 V Kt -MAIN AND NO CHANGE IN EXISTING OCCUPANCY. - ALL PARTITION AND EXTERIOR WALLS TO REMAIN AND ALL WALL SEPARATIONS TO REMAIN AS EXISTING AS NO OCCUPANCY CHANGED. SEMINOLE TRAIL NORTH RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE NOTE: ALL WORK SHOWN IN THESE DOCUMENTS IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GC, UON. ¢ Wt W ¢ ¢ ¢o 0 U W p ---' F � U 0 Up U 0 11l > U) z o rn a)0 rn > J z 1.I J{{> W Z J W2 =W W H W W Y' W Z W W 7 OF O 00 In UM 20 Urn _ U� =W UN m m m m m m m m m m m m 0 0 0 0 0 0 JJ 0 J0 oo o a WzWzWz W zzz COMMENTS: 1 FURNITURE • • ELECTRICAL BY GC SEE MEP DOCUMENTS FOR CABLING 2 MILLWORK EXCLUDING LINE ITEM 14 ( ) • • ELECTRICAL BY GC SEE MEP DOCUMENTS FOR CABLING 3 TELE/DATA SYSTEM HARDWARE • • SEE SHEET E5.1 4 SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM • • ELECTRICAL & COORD. BY GC; DEVICES & CABLING BY VENDOR 5 EXTERIOR SIGNAGE • • ELECTRICAL BY GC 6 INTERIOR APPLIED LETTERS AND LOGOS • • 7 POWER FOR INTERIOR / EXTERIOR SIGNAGE • • REFER TO ELECTRICAL DWGS 8 INTERIOR TENANT GRAPHICS • • CS GRAPHICS VENDOR ELECTRICAL AND BLOCKING BY GC 9 IN -WALL BLOCKING FOR SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS • • GC TO REFER TO ELEVATIONS AND SIGNAGE/GRAPHICS PACKAGES 10 ALL FLOOR, CEILING & WALL FINISHES • • • FLOORING IS PROVIDE BY CS VIA NATIONALACCOUNT 11 WALL BASE • • REFER TO SHEET A1.2 FOR SPECS. AND ORDERING INFORMATION 12 DISTRACTION VINYL (OFFICE GLASS) • • GG MUST TRACT TO OFILMINSTALLER PROFESSIONAL 13 GREETER DESK • • COORD. WITH CSCM FOR DELIVERY AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS 14 LOBBY KIOSK (SEATED FURNITURE VERSION) • • 15 LOBBY KIOSK (STANDING MILLWORK VERSION SECURED TO WALL BY GC 16 LOW VOLTAGE CABLING • • SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS 17 AN EQUIPMENT • • SEE AV SHEETS FOR SCOPE AND SPECIFIC RESPONSIBILITIES 18 WIRELESS AP PLACEMENT • • REFER TO TENANT "HEAT MAP' FOR FINAL QTY. AND LOCATIONS 19 IN -WALL BOX & BLKG. AT WALL HUNG TV SCREENS • • SEE AV SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFO. 20 WALL HUNG TV SCREENS AND MOUNTS • • 21 LIGHTING FIXTURES • • 22 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) • • 23 UPS WALL BRACKET • • 24 FIRE SPRINKLERS ENTIRE SYSTEM ( ) • • PER FP SHEETS, INCLUDING FULL DESIGN, DRAWINGS AND PERMIT 2 5 INSULATION AND GWB EXTERIOR SUITE WALLS • • AS REQ. REFER TO SHEET A1.0 26 WATER DISPENSER (INCLUDING PLUMBING PARTS) • • DED PCTNG DARRE ER O PLUMBING WGS 27 COFFEE MAKER (WI PLUMB KIT) • • GG TftONNECT WATER LINE FROM #26; REFER TO PLUMBING DINGS NOTE: ALL PROJECT RELATED CONTRACTORS, VENDORS, AND PERSONNEL ARE TO REFER TO SHEET A1.3 FOR MORE DETAILED RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULES PERTAINING TO I ADDITIONAL INTERIOR ITEMS AND EQUIPMENT TO BE FURNISHED THROUGHOUT THE SPACE. ===J SCOPE OF WORK HIS PROJECT IS AN ALTERATION OF AN EXISTING SPACE AND WILL BE CLASSIFIED AS A LEVEL 2, WITH NO CHANGE O USE OR OCCUPANCY (REMAIN B OCCUPANCY). THIS DRAWING SET IS FOR AN INTERIOR TENANT IMPROVEMENT, INCLUDING GENERAL MEP SCOPE, WITHIN AN EXISTING BUILDING SHELL, AND NO MODIFICATIONS TO THE EXTERIOR. (WILL COMPLY WITH VEBC CHAPTER 6 REQUIREMENTS) THIS PROJECT IN NO WAY DETRACTS FROM THE EXISTING BUILDING STRUCTURE OR LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS. ANY REQUIRED FIRE PROTECTION WORK AND/OR EXTERIOR SIGNAGE WILL BE DESIGNED BY OTHERS AND PERMITTED UNDER DEFERRED SUBMITTAL. TENANT CODE SUMMARY APPLICABLE CODES: BUILDING: 2018 VIRGINIA EXISTING BUILDING CODE PLUMBING: 2018 VIRGINIA PLUMBING CODE MECHANICAL: 2018 VIRGINIA MECHANICAL CODE ELECTRICAL 2017 NEC WITH VIRGINIA AMENDMENTS FIRE/LIFE SAFETY: 2018 VIRGINIA FIRE PROTECTION CODE I NFPA 13 ACCESSIBILITY: 2009 ANSI 117.1 ENERGY: 2017 NATIONAL ENERGY CODE WITH VA AMENDMENTS BASE BUILDING: TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION: II-B (NON -SEPARATED MIXED USE) FIRE PROTECTION: FULLY SPRINKLERED BUILDING HEIGHT IN STORIES: 1 STORY LEASED AREA OCCUPIED BY TENANT COVERED UNDER THESE DRAWINGS: USE GROUP CLASSIFICATION: (B) BUSINESS SQUARE FOOTAGE: 1,384 S.F. LEASED OCCUPANT LOAD: 1,384 1100 =14 OCCUPANTS - TOTAL OCCUPANTS =14 NUMBER OF EMPLOYEES: (4) - (3) IN OFFICES AND (1) GREETER AREA ACCESSIBLE TO OR OCCUPEND BY TENANT COVERED UNDER THESE DRAWINGS: NUMBER OF EXITS REQUIRED: (1) NUMBER OF EXITS PROVIDED: (1) - (1) FULLY ACCESSIBLE ENTRY RESTROOM FIXTURES REQUIRED: (1) WC & (1) LAV. (SINGLE ALL GENDER RESTROOM) RESTROOM FIXTURES PROVIDED: (1) WC & (1) LAV. (SINGLE ALL GENDER RESTROOM) DRINKING FOUNTAINS REQUIRED: (0) DRINKING FOUNTAINS PROVIDED: (0) DRINKING FOUNTAIN NOT REQUIRED FOR OCCUPANT LOAD OF 15 OR FEWER MOP SINKS REQUIRED: (1) MOP SINKS PROVIDED: (1) ACCESSIBLE PATH OF TRAVEL ACCESSIBLE GENDER 2) EXISTING DEMISING WALL 1 NEUTRAL RESTROOM (EXISTING ASSEMBLY TO REMAIN) TENANT LEASELINE ( I 1 MOP SINK EXIT SIGN L B 1 ACCESSIBLE PATH OF TRAVEL THROUGH SPA au 1 EXISTING DEMISING WALL 1 _ (EXISTING ASSEMBLY �( TO REMAIN) 1 V p'- ♦ EXIT SIGN �•� ^jam ACCESSIBLE L0* L�J11 MAIN ENTRY EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL (TO REMAIN) NOTE: ALL PORTIONS OF ACCESSIBLE ROUTE BEYOND LEASE LINE BOUNDARIES ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE BUILDING OWNER, INCLUDING THE CODE REQUIRED NUMBER OF ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES AND THE ACCESSIBLE PATH TO THEM FROM THE LEASE SPACE. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE TRAVEL DISTANCE THROUGH SPACE =100' ACTUAL MAXIMUM TRAVEL DISTANCE (A-B)= 56' ALL EXISTING WALL ASSEMBLIES ARE TO REMAIN- NO SCOPE OF WORK ON EXISTING WALL LEASE -LINE PARTITIONS - charles SCHWAB CHARLOTTESVILLE INDEPENDENT BRANCH SERVICES ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are F I R S T F L 0 0 R deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. NEW L 0 C A T 10 N This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. Jat14. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 220 TWENTYNINTH PLACE CT. #S20 CHARLOTTESVILLE, VA 22901 CHARLES SCHWAB & CO., INC. 4350 Farfax Drive Suite 125 Arington, VA. 22203 Cell: (571) 481-0142 Construction Manager: Adam Yeh e-mail: adam.yeh@Schwab.com Design Manager: Beverly Bell e-mail: beveedy.bell@schwab.com TPM: Da aleno e-mail: ceke.valedo@schwab.com J LANDLORD CONTACT FEDERAL REALITY 1117 Emmet Street Charlottesville, VA. 22903 Therms Funad Phone: (434) 227- 5173 e-mail: tfunad@federalrealty.com ARCHITECT NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. 201 E. 4th. Street Suite 1700 Cincinnati, Ohio 45202 Project Manager: Harry Koutsis e-mail: hkoutsis@nelsonww.com Senior Project Leader: Benjamin Madson e-mail: bmadson@nelsonww.com BUILDING DEPARTMENT ALBERMARLE COUNTY COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT DEPARTMENT 401 Mc Intire Road Charlottesville, VA 22902 Betty Slough (Commercial Plans Examiner) Phone: (434) 296-5832 ENGINEERING CONSULTANT SCHNACKEL ENGINEERS, INC. 53 West 36th Street, 12th Floor New York, NY 10018 PROJECT MANAGER: Jae Lee Direct Phone: (646) 952-7008 Mobile Phone: (347) 561-0552e-mail: jlee@schnackel.cem PROJECT MANAGER: Sean Hombuckle Direct Phone: (646) 952-7007 Office Phone: (212) 366-4813 e-mail: shombuckle@schnackel.cem GENERAL CONTRACTOR TBD INDEX TO SHEETS SHEET NUMBER SHEET TITLE ISSUED FOR SCHWAB REVIEW ISSUED FOR PERMIT REVIEW ISSUED FOR LANDLORD REVIEW ISSUED FOR BID ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION REVISION REVISION REVISION G1.0 INDEX, LEGEND, LOCATION PLAN, AND GENERAL NOTES 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 D1.0 DEMOLITION PLAN 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 A1.0 CONSTRUCTION PLAN 0106/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 A1.1 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 A1.2 FLOOR AND WALL FINISH PLAN / FINISH LEGEND 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 A1.3 FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT LOCATION PLAN 0106/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 A1.4 DOOR SCHEDULE AND RELATED DETAILS 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 A2.0 RESTROOM PLAN, ELEVATIONS, DETAILS, AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 A4.0 WALL TYPES AND DETAILS / MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 A4.1 CASEWORK, CEILING, AND MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS 08/26/22 1 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 AS1.0 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 SC1.0 SECURITY EQUIPMENT PLAN AND SCHEDULE 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 MEP1.1 MEP CEILING COORDINATION PLAN 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 E1.0 ELECTRICAL DEMO PLAN OS126/22 09I20122 09/14/22 09114122 E1.1 LIGHTING PLAN 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 E2.1 POWER AND SYSTEMS PLAN 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 E2.2 ELECTRICAL DEVICE DIMENSIONS PLAN 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 E3.1 ELECTRIC ONE LINE DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULES 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 E4.1 ELECTRIC SPECIFICATIONS 0106/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 E4.2 ELECTRIC SPECIFICATIONS 08126122 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 E5.1 TELECOM & DATA SYSTEMS PLAN 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 E5.2 TELECOM & DATA SYSTEMS DETAILS AND ELEVATIONS 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 E6.1 ENERGY COMPLIANCE 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 E6.2 ENERGY COMPLIANCE 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 FP1.1 FIRE PROTECTION PLAN 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 FP2.1 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 MIA HNA.C. FLOOR PLAN 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 M2.1 H.V.A.C. SCHEDULES 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 M2.2 HNA.C.DETAILS 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 M3.1 H.V.A.C. SPECIFICATIONS 1 0106/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 M3.2 HNA.C. SPECIFICATIONS 11 08/26/22 1 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 M4.1 SANITARY SEWER PLAN 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 M4.2 PLUMBING SCHEDULES AND DEETAILS 0106/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 M4.3 PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 M4.4 FIRE AND PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 M5.1 MECHANICAL ENERGY COMPLIANCE 08/26/22 09/20/22 09114122 09114122 M5.2 MECHANICAL ENERGY COMPLIANCE 08/26/22 09/20/22 09/14/22 09/14/22 tii u C d 16 2 8 z `o N n 'o s 3 d 0 d 2 2 a 2 D m C d d fi 8 z n d m N 8 s ` d n m 3 a` NELSON SCHWAB s t16 t n 0 R. Rink o 1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 3 4 3 E 7 e 0 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 r' L KI J i� GI F E CI CC CB tea, DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 14" NInTF' GC IS TO COMPLETELY INSPECT ALL EXISTING STOREFRONT SYSTEMS AND THE EXTERIOR FACADE OF TENANT SPACE. ANY DAMAGE TO THESE ASSEMBLIES FROM PRIOR USE IS TO BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT AND CSCM IMMEDIATELY. NInTF GC IS TO PERFORM SELECTIVE DEMO TO SPACE AS REQUIRED TO INVESTIGATE THE CONDITIONS OF EXISTING IN -WALL INSULATION AT THE DEMISING WALLS. REPORT BACK TO THE DESIGN TEAM WITH PHOTOS SHOWING THE AMOUNT AND TYPE OF INSULATION, AND ANY DEFICIENCIES FOUND. ALL DEMO IS TO BE REPAIRED. NORTH nInTF' GC IS TO FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING DIMENSIONS SHOWN. ANY ISSUES WITH THE LAYOUT OF THE NEW CONSTRUCTION SHOWN IN THIS DRAWING SET IS TO BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT AND CSCM IMMEDIATELY. nInTF' GC IS TO REFER TO MEP DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE OF WORK REGARDING THE DEMOLITION / REPLACEMENT OF ANY EXISTING EQUIPMENT WITHIN SPACE AND/OR ON EXTERIOR OF BUILDING. NnTF- GC IS TO REFER TO LANDLORD TENANT DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA MANUAL - SEE ARCHITECT OR CHARLES SCHWAB FOR MANUAL.. 1 2 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. NnTF- KEY NOTES: DEMOLITION PLAN EXISTING EXTERIOR DOORS TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED DURING ALL PHASES OF WORK. GC IS TO ADJUST OR REPLACE EXISTING THRESHOLDS AND WEATHER SEALS AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE A WEATHER TIGHT SPACE. CSRPM TO INSTALL NEW HIGH SECURITY KEYWAYS AS NOTED ON SHEET A1.4. GC IS TO INSPECT THE WORKING CONDITION OF ALL EXISTING HARDWARE AND ALERT CSCM IMMEDIATELY TO ANY DAMAGED OR NON-FUNCTIONING EQUIPMENT. EXISTING STOREFRONT TO REMAIN, GC TO PROTECT DURING ALL PHASES OF WORK. - REMOVE ALL EXISTING BLINDS AND BLACK -OUT PAINT (GC IS NOT TO REMOVE EXISTING BLACKOUT PANELS FROM THE FINISHED FLOOR TO THE FIRST HORIZONTAL MULLION) -GC TO CLEAN/PAINT AND REPAIR ALL ASPECTS OF THE STOREFRONT TO MATCH EXISTING BUILDING STANDARDS. - SEE 29TH PLACE TENANT MANUAL (02 22 2022) FOR BUILDING STANDARDS. EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANELS TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED FOR REUSE. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. EXISTING STRUCTURAL BUILDING COLUMN IS TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED DURING ALL PHASES OF WORK. REFER TO CONSTRUCTION PLAN FOR FURTHER INSTRUCTION. COMPLETELY REMOVE ALL EXISTING INTERIOR PARTITION WALLS, DOORS, FIXTURES, FURNISHINGS, AND ACCESSORIES SHOWN DASHED, UON. REFER TO CONSTRUCTION PLAN AND MEP SHEETS FOR NEW SCOPES OF WORK. COMPLETELY REMOVE ALL EXISTING FLOOR FINISHES, CEILING FINISHES, NON-SCHEDULED WALL FINISHES, AND WALL BASES FROM ENTIRE SPACE. ALL AREAS ARE TO BE MADE READY FOR NEW FINISHES. COMPLETELY REMOVE ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL / DATA OUTLETS, WIRING, PLUMBING, AND HVAC INSTALLATIONS THROUGHOUT SPACE THAT ARE NOT SLATED FOR REUSE, UON. REFER TO MEP DRAWINGS FOR SCOPES OF WORK. ALL WALLS ARE TO BE REPAIRED AS NEEDED. REMOVE EXISTING MILLWORK AND SOFFIT. - PREPARE ALL SURFACES FOR NEW BUILD, AND FINISHES. REMOVE EXISTING FIXTURES AND PREPARE ALL WALLS AND PLUMBING FOR NEW RESTROOM FIXTURES. GC IS TO PATCH AND REPAIR ALL DEMISING WALLS. REMOVE/PATCH AND REPAIR ANY EXISTING SCREWS/HOLES ETC. TO PREPARE FOR NEW FINISHES AND PAINT. ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 LEGEND: DEMOLITION PLAN INDICATES TENANT LEASE LINE. NO WORK OUTSIDE OF THIS LINE, UON. INDICATES EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN. INDICATES EXISTING WALL, DOOR, OR ITEM TO BE REMOVED. DEMOLITION AND PREPARATION: 1. GENERALSCOPE FURNISH EQUIPMENT AND PERFORM LABOR REQUIRED TO EXECUTE THIS WORK AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS AS SPECIFIED AND AS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THESE MAJOR ITEMS: A. PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK TO REMAIN. GC SHALL DOCUMENT ANY EXISTING NOTABLE DAMAGE WITH DATED DIGITAL PICTURES. B. DEMOLISH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION WHERE INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS AND WHERE REQUIRED BY JOB CONDITIONS. C. REMOVAL OF PARTITIONS, DOORS, FLOOR COVERINGS, CEILINGS. D. REMOVAL AND CAPPING OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL FIXTURES AND SERVICES. E. DEBRIS REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL. F. REMOVAL OF PORTIONS OF THE EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB AS REQUIRED SO THAT SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT LINES CAN BE RUN BELOW. WORK SHALL BE ACCEPTABLE TO THE POINT THAT THE FINISH WILL ACCEPT NEW MATERIAL WITH NO NOTICEABLE EFFECT OF AN ALTERATION HAVING BEEN MADE. G. REMOVAL OF ANY EXISTING ROOF EQUIPMENT OR PENETRATIONS, AS REQUIRED, ANY RESULTANT ROOF DAMAGE IS TO BE REPAIRED TO LIKE NEW CONDITION. GC TO COORDINATE ANY AND ALL ROOF PENETRATIONS, REPAIRS, ETC. WITH LANDLORD'S ROOFING CONTRACTOR TO AVOID THE VOIDING OF ANY WARRANTIES. H. ALL FIREPROOFING AT UNDERSIDE OF STEEL DECK SHALL BE REPAIRED BY GC TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE LANDLORD AND BUILDING DEPARTMENT INSPECTOR. 2. RELATED WORK A. DISCONNECTING, CUTTING, CAPPING, OR RELOCATING ANY ACTIVE UTILITY LINES ENCOUNTERED. 3. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A10.6 : "SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR DEMOLITION", PUBLISHED BY THE AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE. 4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. FIELD CONDITIONS: TAKE INTO CONSIDERATION AS NECESSARY ALL OBVIOUS EXISTING CONDITIONS AND INSTALLATIONS ON THE SITE AS THOUGH THEY WERE COMPLETELY SHOWN OR DESCRIBED. ACCEPT THE SITE OF THE WORK AS IT EXISTS AND CLEAR OBSTRUCTIONS TO THE WORK INDICATED. GC SHALL WORK WITH CSCM TO GUARANTEE ABOVE CEILING ACCESS. REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES AND/OR UNFORSEEN CONDITIONS IMMEDIATELY TO THE ARCHITECT AND CSCM. B. GC IS TO VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN AND REPORT ANY DISCREPANCIES TO CSCM AND TO THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. C. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE FULLY RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ADEQUACY AND INSTALLATION OF ALL TEMPORARY SHORING SYSTEMS USED DURING THE REMOVAL OF ALL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS. D. NO EXISTING STRUCTURAL ELEMENT (BEAM, COLUMN, SHEAR WALL, ETC.) SHALL BE MODIFIED / REMOVED UNLESS CONTRACTOR IS PREPARED TO BEGIN INSTALLATION OF A NEW STRUCTURAL ELEMENT AT THE TIME OF REMOVAL OF THE EXISTING ELEMENT, EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE AGREED TO BY THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT, ARCHITECT, AND LANDLORD. E. THE DRAWINGS DO NOT NECESSARILY INDICATE THE FULL EXTENT OF THE WORK REQUIRED TO BE PERFORMED. INSPECT THE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION CAREFULLY TO DETERMINE THE FULL EXTENT OF THE WORK TO BE PERFORMED AND THE PROBLEMS INVOLVED. NO EXTRA COMPENSATION WILL BE ALLOWED BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO ESTIMATE THE FULL EXTENT OF THE WORK OR FOR ANY CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES. F. ALL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED BY SKILLED AND PROPERLY EQUIPPED PERSONNEL. DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF ITEMS SCAFFOLD HIGH OR HIGHER SHALL BE LOWERED BY CONTROLLED METHODS, NOT BY THROWING OR DROPPING. PERFORM CUTTING AND STRIPPING SO THAT THE WORK TO REMAIN IS UNDAMAGED AND IN SUCH A MANNER THAT NEW WORK CAN BE PROPERLY CONNECTED WITH IT. G. TAKE CAREFUL NOTE OF THE FACT THAT THE BUILDING PREMISES MAY BE OPEN FOR "BUSINESS AS USUAL" DURING THE LIFE OF THIS CONTRACT. NO INTERRUPTION OF TRAFFIC FLOW, UTILITIES SERVICES, OR LANDLORD'S USUAL ACTIVITIES WILL BE PERMITTED WITHOUT PREVIOUS SCHEDULING WITH THE LANDLORD. H. CODES: PERFORM ALL WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE BUILDING CODE OF THE GOVERNING BODY HAVING JURISDICTION, THE GOVERNING STATE INDUSTRIAL SAFETY ORDERS AND THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT. I. UNFORSEEN CONDITIONS: INCLUDE IN THE BASE BID MISCELLANEOUS CUTTING AND PATCHING NECESSITATED AS A RESULT OF UNFORSEEN CONDITIONS AND THE REWORKING OF ABUTTING SURFACES AS REQUIRED TO MAKE NEW WORK JOIN AND MATCH EXISTING SURFACES TO REMAIN. NO EXTRA PAYMENTS BASED ON THE PLEA OF UNFORSEEN CONDITIONS WILL BE ALLOWED. J. GC TO COORDINATE WITH THE LANDLORD ALL WORK THAT MAY AFFECT NORMAL DAILY OPERATIONS OF THE BUILDING AND COMPLY WITH ALL RESTRICTIONS THE LANDLORD MAY HAVE ON DEMOLITION AND/OR CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES. COOPERATE FULLY TO THE END THAT CERTAIN FACILITIES AND SERVICES ARE MAINTAINED IN OPERATION UNTIL IMMEDIATELY BEFORE THEIR REMOVAL IS REQUIRED TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK. K. NOISE CONTROL: CARRY ON ALL WORK IN A MANNER WHICH WILL PRODUCE THE LEAST AMOUNT OF NOISE. INSTRUCT ALL WORKERS IN NOISE CONTROL PROCEDURES. ALL MAJOR NOISE GENERATING TASKS ARE TO BE PERFORMED BEFORE OR AFTER BUSINESS HOURS. L. THE REQUIRED MEANS OF EGRESS IS TO REMAIN CLEAR AT ALL TIMES. 5. PROTECTION A. CEASE OPERATIONS AND IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY TENANT AND LANDLORD IF THE SAFETY OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION APPEARS TO BE ENDANGERED AT ANY TIME. TAKE PRECAUTIONS TO SUPPORT SUCH ENDANGERED CONSTRUCTION. DO NOT RESUME CONSTRUCTION UNTIL AUTHORIZED BY TENANT AND THE LANDLORD. B. LOWERING MATERIAL: PROVIDE HOISTS AND CHUTES AS REQUIRED TO LOWER REMOVED MATERIAL. THROWING, DROPPING, OR PERMITTING THE FREEFALL OF MATERIAL AND DEBRIS FROM HEIGHTS WHICH WOULD CAUSE DAMAGE, UNDUE NOISE OR NUISANCE, OR EXCESSIVE DUST IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED. C. PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL: ERECT SIGNS, BARRICADES AND SUCH OTHER FORMS OF WARNING AS MAY BE REQUIRED TO PREVENT PERSONNEL FROM PUTTING THEMSELVES IN THE WAY OF INJURY. D. EXISTING WORK TO REMAIN: PROVIDE SUCH FORMS OF PROTECTION AS MAY BE NECESSARY TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN. E. GC IS TO EXERCISE EXTREME CARE DURING DEMOLITION SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE OR DISRUPT ANY UTILITIES OR SPRINKLER LINES WHICH MIGHT PASS THROUGH THIS SPACE TO SERVICE OTHER TENANTS. GC WILL BEAR SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH DISRUPTION OR DAMAGE. F. GC SHALL COORDINATE ALL X-RAYS AND CUTTING OF SLAB WITH LANDLORD PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK. 6. GENERAL DEMOLITION A. DEMOLISH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO THE EXTENT NECESSARY FOR THE PROPER INSTALLATION OF NEW CONSTRUCTION AND ANY FINISHES IN CONJUNCTION WITH EXISTING WORK. CUT BACK FINISHED SURFACES TO STRAIGHT, PLUMB, AND LEVEL LINE AS REQUIRED. B. ALL CONTRACTORS ARE TO REFER TO ENTIRE PLAN SET FOR SCOPE OF WORK AND LIMITATIONS TO AREAS OF WORK PRIOR TO DEMOLISHING, RECONSTRUCTING, OR CONSTRUCTING ANY AREAS. C. EXISTING FINISH MATERIALS: ANY AND ALL FINISHES ON SURFACES WHICH ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN SHALL BE MODIFIED AND/OR REPLACED AS NEEDED TO MATCH TENANT SPECIFICATIONS. D. EXTERIOR STOREFRONTS: REMOVE FROM TENANT SIDE OF ALL STOREFRONT MULLIONS ALL EXISTING SCREWS, HOOKS, BRACKETS, ETC. NOT TO BE REUSED. ENSURE ALL HOLES LEFT IN MULLIONS ARE DE -BURRED AND FILLED WITH CAULKING TO MATCH THE MULLION COLOR. SHOULD EXISTING STOREFRONTS, DOORS, WINDOWS, ETC. BE OVERLY DAMAGED IN ANY WAY, GC IS TO BRING SUCH DAMAGE TO THE ATTENTION OF THE CSCM IMMEDIATELY AND MAY BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REPAIRS. E. DOORS AND HARDWARE: REMOVE CAREFULLY TO AVOID DAMAGE. INSOFAR AS POSSIBLE, LEAVE HARDWARE ATTACHED TO THE DOOR. F. PARTITIONS: REMOVE PARTITION FINISH, STUDS, PLATES AND SILLS. WHERE ONLY A PARTIAL RUN IS REMOVED, CUT BACK FINISH MATERIAL TO THE CENTER OF THE NEXT ADJACENT SUPPORT TO REMAIN. LEAVE REMAINING MATERIAL WITH A CLEAN TERMINAL LINE WITH NO LOOSE MATERIAL ADHERING. 7. MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING A. CAREFULLY REVIEW PLANS AND DETERMINE LINES TO BE REMOVED AND THOSE TO BE KEPT ACTIVE OR TO BE REACTIVATED. PROTECT LINES TO REMAIN. PROVIDE FOR MINIMUM SERVICE INTERRUPTION OF LINES TO REMAIN. REFER TO MEP SHEETS FOR MORE INFORMATION ON SCOPE OF HVAC, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING DEMOLITION. B. REMOVE FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT AS INDICATED. WHEN INDICATED FOR REUSE, CLEAN, STORE AS DIRECTED, AND PROTECT. IDENTIFY POINT OF REUSE. C. REMOVE LINES COMPLETELY WHEREVER POSSIBLE. CUT AND CAP OR PLUG IN A POSITIVE MANNER BEHIND THE BACK OF FINISH MATERIAL. D. REPAIR, RESTORE, REPLACE, OR MAKE GOOD DAMAGE TO EXISTING CONSTRUCTION WHICH OCCURS AS A RESULT OF DEMOLITION OPERATIONS, AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE TENANT, THE ARCHITECT OR THE LANDLORD. THESE REPAIRS SHALL INCLUDE ANY ROOF PATCHING REQUIRED DUE TO DEMOLITION AND SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH LANDLORD AND LANDLORD'S ROOFING CONTRACTOR. 8. FLOORFINISHES A. REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR FINISHES AND PREPARE SUB -SURFACE TO RECEIVE NEW TENANT FLOOR FINISHES AS INDICATED. WORK SHALL BE ACCEPTABLE TO THE POINT THAT THE FINISH WILL ACCEPT NEW SCHEDULED MATERIAL FINISH WITH NO NOTICEABLE ALTERATION HAVING BEEN MADE. PROVIDE CONCRETE TOPPING WHERE REQUIRED. 9. REMOVED MATERIAL AND DEBRIS A. ALL REMOVED MATERIAL, NOT OTHERWISE DESIGNATED, AND ALL DEBRIS BECOMES THE PROPERTY OF THE CONTRACTOR, WHO SHALL REMOVE IT FROM THE SITE. B. DO NOT ALLOW MATERIALS AND DEBRIS GENERATED BY DEMOLITION ACTIVITIES TO ACCUMULATE. REMOVE DAILY AND DISPOSE OF THEM IN A LEGAL MANNER. NO ON -SITE SALE OR BURNING OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS WILL BE PERMITTED. C. LEAVE ALL SPACES BROOM CLEAN WITH ALL LEDGES AND CORNERS PROPERLY CLEANED. D. GC IS TO COORDINATE LOCATION OF CONSTRUCTION DUMPSTER WITH LANDLORD'S CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGER. E. EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL LEAVE THE SITE IN A NEAT, CLEAN AND ORDERLY CONDITION UPON THE CONCLUSION OF HIS WORK ON A DAILY BASIS. ALL WASTE, RUBBISH, AND EXCESS MATERIALS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE SITE PROMPTLY BEFORE REGULAR BUSINESS HOURS. NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www. nelsonworldwide.corn cha des SCHWAB ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENTREVIEW 08/26/22 PERMIT BID 09/14/22 LANDLORD REVIEW 09/14/22 CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. �4EALT11 O CV S VINCENT P. DUET Lic. No. 0401016975 �RCHITS r10' PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB Charlottesville IBS 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 PROJECT #: 22.0000289.00 SHEET INFORMATION Demolition Plan DRAWN BY: H. Koutsis REVIEWED BY: R. Rink SCALE: As noted D1.0 2 3 4 1 LT 7 E: 4 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 0 a 0 0 3 M M MI L K I M. GI F EI " CI IMPORTANT NOTE: ALL WALLS THAT DEMISE THE TENANT SUITE COVERED IN THIS DRAWING SET MUST BE FULLY FRAMED, INSULATED, AND DRYWALLED TO THE DECK ABOVE. IF THESE WALLS ARE ALSO REQUIRED TO BE FIRE RATED IT WILL BE FURTHER NOTED IN THE DRAWING SET. THE GC IS TO FIELD INVESTIGATE ALL WALLS THAT DEMISE THE SPACE AND ALERT THE CSCM IMMEDIATELY OF ANY THAT DO NOT MEET THESE REQUIREMENTS. IT WILL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GC TO ADD FRAMING, INSULATION, AND/OR GWB AS NEEDED TO ENCLOSE THE DEMISED PROJECT SUITE WITH FULL HEIGHT WALLS. IF THE EXISTING DEMISING WALLS ARE DAMAGED OR NOT COMPLETE IN ANY WAY, GC IS TO NOTIFY THE CSCM IMMEDIATELY. BACK OFFICE / PANTRY CABINETRY IS TO BE CUSTOM BUILT OFF -SITE BY GC'S MILLWORKER. DESIGN AND DETAILING OF CABINETRY AND COUNTERTOPS IS TO MATCH INDUSTRY STANDARDS AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE TO MINIMIZE EXTRA COSTS. REFER TO SHEET A1.2 FOR LAMINATE SPEC. AND SHEET A4.1 FOR SECTIONS AND DETAILS. MILLWORK SHOPS TO BE PROVIDED AT PROJECT START. CONSTRUCTION PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = V-0" 2 20 20 GC IS TO CHALK OUT THE INTERIOR PARTITION LAYOUT IMMEDIATELY UPON STARTING WORK AND IS TO ALERT DESIGN TEAM WITH ANY ISSUES OR QUESTIONS PRIOR TO LAYING TRACK. GC IS TO INSPECT EXISTING DEMISING WALLS AND PROVIDE ACOUSTICAL SEALANT AT ANY OPENINGS, AND ALONG HEAD AND BASE OF WALLS, AS NEEDED. ANY NEW PENETRATIONS DUE TO NEW WORK ARE ALSO TO BE SEALED BY GC. ALL WORK IS TO BE PHOTO DOCUMENTED. ALL CONTRACTORS ATTACHING SIGNAGE TO THE EXTERIOR OF THIS BUILDING MUST COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH THE BUILDING OWNER AND CSCM. GC TO FIRE SEAL ALL EXISTING PARTITION WALLS, SEAL AND PATCH/REPAIR ALL EXISTING PARTITION WALLS. NORTH LEGEND: WALL CONSTRUCTION INDICATES EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN AND BE PROTECTED, ION. GC IS TO FIELD VERIFY AND MAINTAIN ANY EXISTING FIRE RATINGS PER LOCAL CODE (UL U419). A16 INDICATES NEW 3 5/8" METAL STUD CONSTRUCTION A4.0 EXTENDED FROM FLOOR TO 5" ABOVE HIGHEST ADJACENT CEILING WITH 5/8" TYPE "X" GWB BOTH SIDES, AND FULL A THICKNESS SAS. PROVIDE LATERAL BRACING TO STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED. REFER TO METAL STUD SCHEDULE ON SHEET A4.0 FOR GAUGE SIZE. ALL NEW WALLS ARE THIS TYPE, UON. A13 INDICATES NEW 3 5/8" METAL STUD FURRING WITH 5/8" TYPE A4.0 'X" GWB ON EXPOSED SIDE, EXTENDED FROM FLOOR TO 6" S ABOVE HIGHEST ADJACENT CEILING. PROVIDE LATERAL BRACING TO STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED. REFER TO METAL STUD SCHEDULE ON SHEET A4.0 FOR GAUGE SIZE. A11 - INDICATES NEW 3 5/8" METAL STUD FURRING WITH 5/8" TYPE 'X" GWB ON EXPOSED SIDE, EXTENDED FROM FLOOR TO TOP C OF INTERIOR HORIZONTAL MULLION. REFER TO METAL STUD SCHEDULE ON SHEET A4.0 FOR GAUGE SIZE. - SEE A11/4.0 FOR DETAIL A7 ■ ■ ■ ■ V 3 5/8" METAL STUD FURRING WITH 2 5/8" TYF; A4.0 u r BOTH SIDES, EXTENDED FROM FLOOR DECK. D PROVIDE LATERAL BRACING TO STRUCTURE AS REQUIRED. REFER TO METAL STUD SCHEDULE ON SHEET A4.0 FOR NOTES: (7AI rrr 1317F 1. ALL NEW WALLS ARE TO BE CONSTRUCTED AS WALL TYPE W, UON. 2. REFER TO F10/A4.0 FOR HEADER FRAMING DETAIL FOR ALL WALL OPENINGS. 3. REFER TO TYPICAL DOOR / WINDOW FRAMING DETAILS ON SHEET A1.2 FOR INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR DOOR / WINDOW FRAMING SYSTEMS. 4. REFER TO SHEET A1.4 FOR DOOR SCHEDULE. 5. GC SHALL VERIFY DIMENSIONS OF ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS. 6. ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE TO BE TO FACE OF DRYWALL, ION. OKEY NOTES: FLOOR PLAN 1. TENANT LEASE LINE. NO WORK OUTSIDE OF THIS LINE, UON. 2. EXISTING PERIMETER / DEMISING WALLS, STOREFRONTS, AND DOOR. GC IS TO PROTECT IN PLACE AND MAINTAIN ANY EXISTING RATINGS. 3. ALL WALLS AND CEILING OF RESTROOM ARE TO BE FULLY INSULATED WITH FULL THICKNESS SAB, AND ARE TO BE SHEATHED WITH 5/8" GOLDBOND SOUNDBREAK XP (OR EQUAL) DRYWALL. PHOTOS OF INSTALLATION MUST BE PROVIDED TO DESIGN TEAM. 4. GC IS TO ADD FURRING AND GWB AS REQUIRED TO FACE OF EXISTING WALL IN THIS AREA TO ALLOW FOR ALL PLUMBING AND / OR ELECTRICAL CONDUITS TO BE CONCEALED. 5. WALL MOUNTED LED TV SCREEN BY CS VENDOR. GC IS TO FURNISH IN -WALL BLOCKING AND ELECTRICAL "BACK -BOX" PER DETAIL J16/A4.0. REFER TO SHEET A1.3, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. REFER TO ELEVATION DETAILS M13, M16, AND J13 ON SHEET A4.0 FOR SPECIFIC INFORMATION BASED ON TV LOCATION. 6. GC TO PROVIDE FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND CABINET. REFER TO SHEET A1.3 FOR MORE INFORMATION. 7. GC IS TO FURNISH IN -WALL BLOCKING FOR CABINET/SHELF ATTACHMENT BEFORE FINISHING WITH GWB. SEE DETAIL M10/A4.0 FOR MORE INFORMATION. BACKING HEIGHT AND SIZE IS TO BE ADJUSTED AS REQUIRED. COORDINATE WITH FURNITURE PACKAGE AS NEEDED. 8. MILLWORK TO BE FINISHED ON ALL VISIBLE SIDES. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR IMPORTANT INFORMATION. SEAMING IS TO BE MINIMIZED WHENEVER POSSIBLE. 9. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR LAYOUT OF BOH MILLWORK. 10. WALLCOVERING WC-2. REFER TO SHEET A1.2 AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 11. GC TO FURNISH (2)-12" DEEP WHITE MELAMINE SHELVES ON ADJUSTABLE SHELF BRACKETS ON BACK WALL OF MOP CLOSET. GC TO ALSO FURNISH IN -WALL BLOCKING AS NEEDED. 12. GC IS TO SHEATH THE INSIDE WALLS OF THE MOP CLOSET IN 48" HIGH WHITE FRP. REFER TO SHEET A1.2 FOR MORE INFORMATION. 13. GC IS TO FURNISH IN -WALL BACKING AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR WALL MOUNTED ILLUMINATED SIGN IN THIS LOCATION. IF ON AN EXISTING WALL GC IS TO REPAIR AS REQUIRED. REFER TO SIGN PACKAGE AS PROVIDED BY CSCM, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 14. GC IS TO FURNISH IN -WALL BACKING AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTION FOR WALL MOUNTED ILLUMINATED TENANT GRAPHIC IN THIS LOCATION. IF ON AN EXISTING WALL GC IS TO REPAIR AS REQUIRED. REFER TO TENANT GRAPHICS PACKAGE AS PROVIDED BY CSCM, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, DETAIL C4/A4.0, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 15. ELECTRICAL PANEL LOCATION. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 16. SONITROL SECURITY KEY PAD IS TO BE LOCATED HERE. REFER TO SECURITY AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 17. NEW WALL FRAMING IS TO ALIGN WITH EXISTING AS SHOWN. 18. LOBBY LIGHT SWITCHES IS TO BE LOCATED HERE. REFER TO SECURITY AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 19. FUR WALL 6" ABOVE CEILING AND MATCH WITH EXISTING STOREFRONT MULLION - V.I.F. 20. GC TO CLEAN AND PROTECT EXISTING STOREFRONTS AND EXTERIOR DOORS AS REQUIRED. 21. GC TO ADD ADDITIONAL SEALS AT THE DEMISING WALL AND TRANSITION TO STOREFRONT TYP. - SEE J16/A4.1 FOR DETAIL 22. GC IS TO PROTECT AND REPAIR EXISTING BLACK -OUT PANELS FROM THE F.F. TO FIRST HORIZONTAL MULLION ON EXTERIOR STOREFRONT. GENERAL NOTES: CONSTRUCTION PLAN 1. ALL METAL STUD GAUGES PER STUD SCHEDULE ON SHEET A4.0. SEE USG "STEEL -FRAMED DRYWALL SYSTEMS" LIMITING HEIGHT - STEEL STUD ASSEMBLIES CHART. USE THE U240 ALLOWABLE DEFLECTION FIGURES ONLY. 2. THE ARCHITECT HAS ENDEAVORED TO VERIFY THAT ALL DIMENSIONS WORK WITH ALL WALL SYSTEMS AND FIXTURES. HOWEVER, IT MAY BE NECESSARY FOR THE MILLWORK CONTRACTOR TO SLIGHTLY ALTER A FIXTURE SIZE FOR VARIOUS REASONS. THEREFORE, THE GC SHALL VERIFY WITH MILLWORK CONTRACTOR THE ACTUAL SIZE OF ALL WALL SYSTEMS, COMPONENTS, AND FIXTURES BEFORE CONSTRUCTING ANY WALLS. 3. DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF GWB OR CENTERLINE OF COLUMN. ALL ELEVATIONS ARE NOTED FROM FINISH FLOOR ELEVATIONS. 4. ALL GWB SHALL BE 5/8" TYPE'X', ION. 5. PROVIDE DRYWALL TRIM BEAD AT ALL EXPOSED EDGES AND CORNERS. 6. GC SHALL VERIFY THAT ALL WALLS THAT DEMISE SPACE EXTEND TIGHT TO STRUCTURE ABOVE, AND ARE FULLY INSULATED AND DRYWALLED. ALL PENETRATIONS MUST BE SEALED TIGHT, AND BE FIRE RATED IF REQUIRED BY CODE. GC SHALL PROVIDE ALL WORK REQUIRED TO CORRECT DEFICIENT CONDITIONS. 7. DEMISING WALLS ARE NOT DESIGNED TO ACCOMMODATE LOADING. ALL FIXTURES MUST BE SUPPORTED BY THE FLOOR OR NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION. 8. ALL FRAMING LUMBER, PLYWOOD, AND CONCEALED WOOD SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED (F.R.T.). NO WOOD IN CEILING PLENUM UNLESS CLEARLY STAMPED AS F.R.T. 9. STANDARD (MINIMUM) DIMENSION FROM ANY CORNER OR WALL TO FRAMING STUD AT DOOR JAMB OPENING SHALL BE 4", UON. 10. PROVIDE METAL OR F.R.T. WOOD BLOCKING FOR ALL SIGNS, HOOKS, AND ANY OTHER WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT. COORDINATE ALL BLOCKING REQUIREMENTS NECESSARY FOR MILLWORK WITH MILLWORK SUPPLIER. 11. SHOULD THE DRAWINGS DISAGREE WITH THEMSELVES OR WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS OR SHOULD THE SPECIFICATIONS DISAGREE WITH THEMSELVES, THE BETTER QUALITY AND/ OR GREATER QUANTITY OF WORK OR MATERIALS SHALL BE ESTIMATED UPON AND SHOULD BE SUBMITTED TO ARCHITECT AS A REQUEST FOR INFORMATION. NO SUBSTITUTIONS ARE PERMITTED WITHOUT ARCHITECT'S WRITTEN APPROVAL. 12. GC SHALL VERIFY DIMENSIONS OF THE EXISTING SPACE AND OF ANY EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN BY ACTUAL MEASUREMENT BEFORE ANY WORK IS PERFORMED. IF ANY MEASUREMENTS DIFFER FROM DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON PLAN, GC IS TO NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT AND CSCM IMMEDIATELY. GC SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CORRECTING ANY AND ALL DISCREPANCIES FOUND AFTER THE WORK IS PERFORMED, AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO CHARLES SCHWAB. 13. GC TO VERIFY ALL FINISHED DIMENSIONS AND CHALK SPACE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. FIELD CONDITIONS ALTERATION OF ANY DIMENSIONS MUST BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT AND CSCM. 14. GC SHALL COORDINATE WORK OF VARIOUS TRADES IN INSTALLATION OF INTERRELATED WORK. BEFORE INSTALLATION OR WORK BY ANY TRADE BEGINS, MAKE PROPER PROVISIONS TO AVOID INTERFERENCES. CHANGES REQUIRED IN WORK CAUSED BY NEGLECT TO DO SO SHALL BE MADE AT NO COST TO CHARLES SCHWAB. THIS SHALL INCLUDE WORK PERFORMED BY ANY SUB -CONTRACTOR. 15. GC IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL TEMPORARY POWER AS NECESSARY. 16. GC IS RESPONSIBLE FOR TELEPHONE BOXES AND CONDUIT. 17. GC SHALL LEAVE NO GAPS AND FILL SOLID TO PIPING AND DUCTWORK TO MAINTAIN THE INTEGRITY OF DEMISING WALLS AND MAINTAIN EXISTING FIRE SEPARATION AS/IF REQUIRED. 18. MILLWORK TO BE FINISHED ON ALL VISIBLE SIDES, WITH MINIMAL SEAMING. 19. ALL EXIT DOORS SHALL BE READILY OPENED FROM THE SIDE FROM WHICH EGRESS IS TO BE MADE WITHOUT USE OF KEY OR SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE. ALL EXIT DOORS SHALL HAVE ALL HARDWARE NECESSARY TO SATISFY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LOCAL CODES. 20. GC SHALL PROVIDE CAULK JOINTS WHERE GWB MEETS THE FLOOR AND ROOF DECK. PACK FLUTES AT DECK. FIRE CALUKING IS TO BE USED IF RATED WALL IS REQUIRED BY CODE. 21. ALL INTERIOR FINISH AND TRIM MATERIALS SHALL MEET APPLICABLE CODES FOR FLAME SPREAD RATINGS. 22. ALL WORK, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE GUARANTEED FOR A MINIMUM PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM DATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE. THE GC SHALL PROVIDE THE OWNER WITH ALL EQUIPMENT MANUALS WARRANTIES AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS UPON FINAL ACCEPTANCE. 23. GC IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL FLOOR AND WALL PENETRATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL WORK. ALL SUCH OPENINGS SHALL BE FRAMED AND REINFORCED. NO PENETRATIONS SHALL BE CUT THOUGH DEMISING WALLS OR FLOORING WITHOUT PRIOR AUTHORIZATION BY THE LANDLORD. 24. GC SHALL CLEAN THE SITE OF ALL UNNECESSARY DEBRIS PRIOR TO STARTING CONSTRUCTION, AND SHALL KEEP THE SITE NEAT AND CLEAN AT ALL TIMES. THE GC SHALL CLEAN ALL DOORS, WINDOW GLASS, INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR WALLS, CEILINGS AND FLOORS, AS WELL AS ALL INSTALLED ITEMS BEFORE VACATING THE PREMISES. 25. GC SHALL PATCH AND REPAIR EXISTING SURFACES AS NECESSARY BEFORE APPLYING NEW FINISHES. ALL SOFT, POROUS, FLAKING, OR OTHERWISE DEFECTIVE FINISHES WILL BE REMOVED BEFORE APPLICATION OF NEW MATERIALS. OPENINGS, VOIDS, OR UNFINISHED SURFACES CREATED BY REMOVAL OR MODIFICATION OF EXISTING WORK SHALL BE FILLED OR PATCHED AND FINISHED AS NECESSARY TO MATCH EXISTING CONTINUOUS SURFACES OF NEW FINISHES REQUIRED. SPECIFICALLY, FLOOR SURFACES AT ENTRY SHALL BE LEVELED AS NEEDED TO ASSURE SMOOTH SURFACE FOR FINISH FLOOR INSTALLATION. 26. ALL EXISTING FIREPROOFING TO BE MAINTAINED. DAMAGE OR REMOVAL OF FIREPROOFING MUST BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED AT NO COST TO CHARLES SCHWAB. 27. IT IS THE GC'S RESPONSIBILITY TO MAINTAIN THE STRUCTURAL, ARCHITECTURAL, SOUNDPROOFING, AND FIRE RATED INTEGRITY OF LANDLORD'S DEMISING WALLS, FLOOR SLAB, BEAMS, COLUMNS, AND ROOF STRUCTURE. 28. GC TO COORDINATE WITH CSCM THE DISPOSITION OF ANY QUESTIONABLE WALL OR FLOOR SURFACES. PARTICULARLY IN AGED BUILDINGS AS TO THE ACCEPTABLE MATERIALS AND LEVEL OF FINISH REQUIRED. 29. GC TO REFER TO REQUIRED DOOR CLEARANCES ON SHEET A1.4 FOR ALL DOORS. 30. GC SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SHEATHING OF ANY EXISTING TENANT WALL AREAS THAT HAVE NOT BEEN SHEATHED BY OTHERS PRIOR TO TURN -OVER, OR WHERE REMOVAL OF EXISTING MATERIALS HAS CAUSED DAMAGE. MINIMUM ALLOWABLE SCOPE WOULD BE THE INSTALLATION AND FINISHING OF ONE LAYER OF 5/8" GWB, BUT SITE CONDITIONS MAY REQUIRE ADDITIONAL SCOPE SUCH AS THE ADDITION OF WALL INSULATION AND/OR STUD FURRING PRIOR TO GWB INSTALLATION. GC IS TO WALK THE ENTIRE SPACE WITH CSCM AT BIDDING TO VERIFY THE COMPLETE SCOPE OF WORK. 31. ALL DRYWALL SURFACES ARE TO BE DONE TO A LEVEL FOUR FINISH (MIN.). WALLS WHICH ARE SHOWN TO RECEIVE SPECIAL ACCENTS, LOGOS, GRAPHICS, ETC. ARE TO BE FINISHED TO A LEVEL FIVE FINISH AS COORDINATED WITH THE CSCM. 32. ANY PENETRATIONS REQUIRED INTO EXISTING RATED WALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OR REPAIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE CODES. 33. GC SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FURNISHING, AT ANY LARGE VOIDS WITHIN THE EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB, A RAPID DRYING CONCRETE MIXTURE AND CLASS "A" VAPOR BARRIER WITH AN INSTALLATION THAT MEETS ASTM E 1643. MOISTURE CONTENT OF ALL EXISTING AND NEW CONCRETE SHALL BE FIELD TESTED TO 5LBS./24HRS. OR A R.H. OF NOT MORE THAN 80%. SHALL THESE LIMITS NOT BE ABLE TO BE MET, GC MUST ALERT CSCM IMMEDIATELY AND MUST PROVIDE AND INSTALL PROPER SLAB TOPPING AS RECOMMENDED BY SPECIFIED FLOORING MANUFACTURER(S). 34. GC TO FINISH ANY /ALL EXISTING SHELL BUILDING WALLS, COLUMNS, ETC. WHICH ARE LEFT UNFINISHED BY THE DEVELOPER WITH FURRING / FRAMING, INSULATION AND DRYWALL AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A FULLY FINISHED INTERIOR SPACE. 35. GC SHALL COORDINATE ANY X-RAYS OR CUTTING OF SLAB WITH LANDLORD PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK. NO CUTTING OF SLAB DECK ABOVE IS PERMITTED. 36. SHOULD THESE DRAWINGS CALL FOR ANY PENETRATIONS WITHIN ANY WALLS THAT ARE REQUIRED TO BE FIRE RATED, WHETHER EXISTING OR NEW, GC IS TO USE ONLY UL LISTED METALLIC OR NON-METALLIC OUTLET BOXES AND UL APPROVED FIRE BARRIER PUTTY PADS IN ALL CASES. 37. GC IS TO INSPECT ALL EXISTING EXTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEMS TO REMAIN THROUGHOUT ENTIRE TENANT SPACE, AND REPORT ANY DAMAGE TO THE CSCM. GC WILL BE REQUIRED TO REMOVE FROM TENANT SIDE OF ALL STOREFRONT MULLIONS ANY EXISTING SCREWS, HOOKS, BRACKETS, ETC. NOT TO BE REUSED. ENSURE ANY HOLES LEFT IN MULLIONS ARE DE -BURRED AND FILLED WITH CAULKING TO MATCH THE MULLION COLOR. 38. GC IS TO INSPECT EXISTING EXTERIOR BUILDING FACADE ON ALL SIDES OF THE TENANT SPACE, AND REPORT ANY DAMAGE TO THE CSCM. THIS IS INCLUSIVE OF DAMAGE TO EXTERIOR WALLS FROM PREVIOUS TENANT SIGNAGE, ETC. GC MAY BE REQUIRED TO REPAIR AND REFINISH EXTERIOR WALL AREAS PRIOR TO CHARLES SCHWAB SIGNAGE INSTALLATION. ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 r r r r r r r r r r NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, CH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com C&Iya SCHWAB ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 08/26/22 PERMIT BID 09/14/22 LANDLORD REVIEW 09/14/22 CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. ;OltALTH Op 114 S VINCENT P. DUET N. 16Lico04001975 L g1CINITBCl� PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB Charlottesville IBS 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 PROJECT #: 22.0000289.00 SHEET INFORMATION Construction Plan DRAWN BY: H. Koutsis REVIEWED BY: R. Rink SCALE: As noted AlnO 0 10 12 13 14 15 16 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 M I1■ 1M LI KI I:■ GI FI E a 0 0 3 n CI IIIIIII� REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = V-0" nInTC- ALL SUSPENSION WIRES FOR ANY ITEMS TO BE HUNG FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE ARE TO BE ATTACHED TO THE INTERNAL STRUCTURE ONLY. NOTHING IS TO BE ATTACHED DIRECTLY TO THE ROOF DECK EXCEPT AS COORDINATED WITH ALL BUILDING OWNER REQUIREMENTS. nlnTr:- HVAC AND SPRINKLER LOCATIONS ARE DESIGNED BY OTHERS, AND ARE NOT SHOWN ON THIS PLAN. REFER TO SHEET MEP1.1 FOR A COMBINED CEILING COORDINATION PLAN. ALL CONTRACTORS MUST REFER TO THE RESPECTIVE MEP DRAWINGS FOR THEIR INDIVIDUAL SCOPES OF WORK. ►O: . FINISH LEGEND: CEILING PLAN # TYPE MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATION ACT-1 2x2 SUSPENDED ACT ARMSTRONG TILE: DUNE 1775 WHITE 24"x24"x5/8" TEGULAR CEILING GRID: SILHOUETTE 9/16" W/ 1/8" REVEAL, BOLT SLOT SYSTEM WALL ANGLE: "W" STYLE SHADOW MOULD GWB SUSPENDED GWB CEILING GWB: 5/8" GOLD BOND SOUNDBREAK XP INSULATION: 61/4" SAB (OWENS CORNING SONOBATTS OR EQ.) NOTE: SUSPENDED ACT CEILINGS ARE NOT TO BE USED AS SUPPORT FOR INSTALLED FIXTURES OTHER THAN CEILING TILES. ALL LIGHTING, HVAC, ETC. MUST BE INDEPENDENTLY SUSPENDED FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE AND ANY REQUIRED SUB -STRUCTURE. KEY NOTES: REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1. ALL FIXTURES ARE TO BE CENTERED IN CEILING TILE, LON. 2. CEILING GRID IS TO BE EQUALLY CENTERED (BOTH DIRECTIONS) IN THIS ROOM OR SPACE AS SHOWN. 3. NEW CEILING MOUNTED EXIT LIGHT PROVIDED BY CS, AND INSTALLED BY GC. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 4. MOP CLOSET CEILING IS TO BE FRAMED WITH 6" MTL. JOISTS WITH A 3/4" FRT PLYWOOD TOP TO FUNCTION AS A SHELF FOR THE WATER HEATER. WATER HEATER IS TO BE FULLY ACCESSIBLE VIA SURROUNDING ACT CEILINGS. REFER TO DETAIL M16/A4.1 AND TO MEP DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 5. ENTIRE SUSPENDED CEILING IN THIS AREA IS TO BE COVERED WITH 61/4" SAB INSULATION. 6. ENTIRE RESTROOM CEILING IS TO BE FRAMED WITH 6" MTL. JOISTS WITH 61/4" SAB INSULATION. NOTE: ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES TO BE PROVIDED BY CHARLES SCHWAB AND INSTALLED BY GC, UON. LEGEND: REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FIXTURE DESCRIPTION T24" X 24" CEILING GRID. EDGE LIT EXIT SIGN - SHADING INDICATES FACE OF SIGN. ® DIRECTIONAL ARROWS ARE REQUIRED ASIIF SHOWN. ® 24" X 24" INDIRECT LIGHT ® 24" X48" INDIRECT LIGHT 0 6" RECESSED DOWN LIGHT LED STRIP LIGHTING - REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE m INFORMATION. NOTES 1. ALL GWB SOFFITS AND CEILINGS TO BE PAINTED PT-1, LION. 2. ALL CEILING FIXTURES TO BE CENTERED IN CEILING TILE, LION. 3. ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES ARE TO BE PLACED AS SHOWN ON THIS PLAN. APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS GOVERN THE LOCATIONS AND QUANTITIES OF HVAC AND FIRE PROTECTION ITEMS AS DESIGNED BY THE MEP ENGINEERS, THEREFORE THEY ARE NOT SHOWN ON THIS ARCHITECURAL PLAN. ALL CONTRACTORS MUST REFER TO MEP SHEETS FOR FULL SCOPE OF WORK. MEP SHEETS GOVERN THE FINAL PLACEMENT OF ALL CEILING MOUNTED ITEMS. 4. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR LIGHT FIXTURE SPECS. AND REQUIREMENTS. 5. IF SPACE IS TO BE SPRINKLERED, THE GC'S SPRINKLER SUB -CONTRACTOR IS TO COORDINATE THE LOCATION OF ALL SPRINKLER HEADS WITH THE LOCATIONS OFLIGHTING AND HVAC AS SHOWN IN THESE DRAWINGS. REFER TO MEP DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFO. GENERAL NOTES: REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 1. GC SHALL COORDINATE THE WORK OF ALL SUBCONTRACTORS TO ENSURE CLEARANCES FOR DUCTS, PIPES, CONDUITS, FIXTURES, SUSPENSION SYSTEMS ETC. NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN THE FINISHED CEILING HEIGHT NOTED. CONTACT DESIGN TEAM TO RESOLVE CONFLICTS BEFORE PROCEEDING. CEILING GRID RE -FRAMING CHARGES DUE TO CEILING CONFLICTS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. 2. VERIFY FIELD CONDITIONS AND LOCATIONS OF ALL PLUMBING, MECHANICAL DUCTS, STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS, AND OTHER APPLICABLE ITEMS. INSTALL NEW PLUMBING, MECHANICAL FANS, DUCTS, CONDUITS, AND OTHER RELATED ITEMS SO AS TO NOT CONFLICT WITH LIGHT FIXTURES AND OTHER EXISTING AND NEW CONDITIONS. 3. GC TO VERIFY WITH LANDLORD THE METHOD OF ATTACHMENT FOR ALL ITEMS ANCHORED TO, OR SUSPENDED FROM, THE BUILDING STRUCTURE. 4. ALL STRUCTURAL FRAMING, HANGERS, CHANNELS, RODS, AND OTHER MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORT STEEL SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE GC AS NECESSARY FOR PROPER SUPPORT OF SUSPENDED / SUPPORTED EQUIPMENT AND SHALL BE FASTENED TO BUILDING STRUCTURE AS APPROPRIATE. GC TO COORDINATE WITH A STRUCTURAL ENGINEER AS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION OF ALL EQUIPMENT. 5. GC TO OPEN AND CLOSE CEILING TO ELECTRICAL ROOM AND TELEPHONE CLOSET AND COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL, SECURITY, AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS CONTRACTORS. 6. ARCHITECTURAL PLANS SHALL GOVERN THE LOCATION OF ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES, LION. ENGINEERING DRAWINGS SHALL GOVERN THE LOCATION AND QUANTITY OF ALL HVAC AND FIRE PROTECTION ITEMS. IN THE EVENT OF DISCREPANCIES, ENGINEERING DRAWINGS TO TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER THIS SHEET TO GOVERN THE QUANTITY OF LIGHT FIXTURES, HVAC REGISTERS, AND FIRE PROTECTION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE CODES. GC AND ALL SUB -CONTRACTORS MUST REFER TO APPLICABLE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR FINAL LOCATIONS AND QUANTITIES OF THESE ITEMS AND THE ASSOCIATED SCOPES OF WORK. 7. GC TO PROVIDE CODE ACCEPTABLE AND APPROPRIATE SUSPENSION ANCHORING AND BRACING FOR INTEGRATION OF CEILING GRID, FIXTURES, AND ABOVE CEILING ITEMS. 8. NEW HVAC, DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND THERMOSTATS TO BE CHARLES SCHWAB STANDARD ITEMS, LION. REFER TO ENGINEERING SHEETS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 9. LOCATE EXHAUST FANS ABOVE NON -OCCUPIED SPACES. PROVIDE ACOUSTICALLY LINED DUCT TO GRILLE. 10. AS APPLICABLE, ALL WORK TO THE FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS REQUIRED FOR THE NEW INTERIOR BUILT -OUT ARE TO BE PER FULLY PERMITTED DRAWINGS AS DEFERRED TO THE GC'S LOCALLY LICENSED SUB -CONTRACTOR. THE ATTACHED MEP DRAWINGS SHOW FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS FOR SCHEMATIC PURPOSES ONLY, LION. 11. ALL NOTED CEILING DIMENSIONS ARE INDICATED AS CLEAR ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. 12. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND LAMPS TO MATCH CHARLES SCHWAB STANDARD, LION. 13. INSTALL ONLY UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY, INC. (UL) LABELED DEVICES AND FIXTURES. 14. PROVIDE FIXTURE MOUNTINGS AND TRIMS APPROPRIATE FOR THE TYPE OF CEILING. 15. ALL DIRECTIONAL LIGHT FIXTURES IN THE SAME SPACE ARE TO BE ORIENTED IN THE SAME DIRECTION AS SHOWN ON THE PLAN. 16. ALL LIGHTS TO BE CONTROLLED BY ROCKER STYLE SWITCHES AS SPECIFIED, OR AS SUPPLIED BY LIGHTING MANUFACTURER. ALL COVERPLATES TO BE WHITE "DECORA" STYLE WITHOUT VISIBLE SCREWS, LION. 17. ALL LIGHT SWITCHES TO BE CENTERED VERTICALLY AT 40" AFF, LON. WHERE MORE THAN ONE SWITCH IS SHOWN AT THE SAME LOCATION, THEY SHALL BE GANGED AND FINISHED WITH A ONE PIECE COVERPLATE. SWITCHES TO BE HELD 6"-9" TO CORNER, LION. 18. ILLUMINATED EXIT SIGNS AS REQUIRED BY CODE TO BE PROVIDED BY CS AND INSTALLED BY GC. 19. MODIFY EXISTING LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS TO INCLUDE SMOKE DETECTORS, SPEAKERS, STROBE LIGHTS, ETC. REQUIRED BY CODES AND BUILDING OFFICIALS. 20. WALL MOUNTED STROBE LIGHTS TO HAVE WHITE COLOR BASE. MOUNT AT 80" DIRECTLY ALIGNED ABOVE LIGHT SWITCHES, UNLESS SHOWN ELSEWHERE IN MEP DRAWINGS. 21. ALL FIRE PROTECTION INFORMATION WITHIN THESE DRAWINGS IS SHOWN FOR DESIGN INTENT ONLY, LON. IF SCOPE OF WORK INCLUDES NEW OR MODIFIED FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT, SUCH WORK IS TO BE DEFERRED TO GC'S FIRE PROTECTION SUB, LION. 22. ALL SPRINKLER HEADS TO BE CENTERED IN CEILING TILES, LION. GC TO NOTIFY DESIGN TEAM OF QUESTIONABLE LOCATIONS FOR VERIFICATION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 23. ABOVE CEILING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IS NOT SHOWN IN ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. GC AND ALL SUB -CONTRACTORS ARE TO REFER TO THE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS FOR THE FULL SCOPE OF WORK. 24. GC IS TO PERFORM ALL REQUIRED ROOFING WORK, SUCH AS ROOF CURBS, FLASHINGS, PENETRATIONS, ETC. IN ACCORDANCE WITH BUILDING OWNER REQUIREMENTS. IF REQUIRED BY BUILDING OWNER, GC IS TO HIRE THEIR SPECIFIED ROOFING CONTRACTOR TO PERFORM ALL APPLICABLE WORK. REFER TO GENERAL DETAILS ON SHEET A4.0 AND IN MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 26. CEILINGS IN SEPARATED ACCESSORY ROOMS, SUCH AS CLOSETS, ARE TO BE -ACT-1. AT THE SAME HEIGHT AS THE ADJACENT MAIN ROOM / AREA, LON. ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com Charles SCHWAB ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 08/26122 PERMIT BID 09/14122 LANDLORD REVIEW 09/14122 CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. 7 0 10 12 13 14 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 REAR OF ROOM FINISH NOTES IMATERIAL FINISHES & COLOR SCHEDULE- NO SUBSTITUTES ACCEPTED NOTE: INSTALL LVT FLOORING WITH RANDOM, WELL SPACED, STAGGERED END LOLI LLI NOTE" THIS LAYOUT DETAIL IS JOINTS. REFER TO FINISH PLAN FOR STARTING POINT. IF NO STARTING A. THE GC SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROPER PREPARATION OF ALL NEW AND EXISTING FLOORING /TILE WAL LC OV E R I N G P PROVIDED FOR GENERAL POINT IS PROVIDED, INSTALL WITH MINIMAL CUTS IN PUBLIC AREAS. SURFACES IN A SATISFACTORY MANNER TO RECEIVE NEW FINISHES. THIS INCLUDES THE J Q M H REFERENCE ONLY. DEMOLITIONAND REMOVAL OF NECESSARY ITEMS. TOUCH-UP AND/OR REFINISH F TYPE MANUFACTURERSTYLE/DESCRIPTION/COMMENTS TYPE MANUFACTURER RERCOMMENTS/DESCRIPTION ID Q CONTRACTORS ARE TO COORDINATE FULL SURFACES DAMAGED BY SUBSEQUENT WORK SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GC. ALL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S CPT-X INTERFACE PRODUCT: CARPET TILE WC-2 KOROSEAL INTERIOR PRODUCTS TACKRIGHT #TR05-86 (COLOR: ACORN) - 48" WIDE, Q J SCOPE AND DETAILS OF RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION METHODS. THE GC SHALL PREPARE THE EXISTING FLOOR (ALL STYLE: WORLD WOVEN - 25CM x 1 M PLANK TILE CONTACT: JENNIFER OKUNSKI INSTALLED FROM TOP OF WALL BASE TO CEILING. U = CARPET INSTALLATION PRIOR TO THE APPLICATION OF FINISH FLOORING. THE EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB MUST BE COLORS) INSTALLATION: REFER TO INDIVIDUAL CARPET TYPES BELOW. "TAC-TILE" 855-753-5474 ALUMINUM TRIM STRIP #JTR05 - TRIM IS APPLIED TO U) WITH CS DESIGN TEAM. SMOOTH AND LEVEL TO WITHIN A TOLERANCE OF ONE -EIGHTH INCH PER FOOT. LATEX USE INSTALLATION METHOD ON ALL PER CS CONTRACT PRICING ALL FOUR SIDES OF PRODUCT. CSCM IS TO PROVIDE GC CEMENT PATCHING COMPOUND SHALL BE UTILIZED (NO ASPHALT BASED COMPOUNDS). MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS. TACKRIGHT ADHESIVE #TR8001 OR #TR8004 Lu Lu WITH A FULL COLOR B. ALL SURFACES WHICH ARE TO RECEIVE A PAINT FINISH SHALL BE PRIMED AND FINISHED IN CPT-1 INTERFACE PRODUCT: WW895 FRP MAR LITE STANDARD FRP (48" HIGH) LLu Lu COPY OF THE FLOORING ACCORDANCE WITH THE WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDED BY CS COLOR:105377 HIGHLAND WEAVE (OR EQUAL) FINISH: SMOOTH U) MANUFACTURER'S C. ALL JOINTS IN GWB WALLS SHALL BE FINISHED WITH PAPER TAPE AND THREE COATS OF INSTALLATION: RANDOM ASHLAR COLOR: WHITE 0 CHARLES SCHWAB VINYL, DRY OR PREMIXED JOINT COMPOUND. ALL OUTSIDE CORNERS SHALL BE FINISHED L N g U DESIGN MANUAL PRIOR TO ANY INSTALLATIONS. WITH METAL CORNER BEADS, TAPED AND SPACKLED. ALL AREAS TO BE PAINTED SHALL BE NOT USED PAINT SANDED SMOOTH. JUST PRIOR TO THE APPLICATION OF THE FIRST COAT OF PAINT, WIPE CD PROPERLY STAGGERED I AVOID IMPROPERLY CLOSE SANDED SURFACES WITH A DAMP CLOTH IN ORDER TO LAY FLAT ANY NAP WHICH MAY HAVE TYPE MANUFACTURER STYLE/DESCRIPTION/COMMENTS CPT-3 INTERFACE PRODUCT: WW860 2 I RANDOM JOINTS JOINTS AND "H" PATTERNS D. FORMED IN SANDING. THE PAINT CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL HARDWARE, SWITCH COVERS, ETC. PRIOR TO PROVIDED BY CS COLOR: 105353 CHARCOAL TWEED PT-1 BENJAMIN MOORE CLOUD WHITE CC-40 FRONT OF ROOM (DOOR WALL) PAINTING AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REINSTALLATION AFTER PAINTING IS COMPLETED. INSTALLATION: RANDOM ASHLAR (SEMI -GLOSS ON PAINTED DOORS) E. ALL JOINTS BETWEEN MATERIALS TO BE TIGHT AND CONSTRUCTED IN A NEAT WORKMANLIKE CPT-4 INTERFACE PRODUCT: SR999 (STEP REPEAT) -1 ,4 i CHES f Nu 2080-LO PRIVATE OFFICE CARPET LAYOUT LVT PLANK PLACEMENT MANNER. PROVIDED BY CS COLOR: 104944 IRON PT-3 BENJAMIN MOORE COSMOPOLITANCSP-100 F. UPON COMPLETION OF LVT FLOORING, GC TO PROVIDE FIFTEEN FULL EXTRA TILES FOR SIZE: 50CM x 50CM WALK -OFF MAT FUTURE TENANT USE. INSTALLATION: QUARTER TURN PT-0 BENJAMIN MOORE STILLWATER 1650 G. FINISH FLOORING INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S LVT-1 INTERFACE PRODUCT: ARTISTRY - STANDARD COLLECTION PT-5 BENJAMIN MOORE MONTPELIER AF-555 RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION GUIDELINES. COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION WITH OTHER PROVIDED BY CS COLOR: ELM TRADES, SUCH AS ELECTRICAL. SIZE: 25Cx 1041 0CM LUXURY VINYL TILE PLANK M x 10 M CARPET AND LVT ARE TO BE INSTALLED IN PATTERNS AS DESIGNED FOR EACH ROOM / AREA FOR CHARLES SCHWAB BY H. THE INTENT OF THE FINISH SPECIFICATION IS TO PROVIDE A SATISFACTORY FINISH TO ALL INSTALLATION: RANDOM STAGGERED. GLUE DOWN PER MILLWORK INTERFACE CARPET. GENERAL LAYOUTS ARE SHOWN ON THIS SHEET FOR REFERENCE ONLY. FINAL INSTALLATION FOR PARTS OF THE WORK. COVER ALL SURFACES THOROUGHLY. MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS. EACH AREA AND FLOORING TYPE IS TO FOLLOW THE FULL COLOR "CHARLES SCHWAB DESIGN MANUAL" AS PRODUCED BY I. ALL FINISHES SHALL BE TOUCHED UP TO CORRECT ANY IMPERFECTIONS AFTER INSTALLATION. FIXTURE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TO THE GC ALL MATERIALS FOR TYPE MANUFACTURER STYLE/DESCRIPTION/COMMENTS CT-1 DALTILE PRODUCT: "LINDEN POINT" (12" X 24") PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE INTERFACE CARPET AND PROVIDED TO GC BY CSCM. TOUCH UP WORK. THE GC SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE APPLICATION OF ADDITIONAL CONTACT: (877) 556-5728 COLOR: #LP21 "GRIGIO" (MATTE) PL-1 FORMICA WHITE #949-58 (MATTE) COATS OF THE SPECIFIED MATERIAL TO GIVE SATISFACTORY COVERAGE, AT NO ADDITIONAL NATIONAL.A000UNTS@DALTILE.COM INSTALLATION: STRAIGHT STACK (PARALLEL TO WET WALL) "CUSTOM" INSTALLATION (BACK OFFICE COUNTERTOPS & COST TO OWNER. IF THE SPECIFIED NUMBER OF COATS DOES NOT ACCOMPLISH THE INTENT. (FOR PRICING AND STOCK) TRIM: SCHLUTER "DILEX-EKE" (PG) COVE TRIM AT ALL WALLS; UPPER CABINET FACES, RESTROOM STORAGE CABINET) GC IS TO CONFIRM IN WRITING TO THE DESIGN TEAM THE RECEIPT OF THE FULL COLOR CHARLES SCHWAB DESIGN J. RUBBER BASE INSTALLATION SHALL BE FREE OF BUCKLES, JOINTS, OR IMPERFECTIONS. ANGELA.BRABEC@DALTILE.COM REFER TO CT-1B AND CT-1C FOR WALL BASES MANUAL, AND ALERT TEAM TO ANY QUESTIONS VIA OFFICIAL RFI PRIOR TO ANY INSTALLATIONS. SEAMS SHALL BE IN ACCURATE ALIGNMENT ALONG BOTH COORDINATES. (FOR CONCERNS OR ESCALATION) GROUT: MAPEI, #02 "PEWTER" 1/8" SANDED W/ LATEX ADDITIVE WINDOW TREATMENT K. CLEAN ALL GLASS SURFACES WITH LIQUID GLASS CLEANER AT PROJECT COMPLETION. CTAB DALTILE PRODUCT: "LINDEN POINT" #P43C9 (3" x 12") BULLNOSE TILE L. ALL PAINT FINISHES TO BE EGGSHELL WITH THE EXCEPTION OF FLAT ON CEILINGS AND CONTACT: SEE ABOVE COLOR: #LP21 "GRIGIO" (MATTE) TYPE MANUFACTURER STYLE/DESCRIPTION/COMMENTS THERE ARE TO BE NO TRANSITION STRIPS PLACED BETWEEN DIFFERING FLOORING, LION. ALL FLOORING TRANSITIONS SEMI -GLOSS AT WET AREAS, DOOR FRAMES, AND PAINTED DOORS. INSTALLATION: FOR USE AT NON -TILED RESTROOM WALLS. ET E-SCREEN - 3%OPEN, CHARCOAL / Gi L ARE TO BE SEAMLESS. TRANSITIONS AT DOOR OPENINGS ARE TO BE HIDDEN BELOW THE DOOR IN THE CLOSED POSITION. M. ALL EXPOSED METAL FINISHES TO BE A BRUSHED TYPE STEEL OR ALUMINUM, WITH THE GROUT: MAPEI, #02 "PEWTER" 1/8" SANDED W/ LATEX ADDITIVE FASCIA TRIM, UON (MANUAL OPERATIC' EXCEPTION OF PAINTED METAL, IN WHICH CASE SURFACE TO BE FACTORY FINISHED IN CT-1C DALTILE PRODUCT: "LINDEN POINT" (12" X 24") PORCELAIN FLOOR TILE EN -MATCH WT-1 FOR ALL OTHER N. COLOR NOTED. GC IS PROVIDE FULL COLOR ROOM BY ROOM PHOTOS OF FLOORING INSTALLATIONS TO CONTACT: SEE ABOVE COLOR: #LP21 "GRIGIO" (MATTE) BACK" - LL c DESIGNN TEAM FOR REVIEW DURING INITIAL INSTALLATION. INSTALLATION: CUT ACROSS GRAIN INTO 3" x 12" STRIPS AND 0. GC IS TO SUBMIT FULL MANUFACTURER SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ALL DOOR AND FRAME INSTALLED OVER SCHLUTER STRIP AT TILED "WET" WALLS. SYSTEMS TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO ORDERING ANY GROUT: MAPEI, #02 "PEWTER" 1/8" SANDED W/ LATEX ADDITIVE MATERIALS. CT-2 DALTILE PRODUCT: "ANNAPOLIS" (6" X 16") CERAMIC WALL TILE P. ALL INTERIOR WALL AND CEILING FINISH MATERIALS ARE TO BE CLASSIFIED AS "CLASS A" CONTACT: SEE ABOVE COLOR: #AP10 "SAIL MATTE" (FLAT TILE, NO BEVEL) ! Q PER ASTM E84 OR UL 723 WITH A FLAME SPREAD INDEX OF 0-25 AND A SMOKE DEVELOPED INSTALLATION: HORIZONTAL 1/3 STAGGER, FULL TILES 5 INDEX OF 0-450. GC IS TO PROVIDE MANUFACTURER DATA AS REQUESTED. STARTING AT TOP OF WALL WITH CUT TILES AT WALL BASE. Q. ALL INTERIOR FLOOR FINISHES AND COVERING MATERIALS SHALL BE CLASSIFIED IN TRIM: SCHLUTER "JOLLY" (AT) AT OUTSIDE CORNERS. ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM AND NFPA 253 AS "CLASS I" TO BE COMPLAINT WITH THE GROUT: MAPEI, #02 "PEWTER" 1/8" SANDED W/ LATEX ADDITIVE K REQUIREMENTS OF THE DOC FF-1 "PILL TEST AND A SMOKE DEVELOPED INDEX OF 0-450. TH-1 GRIFFORM INNOVATIONS SOLID SURFACE THRESHOLD - ITEM #TT2 R. ALL TRANSITIONS BETWEEN FLOORING TYPES OR COLORS OCCURRING AT A DOORWAY (OR SUBMITTED AND COLOR: SILVER GRAY SHALL BE CENTERED UNDER THE CLOSED DOOR. APPROVED EQUAL) FOR USE AT RESTROOM DOORS ��� _ _" ,,; ;rDE, AND ARE TO BE LONG S. REFER TO SHEET AS1.0 FOR FULL ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS. POSITION. ABLE FROM A STANDING P GLASS -OR MOTORIZED LOBBY / HALLWAY SHADES IS TO BE GANGED WITH LOBBY LIGHT TYPE MANUFACTURER STYLE/DESCRIPTION/COMMENTS SWITCH FOR MOTORIZED CONFERENCE ROOM SHADES IS TO BE LOCATED NEAR WALL GL-1 CS SIGNAGE VENDOR VINYL "DISTRACTION BANDING" PROVIDED BY CS, °V CONTROLS. NOTE; q�� �❑ ❑ AND INSTALLED PER THE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ON SHEET G1.0. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS WALL BASE °❑❑ - -'" ALL CARPET AND LVT IS TO BE Lb ❑° ❑a0 FOR LOCATION INFORMATION. CENTER BAND AT 48" as REPEAT AFF FILM BACK 1/16" ALL TYPE MANUFACTURER COMMENTS/DESCRIPTION J PROVIDED BY CHARLES SCHWAB APPLYOLD TOROOMINTERIORSDOM EOFGLA GLASS. B-1 TARKETT (JOHNSONITE) PRODUCT: CUSTOM TABLESS AND INSTALLED BY GC, UON. PROVIDED BY CS STYLE: TTDC-71 3 1M /4"-LOUD 75'COIL (NON-STK) NOTES: *ALL WALL BASES ARE TO BE MITER CUT TO FIT TIGHTLY AT ALL CORNERS. a 0 5 HI GI FI E CI I" ALL GENDER RESTROOM 105 C INA W 14DE CPT-1 CPT-3 00 OFFICE 108 CPT-1 CPT-3 00 CONF. ROOM 1os 0 2 z Z W o Lu CPT-3 0 1�111111 FLOOR AND WALL FINISH PLAN 00 SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" i L©P ►O. % 0 ao OFFICE 103 CPT-1 CPT-3 GO CPT-1 00 aL 9'-10" OFFICE 1oz CPT-1 CPT-3 CPT-3 TOWNSOUARE 101 Z Zo W v a � 0 6A %PT-4,° 1 NORTH 11 16 17 18 LEGEND: FLOOR AND WALL FINISH PLAN SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR BASE LOCATIONS E-1 C PT-X CARPET TILE PLANK CPT-4 ENTRANCE MAT CARPET LVT-1 UXURY L TILE PLANK VINYL CT-1 CERAIC FLOOR TILE CT-2 CEAIC WALL TILE NOTES: 1. ALL WALLS ARE TO BE PAINTED PT-1 WITH B-1 BASE, UON. 2. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR MORE FINISHES INFORMATION. 3. SEMI -GLOSS PAINT TO BE USED ON PAINTED DOORS AND FRAMES PER THE NOTES ON SHEET A1.4, LON. 4. CERAMIC TILED AREAS ARE TO BE LAID OUT IN SUCH A WAY TO MINIMIZE THE NUMBER OF CUT TILES. WHOLE TILES ARE TO BE USED WHERE EVER POSSIBLE AND ESPECIALLY IN THE MAIN FOCAL AREA OF EACH ROOM. GENERAL NOTES: FLOOR AND WALL FINISH PLAN 1. REFER TO FINISH MATERIALS SCHEDULE FOR DESCRIPTIONS OF FINISH MATERIALS. 2. REPAIR, REFINISH AND PREPARE, AS APPLICABLE, EXISTING SURFACES TO RECEIVE NEW MATERIALS. THIS INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, COLUMNS, PARTITIONS, FLOOR SLAB, CEILING, AND RELATED ITEMS AS REQUIRED. 3. GC IS TO REPAIR AND REFINISH EXISTING SURFACES TO REMAIN AS REQUIRED TO MATCH NEW CONSTRUCTION AND FINISH MATERIALS AND STANDARDS. THIS INCLUDES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO EXISTING WALLS, COLUMNS, PARTITIONS, CEILINGS, DOORS, FRAMES, AND RELATED ITEMS. 4. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATION SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL WALL FINISH INFORMATION. 5. ALL FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS TO BE INSTALLED PER MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS VERIFY WITH MANUFACTURER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 6. THE GC IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING A SMOOTH LEVEL FLOOR SURFACE THAT MEETS THE MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF ALL FLOORING MATERIALS. USE EPDXY BASED LEVELING COMPOUND. PATCH/SHIM ALL AREAS AS NECESSARY SO THAT NEW FLOORING MEETS LEVEL WITH ALL OTHER FLOORING SURFACES, MAX. SLOPE OF 1:20. 7. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING THAT THE CONDITION OF THE BASE FLOOR MEETS THE INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF THE NEW FLOORING MATERIAL. 8. ALL DRYWALL SURFACES TO BE PAINTED PT-1 IN EGGSHELL SHEEN, LON. 9. ALL PAINTED DOORS TO BE PAINTED PT-1 IN SEMI GLOSS SHEEN, LON. 10. GC MUST INVESTIGATE THE MOISTURE LEVEL OF THE ENTIRE CONCRETE FLOOR SLAB. IF SLAB DOES NOT MEET FLOORING MANUFACTURER'S SET GUIDELINES, GC IS TO NOTIFY CSCM IMMEDIATELY AND MUST INCLUDE PROVISIONS TO READY SLAB FOR FLOORING INSTALLATIONS. ANY CONCRETE SLAB REPAIRS OR ADDITIONS UNDER 28 DAYS OLD ARE TO BE SEALED BY THE GC PER CARPET MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR MORE INFO. 11. ALL WALLS TO RECEIVE B-1 BASE, UON. REFER TO ELEVATIONS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 12. DIMENSIONS OF WALL COVERINGS MAY BE NOMINAL. GC IS TO FIELD MEASURE MATERIAL PRIOR TO CUTTING OR INSTALLING SPECIFIED FRAMES. 13. GC TO RECEIVE FROM THE CSCM A MANUFACTURER'S GUIDE TO THE INSTALLATION DESIGNS FOR ALL SPECIFIED FLOORINGS. 14. GC IS TO FINISH ALL WALLS WITHIN THE SPACE, WHETHER EXISTING OR NEW, TO A LEVEL 4 FINISH (MINIMUM). ANY WALLS THAT ARE TO RECEIVE AN ACCENT PAINT COLOR, TENANT SIGNAGE OR GRAPHICS, AND/OR WALL COVERINGS ARE TO BE FINISHED TO LEVEL 5. 15. WALL BASES ARE TO BE OF A CONTINUOUS ROLL AS SPECIFIED, AND APPLIED WITHOUT SPLICES WHEREVER POSSIBLE. OKEY NOTES: FLOOR AND WALL FINISH PLAN 1. FOR FLOORING INSTALLATION REFER TO SHEET AS1.0, THE SAMPLE OFFICE LAYOUT ON THIS SHEET, THE CHARLES SCHWAB DESIGN MANUAL AS PROVIDED BY THE FLOORING MANUFACTURER, AND ALL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. 2. "B-1" RUBBER BASE, UON. REFER TO DETAILS K10 AND H10 ON SHEET A4.1, AND SPECIFICATION ON THIS SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION. 3. "BA" RUBBER BASE TO BE APPLIED AT CABINET KICK. 4. LAY SPECIFIED LVT WITH GRAIN END TO END, TYP. 5. NO TRANSITION STRIP REQUIRED BETWEEN CARPET AND LVT. 6. IN RESTROOM GC IS TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL CT-1 FLOOR TILE, CT-1 B AND CTAC BASE TILE, AND CT-2 WALL TILE AS SHOWN ON SHEET A2.0, AND IN DETAILS A13 AND A16 ON SHEET A4.1. 7. NOT -USED 8. SEMI -GLOSS PAINT ON EXPOSED GWB, BEHIND BASE CABINET MILLWORK ONLY, AT AREAS WITH PLUMBING CONNECTIONS. 9. FLOORING NOT REQUIRED UNDER CLOSED CABINETRY OR MOP SINK. 10. PROVIDE FEATHERING AT TILE/CARPET TRANSITION AS NEEDED TO PROVIDE AN ADA COMPLIANT THRESHOLD INSTALLATION. 11. PROVIDE AND INSTALL A "TH-1" THRESHOLD BETWEEN RESTROOM TILE AND CARPET. REFER TO SPECIFICATION ON THIS SHEET, AND TO DETAIL J13/A1.4. 12. COMPLETELY SHEATH THE WALLS ON THE INSIDE OF THE JANITORS CLOSET IN 48" HIGH WHITE FRP. THE FRP IS NOT TO INTERFERE WITH THE DOOR OR BE VISIBLE FROM OUTSIDE OF THE CLOSET. 13. GLASS OFFICE FRONT IS TO RECEIVE GLA DISTRACTION BANDING AS PROVIDED BY CS AND INSTALLED BY GC. ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com c rl es ha C N L V 8 z 6 0 E a 5 3 d 0 d 0 n d a T E 3 m D d C N s a d z n n a T 8 N N t 0 `o a n s N a` NELSON SCHWAB a 0 2 d 8 16 8 DRAWN BY: 9 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M M 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PI NI MI LI KI HI GI FI E !" CI II" EO EQ. 0 4 in EQ. EQ. 0 4 OFFICE FURNITURE a z z 0 0 w U TYPICAL OFFICE OR CONF. ROOM ARTWORK PLACEMENT FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT LOCATION PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = V-0" TPM EQUIPMENT LEGEND: FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT LOCATION PLAN (ALL ITEMS FURNISHED BY CS,LON) # EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION (HxWxD) IN INCHES WEIGHT IN LBS LOCATION/ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION O COMPUTER MONITOR 24" DELL LCD MONITOR 21.9 X 17.1 X 9.2 W/ STAND 9 OFFICES & GREETER DESK ODESK COMPUTER LAPTOP OR PC OFFICES & GREETER DESK O KIOSK COMPUTER LAPTOP OR CHROMEBOOK LOBBY KIOSK; INCLUDES WIRELESS KEYBOARD AND MOUSE ONET SWITCH ARUBA 7024 1.1 X 9.3 X 4.1 1.7 BACK OFFICE; ON RACK IN IT CABINET OPHONE POLYCOM VOIP PHONE PRIVATE OFFICES AND GREETER DESK ODSL / CABLE MODEM CARRIER PROVIDED BACK OFFICE; ON RACK IN IT CABINET OPC/TV BOX DELL PC LOBBY TV AREA; IN CREDENZA O DirecTV HD CABLE BOX DirecTV; H24-200 1.5 X 15 X 9.4 6 LOBBY TV AREA; IN CREDENZA LARGE OFFICE; UNDER DESK OHDMI SWITCH 2.8 X 7.8 X 6.8 1.2 LOBBY TV AREA; IN CREDENZA 10 ARUBA NETWORK CONNECTIVITY MICRO TIK 750 BACK OFFICE; ON RACK IN IT CABINET 11 CHECK SCANNER EPSON 90 6.9 X 14 X 6.3 BACK OFFICE 12 COLOR PRINTER RICOH; C320DN 15.2 X 15.8 X 18.9 64 INSIDE GREETER DESK t3 RICOH MFP RICOH; MP-402SPF 20.1 X 18.7 X 19 57.3 BACK OFFICE; FREE STANDING 14 WALL MOUNTED LOBBY TV 70" LED TV 34A X 61.8 X 2.4 54.5 LOBBY WALL; REFER TO ELECTRICAL DWGS 1s WALL MOUNTED CONFERENCE ROOM TV 60" LED TV 31.3 X 53.9 X 2.4 42.8 CONFERENCE ROOM WALL; REFER TO ELECTRICAL DWGS 1s WALL MOUNTED LARGE OFFICE TV 43" LED TV 22 X 37.9 X 2.4 17.9 LARGE OFFICE WALL; REFER TO ELECTRICAL DWGS 17 TV MOUNT CHIEF WALL MOUNT; MODEL VARIES BY TV LOCATION LARGER MOUNTS IN LOBBY AND CONFERENCE ROOM, SMALLER MODEL IN OFFICE 18 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) APC; BR150OG 11.85 X 4.41 X 15.04 27 BACK OFFICE UNDER IT CABINET 1s ARUBA CEILING -MOUNTED ACCESS POINT ARUBA; AP225 5.2 X 5.3 X 1.8 0.66 LOBBY / CORRIDOR CEILING; REFER TO ELEC. DRAWINGS REFER TO SECURITY SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR INFORMATION ON PLACEMENT OF SECURITY EQUIPMENT. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR FURTHER CLARIFICATION ON PLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND OTHER WALL MOUNTED ITEMS. FACILITIES EQUIPMENT LEGEND: FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT LOCATION PLAN LOCATION/ADDITIONAL # EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION PROVIDE INSTALL INFORMATION SHREDDER FELLOWES CS CS BACK OF HOUSE - UNDER O "POWERSHRED" 84Ci COUNTER O SAFE (SMALL) AMSEC CSC1913EI CS CS BACK OF HOUSE - UNDER COUNTER WHIRLPOOL GC GC PANTRY; OR EQUAL AS SOURCED OMICROWAVE 120OW / 1.6 CU. FT. #WMC30516HW BY GC IF NOT AVAILABLE REFRIGERATOR FRIGIDAIRE GC GC OR EQUAL AS SOURCED BY GC O #FFET1222UW IF NOT AVAILABLE OCOFFEE MAKER KEURIG CS GC PANTRY COUNTER; ON FILTERED (PLUMBED) WATER LINE VIA T-FITTING OWATER DISPENSER VARIES BY LOCATION CS CS PANTRY COUNTER; ON FILTERED (COUNTERTOP) AND VENDOR VENDOR VENDOR WATER LINE VIA T-FITTING NORTH FILTER 3M "AQUA -PURE" GC GC UNDER SINK BASE W/ TAP AND OWATER (INLINE) #3MFF100 LINE UP TO WATER DISPENSER TOWEL AS[ #8165 (OR EQUAL) GC GC UNDERSIDE OF CABINET OPAPER DISPENSER NEAR PANTRY SINK KEY CABINET SENTRY SAFE #KB50 CS GC BACK OFFICE WALL - COORDINATE O LOCATION ON SITE W/ CS O FIRE EXTINGUISHER KIDDE "PRO 210" GC GC PER PLAN; IN CABINET OR #21005779 WALL MOUNTED OFIRE EXTINGUISHER LARSEN'S GC GC PER CODE; MOUNTED AT 42" CABINET ARCHITECTURAL AFF. TO CENTERLINE OF (ALUMINUM FINISH) SERIES#2409-5R, CABINET/HANDLE. SOLID DOOR WITH BLACK "TYPE A" *INCLUDE "K" ABOVE. LETTERING OIT CABINET AND GREAT LAKES CASE CS GC BACK OFFICE; PROVIDED BY ACCESSORIES & CABINET CO. CS AND INSTALLED BY GC. GC (1) GL24WMS CABINET SHALL ALSO FURNISH IN -WALL 24H x 21.25W x 24.5D (2) 7219 POW. STIR. PLYWOOD BLOCKING. (1) IT2 LACING BAR (1) 7217-044" FAN KIT IN -WALL BOX CHIEF MFG. CC GC IN TV WALL CENTERED BOTH O #PAC526 DIRECTIONS BEHIND TV. J-BOXES TO BE INSTALLED PER MFG. INSTRUCTIONS. FIRST AID KIT CINTAS #20929 CS CS PLACE IN PANTRY DRAWER O OR CABINET .. PLR PLAN @ 6O AFF TO BAR, OFILE CABINET 28 X 36 X 18 CABINET CS CS LOCATED UNDER COUNTER (2-HIGH) CONSOLE IRON MOUNTAIN CS CS LOCATED UNDER IT CABINET OSHRED (TALL) 36 X 21 X 16 HOOK RAIL KES #AH2O3H6-2 GC GC OR SUBMITTED AND APPROVED OCOAT s (SEE COMMENTS, 2 KESHOME.COM EQUAL. LOCATION PER PLAN. FOR EA. LOCATION) ONE @ 48" AND ONE @ 66" AFF WALL RACK SOLUTIONS; GC GC REFER TO DETAIL F1 / A4.0 O"UPS" T BRACKET 104-4010 (OR EQUAL) www.racksolubons.com DRY -ERASE CLARIDGE: MGMI-34 CS CS OFFICE AND/OR CONE ROOM OGLASS u BOARD 36" H x 48" W WALLS PER PLAN BY CS VENDOR (60" AFF TO CENTER); GC MUST PROVIDE IN -WALL BLOCKING PRIOR TO INSTALL CHIME SAFETY GC GC TO BE PURCHASED BY GC AT ODOOR SYSTEM TECHNOLOGY LOCAL HOME DEPOT. INTERNATIONAL, INC. COORDINATION WITH CSCM IF STI-3360 NOT AVAILABLE. PLANT LEGEND: FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT LOCATION PLAN # TYPE QTY LOCATION(S) NOTES PL-1 COFFEE TABLE PLANT 1 ON COFFEE TABLE IN TOWNSQUARE IBS SPECIFIC SILK ORCHID PL-2 TOWN SQUARE FLOOR PLANT 2 ON FLOOR IN TOWNSQUARE PER PLAN PL-3 OFFICE FLOOR PLANT 3 ON FLOOR IN PRIVATE OFFICES AND/ OR CONFERENCE ROOM PER PLAN NOTE: ALL PLANT SPECIES AND CONTAINER TYPES ARE TO BE PROVIDED BY VENDOR PER CS DESIGN AGREEMENT FOR EACH LOCATION. INTERIOR BRAND GRAPHIC LEGEND: FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT LOCATION PLAN # TYPE FURNISH BY INSTALL BY NOTES/DIMENSIONS BP BRAND POSITIONING CHARLES SCHWAB GC 52" x 52" - INTERNALLY LIT, REQUIRES BLOCKING L INTERIOR LOGO SIGN VENDOR SIGN VENDOR INTERNALLY LIT, BLOCKING REQUIRED. LOCATION AND ORIENTATION IS TO BE VERIFIED WITH SIGN PACKAGE KSK KIOSK CHARLES SCHWAB CHARLES SCHWAB FREE-STANDING LOBBY FIXTURE SUBSTRATE/GRAPHIC T-4 1/4"W X 2'-5 3/4"H -)UTSIDE FRAME TA 1/2"W X 2'-6"H TABLE TOPPER CHARLES SCHWAB CHARLES SCHWAB FREE-STANDING FIXTURE - ON COFFEE TABLE SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR MORE INFORMATION ON SCHWAB BRANDING GRAPHICS. GENERAL NOTES: FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT LOCATION PLAN 1. FURNITURE IS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND IS NOT IN THE CONTRACT. CHARLES SCHWAB SHALL PROVIDE FURNITURE SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS AS NEEDED. 2. ITEMS LISTED IN THE "FACILITIES EQUIPMENT LEGEND" MAY BE BY EITHER CHARLES SCHWAB OR BY THE GC AS STATED IN THE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ON SHEET G1.0. GC IS TO READ ENTIRE LEGEND AND COORDINATE ANY QUESTIONABLE ITEMS OR SCOPE WITH THE CSCM. 3. EQUIPMENT LISTED IN "TPM EQUIPMENT LEGEND" IS PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY CHARLES SCHWAB. GC IS TO REFER TO THE ENTIRE DRAWING SET FOR POSSIBLE SCOPES OF WORK. 4. GC SHALL COORDINATE ELECTRICAL/TEL/DATA/FEED REQUIREMENTS WITH CSCM. 5. EXACT LOCATION OF POWER & DATA RECEPTACLES ADJACENT TO FURNITURE SHALL BE PER DIMENSIONS IN ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. GC SHALL ALSO COORDINATE WITH CSCM AND THE FURNITURE VENDOR. 6. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ELECTRICAL DEVICE TYPES, RATINGS, MOUNTING HEIGHTS, ETC. 7. GC SHALL CONSULT WITH A LICENSED ENGINEER AND OBTAIN ACCEPTANCE FROM CSCM AND THE LANDLORD PRIOR TO MODIFYING STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS TO ACCOMMODATE UTILITIES AND OUTLETS. 8. GC SHALL CONSULT WITH A LICENSED ENGINEER AND OBTAIN ACCEPTANCE FROM CSCM AND THE LANDLORD PRIOR TO ANY ADDITIONAL CUTTING OF FLOOR SLAB FOR ACCOMMODATION OF FLOOR BOXES, PLUMBING, ETC. 9. ALL FURNITURE SHOWN ON PLAN MUST BE VERIFIED BY FURNITURE VENDOR AND CHECKED BY THE CS PROJECT TEAM. 10. GC SHALL COMPLETE THE IT CABINET INSTALLATION, INCLUDING ALL ELECTRICAL AND DATA WORK, BASED ON THE SCHEDULE LISTED IN THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS OR AS COORDINATED WITH THE CSCM. OKEY NOTES: FURNITURE/EQUIPMENT LOCATION PLAN 1. FRAMED ARTWORK PROVIDED BY CS, GC TO INSTALL AT 6-0" A.F.F. ON CENTER IN LOCATION SHOWN. ART PIECES ARE TO BE EQUALLY CENTERED ON AVAILABLE WALL SPACE, LION. REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. GC IS TO CONTACT CSDM FOR A NUMBERED ARTWORK PLAN. 2. IT CABINET PROVIDED BY CS AND INSTALLED BY GC, INCLUDING PLYWOOD BACKING. DOOR MUST OPEN IN THE DIRECTION SHOWN. REFER TO EQUIPMENT LEGEND AND INTERIOR ELEVATION FOR MORE INFORMATION. GC IS TO UTILIZE THE KNOCKOUTS IN THE BACK OF THE CABINET FOR CONDUITS AND CABLING TO RUN INSIDE WALL. 3. INTERIOR LOGO TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY CS SIGNAGE VENDOR. GC IS TO FURNISH IN -WALL BLOCKING AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED AND AS COORDINATED WITH THE SIGN PACKAGE, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. FINAL LOCATION AND ORIENTATION OF SIGNAGE IS TO BE COORDINATED WITH SIGN VENDOR AND CSDM PRIOR TO INSTALLING BLOCKING OR ELECTRICAL. 4. TENANT GRAPHIC TO BE PROVIDED BY CS VENDOR AND INSTALLED BY GC. GC IS TO FURNISH IN -WALL BLOCKING AND ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED. REFER TO THE GRAPHICS PACKAGE, INTERIOR ELEVATIONS, DETAIL F4/A4.0, AND THE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. FINAL SPECIFICATIONS AND LOCATIONS OF TENANT GRAPHICS ARE TO BE COORDINATED WITH CSCM PRIOR TO INSTALLING BLOCKING OR ELECTRICAL. 5. WIRELESS CHIME AND DOOR CONTACTS TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY GC. REFER TO FACILITIES EQUIPMENT LEGEND FOR SPECIFICATIONS. DOOR CONTACTS ARE TO BE PLACED ON FRONT ENTRY DOOR(S) ONLY. IN THE CASE OF DUAL FRONT ENTRIES, AS SECOND SET OF CONTACTS WILL BE REQUIRED. CHIME IS TO BE PLUGGED INTO AN AVAILABLE WALL OUTLET AT REAR OF HALLWAY. NEAR BACK OFFICE AND RESTROOM DOORS. ECS Mid-AOantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. i William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com Charles SCHWABSCHWABISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 08/26/22 PERMIT BID 09/14/22 LANDLORD REVIEW 09/14/22 CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS 0 _ NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. �itALTH u C N L V 8 z `o 0 E a d S 'o 2 3 d `o d 0 n m a E m 3 D N a L U Q N Z d n n a T n N N t 0 `o a n s N a` NELSON Q16 C 8 16 8 DRAWN BY: 9 15 1 2 3 4 5 0 7 H 0 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 3 4 9 0 7 0 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 M NI MI LI III JI HI GI FI E u CI DOOR SCHEDULE O DOOR FRAME COMMENTS TYPE QTY MANUFACTURER NUMBER/COMMENTS GROUP 1 - PRIVATE OFFICE HINGE 4 EA HAGER BB 1279, 41/2" X41/2' IY 120 Z Z O U Q J a. } H _ p ~ W 2 U W Z v = f- J Q W = H Q Z LL Q) Q � 0- } H Q W 2 Q J Q _ H Q Z li LU Q Q 2 DOOR LEVERILATCHSET 1 SCHLAGE SlOD-NEP-626 (PASSAGE LATCH) STOP 1 HAGER 241F(US26D) COAT HOOKS 2 HAGER 901P (US26D) - CENTERED ON BACK OF DOOR; (1) HOOK @ 48" A.F.F. TO TOP OF HOOK AND (1) HOOK @ 66" A.F.F. GROUP 2 -BACK OFFICE HINGE 4 EA HAGER BB 1279, 41/2" X 41/2" DOOR LEVERILATCHSET 1 SCHLAGE S10D-NEP-626 (PASSAGE LATCH) 101 ENTRANCE B (2) 3'-0" 7'-0" 1 3l4" EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST EXIST DOOR BY LANDLORD TO BE VERIFIED ACCESSIBLE. CLEAN AS NECESSARY. LOCKABLE BY CSRPM, SEE NOTES BELOW FOR SECURITY REQUIREMENTS. STOP 1 HAGER 241F(US26D) 102,103, 108 OFFICE A T-0" 8'-0" 13/4" EE COMM. - C A13/A1.4 A16/A1.4 CLEAR ALUM. 1 **SEE NOTE THIS PAGE FOR WOOD DOOR PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS. CLOSER 1 HAGER 5200 SLIM LINE KICK PLATE 2 12" HIGH STAINLESS STEEL - BOTH SIDES OF DOOR 105 RESTROOM D 3'-0" 8'-0" 1314" COMM. C A13/A1.4 A16/A1.4 ALUM. 6 UNDERCUT P/ PROVIDE VT SEENOTETHIAGEFOR WOOD DOOR PAN PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS. GROUP 3 - JANITOR CLOSET 106 BACK OFFICE E T-0" 8'-0" 13/4" COMM. - C A13/A1.4 A16/A1.4 AL MR 2 "'SEE NOTE THIS PAGE FOR WOOD DOOR PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS. HINGE 4 EA HAGER BB 1279, 41/2" X 41/2" 107 MOP CLOSET C 2'4" 8'-0" 13/4" SEE COMM. C A13/A1.4 A16IA1.4 CLEAR ALUM. 3 UNDERCUT DOOR BY 3/4" TO PROVIDE AIRFLOW. "*SEE NOTE THIS PAGE FOR WOOD DOOR PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS. DOOR LEVERILOCKSET 1 SCHLAGE S10D-NEP-626 (PASSAGE LATCH) STOP 1 1HAGER 241F(US26D) 109 CONF. ROOM F Y-0" 8'-0" 13/4' -COMM. C A13/A1.4 A16/A1.4 CLEAR 1 **SEE NOTE THIS PAGE FOR WOOD DOOR PAINTING INSTRUCTIONS. KICK PLATE 2 12' HIGH STAINLESS STEEL -BOTH SIDES OF DOOR '4 - FRAMELESS BI-F(, ) DOOR OLD DOOR HARDWARE I 1 SET I HAGER 9861 )ULL 1 2 IROCKWOOD GROUP 5 - DOUBLE CLOSET DOORS HINGE 8 EA HAGER NO-T USED DOOR LEi' �Ol LER I G_ HAGER D it!S25D1 3ER GROUP 6 - RESTROOM DOOR HINGE 4 EA HAGER BB 1279, 41/2" X41/2" DOOR LEVERILOCKSET 1 SCHLAGE S40D-NEP-626 (PRIVACY LOCK) COAT HOOKS 2 HAGER 901P (US26D) - CENTERED ON BACK OF DOOR; (1) HOOK @ 48" A.F.F. AND (1) HOOK @ 66" A.F.F. STOP 1 HAGER 241F(US26D) CLOSER 1 HAGER 5200 SLIM LINE KICK PLATE 2 12" HIGH STAINLESS STEEL - BOTH SIDES OF DOOR GROUP 7 - FRONT (EXTERIOR) ENTRY HINGE 4 EA DOOR HAGER BB 1279, 41/2" X 41/2" DEADBOLT 1 SCHLAGE SCH-B360-626 PUSH/PULL 1 SET STOP 1 CLOSER 1 HAGER HAGER HAGER '130S" PUSH 241FlL!S26r CED - 1 O"r `J J GROUP 8 - REAR EGRESS DOOR tv REFER TO SHEET AS1.0 FOR MORE INFORMATION 1 ALL EXTRUDED ALUMINUM INTERIOR FRAMES ARE TO BE "CLEAR" EXTERIOR LEVER / LOCK 1 179-NL w/ QUANTUM STYLE LEVER STOP 1 HAGER 241E US26D A NO FRAME FINISHED GWB OPENING ALUMINUM FINISH DON. B HOLLOW METAL FRAME PAINTED PER DOOR FINISH NOTE ON THIS SHEET ( )S DOOR/ 2 ALL HOLLOW METAL STEEL INTERIOR FRAME NEW R EXISTING) ARE T 0 S( 0 S G) 0LOSER 1 HAGER 5200 SLIM LINE FRAME TYPES . C IVEXTRUDED ALUMINUM FRAMES W/ 1" SNAP -ON "REVEAL" TRIM PROFILE BY: WILSON PARTITIONS -"SNAP ON TRIM" SERIES w/ 1" TRIM (www.wilsonpart.com) WESTERN INTEGRATED - "300" SERIES w/ 1" TRIM (aluminumdoorframes.com) FRAMEWORKS -'TYPE II" REVEAL TRIM SYSTEM (www.frameworks.com) D HIDDEN FRAME - EZY JAMB - "EZC" (OUTSWING) OR "ISD" (INSWING) TRIMLESS FRAME FINISH: BE PROFESSIONALLY FINISHED IN P-1 SG PAINT, DON. 3 ALL PAINTED WOOD INTERIOR DOORS ARE TO BE PROFESSIONALLY FINISHED IN P-1 SG PAINT, DON. 4 TENANT SIDE OF ALL PAINTED EXTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES (NEW OR EXISTING) ARE TO BE PROFESSIONALLY FINISHED IN P-51 SG PAINT, DON. E 1 ALLEGION FALCON 1790 SERIES DOOR FRAME WITH ROC YORK RY-80 CONCEALED HINGES (FRAME NOT TO BE 5 INTERIOR BUTT GLAZING IS TO BE DONE USING CR LAURENCE "EZCC 10" - MORTISED FOR LEVER SET) EZ GLAZE CLEAR 180 DEG JOINT 10MM. DOOR TYPES A13 C1 AA13 A13 A1.4 A1.4 A1.4 A1.4 A16 C1 \\ \\ AA16 A1.4 i G13 A1.4 E16 A1.4 E16 i A1.4 ACCESSIBILITY SIGNS BYOCSVENDOR;ISEEALLED A1.4 A1.4 i \ DETAILS THIS SHEET A16 GL 1 C13 \ TYR A1.4 \ \ E13 \ \ 12" HIGH STAINLESS STEEL KICKPLATE ON BOTH SIDES; PROVIDED A1.4 12"HIGH STAINLESS STEEL KICKPLATE ON BOTH SIDES; PROVIDED A1.4 AND INSTALLED BY GC AND INSTALLED BY GC EQ. EQ. DESCRIPTION: DESCRIPTION: DESCRIPTION: DESCRIPTION: CLEAR ALUMINUM FRAME SET. SOLID CORE DOOR WITH PAINT EXISTING ANODIZED ALUMINUM STOREFRONT AND DOOR SYSTEM. *"EXTERIOR CLEAR ALUMINUM FRAME SET. SOLID CORE DOOR CLEAR ALUMINUM FRAME SET. SOLID CORE DOOR GRADE VENEER. PAINT DOOR PER THE NOTE BELOW DOOR DOORS TO HAVE HIGH SECURITY KEYWAYS (MEDECO OR EQUAL BY CSRPM). WITH PAINT GRADE VENEER. PAINT DOOR PER THE WITH PAINT GRADE VENEER. PAINT DOOR PER THE SCHEDULE. 3/8" TEMPERED GLASS SIDELITE PANELS W/ KEYS MUST READ "DO NOT DUPLICATE" AND EACH KEY TO BE STAMPED IN NOTE BELOW DOOR SCHEDULE. NOTE BELOW DOOR SCHEDULE. BUTT -JOINTED FINISHED EDGES PER SPECIFICATIONS. NUMERICAL SEQUENCE. - FIRE ASSEMBLY: NON -RATED FIRE ASSEMBLY: EXISTING RATING (IF ANY) TO BE MAINTAINED. FIRE ASSEMBLY: NON -RATED FIRE ASSEMBLY: NONRATED TYPE A TYPE B TYPE C TYPE D FRONT ENTRANCE/EXIT DOOR PRIVATE OFFICE DOORS JANITOR CLOSET DOOR RESTROOM DOOR A13 A13 A1.4 A1.4 A16 F A16 i A1.4 i A1.4 12" HIGH STAINLESS STEEL KICKPLATE ON BOTH SIDES; PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY GC DESCRIPTION: DESCRIPTION: CLEAR ALUMINUM FRAME SET. SOLID CORE DOOR CLEAR ALUMINUM FRAME SET. SOLID CORE DOOR WITH PAINT GRADE VENEER. PAINT DOOR PER THE WITH PAINT GRADE VENEER. PAINT DOOR PER THE NOTE BELOW DOOR SCHEDULE. NOTE BELOW DOOR SCHEDULE. FIRE ASSEMBLY: NON -RATED FIRE ASSEMBLY: NON -RATED TYPE E TYPE F BACK OFFICE DOOR CONFERENCE ROOM DOOR SWING DOOR MINIMUM CLEAR FLOOR AREAS ACCESSIBILITY NOTES GLAZING NOTES 1. THIS PROJECT SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL STATE AND LOCAL 1. ALL INTERIOR GLAZING PANEL THICKNESSES ARE TO BE DESIGNED ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES. AND PROVIDED BY GC'S GLASS PROVIDER AS REQUIRED BASED ON 2. THRESHOLDS SHALL BE NO HIGHER THAN 1l2" ABOVE THE FLOOR. THE INDIVIDUAL SIZE AND INSTALLATION DETAIL OF EACH OPENING. EDGE TO BE BEVELED WITH A SLOPE NO GREATER THAN 1 IN 2. 2. ANY INTERIOR GLAZING PANEL THAT IS WITHIN 24" HORIZONTALLY OF 3. DOOR HARDWARE SHALL BE OF THE LEVER OR PUSH TYPE, MOUNTED A DOOR MUST BE TEMPERED. 30" TO 44"ABOVE THE FLOOR AND BE OPERABLE WITH A MAXIMUM 3. ANY INTERIOR GLAZING PANEL THAT IS 9 SQUARE FEET OR MORE AND EFFORT OF 5 LBS. FOR INTERIOR DOORS. IS 18" OR LESS FROM A FLOOR SURFACE MUST BE TEMPERED. 4. ACCESSIBLE DOORS MUST BE A MINIMUM 3'-0"W X 6'$"H. MODIFY IF 4. ANY INTERIOR GLAZING PANEL THAT IS ON A STAIRCASE LANDING OR REQUIRED. WITHIN 60" OF A STAIRCASE TREAD MUST BE TEMPERED. 5. REFER TO LEGEND ON THIS SHEET FOR ACCEPTABLE REQUIRED 5. THE DIFFERENTIAL DEFLECTION OF TWO ADJACENT UNSUPPORTED STRIKEIPUSH SIDE DOOR CLEARANCES ON DOOR CLOSERS. GLAZING EDGES SHALL NOT BE GREATER THAN THE THICKNESS OF 6. FLOOR SHALL BE LEVEL THROUGHOUT. THE PANELS WHEN 50 PLF IS APPLIED AT ANY POINT UP TO 42°AFF. 7. HOT WATER AND DRAIN PIPES UNDER LAVATORIES SHALL BE 6. EACH INTERIOR GLAZING PANE SHALL BEAR THE MFG'S MARK INSULATED. DESIGNATING THE TYPE AND THICKNESS OF THE MATERIAL. I I DOOR +22" DOOR +24" NOTE: "DOOR" = 32" MIN. CLEAR WIDTH 1 2 W 1 WHENADDITIONAL CLEAR FLOOR AREA DOOR HAS BOTH CLOSER AND AIRED LATCH . F-- 2. ADDITIONAL CLEAR FLOOR AREA REQUIRED VZ/3 3 Q WHEN DOOR HAS CLOSER. W 1 0 Q o Q Q z 3. ALTERNATIVE CLEAR FLOOR AREAS AS SHOWN Q ¢ PER CALIFORNIA BUILDING CODE. CONTRACTOR(S) SHALL ADJUST ALL INTERIOR DOORS 2 SO THAT THE REQUIRED OPENING FORCE IS 5 Ibs OR U) W LESS. ANY DOOR WITH A CLOSER SHALL BE ADJUSTED TO SLOW THE CLOSING TIME O TO A MINIMUM OF 5 SECONDS FRONT APPROACH HINGE -SIDE APPROACH LATCH -SIDE APPROACH U FROMASTARTINGPOINTOF �" 90° TO 12° FROM CLOSING. _ ADA "b&c" / CBC "b&c" ADA "f&g" / CBC "f&g" ADA "j&k" / CBC "j&k" REFER TO DIAGRAM. CS SIGN VENDOR TO PROVIDE CS SIGN VENDOR TO PROVIDE RESTROOM SIGNAGE (BLUE WITH DOOR +42" (ADA"e") RESTROOM SIGNAGE (BLUE WITH CV WHITE LETTERING INCLUDING BRAILLE) AS SHOWN HERE AND DOOR +36"(ADA"d") DOOR+24" WHITE LETTERING INCLUDING BASED ON LOCAL CODES. DOOR JAMB SIGNS ARE TO BE PLACED DOOR DOOR (CBC "d") `-' BRAILLE) AS SHOWN HERE AND " AT 48" AFF (MIN.) TO BASELINE OF LOWEST BRAILLE CELL AND 60" 3 3 07 BASED ON LOCAL CODES. DOOR 07 AFF (MAX.) TO BASELINE OF HIGHEST RAISED CHARACTER. LU Z JAMB SIGNS ARE TO BE PLACED Z PLAIN BLUE GEOMETRIC DOOR SIGNS: 2 AT 48" AFF (MIN.) TO BASELINE OF MEN TO BE 12" DIA. CIRCLE, WOMEN TO z CO LOWEST BRAILLE CELL AND 60" BE EQUILATERAL TRIANGLE WITH 12" J Q o o a � AFF (MAX.) TO BASELINE OF 2 VERTICES, GENDER NEUTRAL TO BE 12" g ¢ a HIGHEST RAISED CHARACTER. O DIA. BLUE CIRCLE OVERLAID WITH WHITE MEWS & WOMEN'S O EQUILATERAL TRIANGLE. MOUNTED M(p BETWEEN 58"-60" AFF. SIGNS ARE TO FRONTAPPROACH HINGE -SIDE APPROACH LATCH -SIDE APPROACH W HAVE1/16"(MIN.)ROUNDEDOR1/8"(MAX.) ADA "a" / CBC "a" ADA "d&e" / CBC "d" ADA "h&i" / CBC "h" W MEN'S & GENDER W CHAMFERED EDGES, AND TRIANGLES ARE � WOMEN'S NEUTRAL GENDER NEUTRAL TO HAVE 1/8"-1/4" RADIUSED VERTICES. DOOR, FRAME, AND HARDWARE NOTES 1. CLOSERS - FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY GC. DOOR CLOSERS TO HAVE A MAXIMUM OPENING FORCE OF 5 LEIS (INTERIOR) OR 8.5 LEIS (EXTERIOR). THE SWEEP PERIOD OF THE CLOSER SHALL BE ADJUSTED SO THAT FROM AN OPEN POSITION OF 70 DEGREES, THE DOOR SHALL TAKE AT LEAST 5 SECONDS TO MOVE TO A POINT 12 DEGREES FROM THE LATCH, MEASURED TO THE LEADING EDGE OF THE DOOR. 2. GC SHALL VERIFY WITH SUPPLIER THAT ALL HARDWARE MEETS ALL STATE AND LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. 3. ALL DOOR HINGES TO BE STEEL BALL BEARING, FULL MORTISE TYPE. 4. ALL METAL DOOR FRAMES TO BE PROVIDED WITH SILENCERS. 5. ALL INTERIOR DOORS TO BE PROVIDED WITH COMMERCIAL GRADE FLOOR STOPS. 6. GC TO SUBMIT TYPE -WRITTEN SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT LITERATURE FOR ALL DOORS AND HARDWARE SPECIFIED. 7. GC SHALL ENSURE ALL EXISTING DOORS TO REMAIN TO BE IN GOOD OPERATING ORDER AND TO MEET CURRENT BUILDING CODES AND ADAAG REQUIREMENTS. GC TO RESTORE DOORS AND HARDWARE TO "LIKE NEW CONDITION. 8. EXTERIOR HINGES TO HAVE NON-REMOVEABLE PINS. 9. ALL RATED DOORS TO BE SUPPLIED WITH THRESHOLDS AND GASKETS PER SPECIFICATIONS AND CODE. 10. COORDINATE EXTERIOR DOOR DETAILS AND THRESHOLDS WITH LANDLORD. 11. DOORS AND FRAMES TO MATCH IN COLOR UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 12. REFERENCE A1.4 AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR DOOR/FRAME COLOR DESIGNATIONS. 13. CS SIGN VENDOR TO PROVIDE SIGNS TO RESTROOM FACILITIES AS SHOWN IN THE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET. 14. CSRFM WILL ARRANGE WITH LOCKSMITH TO SWITCH DOOR LOCKS. 15. GC SHALL ENSURE THAT GAPS AT BOTTOM OF ALL INTERIOR DOORS ARE HELD TO 3/16" MAX. WITHOUT IMPACTING THE FINISHED FLOORING. DOOR UNDERCUTS ARE NOT REQUIRED EXCEPT AT SPECIFIC ROOMS WHERE AIRFLOW IS NEEDED, SUCH AS RESTROOMS AND MOP CLOSETS. REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE FOR MORE INFORMATION. 16. THE INTERIOR DOOR FRAME MANUFACTURER USED IS TO BE CHOSEN AT THE GC'S PREFERENCE FROM THOSE LISTED ON THIS SHEET AND IN THE SPECIFICATIONS BASED ON AVAILABILITY, LEAD TIMES, ETC. ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 STANDARD INTERIOR DOOR / FRAME DETAILS SCHEDULED PARTITION y:. DOOR FRAME SOU ATTENUATION " B NKETUNFACED SCHEDULED DOOR '^ 5l8" GYP. BD ON 3-5/8" t' METAL STUDS ti� ^e PROVIDE TH-1 THRESHOLD `` A AT DOOR OPENING; REFER TO MATERIALS SCHEDULE SCHEDULED FLOORING; "' t FLOAT AS REQ. CERAMIC TILE FLOOR V (2) METAL STUDS AT `O �a. >' HEAD n e a 'd ....;. 1x WOOD TRIM W/ EASED TRANSITION TO EDGES AS SHOWN; SCHEDULED DOOR; BE HIDDEN PAINT TO MATCH WALL FACE OF DOOR IS TO UNDER DOOR ALIGN WITH FACE OF HEAD JAMB WALL AS SHOWN J13 Restroom Door J1 Head and Jamb Detail SCALE0:" Threshold S-1`o at Typical Bi-Fold Door NOTE: THE MINIMUM REQUIRED GLASS THICKNESS IS TO BE 3/8" IF ANY ONE EDGE IS TO BE UNSUPPORTED. THICKER GLASS MAY BE REQUIRED DEPENDANT ON THE SIZE OF THE OPENING, FRAMING CONDITIONS, OR OTHER FACTORS. GC IS TO CONSULT A GLASS SUPPLIER TO VERIFY ALL REQUIRED GLAZING THICKNESSES PRIOR TO ORDERING ANY FRAMES, GASKETS, ETC. SCHEDULED DOOR INTERIOR BUTT -JOINTED CR LAURENCE "EZCC" CLEAR EXTRUDED ALUMINUM - DOORFRAME TEMPERED GLAZING COPOLYMER STRIP REQUIRED AT ALL BUTT -JOINTED GLASS - SIZE SCHEDULED DEPENDANT ON GLASS THICKNESS PARTITION G13 Interior Butt -Jointed 5/8"GWB ON 3-5/8" SCALE Glazing Detail METAL STUDS Y=1'0" iv "iy FULLY FINISHED GWB SCHEDULED GLAZING INSIDE CORNER EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WINDOW FRAME EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WINDOWFRAME FINISHED FLOOR SCHEDULED GLAZING E13 Interior Glazing E16 Interior Partition Detail SCALE: Frame at Floor SCALE: Door and Glazing Jambs 3" =1' 0" 3" = 1' 0" 5/8" GWB ON 3-5/8" SCHEDULED METAL STUDS -'' PARTITION , fP. SCHEDULED DOOR Y METAL STUD BOX -BEAM AS REQUIRED AT HEADER; ' REFER TO A13/A1.4 STUD AT GLAZED OPENING EXTRUDED ALUMINUM :. TO BE INVERTED AS SHOWN MULLION EXTRUDED ALUMINUM SCHEDULED GLAZING WINDOW FRAME SCHEDULED GLAZING C13 Interior Door and C16 Interior Glazing Frame SCALE GlazingMullion SCALE Head and Jamb 3" =1 0" 3" = 1' 0" SCHEDULED SCHEDULED PARTITION PARTITION M 5/8" GWB ON 3-5/8" 'M 5/8" GWB ON 3-5/8" METAL STUDS "" I. METAL STUDS METAL STUD BOX -BEAM "•?: AS REQUIRED AT HEADER aY ADD SOLID FRT WOOD STUD AT OPENING TO BE i BLOCKING ON HINGE SIDE INVERTED AS SHOWN w a EXTRUDED ALUMINUM EXTRUDED ALUMINUM " DOORFRAME "" DOORFRAME SCHEDULED DOOR SCHEDULED DOOR A13 Interior Frame A16 Interior Frame SCALE: SCALE: 3"-1'-0" at Door Head113"-T-0• at Door Jamb 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com c r es ha l C d L a 8 z O 0 N E a L 0 s 3 0 `o d 2 E 3 D a u a` 8 Z n a m n 8 t 0 0 n s N NELSON SCHWAB t16 12 IL t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 H14 i NELSON E10 p ' A2.0 ' � 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 t t 1 ' www.nelsonworldwide.com ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these p1 plans and supporting documents under direct D B L§ Illlls �� Illl llul�l supervision. It is my professional judgment that A2.0 (a) the plans were designed and presented as �2A outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia i C Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are IN I - - - deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building - IL- r Department Staff that they be Approved for Code r Compliance. r PT 1 PT 1 PT 1 I ZThis certification does not relieve the registered n design professional(s) of record and other r parties of their responsibilities for the design or BI CEILING i 0 i construction of the project. -11" ' IIJIV �ISSS� -- �� M ` EXI STING STOREf RONT EXISTTING ENTIR NCE IIIIII William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO ❑ // // // III I H1 xSK r Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 GL 1 r A2.0 r PT 1 TYP. Ll 11 \11V PIT, III 1 r IV I 0 T/ FIN D D r B 1 B B r II II L lUJ O00 00, L5 Interior Elevation L11 Key Plan SCALE: SCALE: 1l4" =1'-0" nts GENERAL NOTES: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1. ALL EQUIPMENT AND FURNITURE SHOWN IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY, AND WILL BE PROVIDED BY CS. K NOTE: NO VISIBLE NOTE: GC IS TO REQUEST 2. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL //� WALL MOUNTED TV; DEVICES ARE ALLOWED SIGN PACKAGE FROM CSCM ELECTRICAL CONNECTION INFORMATION. ■ -ha rles REFER TO M13IA4.0 ON GREETER WALL IN -WALL BACKING BY GC; LOCATION OF SIGNAGE 3. ELEVATION DRAWINGS ARE PRIMARILY FOR FINISH V 3" LARGER THAN LOGO IS TO BE FIELD VERIFIED PT 4 REFERENCE. PLAN DRAWINGS WILL PRECEDE FOR PT 4 PT 1 IN ALL DIRECTIONS BY CS SIGNAGE VENDOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES. SCHWABSIDES B/ CEILING PT 1 B/ CEILING B/CEILING 4. SEE MATERIALS SCHEDULE FOR "GL-1"WINDOW FILM i . ♦ ,L ai/ 8'-11" 8'-11" SPECIFICATION. J■V_ EQ. EQ. \ � \ �- ---� 5. GC IS TO FURNISH IN -WALL BACKING BEHIND WALL MOUNTED LOGOS AND GRAPHICS AS COORDINATED WITH CSPM. /'My advice hes 6. REFER TO SHEET A1.3 FOR INFORMATION ON INTERIOR always been to get QPEN TO PHICS ND SIGNAGE. CORRIDOR CO RI OR EQ J L TwoNed, ask Q \ ❑ 7. ALLSECURITYSECURITY EQUIPMENT IS TO BE PLACED BASED ON Nor. X THE LOCATIONS AND DIRECTIONS SHOWN ON THE o SECURITY PLAN. NO DEVICES ARE TO BE PLACED ON 4--`�--= 1 THE"GREETER LOGO"WALL. / o I 11 GL 11FURNITURE BY OTHERS TYP � o // \\ // \\ ii /� TY �� GENERAL NOTES: ADAAG L _J I I T/ FINISH FLOOR TI FINISH FLOOR TI FINISH FLOOR 0-0" 1. THE TOILET ROOMS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED TO COMPLY B 1 B 1 B 1 B 1 g 1 GREETER DESK PROVIDED AND B 1 g 1 WITH ANSI MINIMUM CLEARANCES AND ALL FEDERAL LINSTALLED BY CS VENDOR WI FINAL AMERICAN WITH DISABILITIES ACT ACCESSIBILITY ELEC I DATA CONNECTIONS BY GC GUIDELINES. GRAPHIC PANEL PROVIDED BY CS AND INSTALLED BY 2. LAVATORIES AND WATER CLOSETS TO BE LEVER TYPE H GC; IN -WALL BLOCKING AND ELECTRICAL ALSO BY GC SIDE OF CONTROLS. FLU ER CLOSET. SH HANDLE HALL BE ON THE OPEN 3. GRAB BAR AND SEAT SHALL WITHSTAND A LOAD OF NOT LESS THAN 250 POUNDS APPLIED AT ANY POINT. GC TO PROVIDE BLOCKING IN WALLAS NECESSARY. H1 Interior Elevation Hs Interior Elevation H14 Interior Elevation 4. PROVIDE II/2"CLEARANCE BETWEEN GRAB BAR AND SCALE: SCALE: SCALE: WALL. 5. PROVIDE A CLEARANCE OF 1 1/2" MINIMUM BELOW AND 12" MINIMUM ABOVE GRAB BARS. LINE OF OPEN DOOR 2" 2" 6. EXPOSED WATER AND DRAIN PIPES UNDER SINKS ISSUE INFORMATION CABINET IS TO BE 3/4" PLA CABINET DOOR, SHALL BE INSULATED OR OTHERWISE CONFIGURED TO CENTERED ON THE WITH PULL ON CONCEALED PROTECT AGAINST CONTACT. ISSUED FOR PT 1 PT 1 B/ CEILING WALL ABOVE THE OVERLAY HINGES 7. REFER TO SHEET A1.4 FOR DOOR CLEARANCES I 1" TOILET AS SHOWN IN CLIENT REVIEW 08/26/22 ACCESSIBILITY NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS. G �,'; ELEVATIONS, AND IS PERMIT A4'1 I PT 1 ALWAYS WIDE OPEN HOLES @ 2ELF ON CLIPS VERTICALLYN5mm 8. REFER TO SHEET A1.4 FOR RESTROOM DOOR SIGNAGE NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS. BID 09/14/22 TO THE9. IN CALIFORNIA OR WHERE OTHERWISE REQUIRED, so ai WC 2 / PT 1 OF THE ROOM. ° ° PROVIDE INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS OF ACCESSIBILITY LANDLORD REVIEW 09/14/22 AT 60" ABOVE THE FLOOR ON EXTERIOR AT MAIN ENTRY, 3 ' FBI CEILING AS WELL AS EXIT AND EXIT ROUTE SIGNAGE. E VIP. 4' 0 I .INSIDE FACE, BACK, AND BNET \ / 11" GC TOINSTALL A SHELF TO BE WHITE MELAMINE SMALL CLEAR \ / ACCESSORY SCHEDULE: RESTROOMS RUB\ / SIDEER STOP ON E ,�8 SEWALL WHERE CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED Ir -safe III sNREooER � � 11 I` I ` \ 0 EN T 1'-0° DOOR PULL HITS. O u cu © ITEM MODEL coRI OR - "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN F T/ FINISH FLOOR HORIZONTAL GRAB BAR ASI 3700 SERIES 1 TYPE 57 B 1 B B 1 i 3l4" PL-1 CABINET DOOR, SNAP FLANGE, 1-1/4" DIA., o' REVISIONS / \ STAINLESS STEEL Q - \ I WITH PULL ON CONCEALED o OVERLAY HINGES 18" VERTICAL GRAB BAR ASI 3700 SERIES I TYPE 01 / \ h SNAP FLANGE, 1-1/4" DIA., - / \ > N STAINLESS STEEL PT 1 g1 O FINISH FLOOR BRUSHED HORME FB/C1G 6WIRE PULL RECESSED///PAPER TOILET ASI #7402.5 _T_,NFEC DSP DISPENSER _ SEMI -RECESSED TOWEL ASI #64676.2 - 3/4" PL-1 CABINET i DISPENSER/ WASTE i - - RECEPTACLE E �Y 2-0" FEMININE NAPKIN ASI#20852 DISPOSAL - o Ir PL t Ir PANES E10 Interior Elevation E14 Restroom Storage COAT HOOKS HAGER#901P(Usz6D) - 5 TYP. r--- SINK MOUNTED SOAP ASI #0332-C SCALE: SCALE: 1/4"=T-0" 11/2"=1_0. Cabinet Detail DISPENSER o 30"X36"FRAMED ASI#0620-3036 NELCOARCHTECTURE, INC. MIRROR cp G4BINEi li © 40"MIN. O TI FIN SURFACE MOUNTED ASI #0477-SM I'-3" 1'-0" T-0" ±2 q^ 0'-0" TOILET SEAT COVER f a UI TRASH" MASINK BASE REERIG. `r\�IGALT� of B B 1 �- DISPENSER. �C N 11 D BASE g 1 SPACE V Y INSTALL PER ADAAG REQUIREMENT. COORDINATE O� N n n WITH CSPM AS REQUIRED. E i ALL GENDER VINCENT P. DUET a RESTROOM Lic. No. 0401016975 D1 Interior BOH TOILET SEAT RECESSED TOILET SANITARY NAPKIN / 105 GENERAL NOTES: RESTROOMS / o SCALE: COVER DISPENSER TISSUE DISPENSER DISPOSAL s 1/4"=V-0" Elevations ..._.. ..._... ... 1. ALL RESTROOM ACCESSORIES SHALL BE FURNISHED BY a m THE GC BASED ON THE ACCESSORY SCHEDULE,UON. 'RCHITVq 8 g 18" 3O"X4H" 2. ANY RESTROOM ACCESSORIES DENOTED AS EXISTING r /Q a MIN. n ■ ARE TO BE FIELD VERIFIED BY THE GC TO BE ■ UNDAMAGED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL 2 STATE AND LOCAL CODES. _ _ ■ _ L C I 15 o-� 3. REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE ONSHEET A1.2AND PROJECT INFORMATION MIN. A16 B DETAILS A13 AND A16 ON SHEET A4.1 FOR TILE SPECS. CT 2 PT 1 LINE OF OPEN DOOR PT 1 PT 4 BI CEILING CLR. A4.1 ■ _ _ _ _ _ _ REFER TO n ■ -- _ 4 SPECIFICATIONS. INGDRAWINGSFORPLUMBING CHARLES SCHWAB - - 8 < a o ■ X60L C 5. GC TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL BLOCKING FOR m X X� I, A2. Charlottesville IBS z ¢ y I_J q RESTROOM ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED. 14 2-0" / LL " / \ 220 Twentyninth Place EQ' �Q' r a ■ D \ KEY NOTES: RESTROOMS SuiteS20 3 O ■ \ O Charlottesville, VA 22901 (53 LAVATORY AND PAPER TOWEL DRINKING FOUNTAIN, WO ■ „ „ g 6 3 / MIRROR DISPENSERHT. TO SPOUT) I L54 XQ-I- - - - 1. L"SHAPED HORIZONTAL GRAB BAR (54" X 42"). PROJECT #: IS 1 ij/ I N 1 (MAX.( 2. WATERPROOFING BEHIND ALL TILE. REFER TO DETAIL 22.0000289.00 t 0 3 4 \ y ■ THIS SHEET, AND SHEET AS1.0. a g \ o FLUSH CONTROL MUST q ■ 3. LAVATORY SINK AND ACCESSORIES, REFER TO IS O x o BE LOCATEDON'OPEN' M - - \ I / PLUMBING DRAWINGS. z o Z Q 3 \ SIDE OF EACH T01LET \16 g 2 c 5 4,_6• I \Q,./ 4. WATER CLOSET, REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS. SHEET INFORMATION, E - -- -- - - - - \ rO / 5. RECESSED TOILET PAPER DISPENSER. o q T/FINISH FLOOR 3$" ® n \ coo / 6. SEMI -RECESSED WASTE RECEPTACLE. Restroom Plan Elevations 2 4 0Y -0" 18" 3''t" i 7. SURFACE MOUNTED TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSER. Details, andlnterlOrEl@vatIOI1S 18" 18" 12 CT 1C MIN. CT 1B CT 1B CT 1B ® Y 8. FRAMED MIRROR. a CUT BASE TRIM BULLNOSE TRIM BULLNOSE TRIM BILL NOSE TRIM m OO - 9. SINK MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSER. 8 = fl 10. SURFACE MOUNTED FEMININE NAPKIN DISPOSAL. L 11. 18" VERTICAL GRAB BAR. SPEC TO MATCH #1. "- N N ;0 12. STAINLESS STEEL KICK PLATE (BOTH SIDES OF DOOR). DRAWN BY: 9 a ELEVATION A ELEVATION B ELEVATION C ELEVATION D 13. (2) COAT HOOKS. H.Koutsis t 14. WALL MOUNTED STORAGE CABINET BY GC'S REVIEWED BY: A TOILET AND GRAB BAR TOILET AND GRAB BAR COAT HOOKS 4 6 MILLWORKER, REFER TO DETAIL THIS SHEET. R. Rink SCALE: As noted m 55 HA1Gender Neutral Restroom Elevations A10 Typical Restroom Fixture and A13 Restroom Plan $$QALE: Accessor Installation Requirements $QALE:q�.O1/41/4" = T-0" y Q 1/2" = T-0" /'1 w 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PI MI LI KI HI GI FI EI 5 5 D CI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 STUD DESIGNATION STUD DEPTH FLANGE WIDTH STUD SPACING MAXIMUM WALL HEIGHT MAXIMUM HEIGHT ORDIAGONAL BRACE STUD GAUGE 362S162-33 3-5/8" 1-5/8" 16" 17'-6" 20 362S162-43 3-5/8" 1-5/8' 16" 19'-0" 18 362S162-54 3-5/8" 1-5/8" 16" 20'-6" 16 60OS162-33 6" 1-5/8" 16" 26-6" 20 60OS162-43 6" 1-5/8' 16" 28'-6" 18 60OS162-54 6" 1-5/8" 16" 30'-0" 16 800S162-33 8' 1-5/8' 16' 32'-2" 20 800S162-43 8" 1-5/8' 16' 35-4" 18 80OS162-54 8" 1-5/8' 16" 38'-l" 16 LIGHT GUAGE FRAMING - CROSS REFERENCE GUIDE MIL. THICKNESS - GAUGE NUMBER CROSS REFERENCE 25 GA.----------18 MIL 16 GA. ---------- 54 MIL 22 GA. ------------ 27 MIL 14 GA. --------------- 68 MIL 20 GA. ------------ 33 MIL 12 GA. --------------- 97 MIL 18 GA.------------43 MIL EXAMPLE CROSS REFERENCE: 3 5/8",18 GA. STRUCTURAL METAL STUD - 362 S 162 - 43 METAL STUD STUD (S=STUD) FLANGE STUD DEPTH (T=TRACK) WIDTH THICKNESS =3.625"=1.625" -43 MIL (18 GA.) =3 5/8" =1 5/8" 10 11 12 GC TO PROVIDE DANBACK #D16F FLEXIBLE WOOD BACKING STRIPS (OR EQ.) BEFORE FINISHING WALL WITH 5/8"GWB NOTE: GC MUST COORDINATE DIRECTLY WITH FIXTURE OR FURNITURE SUPPLIERS TO ASCERTAIN CORRECT MOUNTING HEIGHTS FOR BACKING STRIPS AT EACH REQUIRED LOCATION WALL HUNG CABINET, FURNITURE OR OTHER ITEMS AS SHOWN IN PLAN DRAWINGS AND NOTES LIGHT GUAGE FRAMING SCREW CONNECTIONS M10 Detail of SCALE: UNLESS NOTED, LIGHT GUAGE FRAMING CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE 11/2"=V-0" In -Wall Blocking USING #8 SCREWS. SEE DETAIL F10/A-4.0 FOR DIAGONAL CONNECTIONS. CONNECTION SITUATION FASTENER TYPE AT LOCATIONS WHERE SHEATHING MATERIAL IS PLACED AGAINST THE SCREW HEADS OF LIGHT GAUGE METAL FRAMING CONNECTIONS, PANCAKE HEAD SCREWS SHALL BE DIAGONAL METAL STUD BRACE - TO METAL (2) - #8 SCREWS INTO EACH LEG OF FRAMING USED SO THAT THE SHEATHING MATERIAL REMAINS STRAIGHT AND SMOOTH. STUD TOP PLATE CLIP METAL STUDS: ICC # ESR-1166P DIAGONAL METAL STUD BRACE - TO (2) -1/4" DIA. CONCRETE ANCHORS W/ 1 3/4" PRECAST CONCRETE DECK ABOVE MIN. EMBEDMENT INTO CONCRETE. L7 (3) - #12 SCREWS INTO FRAMING CLIP SCALE: NONE Metal Stud Schedule DIAGONAL METAL STUD BRACE - TO STEEL (3) - #12 SCREWS INTO EACH LEG OF EXTRUDED M.REVEAL SEE SP IFICATIONS r = w a Q J ``�0 REVEAL TO BE FINISHED LL .0 v AND PAINTED TO MATCH 1 0 j ADJACENT FINISH II SCHEDULED PARTITION J4 etail at Cut -In SC Paint Reveal =1'0° U_ F_ __1 = I I Q I I- I 0 I I m L----J 0 N EQ. EQ. 2 I----- — < (D w � w z = z EQ. EQ. u, F4 Elevation at Wall Mounted SCALE Internally Lit Tenant Graphics GLASS WHITE BOARD PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY CS VENDOR EQ, EQ. I 01 oI w OI I 4 I I STRUCTURAL MEMBER ABOVE FRAMING CLIP 2" x 2" 16 GA. CLIP ANGLE DIAGONAL METAL STUD BRACE - TO WOOD (3) - #8 SCREWS INTO WOOD MEMBER 1/4" LESS THAN STUD WIDTH STRUCTURAL MEMBER ABOVE (3) - #12 SCREWS INTO FRAMING CLIP (4) FRAMING SCREWS DIAGONAL METAL STUD BRACE - TO STEEL (3) - #12 SCREWS INTO EACH LEG OF ROOF DECK ABOVE FRAMING CLIP 4• NOTES: • DIAGONAL BRACES ARE TO BE 45" AND LOCATED OVER A VERTICAL WALL STUD. \x • DIAGONAL BRACES UP TO 1 V IN LENGTH ARE TO BE A SINGLE 3 5/8", 20 GA. STUD. GALV'D METAL STUD 9 DIAGONAL BRACES 10' TO 1 FIN LENGTH ARE TO BE A DOUBLE 3 5/8", 20 GA. STUD. • DOUBLE STUD BRACES ARE TO BE SECURED TOGETHER WITH #8 SCREWS @ 12" OC. • TYPICAL FRAMING CLIPS ARE TO BE: 2"x2"x6" LONG, 14 GA. • AT EACH DIAGONAL BRACE LOCATION, ATTACH TOP TRACK TO WALL STUDS W/ (2) - #8 LATERAL BRACING CR SCREWS EACH SIDE. • CONCRETE ANCHORS ARE TO BE HILTI KWIK HUS-EZ OR EQUAL }� FIRST LEVEL START 1 1/2" x 16 GA. GALVANIZED . IN SEISMIC AREAS REFER TO FURTHER DETAILING ON THE SEISMIC DETAIL SHEET. 4'-0" ABOVE FLOOR J7 J10 Metal Stud Brace SCALE Lateral Bracing Support NONE NONE Fastening Schedule ELECTRICAL OUTLETS V / BY GC; REFER TO \ 2"x2" 14 GA FRAMING / ELECTRICAL DWGS. \ \ CLIP W((2) #12 / \ \ \ SCREWS EA. LEG NOTE: THIS DETAIL DOES NOT APPLY TO ANY OPENING BRACE WITH METAL STUDS \ / THAT IS TO SUPPORT A HEAD -HUNG DOOR ASSEMBLY, ETC. AT 4'-0" O.C. MAXIMUM. / (ALTERNATE DIRECTION OF \ + +\ / BRACES ALONG LENGTH OF / ALL WALL TRACK AND SCHEDULED WALL WALL WHERE POSSIBLE) BRACING IS TO CONNECT TO STRUCTURE AND NOT TO ROOF DECK. OPENING WIDTH MINIMUM FRAMING REQUIREMENTS V TO 6' (2) 3 5/8" 20 GA. MTL. STUDS 6' TO 12' (2) 6" 20 GA. MTL. STUDS 17 TO 16' (2) 8" 18 GA. MTL. STUDS 16' TO 20' (2)10" 16 GA. MTL. STUDS OPENING WIDTHS OVER 20'- CONSULT WITH ARCHITECT DBL. 3 5/8" MTL. STUD W/ DBL. TRACK BUILT-UP COLUMN @ EA. END OF BOX -BEAM, TYP. #12 FRAMING SCREWS @ 8" OC, TYP. SCHEDULED WALL FOR FURTHER DETAILS NOTE: REFER TO J10/A4.0 ELECTRICAL OUTLET CONSTRUCTION BY GC; REFER TO REGARDING BRACING DOUBLE MTL. STUDS AS REQUIRED ELECTRICAL DWGS. AND FASTENERS. FOR OPENING WIDTH; SEE ABOVE loe c4 I Elevation at Wall Mounted II SCALE: Glass White Board 1/4" -1'-0" ORIGINAL ARTWORK PROVIDED BY CS AND HUNG BY GC ARTIST NAME PLAQUE PROVIDED BY CS AND HUNG BY GC OTE: PLAQUE CAN BE -ACED ON RIGHT OR :FT SIDE DEPENDING ON JRNITURE PLACEMENT. A4 Artist Plaque Installation gCAPO" Detail at Original Artwork SCHEDULED CEILING F7 Diagonal Stud SCALE NONE Bracing Detail IN SEISMIC AREAS REFER TO SEISMIC DETAIL SHEET FOR PERTINENT DETAILS AND REQUIREMENTS. a 00 @J O U ti m z 0 U W Wall Type "Drr Full Height Partition --NT. 3-5/8' MTL. TOP NNER DP OF WALL IS TO BE CON COUSTICALLY SEALED AT ;HT TO ROOF DECK RIFY HEIGHT IN FIELD LAYERS 5/8" TYPE' GYP. 4RD 18" MXL. STUDS AT 16" O.C. MAX. V8" GWB (SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR APPLIED FINISH) (2) LAYERS 5/8" TYPE'X GYP. BOARD 3-5/8" MTL. STUDS AT 16" O.C. FULL THICKNESS SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKET, TYP (2) LAYERS 5/8" TYPE'X GYP. BOARD CONT. 3-5/8" MTL. BOTTOM RUNNER ATTACH TO CONC. FLOOR SLAB AS REQUIRED (FASTENERS AT 4'-0" O.C. MAX.) BASE OF WALL IS TO BE CONTINUALLY ACOUSTICALLY SEALED AT BOTH SIDES SEE M7/A4.0 AND SEISMIC DETIALS IN SEISMIM AREAS FOR REQUIRED METAL STUD GAUGEIM 14 GA. MTL. TRACK TOP AND BOTTOM TO MATCH SCHEDULED WALL THICKNESS INVERTED MTL. STUD @ TOP OF ROUGH OPENING, WO; REFER TO A13 & C16 / A1.4 F10 Non -Load Bearing Interior Partition IN SEISMIC AREAS REFER TO SEISMIC DETAIL SHEET A5.0 FOR PERTINENT DETAILS AND REQUIREMENTS. EXISTING STOREFRONT - (NO CHANGE IN EXTERIOR OR R-VALUE) WALL IS TO BE CONTINUALLY ACOUSTICALLY SEALED TOPTOP OFNG OREFRONT MULLION V.I.F. WALL FINISH TO CONTINUE TO TOP OF EXISTING STOREFRONT MULLION. 4114' (V.I.F.) EXISTING BLACKOUT PANEIJCHANNEL o GLASS TO REMAIN. LATERAL BRACING; REFER 2 TO DETAIL J7/A4.0 1- 0 rr w 0 3-5/8" MTL. STUDS AT 16" O.C. 0 a. O (1) LAYER 5/8" TYPE W GWB; SEE Z FINISH SCHEDULE FOR APPLIED FINISHES 3-5/8" MTL. BOTTOM TRACK; ATTACH TO FLOOR SLAB AS REQUIRED (FASTENERS AT 4'-0" O.C. MAX.) PER ICC-ES EVALUATION REPORT HILTI ESR-3027 NOTE: REFER TO L7/A4.0 FOR REQUIRED METAL STUD GAUGES. A10 Wall Type "C° - Existing Storefront W/ 1S?ALE:n Interior Standard GWB Furring Below 13 14 15 CREDENZA AND OUTLETS ARE SHOWN HERE FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND MAY NOT ALWAYS BE PRESENT. GC IS TO VERIFY AGAINST FURNITURE PLAN AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. TV SCREEN AND MOUNT BY SCHWAB; SEE J16/A4.0 B.O. SCHEDULED CLG. REFER TO RCP EQ. ti EQ. ti O CD W o LL CJ w I o0 I I OUTLETS TO BE CENTERED UNDER THE TV AND GANGED TOGETHER - REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS M13 Elevation at Wall 14"-V-0" Mounted Lobby TV REFER TO A1.0 E 6 17 18 TV SCREEN AND MOUNT BY SCHWAB; SEE J16/A4.0 B.O. SCHEDULED CLG. REFER TO RCP EQ. 4 I EQ. NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 W W W. nelsonworldwide.com CREDENZA UNDER Fj CONFERENCE TABLE TV BY CS FURNITURE BY CS FURNITURE VENDOR O cli VENDOR 3 _ II 00 II w I T.O. FINISH FLOOR Ah T.O. FINISH FLOOR 0'-0" ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these OUTLETS TO BE CENTERED UNDER plans and supporting documents under my direct THE TV AND GANGED TOGETHER - supervision. It is my professional judgment that REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are M16 Elevation at Wall Mounted deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and ECSreybeApdvedfos to lding Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Department SCALE Conference Room TV Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or GC IS TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL construction of the project. IN -WALL BACK BOX CENTERED LED SCREEN BY TV SCREEN AND MOUNT BEHIND TV AS SHOWN; REFER TO CHARLES SCHWAB BY SCHWAB; SEE J16/A4.0 SHEETA1.3 AND ELECTRICAL AN VENDOR J1 Elevation at Wall Mounte LE: Large Private Office TV CLEAR INSIDE CLOSET DIMENSION VARIES (V.I.F.) V-4" F16 A4.0 VARIES DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION Ah B.0 CHEDULED CLG. FER TO RCP William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 I T.O. FINISH FLOOR 0'-0" TV MOUNTING GC IS TO ADD IN WALL SOLID BRACKET BY CHARLES Charles SCHWAB BLOCKING AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT SCHWAB AN VENDOR WALL HUNG TV, MOUNT, ETC. d J16 Typical Elevation at Wall SCALE Mounted Schwab TV GC IS TO CONTACT THE MAGNUSON GROUPA www.magnusongrou . m 1'-6" TO FIND A LOC EALER WHITE MELAMINE SHELF I Y" AND DISCUS XPEDITED SOLID STOCK SUPPO S - DELIVERY TIONS _ AND CROSS -BRAG WHI MELAMINE SHELF W/ rL A.F.F. 6' 0" S ID STOCK SUPPORTS MAGN ON #USR-1000 12" 1" P ISHED CHROME F13 AT ROD ISSUE INFORMATION A4.0 ISSUED FOR MAGNUSON #USR-1000 1" �jO WHITE MELAMINE STORAGE CLIENT REVIEW 08/26/22 POLISHED CHROME COAT ROD J� BOX W/ SOLID STOCK PERMIT 9I20/22 — WHITE MELAMINE ADA SHELF SUPPORTS AND CROSS -BRACES BID 09/14/22 W/ SOLID STOCK SUPPORTS \O A.F.F. LANDLORD REVIEW 09/14/22 E — FACE OF SCHEDULED 4.0 MAGNUSON #USR-1000 V POLISHED PARTITION, PAINTED P-51 CHROME COAT ROD MOUNTED TO BOTTOM OF STORAGE BOX TO MAGNUSON #USR-1000 1" COMPLY WITH ADA STANDARDS POLISHED CHROME COAT ROD CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD FACE OF SCHEDULED ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED — FACE OF CASED CLOSET DOOR OPENING PARTITION, PAINTED P-51 "CONSTRUCTION SET' HEREIN F1 Elevation at 11 F1 Section at �NAE'* N E + + IN SEISMIC AREAS REFER TO SEISMIC EXISTING DECK / IN SEISMIC AREAS REFER TO SEISMIC L EXISTING DECK I DETAIL SHEET A5.0 FOR PERTINENT STRUCTURE DETAIL SHEET A5.0 FOR PERTINENT STRUCTURE DETAILS AND REQUIREMENTS. DETAILS AND REQUIREMENTS. BRACES APPROPRIATELY BRACES APPROPRIATELY ATTACHED TO STRUCTURE ATTACHED TO STRUCTURE AND TOP PLATE; SEE J10/A4.0 \ AND TOP PLATE; SEE J10/A4.0 PROVIDE DIAGONAL STUD \ \ PROVIDE DIAGONAL STUD BRACING TO STRUCTURE \ BRACING TO STRUCTURE ABOVE; SEE M1/A4.0 \ ABOVE; SEE M1/A4.0 + + + + CONT. 3 5I8" MTL. TOP TRACK T. 3 5l8" MTL. TOP TRACK - z z SCHEDULED CEILING SCHEDULED CEILING O REFER TO RCP REFER TO RCP FULL COVERAGE 6" SOUND FULL COVERAGE 6" SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKET PER ATTENUATION BLANKET PER DIRECTION ON RCP DIRECTION ON RCP WALL FINISH TO CONTINUE 6" ABOVE WALL FINISH TO CONTINUE 6" ABOVE HIGHEST ADJACENT FINISHED CEILING; HIGHEST ADJACENT FINISHED CEILING; AT OPEN CEILINGS CONTINUE TO DECK AT OPEN CEILINGS CONTINUE TO DECK '� LATERAL BRACING; REFER w LATERAL BRACING; REFER w TO DETAIL J7/A4.0 TO DETAIL J7/A4.0 CD FULL THICKNESS SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKET, TYP. 35/8' MTL. STUDS AT 16' O.C. 35/8' MTL. STUDS AT 16' O.C. w w a o (1) LAYER 5/8" TYPE W GWB; SEE o (1) LAYER 5/8" TYPE W GWB EACH FINISH SCHEDULE FOR APPLIED ¢ SIDE; SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR FINISHES g APPLIED FINISHES 0 3-5/8" MTL. BOTTOM TRACK; ATTACH TO 3-5/8" MTL. BOTTOM TRACK; ATTACH TO FLOOR SLAB AS REQUIRED (FASTENERS FLOOR SLAB AS REQUIRED (FASTENERS AT 4'-0" O.C. MAX.) PER ICC-ES AT 4'-0" O.C. MAX.) PER ICC-ES EVALUATION REPORT HILTI ESR-3027 EVALUATION REPORT HILTI ESR-3027 BASE OF WALL IS TO BE CONTINUALLY ACOUSTICALLY SEALED AT BOTH SIDES NOTE: REFER TO L7/A4.0 FOR NOTE: REFER TO L7/A4.0 FOR REQUIRED METAL STUD GAUGES. REQUIRED METAL STUD GAUGES. A13 Wall Type "B" A16 Wall Type "A" SCAL 11/21E0" 1 1/2"=T-0" Interior Standard GWB FurrinSCALE: , Interior Standard GWB Partition REVISIONS 0 _ C NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. d 2 tii> ALTy r� 1' F 8 P o� c'ti o Is VINCENT P. DUET a A Lic. No. 0401016975 s / D ° G 3 d �RCHITEG� fin/ 8 d 0 PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB T Charlottesville IBS 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 PROJECT #: 22.0000289.00 t e a SHEET INFORMATION Wall Types and Details I Miscellaneous Details d N DRAWN BY: 9 H. Koutsis REVIEWED BY: R. Rink ° SCALE: o. As noted m N AU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 PI NI MI LI KI JI HI GI FI E Z 0 5 IV CI I" 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 BOTTOM OF EXISTING STRUCTURE 3/4" P.LAM CABINET DOOR wl PULLS FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET - ON CONCEALED OVERLAY HINGES j HILTI KWIK PRO SCREW DRIP PAN AND WATER REFER TO SHEET A1.3 FOR FASTENERS INTO STRUCTURE 1/4' DIA. X 3" EMBED + + SOFFIT FRAMIN 0 TER HE ER HEATER; REFER TO SPECIFICATION BE SECURE 0 MEP DWGS. MELAMINE ADJUSTABLE SHELF HANGER WIRES AT 4'-0" O.C. IN STRUCTU ABOVE 2 2 ON VERTICAL STANDARDS EACH DIRECTION- NO MORE THAT + + UNDERSIDE OF EXISTING 1:6 OUT OF PLUMB, TYP. STRUCTURE ABOVE 4 TIGHT TURNS IN 1 °Q � 1l2" LENGTH 8" MAIN TEE OR CROSS TEE STEEL STRAP 1" W X 2" L X 3/4" FRT PLYWOOD o FIRE 1'-0" SUSPENSION SYSTEM 12 GA. MIN. SPLAYED SEISMIC PLATFORM o EXTINGUISHER PL. LAM. DOOR PL-1 BRACING WIRE EXISTING HEADER + + " MIN. CLR. o NOTE: FRAMING AT TOP _ DO NOT USE "SHOT -IN ANCHORS" FOR BRACING WIRE OF STOREFRONT o Q + + ALL CABINETS TO BE SCRIBED _ TO FACE OF FINISH WALLS, TYP. / Q w SCHEDULED CEILING 5/8" GYP. BD. CEILING HILTI KWIK PRO SCREW w �� 1/4" DIA. X 3" EMBED IN = z SHADOW N1 Semi -Recessed Fire N] DOWN FLUTE y O MOULD W/THGWBCLG. 6' MTL. STUDS @ 16' OC SCALE: Extinguisher Cabinet SCALE: Suspended GWB Ceiling UNDERSIDE OF EXISTING SCHEDULED 3" = 1'-0" g 3" = 1'-0" �7 p g STRUCTURE ABOVE STEEL STRAP 1" W X 2" L X 12 GA. CEILING MIN. MOP CLOSET BACK OFFICE NEW CONCRETE SLAB INFILL #4x18' DOWELS @ 24"oc AS REQUIRED; SEE DEMO VERTICAL HANGER WIRE AND/OR CONSTRUCTION PLANS DRILL DOWELS INTO EXISTING 3 TIGHT TURNS IN 1 1/2" SLAB AND GROUT SOLID LENGTH SCHEDULED WALL NEW 5I8" GWB ON 3-5I8" MTL. REFRIGERATOR NOTE: SEE SHEET A1.1 STUD SOFFIT FRAMING CONSTRUCTION 1>' D ' ^ 2'-0" DO NOT USE "SHOT -IN ANCHORS" FOR HANGER WIRE _�' PL. LAM. PL-1 PL.LAM. PL-1 COUNTER P d a5�0 a BACKSPLASH 3MPo" anding Brac ng Wire er ire M1�o• at ACT CeilinGWB g M1 o Water Heater Platform Detail SCALE @ Top of Mop Closet pn =III —I I=III=III—III=1 1-1 1 —III DRYWALL MOLDING END SCHEDULED WALL FRAMING; CLOSURE; FRY REGLET REFER TO CONSTRUCTION PLAN FU OMPACTED AND PREPARED EXISTING CONCRETE SLAB ?" Q.. LAM. PL-1 "DMEC', OR EQUAL. FINISH OW SLAB MATERIALAS REQUIRED �/ BULKHEAD FRAMING ABLE HINGED DOORS TO MATCH INTERIOR WALLS ' - SECURED AND BRACED •�.. �• ::'.' NEW OR BARRIER o TO STRUCTURE ABOVE i AS REQUIRED g LAZY SUSAN UNIT; o a. L1 oncrete Slab L4 Section at Upper Pantry Cabinet HAFELE #542.11.740 ORVINYL WALL N EXTERIOR GLAZING SC Tie -In Detail SCALE Above Refrigerator EQUAL AS SCHEDULED EDSE one = LE AND MULLION 1/2" x 1" CLOSED CELL FOAM 3/4" P.LAM CABINET DOOR wl PULLS a ALL OUTSIDE (AND STRIP ADHERED TO MULLION ON CONCEALED OVERLAY HINGES INSIDE) CORNERS GC IS TO FURNISH SOLID 3" GWB WALL AS MUST BE MITRED DRYWALL MOLDING END RUBBER BASE TOE -KICK SCHEDULED ¢ CLOSURE; FRY REGLET SCHEDULED WALL FRAMING TIGHT IN -WALL BLOCKING BEHIND THIS ENTIRE w DMEC", OR EQUAL. FINISH TO FACE OF HORIZONTAL MULLIONS AREA (SEE SHEET A2.0) 2"JCLR x TO MATCH INTERIOR WALLS MELAMINE ADJUSTABLE K] Section at Pantry Cabinet K10 Rubber Base Detail w SHELVES rwn SCHEDULED CEILING, TYP. CONTINUOUS 3" DEEP S LE: SCALE: �+ =P_0" w/ Lazy Susan 3" V-0^ at Outside Corner EMSEAL"QUETJOINT" g z SONITROL SECURITY SHG; COLOR TO MATCH o PL. LAM. PL-1 DOOR 4 w CONTROL BOX MOUNTED TO WI PULL, TYP. `" SEE A4 FOR TYPICAL UPPER CABINET SHADOW MOULD, TYP. STOREFRONT; NO y WALL DIRECTLY ABOVE I.T. SUBSTITUTIONS CABINET (SEE SHEET A2.0) 5/8"GWB ON 3-5/8"MTL. STUDS VERIFY ON SITE VERTICAL SHELF SCHEDULED WALL EXTERIOR GLAZING STANDARDS, TYP. T-0" CONSTRUCTION INTERACTING W/ SUSP. CEILING (WIDTH OF EMSEAL CLOSURE MUST BE CUSTOM ORDERED TO PROPERLY FILL GAP) WALL MOUNTED I.T. PL. LAM. PL-1 PL .LAM. PL-1 COUNTERTOP CABINET; REFER TO SHEET BACKSPLASH J13 GWB Header Detail J16 Partition Wall to Storefront A1.3 FOR SPEC AND SHEET ALL CABINETS TO BE SCRIBED a SCALE: SCALE: A2.0 FOR HANDING TO FACE OF FINISH WALLS, TYP. RUBBERBASE- APPLIED 3'=1'-0" at ACT Ceiling 3'=1'-0" Connection Detail PER MANUR INSTRUCTIONS ' PL. LAM. PL-1 DRAWER w/ PULL AND ROLLER REFER TO INTERIOR 4 GLIDE NG TO BE ELEVATIONS FOR 2 0 N INSTALLED BEFORE SCHEDULED IWALL BASE IMPORTANT DETAILS PL. LAM. PL-1 COUNTERTOP 3/4" PULL LAM. ONPL-DOOR a PL. LAM. PL-1 w/PULL ON CONCEALED a BACKSPLASH OVERLAY HINGES, TYP. w PL.LAM.PL-1DRAWERwI GC TO PROVIDE AND HLI A0 r�TlghtlOCkrr Rubber PULL AND ROLLER GLIDE INSTALL(1)SIMPLEHUMAN 3"=1'_0, Wall Base Detail #CW1016 PULL OUT "UPS" PROVIDED AND RECYCLER ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct _ INSTALLED BY CS; 3/4" PL. LAM. PL-1 DOOR supervision. It is my professional judgment that SECURITY o REFER TO SHEET A1.3 w/ PULL ON CONCEALED (a) the plans were designed and presented as ¢ �a outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia w OVERLAY HINGES, TYP. w 3„ Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered RUBBER BASE TOE -KICK systems and/or construction features are cn deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes w MELAMINE SHELF ON M and regulations. ECS recommends to Building r= ADJUSTABLE SUPPORTS, TYP. Department Staff that they be Approved for Code G] Section at Pantry Base Compliance. r� VERTICAL SHELF SCALE: !'� This certification does not relieve the registered "UPS"MOUNTING 1" V-0" Cabinet w/ Trash/Recycling design professional(s) of record and other BRACKET PROVIDED STANDARDS, TYP. parties of their responsibilities for the design or AND INSTALLED BY GC; Z-construction of the project. REFER TO SHEET A1.3 3„ SEE A4 FOR TYPICAL UPPER CABINET RUBBER BASE TOE -KICK i FINISHED FLOOR NOTE: CABINET INTERIOR TO BE 10" WIDE (MIN. CLR.) FOR RECYCLING UNIT TO FIT. l- PL. LAM. PLA PL .LAM. PL-1 COUNTERTOP William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO BACKSPLASH Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge F1 Section at Wall F4 Section at Standard Pantry DPOR License # 0402021900 SCALE: SCALE: S V=1�_o.. Hung I.T. Cabinet =1,_0, Upper and Lower Cabinets 3/4" P.LAM CABINET DOOR wl PULLS PL. LAM. PL-1 JOINT IN SHELF TO T-2" DRAWERS wl PULLS OCCUR AT STANDARD ON CONCEALED OVERLAY HINGES AND ROLLER GLIDES a w 2 2" MELAMINE ADJUSTABLE , 1'-2" PL. LAM. PL-1 SHELF W/ FIR T SHELVES APRON; REFER TO ELEVA DNS FOR SHELF QUANTITIES PL. LAM. DOOR PL-1 4 CV `� 3 RUBBER BASE TOE -KICK ADJUSTABLE M AL SHELF 1'-0" VERTICAL SHELF U BRACKETS ON TANDARDS MIN. CLR. STANDARDS, TYP. 7M D] Section at Pantry Base STANDA S ATTACHED TO 24" WIDE, SCALE: Cabinet w/ Drawers SOUNDBREAK GWB AT 16 GAU METAL STRAPPING ALL CABINETS TO BE SCRIBED - 1'-0" ALL WALLS AND TO FACE OF FINISH WALLS, TYP. CEILINGS; SEE A1.0 SEE A4 FOR TYPICAL UPPER CABINET NOTE: THIS CABINET IS TO EXTEND INTO VOID SPACE IN CORNER, WHICH IS TO B S/ST SINGLE -BOWL SINK Q CAPTURED AS USABLE STORAGE SPACE WITH FIXED SHELF AS SHOWN BELOW FULL HEIGHT TILE TO 2 -0 4 START AT TOP OF WALL J J� PL. LAM. COUNTERTOP PL-1 2-0' 2'-0" 2'-0.. /` PL. LAM. PL-1 PL.LAM. PLA COUNTERTOP PL.LAM. PL-1 COUNTE OP q �C• PL. LAM. COUNTERTOP PL-1 BACKSPLASH PL. LAM. ASH 6'x16" T WA FULL BACKSPLASH HEIGHT WALL TILE SOUNDBREAK GWB AT PL. LAM. FACE PL-1 , ALL WALLS; SEE A1.0 1" � — WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE (12" MIN.) UNDER COUNTER Y ? REFRIGERATOR BY a O4" PL. LAM. PL-1 DOOR 8" MIN. �/ CUT (CT-1B) BULLNOSE TILE a GC; SEE SHEET A1.3 a `GJ w/ PULL ON CONCEALED o 3l4" INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT PANEL w PL. LAM. KNEE PANEL PL-1; rwwi, "' J OVERLAY HINGES, TYP. o = WATERPROOFING CUT CT-1 C BASE STRIPS w WITH PLASTIC LAMINATE FINISH PL-1 v TO BE EASILY REMOVABLE �' '� x \O o MEMBRANE 3" ( ) WITHOUT TOOLS PL .LAM. PL-1 END \ FIXED MELAMINE SHELF v N N PANEL (AS REQ.) EXTENDING INTO SCHLUTER DILEX-EKE SCHLUTERDILEX-EKE CORNER VOID (PG) COVE BASE (PG) COVE BASE 3/4" END PANEL WITH PLASTIC z LAMINATE FINISH PL-1Co w w m 12"x24" CT-1 FLOOR TILE m 12"x24" (CT-1) FLOOR TILE ( ) ih fE7"MIN./19"MAX. N. PL. LAM. TOE SPACE PANEL PL-1 3 RUBBER BASE TOE -KICK 1 Section at Open Work A4 Section at Pantry Cabinet w/ A7 Section at Pantry Counter Al Section at Pantry Cabinet A13 Restroom Tile A16 Restroom Wet -Wall Tile CALE Counter and Shelves SCALE: Sink & Typical Upper Cabinet �;�o, w/ Refrigerator Space 4. 5=;-0" w/ Additional Storage Area SCALE: I` at Non -Wet Walls SCALE:„ and Waterproofing 1" Al 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 NELSOn 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com Charles V a 8 z 6 0 E a s 3 d a d n d a D C d a z d n m t s 0 m 6.15 SCHWAB 0 2 8 SHEET INFORMATION 0 Casework, Ceiling, and e `o a` 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1. General condfions for this project shall be Charles Schwab's proprietary general conditions, which are hereby made part of these contract documents. 2. Communication with the design team (client, architect, engineers): all contractors are to note that the "design team" does not employ the use of P any specific project management tools (such as Procore, etc.) in communicating with the contractor or for the transferal of information at any time. a. All project related communications and/or transfer of information such as submittals, RFI's, weekly project photos, etc. must be done via direct email between the contractor and the intended recipient(s). Under no circumstances is anyone from the design team to be "assigned" to a task from a third party management tool. b. All information related to architecture is to be sent directly to the architect, with a copy to the CSCM and CSDM. c. All information related to engineering scopes of work is to be sent directly to the engineer, with a copy to the architect and CSCM. d. Contractor is to be advised that Chades Schwab cannot receive "zip" files or large files (10MB or over) via email, nor can they use any type of file sharing websites (such as Dropbox, etc.). e. All project related communications must include the name of the project in the subject line of all emails, and on all documents. SECTION 01 00 00 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS N 1. Use of specifications: These specifications are to be used to establish a level of quality for Chades Schwab & company retail branches. in the event of discrepancies between Chades Schwab design standards and the building standards materials, substitutions of equal or greater quality may be permitted with written acceptance in advance by Charles Schwab and architect. All questions, clarifications, and requests for information shall be submitted to the architect. 2. In rase of conflict between or within the various contract documents, the more stringent requirements (as determined by the architect) shall govern, and the greater quantity and the higher quality (as determined by the architect) shall be furnished. 3.Other work not included in this contract will be executed during the contract time, including but not limited to furniture installation and telecommunication cabling. Make all provisions for not in contract (N.I.C.) items, cooperate with personnel and provide access to areas, services, etc. Coordinate construction activities under this contract with N.I.C. activities so as not to impede the N.I.C. work and schedule. M 4. The general contractor is responsible for coordinating his work with that of any owner's own work force, owner's separate contractors and items/work supplied by owner for the contractor to install. Coordination shall include, but not be limited to the following: a. The general contractor shall coordinate the work of all subcontractors. b. Including and maintaining any owner's workfissues into the project schedule. c. Establishing critical dates for delivery, installation, etc. d. Provide/coordinate hoisting, loading dock and temporary services. e. Provide/coordinate all/any blocking, support, bracing, etc. as required for owner's workfissues. 5. Coordinates ace r uirements and installation of electrical telecommunication lumbin mechanical and secud s tem work. Establish P eq , P 9, tY Ys routin for i in wirin ductwork and conduit arallel with the rid lines of the buildin . Utilizes aces efficientl to maximize accessibili for 9 PP 9� 9� � P 9 9 P Y ty other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. In finished areas, conceal piping, ductwork, wiring and conduits. 6. A l work shall be done in conformance with all applicable federal, state, county, and city ordinances and building codes, and requirements L established by state and local fire marshals. In case of conflict, the most stringent requirements shall apply. 7. The general contractor shall apply for and obtain, at his expense, all permits required by regulatory agencies. The general contractor's costs shall include the cost of proper insurance as required by state and local laws, national building regulations or codes to adequately protect persons and property. This shall be not less than types of coverage and limits of liability as directed by Chades Schwab. The architect shall be named as additional insured and coverage shall be primary policy. A copy of such insurance coverage shall be furnished to the owner and landlord prior to commencement of work. 8. The general contractor shall be responsible for design, coordination, and execution of construction means, methods, and procedures and provide protection as required for safety of tenants, pedestrians and job site personnel. 9. Construction operational procedures and methods are the responsibility of the general contractor insofar as they do not present hazards to K personnel or property or infringe upon work schedules for normal site activities, other contractors, vendors and the building's standards for construction activities. 10. The general contractor shall prepare and submit, before starting work, a schedule indicating required construction time for each trade's work. 11. The general contractor shall be responsible for verifying access to job site, freight elevator use, schedule and size, and clearances into and out of the building, etc. 12. Schedule all work for regular business hours unless otherwise noted by city, building owner, or contract document requirements. Timing of all disruptive work shall be scheduled so that other tenants in the building are not disturbed. 13. Submit required samples, shop drawings, and/or product data as noted for each section to architect or engineer for review prior to fabrication. Most submittals can be handled via email to the reviewer with a copy to the CSCM. Allow up to five business days for review and comment. J Submittal review will be for conformance with design concept only. Contractor shall review all submittals for conformance with contract documents prior to submitting them for design team review. Submittals are required as specified in this section and/or as specified with additional notes on drawings. Any physical samples mailed for review will be responded to via email. Samples will not be returned. 14. Contractor's checking of submittals: thoroughly check submittals for completeness and for compliance with the contract documents before submitting them to the architect, and mark them with the contractor's stamp certifying that they have so been reviewed. Any submittal without such stamp shall be returned to the contractor without review. 15. Identification of submittals: mark, tag, or otherwise property label each submittal item with the name of the contractor, name of the Charles Schwab branch project, the date, and a reference to the applicable specification section number for identification of each item. Accompany each submittal with a letter of transmittal containing similar information and add the purpose for which the submittal is being made. Each submittal item, or the label affixed thereon, shall have a clear space suitable to receive the stamps of the contractor and the reviewer. H 16. Stamping of submittals: each individual submittal shall be returned to the contractor stamped or marked by the reviewer as follows: a. "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN": the contractor is advised that the reviewer takes no exceptions to the products as submitted and therefore can proceed, providing the work is in compliance with the contract documents. Further submission per individual project is not required. b. "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED": the contractor is advised that the reviewer has made corrections to the submittal, but that ordering, fabrication, and/or construction may proceed providing the work is in compliance with the reviewer's notations and the contract documents. Further submission per individual project is not required. c. "REVISE & RESUBMIT": the contractor is advised that some portion of the submittal does not comply with the design intent of the contract documents, and therefore must be revised as noted. Contractor shall make revisions and resubmit entire submittal for re -review prior to proceeding with any ordering, fabrication, and/or construction. d. "RETURNED WITHOUT ACTION": the contractor is advised that the submittal does not comply with the design intent of the contract documents. Submittals stamped in this way are REJECTED and are not to be used. Submittal is to be revised as required and resubmitted. G 17. Maintain all building life safety, fire protection, and security systems at all times. Do not block exits. 18. Report any hazardous materials encountered to the owneMandlord. 19. Do not allow adhesive odor and other fumes from construction activities to enter HVAC system. 20. All work shall be plumb, square, level, in proper alignment, and securely fastened. 21. Where products are specified by manufacturer and model, it is to establish a quality standard. No product or material substitution is allowed, LION on drawings. Use material specified or approved substitution. Products shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with manufacturers standard specifications, UON. The general contractor shall coordinate any change or substitution with the architect as required. 22. Transport, deliver, handle and store materials and equipment at the job site in such a manner as to prevent damage, including damage which F might result from intrusions of foreign matter or moisture from any source. Comply with material and equipment manufacturers' instructions regarding temperature limitations and other environmental conditions which are required to maintain the original quality and condition of materials and equipment. 23. Confirm appropriate on -site delivery dates for all construction materials required by the contract documents. Notify architect in writing within 10 calendar days of the contract date of any possible consWction delays affecting occupancy that may arise due to the availability of specified products. Requests for substitutions due to late delivery dates of specified products will not be acceptable after consWction starts. 24. Re move and lawfully dispose off site all rubbish and debris resulting from contractor operations daily. Keep project area broom clean. 25. The general contractor shall employ a qualified full time representative satisfactory to the owner and tenant, to be present at the job site during consWction activity on the project. The representative shall be in full charge of the work and all insWctions given to the representative shall be binding. E a 26. The general contractor shall maintain a complete set of the contract documents for record markup purposes throughout the contract W time. He shall markup these documents during the course of work to show both changes and actual installation in sufficient form to 0 comprise a complete record for the owners purposes. He shall give particular attention to work which will be concealed and to measure g and record at a later date, and to work which may require servicing or replacement during the life of the project. He shall bind copies into manageable sets with durable paper covers labeled "AS -BUILT DOCUMENTS", and transmit them to the owner. 11 r 27. Patch and repair existing fire rated partitions with construction to match existing and meet requirements of fire rating. 0 0 r 28. The following items are required for substantial completion: a. Final cleaning of all surfaces, including existing surfaces (glass, blinds, etc.) by a professional service. y 3 b. Reproducible drawings with as -built conditions noted. 0 c. A flash drive with o eration and maintenance data and warranties. o P D d. Specified quantities of maintenance materials. y e. HVAC balance report. z f. Schedule & perform a sequence of operation review & demonstration of all new general contractor provided equipment with client & � landlord on site. 0 (0 SECTION 0173 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING g 1. Repair existing surfaces and construction as necessary to make work complete, with all components matching and consistent. 2. Provide a smooth, even, and invisible transition to new construction. when finished surfaces are cut so that an invisible transition with new work is 1b not possible, terminate existing surface along the nearest breakline, joint, or comer. 0 C 3. Patching of existing concrete deck: a. See landlord's construction criteria for all deck penetration work. b. Install all deck penetrations per the appropriate ul assemblies - see I.1.'s construction criteria. ac. Use landlords subcontractor for patch & repair of roof penetrations at tenants expense. (uon.) oV 8 m SECTION 02 00 00 - EXISTING CONDITIONS a 9 � 1. GC is to visit the job site to inspect the existing conditions and to verify the amount of work that will be necessary for the project to be completed � as indicated by the contract documents. s 2. GC to verify elevation and condition of existing floor substrate and report to the owner in writing if there are any of the following conditions: B a. Variation of 1/2" or more over entire floor area of project 0 b. Slopes of 118" per 10 feet or greater in any area of the project 0 c. Rough or unstable substrate surfaces requiring extensive remedial work. E 8 c 3. GC to verify condition of existing components when they are to be reused and verify that they will provide a suitable substrate for new materials d and finishes to be installed. a SECTION 02 41 13 - SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION (when applicable) 0 r Selective demolition is not applicable to all jobs being bid. Extent of selective demolition is indicated oo drawings. a 1. Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect owners personnel and general public from injury due to w A selective demolition K 0 � 2. Provide shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities W or work to remain. y 0 3. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain during duration of demolition. N 4. Protect floors with suitable coverings when appropriate. 5. Promptly repair damages cause to adjacent facilities by demolition work at no cost to the owner. 6. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain. Keep in service and protect against damage during duration of demolition. 7. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 8. If the presence of unanticipated hazardous materials is ascertained or suspected during demolition, immediately cease work in the area of the material encountered and contact the project manager. A determination by the owner and his oonsultant(s) will be made as to the preferred method of testing and isolating, removing, and disposing of the hazardous material. 9. Erect and maintain dust proof partitions and closures as required to prevent spread of dust or fumes to adjacent portions of the building. 10. Locate, identify, stub off and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain. 11. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 12. For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. 13. Completely fill below -grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. Provide fill consisting of approved earth, gravel, or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6" diameter, roots, or other organic matter. 14. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural, elements which conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both the nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to project manager in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from project manager, rearrange schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without delay. 15. Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site. 16. Upon completion of the demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from the site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. 17. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition work. 18. See demolition drawin s re ared b MEP en ineers and/or consultants for additional information and r uirements for demolition of electrical 9PP Y 9 O eq , heatin ventilatin air conditionin lumbin voice data etc. items as well as coordination of demolition items. 9� 9� 9� P 9, , SECTION 03 00 00 - CONCRETE 1. Where there is an existing concrete floor slab, prepare the slab to receive finish as indicated on drawing. If no new applied finish is called for over an existing concrete floor, contractor is to ensure that all exposed concrete is free of major damage and is left in a safe, dean, usable, and visually acceptable condition. Contractor is to take required steps to remedy any issues as agreed upon with CSCM. 2. Contractor shall inspect job site conditions and report any variations in the level or surface of the existing slab that would affect the aesthetics or wearability of the floor finish indicated. 3. All concrete slab areas, existing or new, are to have a RH of 75%or less prior to the installation of finish materials. If slab tests higher than 75% GC shall coordinate proper action with the CSCM. GC shall refer to Section 09680 for more information. 4. Where there is an existing floor slab requiring modification GC shall inspect the existing slab conditions to determine the amount of concrete floor slab to be removed and replaced for installation of plumbing, electrical, and mechanical work. All penetrations of the slab shall be coordinated with the building owner / engineer. All floor penetrations must be patched back to match existing construction and include an appropriate vapor barrier. 5. Where there is an existin floor slab re uirin levelin GC shall include the erformance of concrete levelin in accordance with roven materials 9 q 9 9 P 9 P and methods assuring the quality of the finished work. In extreme cases the GC shall coordinate the work with the CSCM. SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 1. Summary: light gage cold formed metal framing indicated on the drawings. 2. Quality assurance: a. The work of this section is subject to testing and inspection as governed by local code. b. For welded connections, use only AWS certified welders. c. Regulatory requirements: framing system shall meet the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities. 3. Components: a. Cold formed light -gage steel framing: as indicated on the structural drawings; G40 zinc coated finish in accordance with ASTM A653 for non -load bearing (nonstructural) walls. b. Screws: ASTM C954; self -drilling, self -tapping; pan head; galvanized or fluoropolymer coated steel. c. Zinc rich touch-up paint: "galy-weld", "galvican", "zrc cold galvanized compound", or approved. 4. Installation: a. Install light gage structural framing in accordance with ASTM C1007, unless indicated or specified otherwise. b. Welds shall be in accordance with AWS D1.3. c. Metal framing members shall be saw or shear cut. no torch cutting is permitted. d. Construct comers with a minimum of 3 studs per comer. e. Frame both sides of expansion and seismic joints. Do not bridge joints with system components or accessories. f. Provide framing as required to form solid backing for all edges of gypsum sheathing, and trim accessories. g. Tolerances: 1) Plumbness: plumb within 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2) Location: located within 1/4 inch of the required location. 3) Alignment: stud and runner faces to receive finish 4) Materials shall not vary greater than 1/8 inch from the required plane, with no abrupt jogs or breaks in plane. 5) Level: level within 1/8 inch in 10 feet. h. Erect members in one-piece full length. Splicing and wire tying of framing components shall not be used. i. Touch-u field welds and scratched or dams eel alvanizin with zinc rich aint. P 9 9 9 P j. Install framing between studs for attachment of electrical boxes and other mechanical and electrical items. 5. Interior Doer / Window Framed Openings: a. At contractor's option the use of the following is acceptable at interior wall openings which are to receive door / window frames. 1) Clark Dietrich "HDS Framing System", or equal. (www.clarkdietrich.00m) 2) Scafoo "Priceless Headers" and "KJS" systems, or equal. (www.scafoo.com) SECTION 06 40 00 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1. Work included: provide mill fabricated architectural woodwork and cabinetwork, including cabinet hardware. 2. Standards: perform work in accordance with standards of architectural woodwork institute (AWI), quality standards, "premium grade" at all front of house millwork, "custom grade" at all back of house millwork. 3. Submittals: submit shop drawings for all millwork items pdor to fabrication. Submit manufacturers cutsheets for all hardware items. Verify all dimensions in field prior to submitting shop drawings. 4. Materials: a. Casework and countertops (refer to Finish Legend and details for finishes): b. Quality: custom grade, flush oveday type. c. Wood: hardwood edged plywood, 3/4" thick up to T-0" between supports, 1" thick if over T-0" between supports. d. Plastic laminate: NEMA LD-3.1, high pressure laminates. e. Concealed wood to be fire retardant treated. f. Casework hardware: 1) Cabinet shelves: flush mounted adjustable shelf standards and supports: KV #255WH standards with KV #256WH bracket clips. 2) Cabinet hinges: concealed type, minimum 170 degree opening, with spring closer. 3) Cabinet pulls: wire type, 3-1/2" center to center, brushed chrome finish, uon. 4) Drawer slides: full extension, heavy duty: KV #6505 or submitted and approved equal. 5) Open shelving: double slot heavy duty standards and brackets: KV #82BPWH standards with KV #182BPWH 12.5" brackets. Secure shelves to brackets per manufacturers instructions. 6) Coat rod: steel rod, end angles, and rod brackets: Magnuson group model #USR-1000 under shelf closet hanger rod and ends. Provide intermediate rod brackets per manufacturer recommendations for spans greater than 4'-0". 7) Cam locks: black finish, small profile, keyed alike: battalion #1xte7 (Grainger #1xte7) or submitted and approved equal. 5. Millwork to be fabricated and installed in accordance with the standards of the architectural woodwork institute (AWI). 6. Materials to be AWI custom rade uon. 9 7. Wood veneers to receive trans arent finish to be lain sliced book and end matched uon. P P 8. Particle board to be high density. 9. Provide backing sheets on laminated plastic items to prevent warping. Melamine shall be used on interior surfaces and shelves in cabinets, and on all open shelving, uon. 10. Construction to be AWI custom rade and flush overly a with Euro ear invisible self-dosin 170 d ree o enin hey -du him es and 9 Y tYP , P ( ) 9, e9 P 9 vY tY 9 100 pound rated, full -extension, side -mounted drawer slides, uon. 11. Laminated plastic countertops and splashes to be square edges, uon. 12. Coordinate locations and provide backing in partitions for all cabinets, countertops, and shelving. Provide 6" wide 18 gauge metal strip, "Danback" #D16F flexible wood backing, or custom cut FRT plywood backing/blocking concealed in walls for wall mounted accessories and items. 13. Scribe countertops and splashes to adjacent surfaces. SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING 1. Contractor shall complete the closure and protection of penetrations in shafts, roofs, walls, ceilings, and floors by sealing all cracks around doors, louvers, conduit pipes, ducts and the like, with fire sealant, fire safing, fire stop foam, or other fire -resistive materials acceptable to the fire marshal, building officials, and the architect to contain room environments complete fire rated assemblies. 2. Provide fire stop sealant, one -part silicone electrometric sealant, and fire stop foam, two-part silicone RTV foam: UL rated for 1, 2, and 3 hour fire resistive ratings per ASTM e-814/UL 1479. Dow coming fire stop sealant or 3m barrier caulk. 3. In open plenum construction, provide fire wrapping materials as acceptable to the fire marshal, building officials, and the architect on any and all existing or new non plenum rated combustible materials located within the plenum space. 3M Fire Barrier Plenum Wrap 5A+, or equal. SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS 1. General interior building sealant shall be single component, gun -grade, paintable, acrylic -latex sealant, tremco acrylic latex or approved equal with color white. 2. Sealant back-up: non -staining, closed -cell foam compatible with sealant to be used. Size and shape to control depth of sealant and to allow 20 to 50 percent compression upon insertion. 3. Provide silicone rubber -based sealant: one -part, nonsag elastometric sealant resistant to mildew. Proglaze by Tremco, 786 mildew resistant silicone sealant by Dow Corning. Use at wall mounted urinals, water closets, lavatories, sinks, drinking fountains, oountertops, and splashes. 4. Provide non -hardening acoustical sealant: Tremco acoustical sealant, USG acoustical sealant. Use at perimeter and penetrations of acoustical -type interior partitions. 5. Provide sheet caulking: electrical box sealer, use at electrical and telecommunication box penetrations of acoustical -type interior partitions. SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 1. Manufacturer: Timely Frames "classic frame" C-Series, Western White #SC107 factory finish. 2. Fabricate welded hollow metal frames from 18 GA steel. Provide throat opening for frame according to scheduled partition thickness. 3. Provide anchor dips to each jamb with anchors per manufacturer's specifications or as follows: a. Hinge side: 2" c; one anchor above & below top hinge; one anchor above each remaining hinge. b. Strike side: match hinge side. c. Clip widthnape: match stud width. 4. Fire rated frames: comply with label requirements of NFPA and UL. Provide labels permanently fastened on each frame. 5. Coordinate placement of hardware & mortised frames to receive hinges, strikes and other hardware. Reinforce & prep frames to receive hardware. SECTION 081216 -ALUMINUM FRAMES 1. Section includes a. Prefinished aluminum door frames for interiors. b. Prefinished aluminum door frames with sidelight frame components for interiors. c. Prefinished medium stile aluminum doors with inset lite for interiors (per project, as specified). 2. Submittals a. Product data: manufacturer's technical product data substantiating that products comply with requirements. b. Shop drawings: GC must supply fully detailed shop drawings from manufacturer to architect for review and approval. Shop drawings must include full dimensions of each door and frame set to be provided, as well as full consWction detailing. 3. Quality assurance a. Single source responsibility: provide aluminum door frames, aluminum glazing systems, andaccessodes by a single manufacturer for each type of aluminum frame. If aluminum doors are specified, provide doors from same manufacturer as frames. b. Fire rated assemblies: 1) In locations where fire rated openings are scheduled or required by regulatory agencies, provide fire rated aluminum frames that have been tested and certified for a specified exposure by an agency acceptable to governing authorities. 2) Provide labels permanently on each frame that are within size limits established by NFPA and the testing authority. 3) Provide labels for openings as scheduled on the drawings. 4. Delive stor a and handlin ry, a9 , 9 a. Deliver door and window frames in cartons to rovide rotection durin transit and stora a at roject site. P P 9 9 P1 b. Ins ect door and window frames u n delive for dams e. Re air minor dams a to ainted finish b usin air d in touch u P Po ry 9 P 9 P Y 9 ry 9 P paint of matching color supplied with each job. Replace door and window frames that can not be satisfactorily repaired. c. Store aluminum frames at project site under cover and near final installation location. Do not use covering that will cause discoloration of aluminum finish. 5. Environmental requirements a. Do not begin installation of frames or doors until area of work has been completely enclosed and protected from the elements. b. Maintain temperature and humidity in areas of installation within reasonable limits, as dose as possible to final occupancy standards. If necessary, provide artificial heating, cooling, and ventilation to maintain required environmental conditions. 6. Manufacturer standards a. To establish standards of manufacturer, appearance, performance, function and design, these specifications are based upon the following product: Frameworks "Type 11" 1-1/2" frame profile w/ 1" snap -on "reveal" style trim. b. If aluminum doors are specified in project, medium stile doors shall be ordered from same manufacturer as frames in same finish as frames to ensure a color match. GC shall be responsible for furnishing doors which match the frames, uon. c. Substitutions: GC is permitted to substitute another manufacturer so long as that manufacturer meets all specifications herein. 7. Materials a. Aluminum: controlled 6063 T5 alloy billet, to assure critical tolerances and color uniformity. 8. ExWded aluminum door and window frames a. Manufacturers 1) Frameworks Manufacturing "Type II" (frames and doors both available from this mfg.) 2) Wilson Partitions "Snap On Trim" Series (frames and doors both available from this mfg.) 3) Westem Integrated "300" Series (frames and doors both available from this mfg.) 4) Omega Interiors Aluminum Frames "Type ll" frame 5) CR Laurence "Clear Anodized Officefront" b. Substitution 1) Only if project calls for painted door frames throughout: Timely Frames "Classic" C-Series steel frames factory finished in Westem White#SC107. c. General Notes 1) Face profile: 1-1/2 inches w/ V snap -on trim. 2) Throat size: as indicated by wall thickness on the drawings. 3) Gaskets/mutes: color of glazing gaskets, caulking and brush type door mutes shall match the color of the frames. 4) Submittals: contractor must submit full manufacturer cut sheets and details for review prior to ordering frames. 9. Fabrication a. Pre -machined doorjambs, prepared for hardware with pre -drilled and tapped factory installed reinforcement plates. b. Provide comer reinforcements and align dips as needed for exact butt connections. c. Factory fabrication of sidelight and borrowed lights: GC is to provide manufacturer with final field verified RO dimension for custom cut frame lengths to fit openings without field cutting. d. Sidelights and borrowed lights: manufacturer to provide frame components in stock lengths for field cutting to fit opening. e. Fabricate all components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. 10. Finishes a. Polyurethane painted finish: comply with AAMA 603 applied on vertical or horizontal line and oven baked to insure hardness (color as indicated in schedules in the drawings). b. Anodized aluminum finish: provide "dear" anodized aluminum finished frames per manufacturer's specifications. 1) If project calls for aluminum doors, they are to be provided by same manufacturer as frames to ensure finish match. 11. Examination a. Examine project conditions and verity that the work of this section may property commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. b. Verify wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by specified throat size. 12. Installation a. Comply with frame manufacturer's printed installation instructions and approved shop drawings. Do not attempt installation in areas where wall thickness exceeds throat size specified. b. Install frame plumb and square, securely anchored to substrate with fasteners recommended by frame manufacturer. c. Set all framing in correct location as shown on the drawings, level, square, plumb and in alignment with other work in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings. d. Set all doors in correct location as shown on the drawings, level, square, plumb and in alignment with other work in accordance with the manufacturers installation instructions and approved shop drawings. 13. Adjusting and cleaning a. Protect exposed portions of aluminum surfaces from damage by grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement, and other contaminates. b. Touch up marred areas so that touch-up is not visible from a distance of 4 feet. Remove and replace frames that cannot be satisfactorily adjusted. 14. Protection a. Provide protection required to assure that frames will be without damage or deterioration upon completion of the project. SECTION 0814 00 - WOOD DOORS 1. Work included: provide standard and fire rated type wood doors, for flush type doors. 2. Standards: American Woodwork Institute (AWI), "quality standards", National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA), Industry Standard (I.S.)1 series. Underwriters Laboratories Inc., "building materials directory." 3. Submittals: manufacturers product literature via email, and (1) fully finished wood sample (for stained wood doors) mailed to architect. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: Oregon Door, Marshfield Doors, Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., Eggers Industries. 5. Substitutions of same function and performance are acceptable upon approval of the architect. 6. Materials: a. Flush doors: comply with AWI/WIC custom grade wood doors, Type A requirements for 1-3/4" thick solid stave lumber core. Five ply construction, Type II bond, interior. b. Rail and stile doors: comply with AWI/WIC premium grade, Type A requirements for 1 3/4" thick solid wood framed interior doors. Low density lumber core to have thick veneer. c. Face veneers: all painted doors to be painted in semi -gloss to match color of adjacent wall finish, uon. Provide edge banding on stained wood doors to match face veneers at both sides. 7. Door undercuts are not required unless specified otherwise in the mechanical drawings. GC shall ensure that gaps at bottom of all doors are kept as tight as possible without impacting finished flooring. 8. Finish vertical edges of doors to match faces, seal top and bottom edges. 9. Paint astragals at fire rated doors to match door color. SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE 1. Work included: provide hardware for all glass & wood doors. 2. Standards: ANSI All 15 and All 15 W Series door and frame preparation standards. ANSI All56.1 through At56.20 hardware standards. 3. Quality assurance: fire rated doors shall comply with requirements of NFPA 80 and applicable codes for fire rated door hardware. Provide hardware bearing Underwriters Laboratory (UL) labels. Door indicated in fire rated partitions and walls shall be positive latching and self closing, with smoke gaskets. Access for persons with disabilities shall comply with all local accessibility guidelines. 4. Supplier. recognized builders hardware supplier with minimum five years successful experience in scheduling and furnishing hardware. 5. Submittals: shop drawings indicating locations and mounting heights of hardware and catalog cuts for each type of hardware. 6. Existing doors: where indicated on door schedule, provide new or additional hardware to existing doors. Contractor is responsible for coordinating requirements of new hardware with existing. Remove as required and salvage base building hardware where applicable. Contractor to notify architect of hardware conflicts. 7. Locksets and latchsets: provide of metal matching specified finish; interior parts steel and zinc -dichromate plating, to resist rusting and corrosion; do not supply plastic, die-cast or aluminum mechanisms. a. Type: extra heavy duty commercial cylindrical locksetllatchset. b. Design: Schlage Neptune lever with integral 21/8" wrought rose. c. Accurate 8525 latch set. Backset: 2". d. Strikes: furnish standard strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt; verity type of cutouts provided in metal frames. 8. Keys and keying: coordinate with base building system. Entrance doors and mechanical spaces to be keyed to the building master. a. Cylinders: Schlage, or match building standard. b. Hardware manufacturers shall provide a quantity of master keying of new space equivalent to the existing grand master, master key alike or different keying as directed. c. Submit all keys to Schwab's representative. d. Hardware manufacturers shall key and register lock cylinders. 1) Master key to branch manager 2) Separate key for entry door. All remaining rooms to be keyed the same. 3) Provide new cylinder and/or lookset to match specified keyways and keying schedule at existing doors. 9. Finishes: a. Provide the following finishes except where otherwise noted. b. Hinges and pivots: bhma 626 (us26d), satin chromium plated. c. Door levers and related trim: bhma 626 (us26d), satin chromium plated. d. Closers: manufacturer's standard cover finish to match bhma 626 (us26d), satin chromium. e. Thresholds: BHMA 628 (US28), satin aluminum, clear anodized. f. Other items: provide manufacturer's standard finishes to match similar hardware types on same door, and maintain acceptable finish considering anticipated use. 10. Mounting positions: heights given are center line heights from finished floor. Comply with recommendations of builders hardware manufacturers association, subject to approval, for heights of items not indicated, height is to center unless otherwise indicated. a. Locks and latches: 38" to center of lever. b. Door pulls: 42" to center of grip. c. Push plate: 42" coordinate with pull location. d. Push-pull bar: 42" to center of bar. e. Top hinge location as per manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 10" from head of frame to center line of hinge. f. Bottom hinge location as per manufacturer's standard, but not greater than 12-1/2" from floor to center line of hinge. g. Intermediate hinges equally spaced between top and bottom hinges and from each other. h. Hinge mortise on door leaf 1/4" to 5/16" from stop side of door. i. Dead bolt not more than 44" from floor to operating lever. 11. Hardware schedule: the hardware schedule establishes a type and standard of quality, see drawings. Examine drawings and specifications and furnish proper hardware for door opening, whether listed or not, bring omissions to attention of architect prior to bid opening for insWctions otherwise, list will be considered complete; no extras will be allowed. 12. Door closers: automatic door closers where specified are to be mounted to the second side of the door, typ. SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING 1. Work Included: Provide glass as shown on the contract documents, including safety glazing where required. 2. Standards: Except as modified by governing codes, glazing contractor shall comply with the applicable regulations within the current GANA Glazing Manual as they apply to the individual installations as shown in the contract documents. 3. Submittals: Submit material data sheets for each type of glass. Submit copy of statement signed by installer and contractor stating that glazing materials comply with these specifications and the requirements of the drawings, and that the installation methods comply with the manufacturers published instructions and recommendations for each condition of use on this project. 4. Materials:1/4 in. thick full framed float lass. 3/8 in. or 1/2 in. thick if an one eel a is ex osed or butt= ointed. See door schedule Y 9 Y 9 P 1 and drawings for type and extent of surface finish. Comply with ASTM C1048, Kind FT and meeting the requirements of ANSI Z97.1. Exposed edges to be square edged polished. 5. Installation: All visible gaps at butt -jointed glazing shall be held to 1/4" max. All gaps between butt -glazed panels are to be completely sealed. Applied distraction banding is to be cut to fit between butt -glazed panels, and is not to pass over gap sealants. 6. Butt -Glazing Installation Materials: a. Provide C.R. Laurence "EZCC" dear copolymer strip. Size is dependant on glass thickness. b. Approved Alternate - provide one part "WATER CLEAR" silicone sealant. ASTM C920 class and use as best suited for purpose. C.R. Laurence "WCS1", or submitted and approved equal. Provide setting and edge blocks, face shims, and spacers as required by installation conditions. c. Joint cleaner, primer and sealer: As recommended by the manufacturer. 7. Safety Glazing: All glazing within a 24" arc of a door's vertical edge and less than 60" aff shall be protected with safety glazing. 8. Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing all glass products and assemblies. SECTION 09 20 00 - PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD 1. Summary: Interior Gypsum Board. 2. Materials: a. Gypsum board: 1) 5/8 inch thick unless noted otherwise; provide type x in fire rated partitions. 2) Standard board: ASTM C36. 3) Water resistant board: ASTM C630. b. Accessories: 1) Trims: concealed flange crimp -on or tape -on type; metal or PVC at contractor's option in accordance with GA 216. 2) Joint compound, tape, and finishing compound: ASTM C475 and GA 216; use setting type joint compound at water resistant board. 3. Installation: a. Installation standard: perform all work in accordance with GA 216, "recommended specifications for the application and finishing of gypsum wallboard." b. Install water resistant board as a substrate for surfaces scheduled to receive bonded finishes in restrooms. c. Screw -fasten board to framing, unless approved otherwise. d. Installation of gypsum board at curved surfaces. 1) Install single layer of 5/8" board or multiple layers of thinner board at installer's option. 2) For thicker board and tighter radii, dampen board, block to the required uniform radius, and allow to set for approx. one hour prior to install. 3) For radii fighter than 46" dampen board with 10 to 15 oz of water per side and allow to soak for 15 minutes prior to installation. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for attachment to framing. 4) Install board with long direction perpendicular to axis of curve radius. 5) Install second layer in accordance with specifications for "multiple layer applications." 6) Select methods to produce a uniform radius with smooth transitions at joints. Install board tight to framing. 4. Finishing: a. Provide finishing in accordance with GA214. b. Where necessary to sand, do so without damaging the face of the gypsum board. c. GWB surfaces shall form a smooth surface free of r es 'oint marks fastener de ressions and joint filler lines. d9 �l P 1 Tapered board joints shall be taped, filled, and feathered to 12 inches either side of the joint. Non -tapered board joints shall be taped, filled, and feathered to 18 inches either side of the joint. d. A level 4 finish is standard at GWB wall areas. "Feature walls" shall receive a level 5 finish. e. All existing GWB surfaces to remain are to be refinished as needed to match new GWB finishing standards. 5. Access panels: a. All access panels required are to be metal and of a flush mounted, drywall flange style. Acudor DW-5040 or equal. b. Panels are to be painted to match surrounding walls. c. Specification sheets for all required access panels are to be submitted to architect for approval. 6. In -wall blocking: a. Provide 6" wide 18 gauge metal strip, "Danback" #D16F flexible wood backing, or custom cut FRT plywood backing/blocking concealed in walls for wall mounted accessories and items. Span backing plate over 3 studs min., LON. (See also 06400/12). 7. Reveal Trim: a. Recessed accent paint separation: Pittcon Softforms LLC #SWR-050-063 or equal. b. Surface mounted fabric wallcovering separation: Fry Reglet #DRMPET-375 or equal, UON. c. Recessed fabric wallcovering "tuck" separation: Pittcon Softforms LLC #SWR-013-063 (straight walls) and/or #SO-R060-90 (outside comers) or equal. SECTION 09 5100 -ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 1. Work Included: Provide acoustical ceiling systems, with suspended metal grid systems, trim, and accessories as required for complete installation. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Suspension System: Armstrong Wodd Industries, Inc., or Donn Brand by USG Interiors, Inc. b. Acoustical Units: Armstrong Wodd Industries, Inc., or USG Interiors, Inc. 3. Submittals: Provide material data sheets for acoustic tile, as well as each type of suspension grid, ceiling trims, shadow molds, extruded drapery pockets, ceiling coves, etc. to be used on project. 4. Materials: a. Suspension System: All suspended ceiling systems to comply with ASTM C635 as applicable for type of suspension system required and type of ceiling unit indicated. b. Grid System: Ceiling grid to be Armstrong Silhouette or USG Donn Fineline DXF, 9/16" with 1/8" reveal, bolt slot. Direct hung aluminum or steel as shown on drawings. Suspended ceiling to be level within a tolerance of 1/8" in 12'-0". c. Structural Class: Intermediate duty system. d. Edge Molding: W-Shaped "shadow mold", Armstrong wall angle #7877 or USG Donn Shadowline #MS174. e. Grid Finish: Manufacturer's standard low brightness white baked enamel. f. Ceiling Tiles: Armstrong Dune or USG Olympia Micro, 2'xZx3/4", RH: 0.90, NRC: 0.50, LR: 0.83. 5. Installation: A l suspended ceiling components are to be fully supported by building sWcture above. GC is to provide and install all necessary suspension components, sub -structures, connectors, etc. per manufacturer instructions. 6. Seismic Restraint S stem: As r uired b a licable code. Y eQ Y PP 7. Installed Items: All items installed into ceiling grids, such as HVAC, lighting, etc. are to be fully and separately supported by building structure above. Acoustical ceiling grids are not to be used as primary support for anything other than ACT tiles as designed. a. GC is to provide and install all necessary suspension components, sub -structures, connectors, etc. as needed. SECTION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND WALL BASE 1. Work Included: Provide resilient flooring and wall base. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. LVT: Interface Services, Artistry plank, Standard Collection. b. Ceramic Tile: Daltile. For use in restrooms. Refer to finish schedule for product information. c. Rubber Base: Tarkett (Johnsonite) 31/4" high Tightlock. 3. Submittals: Provide material data sheets and color specification of each color and style of resilient flooring and base. 4. Substitutions: None. 5. Materials: a. LVT: Luxury Vinyl Tile file conforming to ASTM F1066, Composition 1, color and file layout as indicated on drawings. b. Ceramic Tile: Ceramic file that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. Refer to manufacturers information for full specifications, requirements, and installation instructions. c. Resilient Base: Rubber base conforming to ASTM F1861 and ASTM E84 for resilient wall base. Provide main base color in continuous rolls, 48" sticks may be used for accent colors at contractors option. Wall bases must be mitered in all corners. d. Resilient Base Adhesive: Tarkett 960 Wall Base Adhesive (or equal). e. Transition Strips: Transition strips are NOT to be used between LVT and carpet. Transitions to ceramic file floors at restrooms are to receive a solid surface threshold at the door. 6. Rubber Wall Base Procurement: a. For pricing contact Trisha Roe Keel, Tadkett account executive (trisha.roekeel@tarkelt.com). b. For ordering email Greg Weldon @ Fishman Distributing in Cincinnati, OH (greg.weldo n@lfishman.com) or (513) 554-4404 and reference NPN #844137. Greg will be able to follow up with any extended lead-times, and also will direct ship the product to the GC / project site. Copy Trisha Roe Keel on all emails. 7. Sub -Floor Preparation: Conform with manufacturer's recommendatioos for preparation and with ASTM F710. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and defects with subfloor filler. All resilient flooring must be removed from the cartons and allowed to adjust to the job site temperature for 48 hours prior to installation. a. Refer to LVT manufacturer's uidelines for the allowable moisture level and/or RH of the concrete slab and a roved 9 � PP testing procedure, prior to LVT installation. Use only manufacturer specified adhesives as applicable. 8. Installation: a. Follow all manufacturer's recommendations. Open floor file cartons enough to cover each area, and mix tiles to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one area. Lay flooring with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattem. Install no less than half of full width file at room perimeter, L ON. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. b. Use full length pieces only, butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot be avoided, butt ends tight and flush. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, floor outlets and other appurtenances to produce a fight fit. , c. Install all resilient tile the same direction, UON. d. Install LVT using XL Brands "XL 2000 Plus" releasable adhesive as recommended by manufacturer, L ON. e. Prior to flooring installation the contractor is to receive, from CSCM or CSDM, a fully colonized Chades Schwab Design Manual as produced by the flooring manufacturer. This design manual is to be used as a resource to illustrate the desired installation patterns and flooring material mixes for each room or space within a standard CS project. Any questions on flooring installations are to be raised to the design team as an RFI prior to commencing work. f. Install wall base after flooring. Fit base tight and vertical. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. g. Install wall base products using manufacturer's recommended adhesive. h. All ceramic tiled areas are to be installed using 1/8" grout lines. SECTION 09 68 00 - CARPETING 1. Work Included: Provide 25CM x 1M carpet tiles, L ON, complete with required accessories and surface preparation. No transition strips to be applied between carpet and LVT. Provide transition strips where carpeting terminates at other floor finishes only as required. Install resilient base as coordinated with Section 09 65 00 after flooring. 2. Quality Assurance: Must pass 450 or less for ASTM E662 (Smoke density). Must be Class I ASTM E-648 Glue -down (flooring radiant panel test). 3. Submittals: Provide a sample of each type of selected carpet to CSDM and architect for review, via emailed color photos of face and also specification tag. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers: Interface, UON. Contact Rhiannon Hall at "rhiannon.hall@interface.com" for Chades Schwab contract pricing. 5. Patch level and re are slab for scheduled floor coverin . Concrete needs at least 90 da to full cure and shall have a RH P P 9 Ys Y o' of 75 /o or less. Lightweight concrete and concrete poured above grade in metal pans take a considerably longer time to cure. Job site temperature must stay within 60"F and 85"F (for a minimum of 48 days) prior to, during, and after installation. 6. Installation: a. All carpet tiles must be removed from the cartons and allowed to adjust to the job site temperature for 48 hours prior to installation. "Tac-Tile" installation method is to be used on all areas other than stairs. On stairs, use only vinyl compatible permanent adhesive. For stair nosing, use manufacturer's recommended installation method. Cut carpet tiles where required in manner to allow for proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight true and unfrayed. See floor finish plan and manufacturer information for further installation information. b. Prior to flooring installation the contractor is to receive, from CSCM or CSDM, a fully colorized Chades Schwab Design Manual as produced by the flooring manufacturer. This design manual is to be used as a resource to illustrate the desired installation patterns and flooring material mixes for each room or space within a standard CS project. Any questions on 4 flooring installations are to be raised to the design team as an RFI prior to commencing work. 7. Slab Preparation: If RH of concrete slab is higher than carpet manufacturers guidelines, GC shall include the application of "XL Brands 9511" moisture vapor reduction system prior to carpet installation. 8. Where r uired metal transition shi to be anodized aluminum finish b Schluter S stems Inc. S le: Deco UON. eq P Y Y ty , SECTION 09 72 00 - WALL COVERINGS 1. This Section Includes The Following: a. Vinyl wall covering. b. Woven fiber wall covering. c. Textile wall covering. d. Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP). 2. Submittals: a. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. b. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall -covering type. Indicate pattern placement, seams and termination points. 3. Quality Assurance: a. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings and adhesives with the following fire -test -response characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with identical adhesives to substrates per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. , b. Surface-Buming Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: 1) Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. 3) Fire -Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings complying with acceptance criteria of UBC Standard 8-2. 4) Fire -Growth Contribution: Textile wall coverings tested according to NFPA 265 and complying with Method A test protocol in IBC 2000, Section 803.5.1. 4. Manufacturers (no substitutions are allowed): a. Dry Erase Board & Tack Board: Koroseal Interior Products Group b. Wood Wall Paneling: Arborite c. Fabric Wrapped Wall Panels: Maharam or Design Tex d. FRP: Glasteel (white) or submitted and approved equal 4 5. Installation: a. Install er manufacturers s ecifications. P P b. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. c. Fully bond wall covering to substrate, L ON. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. d. Fabric wallcovering is not to be glued to substrate. e. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips. SECTION 09 80 00 - ACOUSTIC TREATMENT 1. Work Included: Provide insulation for sound transmission control measures in all interior partition walls and above interior 4 dropped ceilings where noted on reflected ceiling plan. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Rodkwool, Johns Mansville, Owens Coming, etc. 3. Wall Materials: Full thickness (based on individual wall thickness) "SAB", "SAFB", or "AFB", to provide a minimum STC rating of 50 in a standard interior partition assembly: 3 5/8" metal stud with (1) layer of 5/8" GWB on each side. 4. Ceiling Materials: 61/4" "SAB", "SAFB", or "AFB" to be used above ceilings where required based on notations on reflected ceiling plan. Owens Coming "Sonobatts" or equal. 5. Submittals: Submit copy of product data sheet via email to architect for review. Submittal must include product's specific STC rating for each assembly type. 6. Substitutions: Mineral fiber is the basis of design. Use of glass fiber insulation will be allowed should the product be specifically designed and marketed as an "SAB" to provide required STC ratings, and after a complete specification review by the architect. 7. Delivery, Storage, Handling, and Installation: Per manufacturer's recommendations. SECTION 09 9100 - PAINTING 1. Work Included: Provide painting and finishing of all exposed items and surfaces. Specified surface preparations, priming and coats of paint are in addition to shop -priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work. 2. Acceptable Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint Co. 3. Materials: "Paint" as defined herein means coating systems including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers, fillers, whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. Provide premium grade primers as recommended by paint manufacturers for compatibility with substrates indicated and finish coats specified. 4. Submittals: Apply opaque paint finishes on 8" x 10" cardstock. Apply transparent finishes to same material. Submit a display of each color, finish, and sheen to architect for review. 5. Preparation: Per manufacturers recommendation as appropriate for substrate. 6. lication: I aint in accordance with manufacturers directions. Use a licators and techni ues best suited for substrate APP APP Y P PP Q and type of material being applied. Use appropriate nap depth to provide full coverage, but not leave a noticeable texture. Apply additional coats when stains or blemishes show through final coat until paint is a uniform finish in color and appearance. , 7. Sheen: Basis of design is Benjamin Moore Paint Co.; "Flat" with 0-3%sheen @ 85", "Eggshell" with 15-20%sheen @ 85", and "Semi -Gloss" with 35-60%sheen @ 60". 8.Opaque Finishes: Provide uniform finish color and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, brush marks, run, sags, ropiness or other surfaces imperfections are not acceptable. 9. Transparent Finishes: Produce glass smooth film of even luster provide with no cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel or other surface imperfections. 10. Prepare and paint all exposed columns, panel boxes, conduits, surface raceways, louvers, drapery pockets, grilles, etc. not prefinished to match adjacent partition or ceiling color. 11. Prime and paint all exposed and semi -exposed gypsum board with a minimum of 2 color coats of acrylic latex, eggshell sheen, use 3 color coats for dark colors. Doors, door frames, and exposed metal items to be painted shall be finished with 2 coats bonding agent, and 2 color coats acrylic latex, semi -gloss sheen. 12. Mask U.L. Label on doors, frames and finishes. Do not apply finishes to door or frame labels SECTION 10 44 00 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 1. Work Included: Provide Fire Extinguisher Cabinet with Fire Extinguisher as noted on the contract documents 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Larsen's Architectural Series, Model: 0-2409-5R. a. Trim: Semi -recessed square trim to fit within a 4 7/8" stud wall. 4 b. Door Style: Solid panel (dear aluminum or stainless steel) with a standard style door pull and black type "A" die cut lettering (must meet local code requirements). 3. Fire Extinguisher: Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type 2A10BC, 10 LBS nominal capacity in enameled steel container, to meet local code requirements. If local jurisdiction deems any change, notify architect. 4. Submittals: Provide manufacturer's cut sheets of cabinet and extinguisher as specified NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www. nelsonworldwide.com ECS Mid-Atlamic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. - / / William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 c r es ha l SCHWAB ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 08/26/22 PERMIT BID 09/14/22 LANDLORD REVIEW 09/14/22 CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED " N TR TI N ET" HEREIN COS UC 0 S REVISIONS 0_ NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. r�uitALTH OFl o /P, �� c. O y� VINCENT P. DUET Lic. No. 0401016975 // /� ,RCHITEG, �n l;O PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB Charlottesville IBS 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 PROJECT #: 22.0000289.00 SHEET INFORMATION Architectural Specifications DRAWN BY: H. Koutsis REVIEWED BY: R. Rink SCALE: As noted AS1.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 3 4 5 0 7 0 0 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 0 0 e 0 G: a N M L J H G F C 0 ra SECURITY EQUIPMENT PLAN SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" ALL WALL MOUNTED SENSORS ARE TO BE MOUNTED AS HIGH ON THE WALL AS POSSIBLE, BUT NO CLOSER THAN 6" TO THE CEILING, AND ARE NOT TO BE MOUNTED ON THE "GREETER LOGO" WALL OR ON ACCENT PAINTED WALLS. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL FINISH PLAN FOR ACCENT PAINT LOCATIONS. THE PLACEMENT AND INSTALLATION OF CEILING MOUNTED SECURITY EQUIPMENT SHALL NOT INTERFERE WITH THE PLACEMENT OR FUNCTIONALITY OF THE LIFE SAFETY, LIGHTING OR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AS SHOWN ELSEWHERE IN THIS DRAWING SET. REFER TO SHEET A1.1 AND THE MEP DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. THIS DRAWING IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY. DURING EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION BY THE SECURITY VENDOR'S FIELD TECHNICIAN, GC IS TO ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT IS BEING INSTALLED PER THIS DRAWING. ALL EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON THIS SHEET AND THE PLACEMENT THEREOF IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE SCHWAB SPECIFIED SECURITY VENDOR. GC IS TO REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR POSSIBLE CONSTRUCTION SCOPE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE INSTALLATION OF IN WALL CONDUIT, J-BOXES, ETC. LEGEND: SECURITY EQUIPMENT LOCATION PLAN # TYPE INSTALLATION NOTES SP SONITROL PANEL ON WALL ABOVE IT CABINET IN BOH KP KEY PAD MOUNTED AT 48" AFT HU HOLD UP BUTTON (FIXED) ONE AT EACH GREETER DESK WORK STATION AS AUDIO SENSOR MOUNTED AS HIGH ON WALLAS POSSIBLE, OR ON CEILING WHENEVER POSSIBLE PD PEDESTRIAN DOOR CONTACT ONE AT EACH ENTRY/EGRESS DOOR ® WIRELESS DURESS BUTTON ONE PER BRANCH (NOT SHOWN ON PLAN) .RED 1ER CEILrvo i i u.a ,;LILING MOUNTED, CENTERED IN ACT TILE, COOPI EXACT LOCATION W/ OTHER CEILING ITEMS LOCATED IN EQUIPMENT ROOM, IN IT RACK; COOT EXACT PLACEMENT WITH STECH ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 led VEH�ELECIP1gN1�IL NORTH 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com SCHWABISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 08126122 PERMIT BID 09114122 LANDLORD REVIEW 09114122 CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS 0 _ NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. EALTy Op S VINCENT P. DUET Lic. No. 0461016975 �RCHITEC� C& delf d U m z 0 E r 0 s 3 d 0 m a n m D N 0 E 3 m m U N Q O N Z Y N a a s 0 0 d 3 F a NELSON 0 tlie t 2 3 4 5 H. 7 0 0 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 NELSON P 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.neisonworldwide.com N Rhnackel engineers, New Yo,k• Miami •Omaha• Wa Mgelee• Semite • Honolulu M 800.1 oo selam wwadMKkd mm L K C&doff SCHWAB J H ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 G PERMIT ALL GENDER BID RESTROOM LANDLORD REVIEW ms GWB CLG. I ACT LNG. A TCLNG. _ 4v AFF 1GA'AFF 100"AFF [_ II O AA—EM I I CONTRACTOR O ® SHALL BUILD O ONLY ROM SETS STAMPED F ®® AA—E AA BC4 BC4 "CONSTRUCTION SET' HEREIN ° 11' CLNF REVISIONS O OFFICE Q 1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 AA HALLWAYC 1oz 1oa 1oa — I 9L — — AA EM ® BA K ® {�p� ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these OF ICE ® �' plans and supporting documents under my direct — 1 BC4 BC4 supervision. It is my professional judgment that E _(a) the plans were designed and presented as — outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and BC4 BA LNG. I 1 I systems a ) and/or construction featuresthe ) are red — GWB CLG. 9'9 FF s':5 AFF I deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes — and regulations. ECS recommends to Building MOP CLOSET Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. 07 NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. This certification does not relieve the registered t; CT CLNG. design professional(s) of record and other 2 0'-0' AFF I I I parties of their responsibilities for the design or a construction of the project. tT H OF ® ® BC—EM ® ® ���r 4' DCi 0 0 --ICE I �-/� �� SQiNACM > E `m 0 BC4 BC4 William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO .e 15 0 Plans Examiner and Professional-m-Charge 3 DPOR License # 0402021900 700NAL E a 0 `o Dote.• 10/11/22 COA it 0407 005J57 0 n ONF. C R109 I To) VNSQUAF E PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB Charlottesville IBS 3 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 BC4 BC4—EJ ACT LNG BC—EM ar ottesvl e, 10 CLNG. 11'-0 AFF PROJECT #: � 10 'AFF I 22.0000289.00 Sic g \ {1 — — — — — — GDWDPAL A07ES A. ALL COVTRACTORS SHALL REFER TO THIS SHEET FOR THEIR SCOPES OF WORK TO 45 45 LAaRE PLACEAENT OF DEVICES DO NOT OVERLAP. ALL CEILING AiiOk1tTE0 ITEMS SHEET INFORMATION NOT SHOWN ON PLAN ARIST FIT WITHIN TFE PARAAETERS CF 77E ITEMS SHOWN.P. a 0 a COORDINATION PLAN m a MEP CEILING COORDINATION NORTH N 1 DRAWN BY: SCALE: 1/4" =1'-01, SAL o A GRS REVIEWED BY: L a 9 N SCALE: As noted o 3 m 9 ML MEP1.1 0 O m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 0 W w N 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 IN N K K H G u C ra m MAINTA, FEEDER PANEL. TWO EX SHALL , ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = V-0" GEIIERAL ELEC7RICAL EXISTING CaWITZOW A(07EM A. ANY EXISTING COWITIOVS INDICATED IN THIS SET OF DRAWINGS ARE BASED ON INFO VATIOV PROVIDED BY OTLERS AND POSSIBLE LIMITED FIELD VERIFICATIOV. ADJUST FOR ACTUAL FIELD CODITIONS AT AD ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO 77-E OWNER. B. VISIT PE PROECT SITE, REVIEW EXISTING CONDITIOVS AGAINST THE COVTRACT DOCUIENTS, AND LECO4E FAMILIAR WITH PE #Cw PRIOR TO BIOOINA; AND START OF TIE NOW SIGNING Tl-E CaV7RACT IS AN ACKNOWLEDLEAENT THAT TIE SI7E VISIT HAS 6FEN COAfPLETED AND 77-E EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE ACCEPTED. C. DEU%ISH ANY EXISTING EOUIPAENT, DEVICES, AND LU VINAIRES AS IADICA7ED ANDIOR AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR IASTALLATIOV AAD CVNSTRU CTIOV LF ThE MEW WO4K. REMOVE ALL E(X/IPAENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, CONDUITS, SUPPWTS, HAAK,ERS, ETC. THAT ARE NOT SHOWN AND ARE REQUIRED TO BE READVED IN OPCIER TO COIELETE TTE NEW 96RK. D. ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS THAT ARE TO 6F REMOVED SHALL BE READVED IN THEIR ENTIRETY. CaWt CTORS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM 7HF ITEM TO BE 05fa ISFED TO TFE SOURCE OVERC&RRENT DEVICE. RACEWAYS WHICH ARE INSTALLED IN OR BELOW FLOORS OR WI7HIN WALLS MAY LE ABANDONED, BUT ALL OVEREAD OP EXPOSED RACEWAYS SHALL BE REMOVED. EXPOSED RACEWAYS TO EE ABAMOVED SHALL BE REMOVED AND SHALL LF CUT O4 CHISELED AT LEAST 2" INTO 77E WALL 6P FLOOR AND TFE OPENING GROUTED SMOOTH. E. TEE OWNER SHALL HAVE SALVA6E RI6N7S TO ANY HEMS THAT ARE TO EE DEAaISLED. THOSE ITEMS THAT TI-E OWNER WISACS TO SALVA6F SHALL BE CAREFULLY REMOVED AND STORED IN A LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY THE OWAER. ALL 077ER ITEMS OF DEMOLITIOV STVALL bECYIAE PE PROPERTY OF TFE CONTRACTOR AND SHALL BE REMOVED FROM 7TE SITE. F. PROVIDE IEARORARY CIRCUITS AAD XAAECTIOVS TO EOUIPAENT, LU.IVINAIIRRES, OR DEVICES IN AREAS OF 77E FACILITY THAT ARE TO REMAIN IN OPERATION AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THOSE AREAS IN COWL= OPERATIOV. G. MAINTAIN COVTIAVITY O- EXISTING CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE POWER TO REMAINING EQUIPAENT, DEVICES, AND LUUINAIRES 7H4T ARE NOT BEING REMOVED. H. PROVIDE BLANK COVERPLATES F09 EXISTIAG EAETY DFVICE BOXES 09 OUWTIOV BOXES THAT A#IST REMAIN, SUCH AS FOR CIRCUITS THAT ANIST BE MAINTAINED TO 077ER AREAS. I. WHERE ELECTRICAL DIS7RI8UTI01V EOUIPAENT (PANELBOARDS, S1I`IRa6OIRDS, ETC. ) IS TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED, ALL EXISTING CIRCUITS 7HAT ARE TO REMAIN -WALL BE RECONNECTED TO NEW OR RELOCATED ELECTRICAL DIS7RIBUTIOV EQUIPMENT TO MAINTAIN TIE CONTIAVITY OF THOSE EXISTING CIRCUITS. INTERCEPT AND EXTEND ALL EXISTING CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED. J. REMOVE ALL ABANDONED TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING. K. WHERE ITEMS ARE SHOWN HATCHED, ITEMS ARE TO BE DEMOILISRED ALONG WITH THEIR ASSOCIATED BOXES, CYJNDUITS, CONDUCTORS, SU9PORTS, AND HAACERS UNLESS INDICATED 0TFERWISE. GENERAL NOTE: REFER TO SHEET 01.0 FOR FUTHER INFORMATION. ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. Z,Ji, t /� L / 1" " William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 NELS0MI 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com Schnackel engineers Hex Ydkl Muml�OmNal Ins Mpeh �Seatlpl Xonolulu 800591-M wwwdwredmkom charles SCH 1 • " ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 PERMIT BID LANDLORD REVIEW CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS At LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. rxTH OF Vj�C ? O GREGORY ROY SCHNACKEL > e . 1s O S/ONAL E Date.- 10111122 COA 0407 005757 PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB Charlottesville IBS 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 PROJECT #: 22.0000289.00 SHEET INFORMATION ELECMCAL DEMOLMON PLAN DRAWN BY: SAL REVIEWED BY: GRS SCALE: As noted EU 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 a N M L K H G F E u C FE rn m L.AAIXOV All A. ALL ELECTRICAL WORK TO BE PERFORMED IN C0441LIANE WITH 2O18 VIRGINIA CONSTRUCTION COF, 2017 NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE WITH VIRGINIA AAEN ENTS AT A MINIAk N AAD LAAUORD CRITERIA. S. CHAAGES TO TIC EXISTING, LAN51LORO-INSTALLED, ELECTRICAL PAIEL ARE AT TFE EXPENSE OF T`E TENANT AND SHALL BE REVIEWED BY LAADLCR9 AND 77-E WORK CCAIELETED BY LANX-ORD APPROVED ELECTRICAL COVTRACTOR. C. PNGAE ANON LOW VOLTAGE WIRING SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS, WHICH MAY IA(aWE TFE USE OF SPECIAL PLEMN RATED CABLE, OR THE INSTALLATION OF WIRING WITHIN CONDUIT. THE WIRING IS REOUIRED TO BE PLENAM( RATED OR IN PLENAN RETURAS. D. EXISTING LIC/TS IN CAMPY TO REMAIN .THERE IS NO L191TIAG ON THE STOREFRONT. IF TENANT WOKD LIKE TO INSTALL ALVITOINAL LILWTIAG, THEN SEPARATE PLANS WITH FIXTLIRE SPECIFICATIOV WILL TEED TO BE SU5MITIED TO LAADLCRD FOR REVIEW. E. IF PROVIDE LANDLORD POWER SOS MST BE USED. IF LAACLORD POWER SCARCE IS NOT PROVILED, THEN PROVILIE ELECTRIC FOR THE SIGN FROM/ THEN TENANT'S PAAEL. AM7 EXPOSED WIRING, DISCONNECTS, TRANSFORMERS, OR SW)`TaE5 ALLOYED. F. COAVTY WILL REQUIRE INTERIOR L16HTIAG CVAIRLIAN F CERTIFICATION. E F CE NO LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE MARK MANUFACTURES CATALOG NUMBER VOLTAGE WATTS MOUNTING LIGHT LAMP LAMP SUPPORTED SELECTED REMARKS SOURCE QTY. DESCRIPTION DIMMING BY AA ALPHABET NU4—RD—SW—I3LM-35K-90— 120 12 CEILING, RECESSED LED N/A N/A 0-10v OTHERS HE60—UNV—DIMI0—NC—WH—WH AA—EM ALPHABET NU4—RD—SW—I3LM-35K-90— 120 12 CEILING, RECESSED LED N/A N/A 0-10V OTHERS 90 MINUTE BATTERY BACK—UP HE60—UNV—DIMI0—NC—WH—WH—EM7 BC PINNACLE AD22—A-835MO—GS—U—OL2-1-0—W 120 31 CEILING, RECESSED LED N/A N/A 0-10V OTHERS WITH INSTALLED ENLIGHTED CRF200883 SENSOR 90 MINUTE BATTERY BACK—UP AND BC—EM PINNACLE AD22—A-835MO—GS—U—OL2-1-1IC-1V 120 31 CEILING, RECESSED LED N/A N/A 0-10V OTHERS INSTALLED ENLIGHTED CRF200883 SENSOR BC4 PINNACLE AD24—A-835MO—GS—U—OL2-1-0—W 120 32 CEILING, RECESSED LED N/A N/A 0-10V OTHERS WITH INSTALLED ENLIGHTED CRF200883 SENSOR BC4—EM PINNACLE AD24—A-835MO—GS—U—OL2-1-1IC-1V 120 32 CEILING, RECESSED LED N/A N/A 0-10V OTHERS 90 MINUTE BATTERY BACK—UP AND INSTALLED ENLIGHTED SENSOR E1 LITHONIA AFF— PEL— U VOLT— LTP— SDRT— WT 120 12 WALL, SURFACE LED N/A N/A NON OTHERS 90 MINUTE BATTERY BACK—UP VERIFY FINISH WITH ARCHITECT S2 LITHONIA ZL1N—L24-250OLM—FST— 120 19 CEILING, SURFACE LED N/A N/A 0-10V OTHERS 2' LENSED LED FIXTURE MVOLT-35K-80CRI—WH LIGHT SOURCE CODES SUPPORTED DIMMING CODES LED = LIGHT EMITTING DIODE NON = NOT DIMMABLE 3-WIRE FLUORESCENT 3-WIRE FL = LINEAR FLUORESCENT 0-10V = 0-10V ECO = LUTRON ECOSYSTEM CFL = COMPACT FLUORESCENT IND INCANDESCENT DMX = DMX512 IND = INCANDESCENT MLV MAGNETIC LOW VOLTAGE / TRIAC / FORWARD PHASE / LEADING EDGE MH = METAL HALIDE ELV ELECTRONIC LOW VOLTAGE / REVERSE PHASE / TRAILING EDGE HPS = HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM DALI DIGITAL ADDRESSABLE LIGHTING INTERFACE LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES: A. LUMINAIRE SYMBOLS THAT ARE SHOWN HALF -SHADED, OR LABELED "EM", ON THE PLAN(S) INDICATE LUMINAIRES THAT SERVE AS EMERGENCY LIGHTING. UNLESS SERVED BY A CIRCUIT ORIGINATING AT AN EMERGENCY PANELBOARD OR CENTRAL LIGHTING INVERTER, EMERGENCY LIGHTING LUMINAIRES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH AN EMERGENCY BATTERY. SEE THE SPECIFICATIONS FOR MINIMUM EMERGENCY BATTERY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS. B. PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS FOR LUMINAIRES THAT ARE SELECTED BY OTHERS REQUIRE THE APPROVAL OF THE INDIVIDUAL THAT SELECTED THE LUMINAIRE. C. THE OWNER HAS A NATIONAL ACCOUNT WITH WIEDENBACH BROWN FOR ALL LUMINAIRES. CONTACT CHRISTINE STURM AT (714) 982-1542 OR CHRISTINE-STURM@WBLIGHT.COM FOR QUOTE. LIGHTING PLAN SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" NORTH 0111l A107E32 LICVTIAG PROVIDED BY CHARLES SCHWAB. RECEIVE / INSTALL / PROCRAAANIAG BY CEAERAL CONTRACTOR. ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 6190RAL ELECTRICAL EXISTIAG COVITIOW Af77E51 A. ANY EXISTING COIOITIOJS IADICATED IN THIS SET OF DRAWINGS ARE BASED OV IAEORMATIOV PROVIDED BY OTHERS AA19 POSSIBLE LIMITED FIELD VERIFICATION. ADX/Sr FOR ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS AT NO ADOITIOVAL EXPENSE TO THE OOAER. B. VISIT 77-E FRO.ECT SITE, REVIEW EXISTING CONDITIONS AGAINST THE CONTRACT DOCUENTS, AND BECOME FAMILIAR WITH THE IYORK PRIOR TO BIDDING AAD START OF TFE WORK. SIGNING TFE CONTRACT IS AN ACKNOWLEDGEMENT THAT THE SITE VISIT HAS BEEN COIELETED AAD TIE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE ACCEPTED. C. DEM51LISH ANY EXISTING EOUIPMENT, DEVICES, AND LUMINAIRES AS IN91CATED AAVIOR AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR IASTALLATIOV AID CON57RLCTICW CE 77-E NEW WORK. REMOVE ALL EOUIPMENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, CONDUITS, S -PORTS, HANGERS, ETC. THAT ARE AOT SHOWN AAD ARE REQUIRED TO 6F REMOVED IN ORDER TO CO FLETE THE NEW WORK, D. ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS THAT ARE TO BE REMOVED SHALL BE REMOVED IN THEIR ENTIRETY. COVLUCTORS SHALL LE REMOVED FROM THE ITEM TO 61F LE14VILISTED TO THE SOURCE OVERCLRRENT DEVICE. RACEWAYS WHICH ARE INSTALLED IN OR BELOW FLOCKS OR WITHIN WALLS MAY BE ABAADOED, BUT ALL OVERHEAD OR EXPOSED RACEWAYS -WALL BE REMOVED. EXPOSED RACEWAYS TO BE AHAAWAED SHALL BE REMOVED AND SHALL LE CUT OR CHISELED AT LEAST 2" INTO THE WALL OR FLOOR AAD THE OPENING [.ROUTED SMO07H. E. TIE ONER S)LMLL HAVE SALVAGE RIGHTS TO ANY I7FAC 7HAT ARE TO BE DEM51LI9hED. THOSE ITEMS THAT 7HE ONAER WISHES TO SALVAGE SHALL BE CAREFULLY REMOVED AAV STORED IN A LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY 7TE OWER. ALL OTHER I7FAC CE DEM51LITI6N SHALL El PE PROPERTY OF PE COVTRACTO? AAD SHNALL BE REMOVED FROM 77-E SITE. F. PROVIDE TEAFORARY CIRCUITS AAA COMCTIOWS TO EQUIPMENT, LUMINAIRES, OR DEVICES IN AREAS OF THE FACILITY THAT ARE TO REMAIN IN CIFERATIOV AS NEOUIIED TO MAINTAIN THOSE AREAS IN COMPLETE OPERATION. G. MAINTAIN CONTINUITY CE EXISTING CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE POWER TO REMAINING EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, AND LUMINAIRES THAT ARE AOT LEIAG REA09VED. H. PROVIDE BLANC COVER9LA7FS FOR EXISTING EAFTY DEVICE BOXES CR thWTIOV BOXES THAT Ak ST REMAIN, SUCH AS FOR CIRCUITS THAT AXIST 61F A14INTAIAED TO OTHER AREAS. GDIERAL EZEG7RICAL M27E& A. WHERE 77-E AECi4NICAL DESIGN UTILIZES A PLEM N RETURN AIR CEILING DESIGN, ALL SQUIR4ENT AAD MATERIALS INSTALLED WITHIN THE PLENAI( RETUW CEILING AWT ABET TTE FLAAE SPREAD AND SMOKE LEVEL OPED RATINGS OF 25/50 AAD BE APPROVED FOR USE IN PLENUN RETURN CEILINGS. COORDINATE PLENM CEILING LOCATIONS WITH THE AEOWANICAL CON7RACT09. LWINAIRES THAT ARE MANEACTL,RED WITH A AETAL HIOUSIAG AEET THIS REQUIREMENT AAD ARE AOT REOUIRED TO LE PLEAkN RATED UNLESS 1AOICA7ED OTHERWISE. B. COORDINATE ALL DEVICE LOCATIONS AAD CIRCUIT ROUTING WITHIN ANY MILLWORK WITH MILLWORK VEAVOR PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. C. COORDINATE 77-E CONECTIOVS CE ALL EOUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OTHERS WITH 7HE CONTRACTOR PROVIDING THE EQUIPIENT FRICR TO ROUGH -IN. THIS IACL(ES, BUT IS NOT LIMITED TO, AEOHANICAL EOUIPMENT, KITOEN EOXUIP,IENT, AO910/VISUAL EQULF ENT, FIRE SU99RESSIOV SYSTEM EOIIPAENT, FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT, ETC. PROVIDE 77-E APPROPRIATE DISCONNECTING ARANS FOR, AAD TO MAKE THE FINAL COA ECTIOV TO, ANY HARDWIRED EQUIPMENT. THE ELECTRICAL CON 7 RACTOR IS ALSO RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE AN APPROPRIATE CORD AAD PLUG FOR ANY CARD-AAD-FLOG' CONNECTED EQUIPMENT 7HAT IS AOT EQUIPPED WITH AN INTEGRAL CORD AAO FLOG. D. SEE PAAEL SCE&LES FOR IAEORMATIOV OV CIRCUITS THAT ARE TO 6E ROUTED THROUGH COVTACTORS 07 RELAYS FOR CONTROL. E. ALL EOUIPMENT, DEVICES, AAD LUMINAIRES SHALL BF SUITABLE FOR THE ENVIROVIENT IN WHICH THEY ARE INSTALLED. EQUIPIENT AA7UVTED OUTDOORS SHALL BE AEMA 3R. DEVICES MQ VTED IN DAAE OR NET LOCATIONS SHALL BE WEA7HERPRocF. RECEPTACLES RA7ED 15- OR 20-AAES AAD 120 VOLTS WHICH ARE LOCATED IN DAA4P OR WET LOCATIONLS SHALL EIF GFCI PROTECTED AND EQUIPPED WITH A SUITABLE WEATHERPROOF COVERPLATE (WHILE-IN-L/SE IN WET LOOAT16N5). F. ALL LUGS, TERMINALS, ETC. IN ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTIOV EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LISTED FOR A MINIMN OF 75 DECREE C CONDUCTORS. TERMINATIONS LISTED FOR ONLY 60 D 55REE C CONOLXTORS ARE NOT FERMI TIED. G. CIRCUITS SERVING EMERGENCY L16HTIAG EQUIPMENT SUCH AS EMERGENCY BATTERIES SHALL NOT .SHARE A TEUTRAL (SHALL NOT BE PART OF A AOULTIWIRE BRAMOV CIRCUIT) WITH ANY OTHER CIRCUIT. PROVIDE A SEPARATE NEUTRAL FOR EVERY CIRCUIT THAT SERVES EMERGENCY L16HTIA(G EQUIPMENT. H. ALTH/OkDY NOT SPECIFICALLY SH 90N, THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL NEOUIRED LOW VOLTAGE WIRING AAD DATA CABLJAG, PER THE MAACEACTLRER'S RECOtWAVATICAS, FOO A comcLETE, FC/NCTICWAL LI6HTIAtG COV7ROL SYSTEM. !. ALTHOUGH NOT SPECIFICALLY ShONYV, THE ELECTRICAL COVTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL IEOUIRED WIRING AND DATA CABLING, !DEEDING ALL 0-10V CONTROL WIRING WHERE APPLICA&E, PER 77-E MAAAEACTLRER'S RECOMEiVATIOVS FOR A CO FILETE, FUNCTIONAL DIANING SYSTEM. AE)ED AVIM 1. LOWERCASE LETTERS ALLIACENT TO LUMINAIRES 6 N PLANS CCRRESPOID TO THE ASSOCIATED SWITCH. SWITOLES SHALL BE MUNTED AT 42" AFF. COORDINATE FINAL IE16HT WITH ARCHITECT. 2. CEILING OCC!,FWAOY SENSOR IN THE HALLWAY SHALL BE MONV7ED ON 77-E SAAE CEILING TILE AS THE LUMINAIRE FIXTURE. I�CFa1(�L�Z���rlli� �! �7TCF�7l��lh�71 COVTACT WIEDEABACH DOWN FOR GUOTE THAT IACLLES ALL CO 'ONENTS OF THE SYSTEM LISTED BELOW, SIACLE LINE DIAGRAM AND ALL REOUIRED COIANISSIOVING/STARTUP/ PR06RAAAMIAG COSTS. WIEDEAEACW BROWN OJOTE WILL NOT IAAZLVE THE COST OF IASTALLATION OR CALLING BETWEEN COWUENTS OF THE SYSTEM. WIEDENBALH, BROWN CO., INC. AT7M• OYEISTIAE STRUN (714) 982-1542 CHNARLESSCHAYAB IIGHT. COV L16HTIAAG SU99LIER AEE05 TO BE FAMILIAR WITH INSTALLATION AAD ISSUES RELATED TO 7HE LUMINAIRES AAD HARDWARE. THE 6EAE7RAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR 77-E FULL L16HTIAAG INSTALLATION WITH ASSISTANCE FROM LIGHTING SLRPLIER REGARDING POTENTIAL ISSUES THAT MAY ARISE. REFER TO ZONE SCYEDIKE CONTROLS FOR ALL HARDWARE CVA#YmwrS REQUIRED PER ZONE. ALL COIEOENTS LISTED BELOW ARE LOW VOLTAGE COVTROLS LAILESS 077-ERWISE LISTED. COVTROL ZONES, ALL PRIVATE OFFICES, BAOC OFFICE, aIENT TOUCWXV, AAO TEAM ROY HARDWARE • E111I6H7E9 WS--2-00 WIRELESS DIMMER SWITCH, EALIGY-1TED LUNINAIRE INTEGRAL SENSORS CONTROL INTENT.• 06WIGLRE GENERAL L16HTING IN ROOM TO BE MAACIAL-ON BY USE OF DIGITAL DIMMER AAD AUTO -OFF AFTER A LOSS OF OCCYRAAA;Y FOR 10 MINUTES AS LE7FC7FD BY THE XO.YPAACY SENSOR. DIGITAL DIAA<ER SHIALL MAACUALLY RAISE AND LOWER GENERAL LEVEL LENTING LEVELS IN THIS ROOM. CORRIDOR HdIRDWANE• Ell IO(TED W5-2-00 WIRELESS DIMMER SWITCH, ETM16HTED LUMINAIRE MICRO SENSOR SU-SE-IL/TA(C-SU-SE/CBL-5E-OU4-7F COVTROL INTENT: DURING NORMAL BUSINESS HOURS, 6E7ERAL LIGHTING SHALL BE OV. AFTER NORMAL BV51AESS HOURS, GENERAL L16HTIAC IN ROOT! TO BE AUTO-OV AFTER DETECTION OF WTIOV IN ROM AND AUTO-LFF AFTER A LOSS OF OGCL.PANCY FOR 15 MINUTES AS LETECTED BY XaPAACY SENSORS. STORAGE OLOSET, Acp OLOSET, IT OLOSET HARDWA)RI.• WATTSTPPPER DW-100 OCCLPAACY SENSOR SWITCH COVTROL INTENT • C6WIGU5EE GENERAL LIGHTIAAG IN THIS ROOM TO BE AUTO -ON BY USE OF OC'CLFAACY SENSOR SWITCH AAD AUTO -OFF AFTER A LOSS OF OK'CUPANOY FOR 5 MINUTES AS DETECTED BY THE OCORAACY SENSOR. RESTROOV HARDWARE- WATT57099ER DW-100 OMFAACY SENSOR SWITCH/ CONTROL INTENT, WHILE ROOT! IS OCCL,RIED AS DETECTED BY 77E CGLY.YPAAEY SENSOR, GENERAL LICiTING IN THIS ROOI( SHALL BE ON. AFTER A LOSS OF OCCUPANCY FOR 10 MINUTES AS DETECTED BY THE C>L'CYRAAA;Y SEAS, LIGHTING SMALL TURN OFF. 7oWNSQ141NRE H/ARDWARE.• EAKIGY-ITED WS-2-00 WIRELESS DIAAIER SWITCH, ENLIGHTED L!%NINAIRE INTECRAL SENSORS CONTROL INTENT, DURING AC7MAL BUSINESS HIOGYRS, GENERAL L ICVTIAG SHALL BE ON. AFTER NOPM.4L BUSINESS HOURS, GENERAL LIGY,'TJW IN ROOT( TO BF AUTO -ON AFTER LETECTILW OF WTILNI IN ROLtI! AAD AUTO -OFF AFTER A LOSS OF OLDY.PAAOY FLR 15 MINC/TES AS DETECTED BY OCOYlPA1VCY SENSORS. DIAAIER SHALL A(AACJALLY RAISE Aft LOWER 6E7ERAL LEVEL LIGHITAA; LEVELS IN THIS ROOK. EXTERIOR SIGNAGE HARDWARE.• SIAKYE ZLNE EXTERIOR F'HOTOLELL CONTROL INTENT.• DURING HAGS WITH S(A=FICIENT NATURAL LIGHTING, SlGYVACE SHALL LE OFF'. LXARING HOURS LALTCIIG NATIARAL LICITING, SICVAGE SHALL BF LbV. SEMINAR ROOK H/AROWARE.• EAKIGHTED )IS-2-00 WIRELESS DIAAIER SWITCH, ENLIGHTED LCANINAIRE INTEGRAL SENSORS CONTROL INTENT0WIGYNRE GENERAL LICITING IN ROOM TO BE MAACJAL-ON BY USE OF DIGITAL DIMIER AAD AUTO-CFF AFTER A LOSS OF OCCUPANCY FOP 10 MINUTES AS DETECTED BY THE OCCUPANCY SENSOR, DIGITAL DIAA<ER SHALL MANJALLY RAISE AND LOWER GENERAL LEVEL LIGHTING LEVELS IN THIS ROOK. DAYLIT ZONE LIClTING IN THE DAYLIT ZONES SHALL HAVE THE FOLLOWING CONTROLS INCLRPOOATED IN ALYJITILAV TO THE CONTROLS LISTED ABOVE., HARDWARE.• EAKI6H7ED LUf/NAIRE INTEGRAL SENSORS, ENLIGHTED LWINAIRE ACCESSORIES SENSORS, OR DUAL ZONE PfGTLGELL CONTROL INTENT., LICTTIAG THAT FALLS WITHIN THE DAYLIT ZLNE SHALL AUTOMATICALLY DIM IN RESPONSE TO A/ATlRAL LIGHTING IN THE SPACE. LEGEND EXISTING NEW WORK ® NEW TO EXISTING CONNECTION NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.neisonworldwide.com Schnackel engineers New York MIamI •0maM1a• Wa Mgelea"Seal,la d a 0 0 E a d 0 3 0 0 m 9 0 d 9 d a 0 A E m 3 A 9 d a 0 d z 0 r a 9 N P 3 d 0 a 9 3 m 9 100 C&doff SCHWAB 0 PCa oa LAN 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0 10 12 13 14 15 17 18 2 3 4 0 7 0 0 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 NE N M L K J H G F C u C I ra m IN POWER AND SYSTEMS PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 NORTH PROVIDE CHIEF MODEL# PAC-526 BOX ALLL OUTLETS ARE TO BE INSTALLED INTO THE PAC BOX USING FACTORY PROVIDE KNOCK -OUTS. THERE ARE TO BE NO JUNCTION BOXES MOUNTED ANYWHERE INSIDE THE FREE AREA IN THE PAC BOX. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR MORE INFORMATION. DETAIL FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ALL PAC BOXES ARE TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY GC SB PAC BOX DETAIL NOT TO SCALE E8 ELECTRICIAN TO REFERENCE SIGNAGE PACKAGE AND CONFIRM POWER LOCATION WITH THE PLAN. REVIEW NOTE 8 RELATED TO SIGNAGE PER PLAN. "CR" = CONTROLLED RECEPTACLE. ALL CONTROLLED RECEPTACLES MUST BE MARKED AS SUCH WITH PERMANENT LABELING. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. GLRIERAL ELECTRICAL EXISTING CL'OIDITICIIl4 A17TES A. ANY EXISTING CONDITIONS INDICATED IN THIS SET OF ORAWINC4 ARE BASED OOV INEOORMAT16VV PROVIDED BY OTHERS AND POSSIBLE LIMITED FIELD VERIFICATION. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADAST FOR ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS AT AG ADDITIOVAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. B. THE COVTRACTOR SYiALL VISIT THE PROECT SITE, REVIEW EXISTING CONDITIONS AGAINST THE CONTRACT DOCUIENTS, AAD FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH TIE- #ORK PRIOR TO BIDDING AAD START OF 77-E WORK. BY SIGVING THE COV7RACT, 77-E CONTRACTOR ACYKAO#L=S THE SI7F VISIT HAS BEEN COIPLETED AAD TIE- EXISTING CONOITIOVS ARE ACCEPTED. C. TIE CaV7RACTOR IS RESPOVSISLE FOR DEmaITIOV OF EXISTIND EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, AAD LUMINAIRES AS INDICATED AA0/6R AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR INSTALLATION AAD CON5TRXTI6?N OF TIE NEW WOW. REMOVE ALL EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, LUMINAIRES, COOWITS, SLPPORTS, HANGERS, ETC. THAT ARE NOT SHOWN AAD ARE REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED IN 07DER TO COIPLETE THE IE-W WORK. D. ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS THAT ARE TO BE REMOVED SHALL BF REMOVED IN THEIR ENTIRETY, COOVX76IRS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE ITEM TO BE DEAEEISHE-D TO THE SOLWCE OVERCU9RENT DEVICE. RACEWAYS WHICH ARE INSTALLED IN OR BELOW FLOORS OR WITHIN WALLS MAY BE ABANDONED, BUT ALL OVERHEAD OR EXPOSED RACEWAYS SHALL BE REMOVED. EXPOSED RACEWAYS TO BE ABAM7ONED SHALL BE REMOVED AND SHALL BE CUT OR CHISFLED AT LEAST 2" INTO 77-E WALL OR FLOC AAD 77-E- CRENIAG GROUTED SMOOTH. E. TIE OWNER 57-IALL HAVE SALVAGE RIGHTS TO ANY ITEMS THAT ARE TO BE DEMOLISHED. 7HOSE 17EMS THAT 77E O#NER WISHES TO SALVAGE SHALL BE CAREFLELY REMOVED AAD STORED IN A LOCATION AS DIRECTED BY 77-E OWNER. ALL OTHER I7FA06 OF DEAfCLIT101V .SHALL BECOIE TIE PROERTY LF 77-E CON7RACTOR AA0 SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE SITE. F. PROVIDE TEAPORARY CIRCUITS AAD 00ViECTIOV5 TO EQUIPMENT, LUNINAIRES, OR DEVICES IN AREAS OF THE FACILITY THAT ARE TO REMAIN IN CPERATIOV AS REO/IRED TO MAINTAIN THOSE AREAS IN COMPLETE OERATIOV. G. MAINTAIN COVTIAHIITY OF EXISTING CIRCUITS AS REOUIRED TO PROVIDE POIY£R TO REMAINIAG EQUIPMENT, DEVICES, AND LUMINAIRES THAT ARE AOT BEIAG REMOVED. H. PROVIDE BLACC COVERPLATES FOR EXISTING EMPTY DEVICE BOXES OR AWTIOV BOXES THAT AkST REMAIN, SUCH AS FOR CIRCUITS 7HAT Ak T BE MAINTAINED TO 077ER AREAS. I. #HERE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTIOV EQUIPMENT (PAAELBOARDS, SWITC-BOARDS, ETC.) IS TO BE REMOVED OR RELOCATED, ALL EXISTING CIRCUITS 7HAT ARE TO REMAIN SHALL SE RECONAECTED TO AEW OR RELOCATED ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT TO MAINTAIN THE CONTIMUITY OF 7HDSE EXISTING CIRCUITS. INTERCEPT AAD EXTEAD ALL EXISTING CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED. ✓. REMOVE ALL ABANDOED T£L£COMIANICATIONS CABLING. 619111197AL ELECTRICAL AVIM A. WHERE THE MECHANICAL DESIOV UTILIZES A PLEANMM RETURN AIR OEILIAG LESION, ALL EOUIPMENT AHD MATERIALS INSTALLED WITHIN THE PLEAtN RETLRN CFILIAG A#UST AEET 77-E FLAME SPREAD AAD SMOKE LEVELOED RATIAGS OF 25/50 AND BE APPROVED FOR USE IN RLEAIAN RETLM LFILIAGS. ORDINATE PLEAMMl1 CEILING LOCATIONS #17H 77-E MECHANICAL COVTRACTOR. LUMINAIRES THAT ARE MAACFACTLRED WITH A METAL HOUSIAG MEET THIS REOUIREAENT AA0 ARE NOT REQUIRED TO BE PLEMMM RATED LOESS IADICATED OTHERWISE. B. COORDINATE ALL DEVICE LOCATIONS AAD CIRCUIT ROUTING WITHIN ANY MILLWORK WITH MILLWORK VEIY06R PRIOR TO ROIGY-IN. C. COORDINATE 77E COWECTIOVS OF ALL EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OTHERS WITH THE CONTRACTOR PROVIDING THE EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO RULCH-IN. THIS INaLVES, BUT IS ADT LIMITED TO, AEOVANICAL EQUIPMENT, KITCHEN EQUIPMENT, ALD10/VISUAL EQUIPMENT, FIRE SLPPRESSIOV SYSTEM EO/IPAENT, FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT, ETC. THE ELECTRICAL COV7RACTO? IS RESPOVSIBLE TO PROVIDE THE APPROPRIATE DISCWECTIAG MEANS FOR, AND TO MAKE TIE FINAL COVWCTION TO, ANY HARDWIRED EQUIPMENT. THE ELECTRICAL COV7RACTOR IS ALSO RESPOVSILLE TO PROVIDE AN APPROPRIATE CORD AND PLLG FOR ANY CORD-AAD-RIX CaV\ECTED EQUIPMENT THAT IS HDT EOUIPPED WITH AN INTEGRAL CORD AND PLLV. D. SEE PANEL SaEOU-ES FOR INEO7MATIOV ON CIRCUITS THAT ARE TO BE ROUTED THROUGH COVTACTORS OR RELAYS FOR COVTROL. E. ALL EQUIPMENT, LEVICES, AND LL NIAMIRES SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR 77-E ENV1RCNWWT IN WHICH TIEY ARE INSTALLED. EQUIPMENT A9UJ7FD OUTDOORS .SHALL BE NEMA 3R. DEVICES ADIMVTED IN DAME OR NET LOCATIONS SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF. RECEPTAaES RATED 15- OR 20-AAiPS AAD 120 VATS IYHICH ARE LOCATED IN DAAP OR WET LOCATIONS SHALL BE GFCI PROTECTED AND EQUIPPED WITH A SUITABLE MFATHERPROCF COVERPLATE (WHILE-IN46E IN NET LOCATIONS). F. ALL LUSS, TERMINALS, ETC. IN ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTIOV EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LISTED FOR A MINIMA OF 75 DEGREE C C0A0tC7"OR5. TERMINATIONS LISTED FOR OE Y 60 DEGREE C CO U CTOPS ARE NOT PERMITTED. G. PROVIDE LEVITON 5EC)EWLESS DECORA STYLE COVERPLA TES FOR ALL RECEPTACLES. &EYED AGTM 1. PROVIDE POWER SB PAC BOX. REFER TO LETAIL 2/E2. 1 FOR SPECIFICATION. PROVIDE (1) 120 VOLT aFLEX RECEPTACLES WITHIN BACK BOX. PROVILE (1) 1-1/2" COVUIT #NTH P(KLS7RIAG TO ABOVE ACCESSIBLE OEILINA; AAD CA&IN; FROM A/V R40V TO TV LOCATION. COORDINATE MOUVTIAG HEICVTS AAD EXACT LOCATIOV W17H INTERIOR AROVI7£CTLRAL DETAILS ANO OFTAIL 3/E2.2. UTILIZE KNOCKOUTS IN 846X BOX TO ENSUE RECEPTACLES AND DATA OUTLETS IN BACK BOX ARE INSTALLED FLUSH WITH SIDE OF BACK BOX. REFER TO PROX CT POCUWW7AT16YV FOR IAGTRLCT16VC ON HDW TO INSTALL RECEPTACLES. 2, PROVIDE POWER COMJECTIOV FOR GREETER LEW EQUIPMENT. J. PROVIDE AN OUTLET BOX WITH 4-PORT DATA PLATE, ADJACENT TO POWER? AAD SEaRlTY BOXES FOR TELE/DATA CALLING. PRO VICE 1-1/2" CODUIT WITH FULLSTRIAG FRQN OUTLET BOX lP TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE, SEE 3/E3. 1. PROVIDE A BLACK DUPLEX BRUSH OR ET FOR IASTALLATIOV AT ASK BASE RAIL. COORDINATE GRIT SPECIFICATIOKS WITH OWRER/PRO,ECT MANAGER PRIOR TO ORDERING. THE LOW VOLTAGE VENDOR IS TO ROUTE TELE/DATA FEEDS AAD 7ERMINAT£ AT THE OUTLET BOX. CS TPM IS TO PILL CABL ING FROM CURET BOX, INTO DESK BASE RAIL ( MIST, THTO 5H CABLING CHAAkNEL AAD TERMINATE AT DATA FLA7£S(S) IN DESK ANO AT THE WALL. 4. TELECOM CALLING TO TELECOM CABIAET SHALL BE IN 2" CMWIT TO NEW LEMARCATIOV POINT WITHIN WALL. CA& ING SHALL BE ROUTED DOWN WITHIN WALL. PEAETRATE WALL INTO THE BACK OF THE CABIAET. PROVIDE BUSHIAG ARO&W OPENIAG WALL FOR CAELIAG. PROVIDE (1) COADUIT STLELED INTO TENANT SPACE FROM BASF BUILDIAG 7FLEPHOtE EQUIPMENT BOARD FOR TELERHO\E SERVICE CABLING. PWVILE (1) MWIT STUSISIED INTO TENANT .SPAOF FROM ROOF OR BASE 6UILDIAG CABLE SERVICE LOCATION FOR SATELLITE DISH/CABLE TV SERVICE. COORDINATE SATELLITE/CAHLE SERVICE REO/IREAENTS WITH A/V VENDOR AND ORARLES SCHWAS PROECT MANAGER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. FIELD VERIFY EXACT LOCATION AND CONDUIT ROUTIAG. COORDINATE INSTALLATION REOUIREAENTS AND ANY WORK OUTSIDE OF 7HE TENANT SPACE WITH LAADILCRO PRIOR TO BID AAD COMMEAVEAENT OF WORK. 5, LOCATE SOVITROL SFC#?ITY KEYPAD AT 7HIS LOCATION. PROVIDE LOW VaTAGE RING AND I" CONDUIT WITH PULLSTRIAG TO ABOVE CEILING. 6. INSTALL OWNER FtwzsHED TELECOM EQUIPMENT CABIAET (GREAT LAKES a24WM5 12U WALL MOUNT SWING OUT EAGLOSL E) AND PROVIDE QUAD RECEPTAaE FOR TELECOM EQUIPMENT. RECEPTACLE SHALL BE OFFSET TO THE RIOVT OF THE CABINET AAD A7FD DIRECTLY BELOW CABIAET AT 28" AFF. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECTLRAL ELEVATIONS. 7. PROVIDE QUAD RECEPTAaE, OPL£X RECEPTAaE, (2) DATA DWIFS AAD LOW VOLTAGE RIAG AT 18" AFF IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATIOV AT A/V CREDENZA. REFER TO DETAIL 3/E2.2 FOR MORE INVORVATIOV 8. PROVIDE FINAL CONNECTION TO SIOVALE. COORDINATE LOCATIOV AAD ALL REOUIREAENTS WI7H SI67V COVTRACTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. PROVIDE AN APPRO'RIAIF LOCAL DISCCTIAG MEANS AD(UNTED IN AN ACCESSIBLE, INCONSPICUOUS LOCATION THAT IS WITHIN S16HT OF 77-E SIGN. LAIC-1 SIGN CIRCUIT SHALL HONE A SEPARATE NEUTRAL AND SEPARATE EQUIPMENT GRaMIND CDODI/CTOR. 9. PROVIDE A STANDARD DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AS IADICATED FOR FINAL COWUECTION TO GRAPHIC. COORDINATE LOCATION AAD ALL REQUIREMENTS WITH ARCRITECTLRAL SHEETS PRIOR TO ROUSH-IN. EACH SIGN CIRCUIT SHALL HAVE A SEPARATE NEUTRAL AND SEPARATE EQUIPMENT 01?aWIND CONDUCTOR. 10. ARU5A AP115 CEILING WIRELESS ACCESS POINT PROVIDED BY CHARLES SCHWAS AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL COWTRACTOR. PROVIDE LOW VOLTAGE CABLING FROM ACCESS POINT TO TELECOM EQUIPMENT CABINET. 11. PROVIDE A T1ON PDX IN HALL. GRAPHIC VENDOR TO HARD -WIRE FINAL CONANECTIOV TO GRRAPHIC LED REMOTE POMSR 5V99LY LOCATED ABOVE CEILING' (NOTE LOW VOLTAGE WIRING WILL RUN FRO1 AE407F POOER SUPPLY TO GRAPHIC). COORDINATE EXACT LOCATIOV AA0 REOUIREAENTS WITH GRAPHIC VETO? AAD ARCHITECTL RAL SHEETS PRIG? TO ROCH-IN. ROUTE FLEXIBLE CO19UIT FROM/ POWER SlU'PL Y TO GRAPHIC. 12. PROVIDE CEILING MOUNTED OGaFANDY SENSORS FOR AUTO/ATIC CONTROL Cl- CONTROLLED RECEPTAOLES (CR) WITHIN THIS ROOM. RECEPTACLES MDT MARKED AS CR SYiALL NOT BE CONTROLLED BY 77-E OCaFAM;Y SENSOR. 13. DISCOWCCT SWITCH AAD WEATHERPROOF GFCI SERVICE RECEPTACLE ARE PROVIDED BY EQUIPMENT MAMFACTURER, INTEOVAL WITH EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE CIRCUITS AND FINAL CaAECTIOJS AS IADICATED. 14. PROVIDE HBMI ✓ACC FOR CaNFTAIENCE TABLE. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WI7H DETAIL 2/E2.2. 15, PRO VILE POWER SE? PAC BOX. REFER TO DETAIL 2/E2. 1 FOR SPECIFICATION. PROVIDE (1) 120 VOLT DLPLEX RECEPTACLES WITHIN BACK BOX. PROVIDE (1) 1-1/2" CODUIT WITH PULLSTRIND TO ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING AAD CALLING FROW A/V R40V TO TV LOCATION. ORDINATE M9UVTIM; HEIGHTS AAD EXACT LOCATION WITH INTERIOR ARLW17FCTL RAL DETAILS AND LETAIL 2/E2.2. UTILIZE KNOCKOUTS IN BACK BOX TO EA5[AE RECEPTACLES AAD DATA OUTLETS IN BACK BOX ARE INSTALLED FLLAS41 WITH SIDE OF BACK BOX. REFER TO PRODUCT DOYUENTATION FOR INSTRXTIONS ON HOW TO INSTALL RECEPTAaES. 16. FtAWISV DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR AAD RELAY FOR HVAC !UNIT SU901 Y FAN SHUTDOWN, FOR INSTALLATION/ BY 77-E MECHANICAL COVTRACTCR. DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR SHALL BE SYSTEM SENSOR hV4120 OR EQUAL. PROVIDE 120 VOLT WIRING TO THE DUCT SMOKE LETECTOR AAD CaV\ECT TO SPARE 20 AMP, 1 POE CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH HAADLE LOCK-CW AOESSORY. ALSO PROVIDE A SYSTEM SENSOR ,>UR7S2-ADS, 0? EOUAL, REA07F TEST STATIOV / AUTI-SIIOVALING ACCESSORY AND COORDINATE IASTALLATIOV LOCATION WITH AUTHORITY HAVIAC "ISDICTIOV AND OWNER PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN. PROVILE ALL FINAL WIRING' FOR A COMPLETE AND FtACTICYVAL SYSTEM. 17, PROVIDE AN OUTLET BOX ADJACENT TO POWER AND DATA /[/NCTIaV BOXES FOR SECURITY CABLING. PROVIDE 1-1/2" CO`WIT #1TH P(LLSTRIAG FROM OUTLET BOX UP TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING SPACE. PROVIDE A WHITE FACEPLATE WITH BLACK DUPLEX BRUSH GROMMET CR£NING TO ALLOW CALLING TO PASS 7HPO(5H TO 6 EETER DESK ON T7E WALL. PROVIDE AN ADDITIONAL SLACK Dt-FLEX BRUSH Q%MET FLR INSTALLATIOV AT ASK BASE RAIL AND FINAL CALLIAG KNOCKOUT TERMINATION POINT. C06RDINAIF FA(EPLA7F/C?LMAET SPECIFICATIONS WITH OWAER/PRO,ECT MANAGER PRIOR TO ORDERING. 77-E S'EaRITY VENDOR IS TO FULL CABLING FROM? ACCESSIBLE CEILIAG SPACE, DO#A( TO OUTLET BOX, THW U5H WALL GRO44ET, INTO LESK BASE RAIL CRLMMIET, THWU5H CALLING OHAMNEL AND OUT OF TERRVINATICIV GROMMET, FOR FINAL CWECTION TO EQUIPMENT AS NECESSARY. ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 LEGEND EXISTING —NEW WORK ® NEW TO EXISTING CONNECTION NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.neisonworldwide.com S6nackel engineers, Now York MIamI •Omaha• Wa Mgelea"Seal,la • Honolulu 806581am wwwsdmKkd.mm C&do'" SCHWAB ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 PERMIT BID LANDLORD REVIEW CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS Q1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. V.0 H OF `/ 41 o GREGORY ROY Z SCHNACKEL > .e . 1s S70NAL E Date.- 10/11/22 CDA it 0407 OaW57 PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB Charlottesville IBS 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 PROJECT #: 22.0000289.00 SHEET INFORMATION POWER AND SYSTEMS PLAN DRAWN BY: SAL REVIEWED BY: GRS SCALE: As noted Ell 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PI NI Illllllllllllt•� LI KI JI HI GI FI 2 3 F CENTER LINE OKP O OT O NOTE MULTIPLE DEVICES ARE TO 40" BE ALIGNED VERTICALLY ABOUT O O THEIR CENTER -LINES 6 1 18" 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 SAL ELECMICAL AWE& A. OFFICE DESKS HAVE A 2' AREA WERE RECEPTACLES MAY BE PLACED. DIAEASIQVS AT DESK FLWITLRE ARE TO TIE LITER OF TIE FLRTIEST DEVICE LOCATED IN THIS AREA. REFER TO LETAIL J/E2.2 FCR MORE IAEORMATION. B. GEAERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE WITH CHARLES SCHWAB PROECT MAIii TO RECEIVE TIE FIRNITIIRE INSTALLATION DRAWI16 FORM TIE FURNi VEAL 5WIFIAG TIE ACC(37ATE FREE AREA FOR OUTLET PLAORENT AT EACH DESK PRIOR TO Ra6Y-IN. ALL OUTLETS ARE TO FIT WITHIN TIE FREE ARES 9`0110N QV TIE FIRNIRRE VEA 'S DRAWING'S. C. REFER TO ARCHITECARAL PLANS AAC DETAILS ON ARCHITECTLRAL SAE= FOR EXACT LOCATIONS. IlEYED Af27E5} 1. REFER TO DETAIL 2/E2.2 FOR EXACT LOCATIONS. 2. REFER TO DETAIL 3/E2.2 FCR EXACT LOCATIONS. J. REFER TO DETAIL 4/E2.2 FOR EXACT LOCATICW. ® DEVICE ALIGNMENT DETAIL NOTES 1. 20A 120V DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MOUNTED AT 18" AFF. (15" MIN TO BOTTOM) 2. LIGHT SWITCH MOUNTED AT 40" AFF. (42"MAX TO THE TOP OF THE DEVICE) 3. THERMOSTAT MOUNTED AT 48" AFF. (TO TOP OF DEVICE) 4. FIRE ALARM AUDIBLENISUAL DEVICE (IF REQUIRED) MOUNTED AT 80" AFF (TO THE BOTTOM OF THE DEVICE). 5. SONITROL KEY -PAD MOUNTED AT 48" AFF. (TO TOP OF THE DEVICE) 6. DATA PORT MOUNTED AT 18" AFF. (15" MIN TO BOTTOM) DEVICE ALIGNMENT DETAIL 5 NOT TO SCALE FLOOR FOR PROJECTS WHERE DESKS ARE ALIGNED BACK-TO-BACK AGAINST A WALL, 1-1/2" DEEP OUTLET BOXES WRAPPED WITH MOLDABLE PUDDY PADS SHALL BE USED TO ALLOW BOXES TO BE INSTALLED BACK TO BACK WITHOUT SOUND ISSUES. OFFICE DESK DEVICE ELEVATION /1 1 NOT TO SCALE 2 ALL GENDER ALL G DER " oCCTo RA ti —9 —2 HALLWAY E BACK OFFICE 1oa OFFICE 1ss EF-1 L os EXISTING $ 11 PANEL A "" CR Lo RTU - B — 3'— " — 7„ — — — 10" HWH-1 GFCI GFCI GFCI FCI +44" +44" +44" �0 44 p D MOP CLOSET 07 C" 9" CI BI AI m 6'-2" RtM —6" WALL EQ EQ SB PAC BOX CENTERED BEHIND TV PROVIDE WITHIN SB PAC BOX: (1) DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (1) WHITE DUPLEX LV BRUSHPLATE FOR HDMI HDMI BELOW WALL PROVIDE BEHIND CREDENZA: (1) DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (1) QUAD RECEPTACLE (1) 1-GANG FOR (2) DATA JACKS (1) 1-GANG OPENING WITH HOLE AND BRUSH ia PLATE AND 1-1/4" CONDUIT UP TO PAC BOX 00 1 (1) WHITE DUPLEX LV BRUSHPLATE FOR HDMI TO TV ABOVE -REFER TO AV SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION ON THE DEVICES LOCATED BEHIND THE TV WALL. -REFER TO DETAIL 2/E2.1 FIR THE INSTALLAITON OF ALL OUTLETS. LOBBY CREDENZA TV WALL ELEVATION 3 NOT TO SCALE s N N I I io io OFFICE oa OFFICE I I mz OFFICE CR CR OFFI FE too a2 ou 00 CR F11 1 (MIN) —11" (MAX) WAP TOWNSQUARE 101 TOWNSQUARE 1n1 /07E 2 O 1 fi � ELECTRICAL DEVICE DIMENSIONS PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'4' 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SB PAC BOX CENTERED BEHIND TV PROVIDE WITHIN SB PAC BOX: (1) DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (1) WHITE DUPLEX LV BRUSHPLATE FOR HDMI PROVIDE: (1) DUPLEX RECEPTACLES (1) 1-GANG FOR (2) DATA JACKS (1) WHITE DUPLEX LV BRUSHPLATE FOR HDMI 0 'T N REFER TO AV SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION ON THE DEVICES LOCATED BEHIND THE TV WALL. -REFER TO DETAIL 2/E2.1 FIR THE INSTALLAITON OF ALL OUTLETS. CONFERENCE ROOM TV WALL ELEVATION 2 NOT TO SCALE ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBOO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.neisonworldwide.com Schnackel engineers Ni York Miami •OmaM1a• Wa Mgelea"Seal,la 0 z `o 0 E m n t 0 3 9 0 0 9 Y 0 ii d 9 a 0 E 9 " z 0 a E a t m 0 m 3 `m 0 a 9 N a 9 0 C&doff SCHWAB it m 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LEGEND (SOME MAY NOT BE USED) SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION EXISTING PANEL "A" NELSON WALL MOUNTED SINGLE RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-20R 'O FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED SINGLE RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-20R FED FROM: LANDLORD METER CENTER MOUNTING: SURFACE MOUNTED P WALL MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ® VOLTAGE: 208Y/12OV, 3 PHASE, 4 WIRE ENCLOSURE: NEMA 1 FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE BUS MATERIAL: EXISTING FAULT CURRENT: EXISTING WALL MOUNTED DEDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ® FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DEDICATED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE BUSLOAD: 112 AMPS AIC/SCCR RATING: MATCH EXISTING 201 E.4th. Street, Suite 1700 BUS RATING: 225 AMPS OPTIONS*: BONDED EQUIPMENT GROUND BAR Cincinnati, OH 45202 WALL LRECEPTACLE SWITCHED OR SPLIT -WIRED ® FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, SPLIT -WIRED MAIN: MAIN LUG ONLY WALL MOUNTED QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE ® FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE LOAD (VA) LOAD (VA) www.neisonworldwide.com NOTES CRT. LOAD DESCRIPTION A B C BREAKER BREAKER A 8 C LOAD DESCRIPTION CKT. NOTES o_ WALL MOUNTED DEDICATED QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE ® FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DEDICATED QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE 1 LIGHTING 851 20/1 20/1 900 OFFICE 102 RECEP 2 0 WALL MOUNTED QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE, SPLIT -WIRED ® FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE, 3 CONFERENCE RECEP 180 20/1 20/1 900 OFFICE 103 RECEP 4 rn SPLIT -WIRED 5 CONFERENCE RECEP 900 20/1 20/1 600 INTERIOR SIGN 6 WALL MOUNTED SPECIAL RECEPTACLE, FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED SPECIAL RECEPTACLE, o -0 NEMA CONFIGURATION AS NOTED ❑® NEMA CONFIGURATION AS NOTED 7 CONF TELEVISION 360 20/1 20/1 180 CONTROLLED RECEPT. 8 WALL MOUNTED RANGE RECEPTACLE ABOVE FLOOR SERVICE FITTING, HUBBELL #SC3098A OR 9 MICROWAVE 1500 20/1 20/1 720 TV CREDENZA 10 IN NEMA 14-50R UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE EQUAL; NEMA CONFIGURATION AS NOTED w ❑� �EILING MOUNTED SINGLE RECEPTACLE, NEMA 5-20R ® CEILING MOUNTED QUADRUPLEX RECEPTACLE 11 COFFEE MACHINE 1000 20/1 20/1 1200 SIGN 12 PC 0 C C=FLUSH CEILING, DC=DROPCORD) C C=FLUSH CEILING, DC=DROPCORD 13 WATER DISPENSER 180 20/1 20/1 SPARE 14 ®C �, ILFLUSHOUNTED MOUNTED DUPLEX ®C �CI BUNG FLUSH DEDICATED Q APRUPLEX RECEPTACLE 15 ROOFRD) RECEP 180 20/1 45/3 2822 RTU-1 16 ®C �, ILFLUSMOUNTED OUNCEILING,DCCATED D PDEX RECEPTACLE ®C RILING MOUNTED QUADRUPLEX R EECEPTACLE, SPLIT -WIRED 17 EF-1 864 15/1 --- 2822 ----- 18 p, 19 BACK OFF. REC. 360 20/1 2822 20 ®C �CIFLUSHOCEI ILNGDDC DROPCORDSCLE, SPLIT -WIRED EaC ASILNOTED YCTFLOUSHECEILING RECEPTACLE, CONFIGURATION GFCI 21 REFRIGERATOR 750 20/1 20/1 360 UPS 22 MULTI -OUTLET ASSEMBLY 1 CORD AND PLUG 23 SHREDDER 180 20/1 20/1 180 SECURITY CONSOLE 24 -0 WALL MOUNTED JUNCTION/OUTLET BOX ®j CEILING MOUNTED JUNCTION/OUTLET BOX 25 OFFICE 108 RECEP 900 20�1 20�1 1500 COPIER 26 Rhnackel X C 27 RECEP 360 20/1 20/1 1800 GREETER DESK 28 engineers, m ®j FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED JUNCTION/OUTLET BOX Q JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED ABOVE CEILING 29 TELEVISION 360 20/1 20/1 1800 GREETER DESK 30 New Yo,k"Mlaml"Omaa• Wa Mgeles"6eal,la"Honolulu M HPL 31 HWH-1 3000 40/2 20/1 180 SHREDDER 32 806b814M wwwadmKkd=ri SWITCH, SPST UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE HORSEPOWER PUSHBUTTON STATION, ONE BUTTON RATED WHEN USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH MOTORS l7 33 ----- 3000 --- 20/1 SPARE 34 0 CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR 0 PUSHBUTTON STATION, TWO BUTTON 35 GRAPHICS 600 20/1 20/1 360 TOWNSQUARE DESK 36 J 37 SPACE ONLY 20/1 SPARE 38 o SOS WALL MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR 0 PUSHBUTTON STATION, THREE BUTTON o S CEILING MOUNTED PHOTOSENSOR SAFETY SWITCH, CHARACTERISTICS AS INDICATED 4 SPACE ONLY 20/1 SPARE 40 41 SPACE ONLY 20/1 1200 SIGN 42 PC U CEILING MOUNTED MOTION SENSOR DISCONNECT SWITCH PROVIDED BY EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER o INTEGRAL WITH EQUIPMENT NOTES: z GENERAL 1: SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR OTHER OPTIONS REQUIRED BUT NOT NECESSARILY NOTED ON THIS SCHEDULE. TC AUTOMATIC TIMECLOCK to ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER, CHARACTERISTICS AS INDICATED GENERAL 2: PROVIDE A HANDLE TIE TO INTERLOCK ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS WHICH COMPRISE A MULTIWIRE BRANCH CIRCUIT. w GFCI PROVIDE GROUND -FAULT CIRCUIT -INTERRUPTER (GFCI) 5 MILLIAMP TRIP TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER. P_C_1 PHOTOCELL ® MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER HPL PROVIDE PERMANENTLY -INSTALLED HANDLE PADLOCK ACCESSORY TO LOCK CIRCUIT BREAKER IN THE OPEN POSITION. L COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER AND DISCONNECT PC ROUTE CIRCUIT VIA PHOTOCELL FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL ® RELAY U) SWITCH, CHARACTERISTICS AS INDICATED © CONTACTOR VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UL 924 AUTOMATIC LOAD CONTROL RELAY- UL 1008 BRANCH CIRCUIT EMERGENCY LIGHTING TRANSFER LOAD ANALYSIS FOR PANEL "A" (INCLUDING SUBFEEDS) ALCR HUBBELL CONTROL SYSTEMS #ALCR1277 & EQUAL GTD SWITCH; BODINE #GTD20A OR EQUAL DEMAND PHASE A (VA) PHASE B (VA) PHASE C (VA) TOTAL (VA) I� BELL CHIME LOAD DESCRIPTION FACTOR CONNECT. DEMAND CONNECT. DEMAND CONNECT. DEMAND CONNECT. DEMAND Z o- BUZZER / ` ROTATING BEACON LIGHTING: 125% 851 1064 0 0 0 0 851 1064 v1 0 { RECEPTACLE: 100% 2520 2520 2700 2700 1860 1860 7080 7080 z WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET; WALL MOUNTED DATA OUTLET; OTHER CONTINUOUS: 125% 0 0 0 0 2400 3000 2400 3000 *P DENOTES NUMBER OF TELEPHONE PORTS 0 *D DENOTES NUMBER OF DATA PORTS 0 F FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET; FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DATA OUTLET; 2❑� *P DENOTES NUMBER OF TELEPHONE PORTS ❑0 *D DENOTES NUMBER OF DATA PORTS OTHER NONCONTINUOUS: 100% 2040 2040 4050 4050 4120 4120 10210 10210 z CEILING MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET; CEILING MOUNTED DATA OUTLET; ❑� C *P DENOTES NUMBER OF TELEPHONE PORTS ❑0 C *D DENOTES NUMBER OF DATA PORTS WATER HEATING: 100% 3000 3000 3000 3000 864 864 6864 6864 K MOTOR: 100% 2822 2822 2823 2823 2822 2822 8467 8467 ,/./�/%/-7�`\i WALL MOUNTED COMBINATION TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLET; FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED COMBINATION TELEPHONE AND DATA �II �I, !V#I *P/*D DENOTES NUMBER OF TELEPHONE/DATA PORTS ❑0 OUTLET; *P/*D DENOTES NUMBER OF TELEPHONE/DATA PORTS ADD 25% OF LARGEST MOTOR: 100% 706 706 706 706 706 706 2117 2117 CEIING MOUNTED COMBINATION TELEPHONE AND DATA OUTLET; TOTAL: 11939 12152 13278 13278 12772 13372 37988 38801 ((� Wqp ») WIRELESS ACCESS POINT ❑v C *P *D DENOTES NUMBER OF TELEPHONE/DATA PORTS EQUIVALENT AMPS: 100 102 111 111 107 112 106 108 CIRCUITRY, CONCEALED IN WALL OR CEILING EP POWER POLE SCHWAB PHASE BALANCE: -6.057 2.667 3.39% CIRCUITRY, CONCEALED IN OR UNDER FLOOR ■T TELECOMMUNICATIONS POLE Q 0 CIRCUITRY, EXPOSED NTP TWO -CHANNEL TELECOMMUN CATIONS AND POWER POLE 2 U o CIRCUIT HOMERUN. THE NUMBER OF ARROWS INDICATES THE---UCP--- UNDERCARPET FLAT CONDUCTOR CABLE WIRING SYSTEM, POWER NUMBER OF CIRCUITS. TWO WIRES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE; a UNDERCARPET FLAT CONDUCTOR CABLE WIRING SYSTEM, SLASHES INDICATE NUMBER OF WIRES. EQUIPMENT GROUND---UCT--- TELEPHONE WIRE IS REQUIRED BUT NOT INDICATED. A 7 INDICATES J ISOLATED GROUND CONDUCTOR.---UCD--- UNDERCARPET FLAT CONDUCTOR CABLE WIRING SYSTEM, DATA ,. EXISTING WIREWAY 208Y/120V 3PH, 4W w CONDUIT STUB WIRE LOOP FOR FUTURE CONNECTION, 10'-0" MINIMUM SLACK —� CONDUIT/CIRCUIT BREAK AND CONTINUED ELSEWHERE X VERTICAL CONDUIT/CIRCUIT 8 METER AND SOCKET /V MOTOR w REMOTE LIGHTING P WER SUPPLY/TRANSFORMER; RPO _® LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARD, SURFACE MOUNTED XX S (XX = WATT RATING M J TRACK LIGHTING END FEED; XX = CURRENT LIMITER RATING, IF LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARD, FLUSH MOUNTED XX ED APPLICABLE) n ® OTHER EQUIPMENT AS NOTED TR LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL TRANSFORMER SAFETY SWITCH I200/3 H SYMBOL MODIFIERS (INCLUDING COMBINATIONS), ACRONYMS, AND ABBREVIATONS 200A GENERAL SYMBOL MODIFIERS (APPLY TO ALL) SWITCHES AND CONTROLS MODIFIERS GENERAL ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS FUSES +XX" MOUNTING HEIGHT TO CENTER OF BOX 2 DPST AHJ AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (OVERRIDES DEFAULT MOUNTING HEIGHT) 3 THREE—WAY AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR 4 — 3/0, ACH 6 INCHES ABOVE COUNTERTOP/BACKSPLASH 4 FOUR—WAY AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE 6 GROUND TO CENTER OF BOX a,b,c... CONTROL AND LOAD ASSOCIATION EGG EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR N 2" EM EMERGENCY D DIMMER ERMS ARC ENERGY REDUCING MAINTENANCE SWITCH CONDUIT GFCI GROUND —FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER DTC SPOT, CENTER OFF, MAINTAINED CONTACT FTL FEED —THROUGH LUGS (SUBFEED LUGS ARE (4 TO 6 MILLIAMP TRIP) DTM SPOT, CENTER OFF, MOMENTARY CONTACT ALSO ACCEPTABLE) H HORIZONTAL MOUNT F BOX COVER UNIT, BUSSMANN SSU SERIES GEC GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR ISSUE INFORMATION PT POKE -THROUGH G GLOW HANDLE (HANDLE GLOWS WHEN GFPE GROUND -FAULT PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT WP WEATHERPROOF SWITCH IS OFF) GND GROUND PANEL ISSUED FOR K KEY OPERATED N.F. NON -FUSED A RECEPTACLE MODIFIERS LV LOW VOLTAGE NEC NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NFPA 70) CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 CH CLOCK HANGER LVD LOW VOLTAGE DIMMER NIC NOT IN CONTRACT G CR CONTROLLED M MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLER WITH NL NIGHTLIGHT PERMIT HG HOSPITAL GRADE OVERLOAD HEATER ST SHUNT TRIP IG ISOLATED GROUND OR OVERRIDE WITH TIMER UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE BID SP SURGE PROTECTION OS1 SINGLE -RELAY OCCUPANCY SENSOR SPST SINGLE POLE, SINGLE THROW SR SHOW WINDOW. MOUNTED WITHIN 18 INCHES OS2 DUAL -RELAY OCCUPANCY SENSOR DPST DOUBLE POLE, SINGLE THROW LANDLORD REVIEW OF TOP OF SHOW WINDOW OSD DIMMING OCCUPANCY SENSOR 3PST THREE POLE, SINGLE THROW OW LIAE GDOPAL DIA6RM/ A107ES LEGEND TR TAMPER -RESISTANT P PILOT LIGHT (PILOT ON WHEN SWITCH IS ON) 4PST FOUR POLE, SINGLE THROW A. ALL EXISTIAG FEEDER SIZES, OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES, ETC. NOTED IDEVICE WITH IPORT(S) SB SWITCH BANK (GANGED SWITCHES) SPOT SINGLE POLE, DOUBLE THROW ON TIE RiE L1AE DIAGYRAM AAA ALL EXISTING PA/EL RATIAG:S 1EDICATED ON TIE EXISTING T TIMER DPDT DOUBLE POLE, DOUBLE THROW PAAEL SOED(KES ARE TIE MINI" SIZES REO(1IRED. TIE ELECTRICAL NEW WORK 3PDT THREE POLE, DOUBLE THROW COVTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL EXISTING CGMDITIONS PRIOR TO BID. IF TIE 4PDT FOUR POLE, DOUBLE THROW EXISTING INSTALLATION DOES NOT AEET TIE MINI" CRITERIA ACTED OV TIE ® NEW TO EX/STING CONNECTION NO NORMALLY OPEN aiE LIRE DIAGX'AM AID WITHIN TIE PAAEL SOEDUES, TIE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD NC NORMALLY CLOSED COVTRACTOR .SHALL MAKE ALL ACCESSARY AWIFICA710NS TO BRING TIE EXISTIAG ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED INSTALLATION INTO COM'LIAAK'E WITH ThE MINIAf(%l! SIZES AA016P RATIACS F IADICATED TIEREIN AAD IIMXLVE TIE COST OF ANY REOUIRED A�IFICATILWS IN "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN ThE INITIAL BID. POST -BID ALOITIDVAL 0057S RESl.LT1AE FROM AN EXISTING INS'TALLATIOV THAT DOES MOT AEET TIE MINIA" CRITERIA 1AVICATED WILL AVT ALL WORK ON THIS PROJECT REVISIONS BE FERMIT7ED. IF TIE EXISTIAG INSTALLATIOV AEETS OR EXCEEDS TIE MINIAkhW SHALL BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH CRITERIA IN91CATED, A0O9IFICATIa%S GF 77E EXISTING INSTALLATIOV ARE A49T PREVAILING CODE. Q 1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 REOUIRED. 2 REVIEW COMMENTS 01/30/23 EXISTING ONE -LINE DIAGRAM = E ELECTRICAL RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE NOT TO SCALE _ LANDLORD G.C. OWNER SITE COND. ITEM FURN INST FURN INST FURN INST EXIST NEW REMARKS DEMOLITION X X NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. TEMPORARY POWER N/A ¢` MAIN OVERCURRENT DEVICE IN OF LANDLORD'S ELECTRIC ROOM X REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM. , D SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUIT � z X REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM. TO LEASE SPACE m Cy GY SERVICE ENTRANCE FEEDERS TO LEASE SPACE X REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM. �C E m ELECTRICAL PANELS X REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM. we iS t 3 METER REQUIREMENTS (INCLUDING CT'S IF REQUIRED) X REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM. SGNAL E o TENANT ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMERS X X X REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM. Dote.• Of/30/22 9 N CDA 0407 005357 9 ELECTRICAL SERVICE FOR SEE POWER 8 SYSTEMS PLAN a HVAC MOTORS X X X SHEET E2.1 m 9 C HVAC CONTROLS X x X PROJECT INFORMATION ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these a TELECOM CONDUIT STUB UP X X X REFER TO TELECOM SHEETS plans and supporting documents under my direct CHARLES SCHWAB ` supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as E TELECOM SYSTEMS CABLING X X X PROVIDE ROUGH -IN ONLY. ALL TELECOM outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Charlottesville IBS CABLING IS BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR 3 Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered 2 TELECOM EQUIPMENT X X X X X SOME DEVICES ARE PROVIDE BY OWNER. systems and/or construction features are 220 Twentyninth Place SEE TELECOM SHEETS deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes Suite S20 and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Charlottesville, VA 22901 LOW VOLTAGE CABLING X X X Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. PROJECT #: 46 GENERAL CONDUIT & WIRING X X X This certification does not relieve the registered 22.0000289.00 design professional(s) of record and other a B SEE POWER & SYSTEMS PLAN parties of their responsibilities for the design or ° RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES X X X SHEET E2.1 construction of the project. z SHEET INFORMATION LIGHT FIXTURES & LAMPS X X SEE LIGHTING PLAN - SHEET E1.1 ELECTRICAL ONE -LINE 0 GC RESPONSIBLE TO SCHEDULE, MONITOR, SECURITY SYSTEM X X X X X AND CONTROL /, DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULES 2 SEE FIRE ALARM PLAN FIRE ALARM X X X SHEET FA1.1 ° m William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge "- DPOR License # 0402021900 DRAWN BY: „ SAL 3 d REVIEWED BY: ° A GRS d SCALE: As noted 3 m 9 M E3.1 O M 0 m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 0 W w N 2 3 4 R 0 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 SECTION 260000 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 15 16 17 18 a N M L K H G F E u C FE rn M O N N m 0 w W PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section supplements all Sections of the Specifications for Division 26, Division 27, and Division 28 and shall apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the Drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of approved electrical systems. B. The Drawings, General Conditions and General Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section and the other Sections of Division 26, Division 27, and Division 28 of the specifications. Where conflicts arise between these documents, the more stringent provision will be applicable, subject to the interpretation of the Engineer. C. Furnish all labor, material, services, and skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection, installation, connections, testing, and adjustment of all materials and electrical equipment specified herein, or shown or noted on the Drawings, and its delivery to the Owner, complete in all respects and ready for use. D. Where plans indicate fixtures or equipment will be furnished by this Contractor for installation by other Contractors, this Contractor shall furnish all such equipment, complete in all respects and ready for installation. Drawings, instructions, and manuals supplied with equipment shall be carefully preserved and turned over to the installing Contractor. E. Where plans indicate fixtures or equipment will be furnished by others, this Contractor shall provide all rough -in and supplies and shall connect such equipment to the electrical system. Drawings, instructions, and manuals supplied with equipment shall be carefully preserved and turned over to the Architect. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Work: The construction and services required by the Contract Documents whether completed or partially completed and includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The work may constitute the whole or a part of the project. B. Furnish: To supply and deliver, unload, and inspect for damage. C. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, connect, and place into operation into the work. D. Provide: To furnish and install. E. Connect: To bring service to the equipment and make final attachment including necessary switches, outlets, boxes, terminations, etc. F. Concealed: Hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, embedded in construction, in crawl spaces, or buried. G. Exposed: Not installed underground nor concealed as defined. H. Drawings: All plans, details, equipment schedules, diagrams, sketches, etc. issued for the construction of the work. I. Conduit: Conduit, and all required fittings, pull boxes, hangers, and other supports and accessories related to such conduit. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Perform work in accordance with the applicable Building Code, Electrical Code, Fire Code, Mechanical Code, Plumbing Code, Energy Code, and all other applicable codes, amendments, and ordinances. Also perform all work in accordance with: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations. 2. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 3. The Authority Having Jurisdiction. 4. Landlord requirements including Tenant Criteria Manuals and Lease Exhibits. 5. Utility company requirements. B. Recognized Standards: Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under the requirements of these Specifications shall conform to the latest publications or standard rules of Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), National Electrical Code ((NEC), National Electrical Safety Code (NESC), National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA), and American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). C. Coda, Landlord, and utility company requirements supersede any requirements of the Drawings and/or Specifications. The Contract Documents take precedence where the Contract Documents exceed code, Landlord, utility, or recognized standards requirements. 1.04 PERMITS AND FEES: Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the work under this Contract shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense. 1.05 TEMPORARY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide a temporary electrical service, including all required equipment such as transformers, generators and fuel, panelboards, etc. as required by all trades. Coordinate power requirements for the temporary service with the General Contractor and the utility company prior to the start of construction. The Contractor is responsible to develop all temporary service plans and specifications as required by the Authority Having Juriadiction, submit those plans and specifications as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, and to pay for all temporary service energy consumption. B. Provide all temporary lighting necessary to provide lighting levels in compliance with OSHA Regulations and as required by all trades. 1.06 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. Obtain, fully understand, and coordinate the work with the complete set of Contract Documents. Any required corrections, including all associated costs, arising from lack of coordination with the complete set of Contract Documents is the Contractor's sole responsibility. B. Work under these Sections is diagrammatic and is intended to convey the scope of work and indicate the general arrangement of equipment, conduit, and outlets. Obtain instructions from the Architect/Engineer prior to rough -in wherever a question exists as to the exact intended location of outlets or equipment. C. Promptly report and discrepancies discovered within the Contract Documents. Failure of the Contractor to report discrepancies shall result in the resolution becoming the Contractor's responsibility and subject to the Architect/Engineer's review and possible rejection. Should the Architect/Engineer reject a discrepancy resolution of which they were not notified, the Contractor is fully responsible to correct the installation, including all associated costs, until approval of the installation is given by the Architect/Engineer. 1.07 SUBMITTALS FOR ENGINEER REVIEW: A. Furnish the following submittals to the Architect for review by the Engineer: 1. Product data for floor boxes and all associated cover plates and flanges. 2. Product data and shop drawings for remote control switching devices. 3. Product data for contactors and relays. 4. Product data and shop drawings for lighting control devices. 5. Shop drawings for low voltage transformers. 6. Shop drawings for panelboards. 7. Product data and shop drawings for electrical service entrance equipment. 8. Product data for enclosed switches. 9. Product data for interior lighting. 10. Product data for exterior lighting. 11. Product data and shop drawings for telephone and data systems. 12. Product data and shop drawings for television systems. B. Use manufacturer's specification sheets identified by number indicated on drawings or schedules. C. Indicate catalog number on the cut sheets. D. Submittals other than those listed above will not be reviewed and will be returned stating such. E. Submittals are reviewed only for general compliance with the Contract Documents. Dimensions, quantities and details are not checked during submittal review. Review of the submittals does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing all materials, equipment and accessories necessary for a complete and operational system meeting the requirements of the project and the intent of the Contract Documents. The responsibility for coordination of substituted materials and equipment lies solely with the substituting Contractor. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All components shall be listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose and free of all rust/corrosion or any visible damage. All items not complying with this requirement shall be replaced without any change in the Contract amount. B. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment, devices, luminaires, and materials of the some type or classification and used for the same purpose shall be products of the same manufacturer. Use onl new un-weathered and unused material exce t as Y P specifically noted. C. Equipment performance and accessories shall be as indicated on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Inclusion in both locations is not a prerequisite to inclusion in the Contract; equipment and accessories specified in either location shall be included in the Contract. Provide all necessary accessories and connections as required for a complete, functional system, including all required components reasonably inferred to as necessary although such components may or may not be apecificaily indicated in the Contract Documents. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Accept all materials on site and inspect for damage and protect from corrosion and entrance of debris. Handle all materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to internal components, enclosures, and finishes. 1.10 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE: Provide a complete parts and labor warranty and guarantee on all systems for a period of one year from Owner acceptance of the completed facility. This warranty and guarantee shall cover all failures unless such failure is directly attributable to vandalism or causes other than defects in material or workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR TERMINATIONS: Provide conductor terminations rated at a minimum of 75 degrees C in all equipment. 2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS: The products specified in the Contract Documents constitute the Basis of Design for the Construction Documents and set mum standards for quality, design, and functionality. Other products are permitted to be submitted, at the Contractor's option, during shop drawing review unless indicated otherwise. Any substitute products shall meet or exceed all requirements specified. Any costs and coordination issues arising out of any substitution, including coordination with all other contractors and subcontractors and any associated costs, is the substituting contractor's sole responsibility. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Work lines and established heights shall be in strict accordance with architectural drawings and specifications. Verify all dimensions shown and establish all elevations and detailed dimensions not shown prior to rough -in. B. Promptly report any difficulties encountered in the installation of the work which might prevent prompt and proper installation. Failure to report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other trades as being fit and proper for the execution of this work. C. Coordinate the work with all trades so that it proceeds without delay and minimizes interference to work that is in progress or has not been completed. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. The Electrical Contractor shall pay for all extra cutting and patching necessary by any lack of coordination. D. Arrange all conduit runs in such a manner that it does not interfere with grilles, diffusers, outlet boxes, luminaires, or other items while providing for maximum headroom. Maintain access to equipment requiring service when selecting mounting elevations. E. Afford other trades reasonable opportunity for the execution of their work and connect the work of other trades as to not delay or interfere with their work. F. Explicitly follow all manufacturer's installation instructions and promptly report any conflicts between the manufacturer's installation instructions and the Contract Documents. G. Provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. H. Verify and coordinate ail requirements and installation details of all materials and equipment prior to rough -in. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other Sections. Determine connection locations and requirements, sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment, sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment, and verify that proper power supply is available prior to subcontractor's ordering equipment. Verify proper voltage, phase, and current rating of power supply and report any discrepancies prior to order, connection of equipment, or start-up. Responsibility for verification of proper power supply voltage and any damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor and any conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. 3.02 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT: Install all equipment, starters, switches, receptacles, and boxes so that all parts are easily accessible for inspection, operation, maintenance, and repair. Provide access doors, fire rated where required, for concealed equipment. 3.03 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND PIERCING A. Cut all openings in a neat workmanlike manner, only as large as required for the installation, and leave surfaces around openings smooth and finished to match surrounding surface. B. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials. C. Fire and/or Smoke Rated Assemblies: Become familiar with all fire and/or smoke rated construction and install work to maintain the integrity of those ratings. D. Roof Penetrations: Coordinate with the Roofing Contractor to provide any required roof penetrations. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Install all equipment, devices, luminaires, and materials plumb, level, securely, and in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NFPA 70 and all applicable NECA and NEMA standards. B. Adjust all flush mounted equipment, boxes, cabinets, and enclosures such that they are flush with finished wall or flooring material. C. Replace or refinish damaged equipment, devices, luminaires, materials, and surfaces where marring or disfigurement has occurred. D. Clean electrical ports to remove harmful materials. Clean exposed surfaces of ail equipment, devices, luminaires, and materials and the interior of all boxes, enclosures, and cabinets of all foreign materials. E. Paint all electrical equipment and materials located on exterior walls, on the roof where exposed to view, where visible from 6'-0" above grade from any property line, and aft exposed conduit to match the surrounding surfaces. Coordinate paint color with the Architect. 3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing: Test the entire system under operating conditions over a sufficient period of time to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status, and suitable operation of all equipment, devices, systems, etc. B. Inspection: Obtain all required certificates of inspection and approval. 3.06 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: Provide one printed copy and one electronic copy of project record drawings to the Owner. Project record drawings shall reflect the actual "as -built" conditions and shall include locations of all equipment, devices, and luminaires, circuiting arrangements, routing of all underfloor conduits, routing of conduits larger than 2 inches, locations and mounting heights of all outlet, pull, and junction boxes, locations of all items requiring maintenance and inspection, and locations of components and circuiting and switching arrangements of lighting controls. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide one printed copy and one electronic copy of operation and maintenance data for all equipment, devices and luminaires to the Owner. Operation and maintenance data shall include manufacturer's cut sheets, maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance intervals, wiring diagrams, parts lists, manufacturers' warranties, certificates, and test reports of each item installed. C. Maintenance Materials: Provide to the Owner two keys for each different enclosure and cabinet, including panelboards, two spare fuses of each type and size, and one fuse puller. D. Test Reports: Provide one printed copy and one electronic copy of all completed test reports to the Owner. END OF SECTION SECTION 260519 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLES A. Provide single conductor building wire installed in raceway unless indicated otherwise, otherwise permitted, or otherwise required. B. All conductors shall be copper conductors with 600V insulation; type THEN for dry and damp locations and type THWN-2 for wet locations. C. Metal Clad Cable (Type MC): Permitted only for branch circuits in concealed locations and only when approved by applicable codes and amendments and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Exposed MC Cable is not permitted; no exceptions. 1. All MC Cable sheaths shall be listed and identified for grounding. 2. All MC Cable shall be equipped with copper equipment grounding conductor. No exceptions. D. Nonmetallic -Sheathed Cable T e NM : Type NM-B ermitted onl within individual ( YP ) YP P Y dwelling units and common areas of multifamily dwelling occupancies which are Type III, IV, or V construction when permitted by all local and national codes and amendments and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Exposed MA Cable is not permitted; no exceptions. E. Use solid or stranded conductors for all conductors 10 AWG and smaller. Use stranded conductors for all conductors 8 AWG and larger. F. Wire Sizes: 1. Use 12 AWG conductors, minimum, for all circuits unless indicated otherwise or as modified as follows: a. 20A, 120V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG to offset voltage drop. b. 20A, 120V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG to offset voltage drop. C. 20A, 277V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG to offset voltage drop. 2. Wire sizes indicated on the Drawings or indicated above shall be carried through the entire circuit to the furthest outlet box on the associated circuit unless indicated otherwise. a. Where a circuit splits into multiple branches, the wire size shall be carried through the entirety of each branch to the furthest outlet box on each branch unless indicated otherwise. 2.02 CONTROL CABLES A. All control cable conductor sizes, quantities, stranding, and shielding as recommended by the manufacturer and required for the installation but no smaller than 18 AWG. B. Horizontal Applications in Conduit: Type CL2 unless otherwise required. C. Horizontal Applications not in Conduit: Type CL2P unless otherwise required. D. Riser Applications: Type CL2R unless otherwise required. 2.03 COMMUNICATIONS CABLES: See Section 271005. 2.04 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Use twist -on insulated spring connectors, mechanical connectors, or compression connectors for conductor sizes S AWG and smaller. Do not use push -in wire connectors as a substitute for twist -on insulated spring connectors. B. Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors for conductor sizes 6 AWG and larger. C. Use crimped terminals for all control circuit conductor connections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION: Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.02 COLOR CODING A. Color code conductors as follows and maintain consistent color coding throughout project including branch circuit conductors. 1. 208Y/120 V, 3 phase, 4 Wire System a. Phase A: Black b. Phase B: Red C. Phase C Blue d. Neutral/Grounded: White 2. Equipment Ground: Green 3. Isolated Ground: Green with yellow stripe 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices and include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 feet of location shown. B. Combining branch circuits in a single raceway is permitted under the following conditions: 1. Provide no more than six current -carrying conductors in a single raceway. Dedicated neutral conductors are considered current -carrying conductors. 2. Increase size of conductors as required to account for ampacity Berating. 3. Size raceways, boxes, etc. to accommodate conductors. C. Neutral Conductors: 1. Provide separate neutral conductors for: a. Branch circuits protected by ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) circuit breakers. b. Branch circuits fed from feed -through protection of GFCI receptacles. C. Branch circuits with dimming controls. d. Branch circuits that serve emergency lighting equipment such as emergency batteries or emergency lighting unit equipment. e. Where indicated by the wire counts shown on the Drawings. 2. Multiwire branch circuits (shared neutrals) are permitted where not otherwise indicated. a. Locate all multiwire branch circuits in vertically adjacent panelboard pole spaces and provide circuit breaker handle ties to simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded circuit conductors. D. Pull all conductors together into raceway at some time, do not damage conductors or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension or sidewall pressure, and use suitable wire pulling lubricant where recommended by the manufacturer. E. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using supports and methods approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure; do not support from raceways, piping, ductwork, suspended ceiling support systems, or other systems and do not allow conductors or cables to lay on ceiling tiles. F. Cut all cables per the manufacturer's recommendations and terminate using suitable fittings including anti -short, insulated bushings where applicable. C. Provide a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet. Provide a minimum of 5 feet of slack where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others. H. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. I. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors and make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies. J. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. Provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the over current protective device, where conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate. K. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, or electrical tape for dry or damp locations. Use heat shrink tubing for wet locations. L. Provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. M. Provide all control wiring and communications cabling, whether or not shown on the Drawings, per manufacturer s recommendations and as required for a complete and operational system. END OF SECTION SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 MAXIMUM GROUNDING SYSTEM RESISTANCE: 5 ohms. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROD ELECTRODES: Copper, 3/4 inch diameter, 10 foot long solid rods. Sectional rods are not permitted. 2.02 CONCRETE ENCASED ELECTRODES: 4 AWG, 20 foot long bare copper wire. 2.03 WIRE: Copper wire sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements. 2.04 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES: Copper, copper alloy, or bronze mechanical connectors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. As applicable to the project, provide all components required for a complete grounding electrode system including bonding of metal underground water pipe, metal frame of the building, concrete -encased electrode, metal abovegground water piping system, metal aboveground gas piping system, and rod electrodes) per NFPA 70 requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM A. Without exception, provide insulated equipment grounding conductor sized per NFPA 70 requirements within each feeder and branch circuit raceway and terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. 3.03 TESTING A. Measure grounding resistance using Fall of Potential Method or Signal Injection Method. Provide additional rod electrodes as required to reduce grounding resistance to less than the specified maximum permitted value. END OF SECTION SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Corrosion -resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the supported weight, including the weight of wire in conduit; do not use perforated pipe straps as a means of support. 2.02 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS A. Use precast inserts, preset inserts, expansion anchors, or self -drilling anchors as approved by the Structural Engineer for concrete elements. B. Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or welded fasteners for steel elements. C. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners for hollow masonry, plaster, and gypsum board partitions. D. Use expansion anchors or preset inserts for solid masonry walls. E. Use sheet metal screws for sheet metal elements and wood screws for wood elements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide all required blocking and supplemental framing required to securely support all materials. B. Fasten supports to building structure and surfaces only. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, conduit, or ceiling suspension wires. C. Obtain permission from Structural Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members or before using powder -actuated anchors. D. Rigidly weld support members or use hex -bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Provide lock washers under all nuts. E. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. F. Provide steel channel supports behind all cabinets and panelboards located in damp or wet locations to stand enclosures 1 inch off wall. G. Provide supports for all low voltage wiring not routed in conduit. END OF SECTION SECTION 260534 - CONDUIT AND WIREWAYS PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT A. Size: As required by NFPA 70 for the conductors installed but no smaller than specified. 1. Sizes Indicated on the Drawings: a. Any conduit sizes indicated to a utility transformer ore based on Schedule 80 PVC conduit. b. Any conduit sizes indicated to the primary or secondary of a dry -type transformer are based on Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC). C. All other conduit sizes are based on Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). d. The Contractor is responsible to adjust conduit sizes as required when a different conduit type is used. B. Underground: 3/4 inch minimum rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, Schedule 80 PVC, or Schedule 40 PVC. Metal conduits shall be galvanized or PVC coated. C. Outdoor Locations above Grade: 1/2 inch minimum rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit. Nonmetallic conduit is not permitted above grade. Conduits shall be galvanized or PVC coated. D. Within Slabs above Grade: 3/4 inch minimum rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or Schedule 80 PVC. Metal conduits shall be galvanized or PVC coated. Coordinate with the Structural Engineer for restrictions and limitations on conduits installed in slabs above rode. E. Exposed Wet and Damp Locations: 172 inch minimum rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit. Conduits shall be galvanized or PVC coated. F. Connections to Vibrating Equipment and Luminaires in Dry Locations: 1/2 inch minimum flexible metal conduit. G. Connections to Vibrating Equipment and Luminaires in Damp and Wet Locations: 1/2 inch minimum liquidtight flexible metal conduit. H. All Other Dry Locations: 1/2 inch minimum rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. 2.02 FITTINGS: Provide listed fittings identified for use with the conduit. 2.03 WIREWAYS: Square D Class 5100 Type LOB for dry locations or Square D Class 5100 Type LDR for damp and wet locations unless indicated otherwise; size as required by MFPA 70 based on conductor fill and bending radius requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conceal all conduit in all interior and exterior areas, including exposed structure areas, unless the Architect provides specific approval permitting the use of exposed conduit. B. Route any exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. C. Subject to the Architect's approval, conduit located above ceilings is permitted to be routed point-to-point provided it is secured and supported per NFPA 70 requirements and complies with all applicable Codes and other requirements of the specifications. D. Do not embed conduit in slabs -on -grade. Locate conduit a minimum of 2 inches below the bottom surface of the slab to avoid future damage from cutting of the floor slab. E. Route conduit in slabs -above -grade from point -to point. Do not cross conduits embedded in slabs. F. Route underground conduit from point-to-point and at a burial depth in compliance with NFPA 70, local code, and utility company requirements. G. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance and arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. H. Secure and support all conduit in compliance with NFPA 70 requirements and group adjacent conduits on steel channel racks and trapezes. I. Provide 12 inches of clearance between conduit and piping or surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. J. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. K. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, masonry walls and floors and seal all penetrations through footings and floors water tight. L. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic, control, and expansion joints. M. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. N. Provide caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. 0. Secure wireway to building surfaces and close ends of wireway and unused conduit openings. P. Ground and bond conduit and wire ways as required by NFPA 70. END OF SECTION SECTION 260537 - BOXES PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ALL BOXES A. Nonmetallic boxes are not permitted unless indicated otherwise or without specific written approval from the Architect. B. Provide all required box hangers and supports, extension rings, mud rings, etc. for a complete and secure installation. C. Use gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together; do not use sectional boxes. 2.02 OUTLET AND SMALL JUNCTION BOXES A. Dry and Damp Locations: Galvanized NEMA OS 1 stamped steel box rated for the weight of the equipment supported and sized per NFPA 70 requirements for the device(s) and conductors installed within. B. Wet Locations: Galvanized cast metal NEMA FB 1 Type FD box with ygasketed cover and threadod hubs and sized per NFPA 70 requirements for the devices) and conductors installed within. 2.03 PULL AND LARGE JUNCTION BOXES A. Dry and Damp Locations: Galvanized NEMA OS 1 stamped steel box sized per NFPA 70 requirements for the conductors installed within. B. Wet Locations: Galvanized NEMA 250 Type 4 cast iron or cast aluminum box with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws and sized per NFPA 70 requirements for the conductors installed within. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in locations indicated and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70. B. Install pull boxes and Junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. C. Install outlet boxes for all wall -mounted wiring devices at heights indicated in Section 262726 unless indicated otherwise. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes prior to rough -in. D. Use flush boxes in finished areas. Do not install flush boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches and one stud separation. E. Locate flush boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. F. Install all wall -mounted boxes plumb and level. G. Install all ceiling -mounted boxes level and oriented parallel with building lines and ceiling grid tees where applicable. H. Install all floor boxes level and oriented parallel with building lines and tile grout lines where applicable. I. Vertically align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, similar devices. J. Install concealed boxes within 6 inches from ceiling accesa panels, air distribution diffusers, or removable recessed luminaires. K. Support boxes independently of conduit; do not support boxes from ceiling support wires. L. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. M. Install cover plates on boxes; see Section 262726 for cover plate specifications. N. Ground and bond boxes as required by NFPA 70. ENO OF SECTION SECTION 280553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES: En raved laminated lastic with 1 8 inch letters on contrastin back round. 2.02 LABELS: As required by regulatory agencies. 2.03 WIRE MARKERS: Cloth, tape, split sleeve, or tubing type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 NAMEPLATES. Provide nameplates with the unique equipment designation at each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure, communication cabinet, and control device station. 3.02 WARNING LABELS: Provide all regulatory required and industry standard warning labels on all electrical equipment, including high -voltage, tested series rated combination, and arc flash hazard labeling. 3.03 WIRE MARKF_RS: Provide wire and cable markers at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and junction boxes for each load connection. Indicate branch circuit or feeder number indicated on Drawings and control wire number indicated on shop drawings. 3.04 COLOR CODE LEGEND: Provide identification label identifying conductor color codes at each piece of feeder or branch -circuit distribution equipment. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplates for distribution equipment visible to the public to the inside surface of door. C. Secure nameplates for distribution equipment not visible to the public to the front of the enclosure using screws, rivets, or adhesive. ENO OF SECTION SECTION 260595 - FIRE STOPPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PREPARATION: Examine the complete set of Drawings and identify all fire rated partitions, floors and assemblies and identify appropriate firestopping method for the assembly. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES: Use only systems listed by UL or FM or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 or ASTM E 119 that have F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating. 2.02 MATERIALS: Elostomeric silicone firestopping, foam firestopping, fibered compound firestopping, fiber packing material, mechanical firestop devices, intumescent putty, and firestop pillows are permitted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and other environmental conditions before, during, and after installation. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent -cured materials ore being installed. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. C. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material. Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage. D. Apply the appropriate fire stopping materials and systems to maintain the fire rating of the partition, floor, or ceiling assembly being penetrated. E. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com 0 khnackel engineers, 90CM41163 wwxudmdodmm ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. I / . l : / r,. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 • u� ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 PERMIT BID LANDLORD REVIEW CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS Q1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. ,, OF `/ F � P GREGORY ROY 2 U SCHNACKEL > TONAL Date.- 10111122 PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB Charlottesville IBS 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 PROJECT #: 22.0000289.00 SHEET INFORMATION ELECTRICAL SPEMICATIONS DRAWN BY: SAL REVIEWED BY: GRS SCALE: As noted E4n1 2 3 4 ru A 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 3 4 0 7 0 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 N L F. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by Authority Having Jurisdiction. G. Install any labeling required by Code. H. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. END OF SECTION SECTION 260919 - CONTACTORS AND RELAYS PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTACTORS A. Description: Square D Class 8903, Type L or Type S unless indicated otherwise or otherwise required. B. Contacts: 1. Provide with quantity of normally open and normally closed contacts as required and a minimum of two spare poles. a. Provide multiple contactors connected in parallel with one another when the number of contacts required exceeds the maximum capability of a single contactor. 2. Coordinate contact rating to match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating for continuous loads, but no less than 30 amps. C. Coil: Coordinate with the voltage of the control circuit. D. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard enclosure suitable for the environment in which the contactor is installed. 2.02 RELAYS A. Description: Square D Class 8501 Type C unless indicated otherwise or otherwise required. B. Contacts: Form C contacts rated at 30 amperes unless indicated otherwise. C. Coil: Coordinate with the voltage of the control circuit. D. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard enclosure suitable for the environment in which the relay is installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install individual controls and relays in enclosures adjacent to panelboard serving controlled circuits and make electrical wiring interconnections. B. Provide all relays, contactors, interposing relays, and controls that are required but may not be shown to switch the loads in the manner indicated on the Drawings. C. Provide nameplate for contactors indicating contactor number. END OF SECTION SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PREPARATION A. Hold meeting with the Owner prior to commencing work. 1. Review zoning and make adjustments requested by the Owner. 2. Determine all timeclock settings such as ON and OFF times for each day of the week, holiday settings, latitude and longitude of the project site for astronomic features, etc. 3. Determine all control settings such as on and off triggers, blink warnings, sweep settings, switch programming, etc. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ALL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES A. Provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors, hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system. B. All sensors shall be suitable for the geometrical and environmental characteristics of the associated space and be suitable for the floor area to be covered. Provide multiple sensors when necessary to meet the required room coverage. 2.02 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Wall Switch: 1. Single -Relay: Wattstopper #DSW-301 unless indicated otherwise. 2. Dual -Relay: Wattstopper #DSW-302 unless indicated otherwise. 3. Finish: As selected by the Architect. K B. Combination Wall Switch / Dimmer: 1. 0-10V Wattstopper Dimming: W-311 unless indicated otherwise; finish as PP #D selected by the Architect. C. Wall -Mounted: 1. Sensor: Wattstopper #DT-200 unless indicated otherwise. 2. Power Pack: Wattstopper #BZ-150 unless indicated otherwise. 3. Finish: White. D. Ceiling -Mounted: 1. Sensor: Wattstopper #DT-300 unless indicated otherwise. 2. Power Pack: Wattstopper #BZ-150 unless indicated otherwise. 3. Finish: White. E. Accessories: Provide heavy duty coated steel wire protective guards compatible with specified occupancy sensors where subject to impact. 2.03 TIMECLOCKS A. Tork DZS series unless indicated otherwise. B. Input Voltage: Coordinate with the voltage of the control circuit. J C. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard enclosure suitable for the environment in which the timeclock is installed. 2.04 TIMER SWITCHES: Tork #SS403 unless indicated otherwise. 2.05 OUTDOOR PHOTOCELLS: Took #2101 unless indicated otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all control wiring and communications cabling, whether or not shown on the Drawings, per manufacturer's recommendations and as required for a complete and operational system. B. Program the entire system as established in meeting with the Owner. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF TIMECLOCKS A. Install timeclocks adjacent to panelboard serving controlled circuits and make electrical wiring interconnections. B. Provide all relays, contactors, interposing relays, and controls that are required H but may not be shown to switch the loads in the manner indicated on the Drawings. C. Provide nameplate for timeclocks indicating timeclock number. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF OCCUPANCY SENSORS AND MOTION SENSORS A. Location Adjustments: Locations indicated are diagrammatic and only intended to indicate which rooms or areas require devices. Provide quantity and locations as required for complete coverage of respective room or area based on manufacturer's recommendations for installed devices. B. Install ultrasonic and dual technology occupancy sensors a minimum of 4 feet from air supply ducts or other sources of heavy air flow and as per manufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers. C. Program occupancy sensors as MANUAL -ON, AUTOMATIC -OFF unless indicated otherwise. D. Mask sensor lenses using the manufacturer's masking material as required to prevent false triggers. E. Adjust position of directional occupancy sensors and outdoor motion sensors to achieve optimal coverage as required. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF POWER PACKS G A. Install power packs on junction box in accessible location above ceiling at the associated sensor. B. Do not switch power serving power packs. All required switching shall occur on the load side of the power pack relay. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF OUTDOOR PHOTOCELLS A. Install photocell facing north with unobstructed view. B. Install such that photocell does not face artificial light sources including light sources controlled by the photocell itself. lk C. Weatherproof all connections. Do not install photocell with conduit stem facing up to prevent infiltration of water. D. Adjust external sliding shields under optimum lighting conditions to achieve desired turn -on and turn-off activation. 3.06 CLOSEOUT A. Demonstrate proper operation of lighting control devices to the Owner and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed. F B. Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, programming, and maintenance of lighting control devices. C. Provide a written report of all program settings and photosensor settings to the Owner. END OF SECTION SECTION 262416 - PAIELBOARDS E u C FE n m PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Description: Square D Type NQ for 240 Volt Class and Square D Type NF for 600 Volt Class unless indicated otherwise. B. Voltage, Phase, and Current Ratings: As indicated or otherwise required. C. Short -Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): No less than the available fault current. The Contractor shall determine the available fault current where not indicated on the Drawings. D. Bussing: As indicated. E. Bonded Equipment Ground Bar: Provide for each panelboard. F. Isolated Ground Bar: Provide for each ponelboard that serves isolated ground loads. G. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard enclosure suitable for the environment in which the panelboard is installed; 5.75 inches deep, 20 inches wide unless indicated otherwise; surface or flush mounted as indicated. H. Cabinet Front: Surface or flush type as indicated with hinged door, flush lock, metal directory frame and finished in manufacturer's standard enamel. I. Circuit Breakers: 1. Bolt -on thermal -magnetic molded case circuit breakers with common trip handle for all poles. a. Provide Type SWD for lighting circuits. b. Provide Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigeration equipment circuits. C. Provide Class A ground -fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) where indicated or otherwise required. d. Provide ground -fault protection of equipment (GFPE) where serving heat tracing or otherwise required. e. Provide combination type arc -fault circuit interrupter (AFCI) where indicated or otherwise required. f. Provide dual -rated combination type arc -fault circuit interrupter (AFCI) and Class A ground -fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) where indicated or otherwise required. 2. Accessories: a. Provide handle ties for circuit breakers serving multiwire branch circuits. b. Provide Square D #HLO1 handle clamps for circuit breakers denoted as "HLO" and for all fire protection and fire alarm equipment and all circuits serving emergency lighting. C. Provide Square D #QO*PAF fixed handle padlock attachment for circuit breakers denoted as HPL" and for appliances without a local disconnecting means. d. Provide shunt trip were denoted as "ST" or otherwise required. 3. Amp Interrupting Capacity (AIC) Rating: No less than the available fault current; fully rated or manufacturer tested series combination. The Contractor shall determine the available fault current where not indicated on the Drawings. 4. Do not use multi -pole circuit breakers that mount in a 1-pole circuit breaker space (i.e. half-size circuit breakers). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install pone lboards 6 feet to top of panelboard but no less than 4 inches above floor. B. Provide 4 inch thick concrete housekeeping pad for surface -mounted panelboards installed within 4 inches of the floor. C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. D. Provide typed circuit directory and nameplate for each panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. E. Provide five 1 inch spare conduits out of each flush -mounted panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Identify each as SPARE. F. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder and rearrange circuits as required to balance the phase loads to within 10 percent maximum imbalance. Maintain proper phasing for multiwire branch circuits. G. Provide nameplate indicating panelboard equipment designation for each panelboard. END OF SECTION SECTION 262717 - EQUIPMENT WIRING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Meet with all other trades before commencing any work and obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other Sections. 1. Determine all equipment connection locations and requirements and verify that proper power supply is available prior to subcontractor's ordering equipment. 2. Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment. 3. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment. B. Verify and coordinate all requirements and installation details of all materials and equipment prior to rough -in. C. Verify proper voltage, phase, and current rating of power supply and immediately report any discrepancies. D. Responsibility for verification of proper power supply voltage and any damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor. E. Any conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CORDS A. Description: Multi -conductor flexible cord Type SO for dry and damp locations or Type SOW in wet locations. B. Conductor Quantity: As required for the load served; include identified equipment grounding conductor. C. Conductor Insulation Rating: As required for the voltage of the load served. D. Conductor Ampacity: No less than the rating of the overcurrent protection device protecting the circuit. 2.02 CORD CAPS: Match cord cap to receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. 2.03 OTHER MATERIALS: Provide all disconnect switches, wiring devices, conduit, wire and cable, and boxes required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field -supplied attachment plug is required. F. Install suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. J. Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls, floors, and ceilings where applicable. END OF SECTION SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PREPARATION: Contact the Architect to determine colors of all wiring devices, cover plates, and carpet and tile flanges, locations where stainless steel cover plates are required, and locations where carpet and tile flanges are required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RECEPTACLES A. All Receptacles: 1. Color as selected by Architect. 2. Provide ground -fault circuit interrupter receptacles where denoted "GFCI" on the Drawings and otherwise required. 3. Provide receptacles with factory -applied permanent controlled receptacle marking where denoted "CR" on the Drawings and where controlled by automatic shutoff controls. a. Field -applied controlled receptacle markings, such as those made by a label maker, are not acceptable. 4. Provide NEMA receptacle indicated with two integral Type A, 5 ampere, 5 volt USB ports where denoted "USB" on the Drawings. 5. Provide identified weather -resistant receptacles receptacles for installed P outdoors. 6. NEMA 5-15R unless indicated otherwise. B. Standard NEMA 5-15R Duplex: Hubbell #DR15 unless indicated otherwise. C. Standard NEMA 5-20R Duplex: Hubbell #DR20 unless indicated otherwise. D. Interior GFCI Duplex: Hubbell #GF20 unless indicated otherwise. 1. Provide GFCI receptacles with audible alarm when the receptacle serves a sump pump. E. Exterior GFCI Duplex: Hubbell #GFTR20 unless indicated otherwise. F. Other NEMA Configurations: As required by the load served. 2.02 WALL SWITCHES A. All Switches: 1. Leviton Decors white switches and screw less white faceplates throughout. 2. Horsepower rated when used as motor disconnecting means. B. Single Pole Toggle: Hubbell #1221 unless indicated otherwise. C. Three -Way Toggle: Hubbell #1223 unless indicated otherwise. D. Four -Way Toggle: Hubbell #1224 unless indicated otherwise. E. Single Pole Toggle with Pilot Light: Hubbell #HBL1221PLC unless indicated otherwise. F. Single Pole Keyed: Hubbell #HBL1221L unless indicated otherwise. G. Three -Way Keyed: Hubbell #HBL1223L unless indicated otherwise. H. Four -Way Keyed: Hubbell #HBL1224L unless indicated otherwise. 2.03 WALLBOX DIMMERS A. All Wallbox Dimmers: Color as selected by Architect. B. LED Dimmers: 1. All LED Dimmers: Dimmer utilized shall be tested and listed by the LED manufacturer as a compatible dimmer. 2. 0-10 Volt Dimmers: a. Up to 16 Amps: Lutron Maestro #MAF-6AM with Lutron #GRX-TVI power interface unless indicated otherwise. 3. Electronic Low Voltage Dimmers: a. Up to 16 Amps: Lutron Maestro #MAF-6AM with Lutron #PHPM-WBX-DV-WH power interface unless indicated otherwise. 4. Magnetic Low Voltage Dimmers a. Up to 16 Amps: Lutron Maestro #MAF-6AM with Lutron #PHPM-WBX-DV-WH power interface unless indicated otherwise. 2.04 COVER PLATES A. All Cover Plates: 1. Leviton Decora white switches and screw less white faceplates throughout. 2. Provide cover plates appropriate for the wiring devices installed within the box. a. Use combination plates when wiring devices are ganged together. B. Wall Plates: 1. Provide standard -size nylon wall plates unless indicated otherwise; mid -size or jumbo wall plates are not permitted. 2. Provide stainless steel coverplates where requested by the Architect. 3. Provide galvanized steel cover plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes located in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. 4. Provide gasketed, cast metal, hinged cover plates for all exterior locations, where denoted "WP" on the Drawings, and where otherwise required. 5. Provide weatherproof while -in -use covers which are listed and identified as "extra -duty" for all receptacles installed in wet locations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper heights and that openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by the coverplates or flanges. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring wall -mounted outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Adjust floor boxes to bring floor boxes flush with finished floor. 3.03 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. General: All mounting heights are to the centerline of the outlet box. B. Receptacles: 1. Install receptacles at 18 inches above finished floor unless indicated otherwise. 2. Install receptacles at countertops at the lesser of 44 inches above finished floor or 3 inches above any sidesplashes or backsplashes unless indicated otherwise. C. Wall Switches: Install wall switches including wallbox dimmers, wall switch occupancy sensors, and low voltage switches associated with programmable relay panels and room controllers at 46 inches above finished floor unless indicated otherwise. D. Telecommunications Outlets: 1. Install telecommunications outlets including telephone, data, and television outlets 18 inches above finished floor unless indicated otherwise. 2. Install telephone outlets for side -reach and forward -reach wall telephone 46 inches above finished floor unless indicated otherwise. E. Modify mounting heights in masonry walls as required to locate the outlet box at the joint in the masonry unit to avoid multiple or split -cut masonry units. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install wall switches with OFF position down. B. Install receptacles vertically with ground pin on bottom unless indicated otherwise. C. Ground -Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: 1. Provide a separate GFCI receptacle for every instance where denoted "GFCI" on the Drawings and otherwise required by Code; do not GFCI-protect receptacles from the load side of an upstream GFCI receptacle. 2. Install all GFCI receptacles in in a readily accessible location. a. Provide faceless GFCI device in a readily accessible location when the receptacle will not be readily accessible and connect receptacle to load side of faceless GFCI. D. Wallbox Dimmers: 1. Install wallbox dimmers to achieve full rating; do not break heatsink fins off. 2. Install power interfaces in concealed accessible location. 3. Provide a separate neutral conductor for each branch circuit serving wallbox dimmers; do not connect wallbox dimmers to multiwire branch circuits. 4. Provide all control wiring and communications cabling including all 0-10V control wiring, whether or not shown on the Drawings, per manufacturer's recommendations and as required for a complete and operational system. E. Install wiring devices in outlet boxes and connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal; do not use back -wired push -in terminals. G. Install cover plates on all outlet boxes including blank outlets. H. Use flat -head screws, clips, and straps to fasten multi -outlet assembly channel to surfaces and use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. END OF SECTION SECTION 262818 - ENCLOSED SWITCHS PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SAFETY SWITCHES A. 240 Volt Class: Square D Class 3130 general duty unless indicated otherwise. B. 600 Volt Class: Square D Class 3110 heavy duty unless indicated otherwise. C. Voltage, Phase, and Current Ratings: As indicated or otherwise required. D. Fuse Clips: Class R cartridge fuse clips where fuses are installed. E. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard enclosure suitable for the environment in which the switch is installed. F. Accessories: Provide grounding kit for all enclosed switches. 2.02 BOX COVER UNITS: Bussmann #SSU unless indicated otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All Enclosed Switches: 1. Install in locations that provide all working space required by NFPA 70. 2. Install 5 feet to the operating handle. 3. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. 4. Provide nameplate indicating equipment designation, NEMA fuse class, and fuse size installed. END OF SECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE Siff:W7AmsG',117atu1_:1(rlijwt;lftil?] A. Verify all ceiling systems for proper coordination of luminaires and accessories including any drywall frames, bar hangers, flanges, trim rings, etc. required for a complete, finished installation. B. Provide only luminaires that are listed for the environment in which they are installed. 1. Luminaires shall carry damp location and/or wet location ratings as required. 2. Luminaires shall be insulated ceiling (IC) rated when recessed into insulated ceilings; coordinate locations of all insulated ceilings with the Architectural plans. C. Coordinate exact locations of all luminaires with the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan(s); luminaire locations on the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan(s) take precedence over locations indicated on the electrical lighting plans. D. Coordinate mounting heights of all wall -mounted luminaires with the Architect prior to rough -in. E. Confirm all luminaire and accessory finishes with the Architect prior to ordering. F. Coordinate luminaire dimensions with the wall and/or ceiling thickness prior to ordering. G. Coordinate mounting location, number of faces, and directional arrows of exit signs as required to mark paths of egress to the satisfaction of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES A. Provide as indicated on the Drawings. B. The acceptability of any substitute fixtures lies solely with the Architect and Engineer. C. The specified luminaire shall be provided at no additional cost where a substitute fixture is not accepted by the Architect or Engineer. 2.02 NON -DIMMING BALLASTS, TRANSFORMERS, AND DRIVERS A. All Ballasts, Transformers, and Drivers 1. Provide low -temperature ballasts when installed in locations where ambient temperature can fall below 10 degrees C (50 degrees F). B. LED Drivers: As required for and compatible with the associated LED module. 2.03 DIMMING BALLASTS AND DRIVERS A. All Dimming Ballasts and Drivers: 1. Provide appropriate dimming ballasts/drivers in all fluorescent and LED luminaires controlled by wallbox dimmer switches or dimming systems whether or not specifically indicated within the specified luminaire's catalog number. 2. All dimming ballasts/drivers shall be compatible with associated wallbox dimmer switches or centralized dimming system control units. 3. Dimming Range: 100 percent to 5 percent. 4. Voltage: Universal (120 through 277 volts). 5. Power Factor: Greater than 0.95. 6. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 10 percent. 7. Sound Level Rating: Class A. B. LED Dimming Drivers: Advance Xitanium series or equal. 2.04 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLIES A. Provide appropriate emergency battery in all fluorescent and LED luminaires indicated as emergency fixtures whether or not specifically indicated within the specified luminaire's catalog number. 1. Battery Type: Sealed nickel calcium (NiCad) with 7-year, minimum, life expectancy. 2. Illumination Time: 90 minutes minimum. 3. Voltage: Universal (120 through 277 volts). 4. Test Switch: Two -wire with LED indicator. 5. Lamp Operation: Two -lamp operation for luminaries equipped with more than one lamp. 6. Minimum Initial Illumination Rating: a. Integrated LED 1000 Lumens and Less: 10 watt output. b. Integrated LED Greater than 1000 Lumens: 20 watt output. 2.05 LAMPS A. LED. As indicated on the Drawings. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all supplementary items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation including, but not limited to: 1. Dimming ballasts for fluorescent and LED luminaires that are served by wallbox dimmer switches or dimming systems. 2. Emergency power supplies for fluorescent and LED luminaires indicated as emergency fixtures. 3. Multiple ballasts for fluorescent luminaires where indicated to have multi -level switching. 4. All trim rings, extensions, stems, canopies, cords, pendant feeds, connectors, bar hangers, fittings, hold-down clips, alignment clips/joiners, etc. necessary to mount the luminaires in a proper and approved method. 5. All necessary low -voltage transformers, connectors, mounting hardware, etc. for a complete low -voltage lighting system. 6. All necessary connectors, feeds, end caps, pendants, mounting hardware, fittings, etcfor a complete track lighting system. 7. Chain hangers for all suspended luminaires in unfinished areas. 8. Drywall frames for all linear fluorescent luminaires that are recessed into drywall ceilings. 9. Wireguards for any wall -mounted luminaires, including emergency lighting unit equipment and exit signs, located in gymnasiums or where otherwise exposed to physical damage. 10. Fire -rated luminaire covers (tents) for luminaires installed in fire -rated ceiling assemblies; coordinate locations of fire -rated ceiling assemblies with the Architectural plans. 11. Any seismic bracing and/or restraints required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install luminaires in locations shown on the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan(s); luminaire locations on the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan(s) take precedence over locations indicated on the electrical lighting plans. B. Install luminaires plumb and level and align with building lines and adjacent luminaires. C. Support all luminaires completely independent of any suspended ceiling systems. D. Connect luminaires to branch circuit. 1. Circuit all exit signs, emergency lights, and nightlights ahead of any switching. 2. Do not use multiwire branch circuits for circuits serving emergency lighting equipment such as emergency batteries or emergency lighting unit equipment. E. Provide all additional emergency lighting and/or exit signs determined necessary by the Authority Having Jurisdiction during inspections. F. Install all remote ballasts, low voltage transformers, and drivers in concealed accessible areas in close proximity to the associated luminaires and connect to the associated luminaires per the manufacturer's recommendations, including adjusting wire sizes for voltage drop if required. G. Prevent insulation from being installed above or within 3 inches away from any luminaire that is recessed into an insulated ceiling but is not insulated ceiling (IC) rated. H. Install fire -rated luminaire covers (tents) for luminaires installed in fire -rated ceiling assemblies; provide fire -rated boxes around luminaires when fire -rated luminaire covers (tents) are not available. I. Burn -in all fluorescent lamps controlled by wallbox dimmers or dimming systems for a minimum of 100 hours prior to connecting to dimmer. 3.02 CLOSEOUT A. Replace any lamps and ballasts that expire before the Owner's acceptance of the project. B. Aim and adjust all luminaires to provide illumination levels, focusing, and distribution patterns to the Owner's satisfaction. END OF SECTION SECTION 275132 - TELEVISION SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL - NOT USED PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSURES A. Backboards: Provide 3/4 inch thick UL-labeled, fire -retardant, interior grade plywood; size as indicated on the Drawings. 2.02 OUTLET BOXES A. Wall: 4-square by 2-1/8 inch deep outlet box with single gang mud ring and cover plate unless indicated otherwise or otherwise required. B. Floor: As indicated on the Drawings or within Section 260537 unless indicated otherwise or otherwise required. C. Wall Plates: 1. Provide standard -size nylon blank wall plates unless indicated otherwise; color as selected by the Architect. Mid -size or jumbo wall plates are not permitted. 2.03 PATHWAYS A. All Pathways: 1. See Section 260534 for permitted conduit types. 2. Provide pullstring in each conduit. B. Service Entrance: Conduit with extended radius sweeps; size as indicated or otherwise required. C. Branch Wiring: Provide 3/4 inch minimum conduit from all outlet boxes to accessible ceiling space unless indicated otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ENCLOSURES A. Backboards: Install at locations indicated on the Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES A. Install in compliance with Section 260537. B. Mounting Heights: See Section 262726. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. All Pathways: 1. Install all pathways with the following minimum clearances: a. 48 inches from motors, generators, frequency converters, transformers, x-ray equipment, and uninterruptible power systems. b. 12 inches from power conduits and cables and panelboards. C. 5 inches from fluorescent and high frequency lighting fixtures. d. 6 inches from flues, hot water pipes, and steam pipes. B. Conduit: 1. Install conduit in compliance with Section 260534 unless indicated otherwise. a. Do not install more than two 90 degree bends in a single horizontal cable run. b. Leave pull cords in place where cables are not initially installed. C. Under floor slabs, locate conduit at 12 inches minimum below vapor retarder and seal penetrations of vapor retarder around conduit. END OF SECTION ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.neisonworldwide.com Schnackel engineers, Ni York " Miami "OmaM1a" Wa Mgelea"Semite " Honolulu BOOS96.i 81-0wwwadindod.mm ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 PERMIT BID LANDLORD REVIEW CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS Q1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. OF � SQiNACKEIY > .e 15 S/ONAI E Dote.• 10/l1/22 CDA 0407 005357 it C&doff SCHWAB d r d a d 0 0 d t 3 9 0 0 m 9 0 9 d 0 E 3 9 d d d d z 0 e 0 9 m a 0 d 3 d 0 0 d a m 3 A 9 0 d PROJECT INFORMATION 0 2 3 4 u 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 W N K K H G IN C ra m C THE AND DATA PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = V-0" NORTH 7REI%W1tl4rA GDOM A07M A. ALL CABLIAG SHALL BE SU99C RTED BY CABLE SADDLES AND ✓-hO0((S ABOVE TIE CEIL INC. DO NOT USE TY-WRAPS OV CABLING. OILY ✓EZC70 IS ACCEPTABLE AAD SHOULD NOT BE WRAPPED TOO T16HTLY. B. ALL HORK S7-MLL COMPLY WITH ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C. 1 COWERCIAL BUILDING COWKNICATIOVS CABLING STAADARD AAD 569, 606, AAD 607. C. ALL INSTALLATIONS SHALL COMPLY WITH ANSI EIA/TIA-568C, 569, 606, AAD ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL CAS. D. REFER TO ELECTRICAL PLANS FOP CaiT/SLEEVES/CABLE TRAY PATHWAYS. E. REFER TO DETAIL DRAWIAG FOR TYPICAL WORK AREA OUTLET COAFICURATIONS. F. ALL WORK SHALL COA4'LY WITH TI-E CLRRENT EDITIOV OF 77E NATIOVAAL ELECTRICAL CWE AAD ALL OTHER APPLICABLE FEDERAL, STATE AH49 LOCAL CAS. G. WHERE THE CONSTRIL TIOV DOCUENTS INDICATE M9RE RESTRICTIVE REOUIREAENTS, 77E CONST7RXTIOV DOCUIENTS SHALL GOVERN BUT THE CONTRACT DOCLAENTS SHALL ACT BE INTERPRETED AS AUThWITY TO VIOLA7E ANY CODE OR REGULATIOV. H. IN THE EVENT O- A CONFLICT OR IACONSISTEACY BETWEEN ITEMS 1ADICATED OV TIE PLANS AAD/Di? SPECIFICATIONS CR WITH CODE REOUIREMEN S, TI-E ADTE, SPECIFICATILW OR CODE HHNICH PRESCRIbIES AAD ESTABLISHES THE MORE COIELETE 9 OR T`E HIKER STAAOARO SHALL PREVAIL. I. ALL MATERIALS AAD EOUIRIENT SHALL BE AEW AAD SHALL BEAR Ti LADERWRITERS LABEL (UL) AAD SHALL BE INSTALLED IN THE MANMER FOR WHICH THEY ARE LES16AED AHD APPROVED. J. ALL STATION CABLING SHALL TERMINATE IN T7E ILF LMESS 077ERHISE NOTED. ALL STATIOV CABLING SHALL ALSO BE BUNDLED IN CWOUDS CF 24 CABLES IN THE IDF AHD O7ESSED AEATLY WITH VELCRO EERY 12' TO 77-E PATCH PAAEL. COVTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE INSTALL AAO TEST ALL CABLING, JACKS, AAD PATCH PAAELS FOR A C06yPLETE SYSTEM. K. ALL TEST RESUL TS SHALL BE DOGbWNi AHD PROVIDED TO 77-E C/STOIER UPOV 0041 ETIOV LT- 17-E ACT. L. THE OWNER AA0/0R OWNER REPRESENTATIVE IS TO BEF AGTIFIED CF ANY CHANGE TO L RAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS IN WRITING CAUSED BY FIELD COIDITIOV COWL IC Ts. M. ALL PEAETRATIOVS 77EOIGH FIRE RATED WALLS A ST BE FIRE STOPPED USING THE APPROPRIATE APPROVED (i CLASSIFIED) FIRE STOPPING MATERIAL. 7HIS SHALL IHKLUDE BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO WALL, FLOOR, CEILIAG PENETRATIONS AA0 CYkNDUITS, SLEEVES, SLOTS OR CABLE. N. ANY DEVIATIONS FROM DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS ARE TO BE APPROVED BY 77E OHNER IN IYRITIAG PRIOR TO PERFOdMIHG THAT NOW. ANY DEVIATIOV DOE WI7HOIT WRITTEN APPROVAL IS DOE AT RISK AAD AT COST TO CONTRACTOR. 0. COORDINATE LOCATIOJ O- ALL CMWITS, SLEEVES, AND CABLE TRAY BEING USED FOR STRUC7ZRE0 CABLING SYSTEM. P. ALL AP'S/WAP'S SHALL BE INSTALLED BY THE COVTRACTOR IN 77E ACT CEILING AAD AVOID ALL GWB S5FFITS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL USE 77-E APPROPRIATE AA-NTIHG BRACKET FOR EACH PARTICULAR CEILING TYPE. 0. THERE SHALL BE NC ACRE THAN TWO 90 DECREE BEADS PER 100 FEET SECTICW 6F CCAWIT WITHIO/T A PULL BOX. ALL BEADS SHALL SE LOG AND SWEEPING. R. COIDUIT Rlk0S SHALL NOT EXCEED 100 FEET IN LEAi WITHOUT A PULL BOX. A PULL STRIAG IS REOUIRED IN ALL COtDUITS. S. ANY CABLING INSIDE A FIRE RATED WALL SHALL BE IN CaiT. A AW RIAG AAD S7RIAG ARE ACCEPTABLE IN NOV-FIRE RATED WALLS PROVi IT CO i IES WITH LOCAL CYJOES. T. TIE LOW VOLTAGE COV7RACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AAD INSTALL ALL PATCH CORDS AT EACH HAP LOCATIOV FOR EVERY CO0\ECTI01N IN THE OFFICE AREA AND IN THE IDF. REFER TO THE CABLING .SPECIFICATIONS FOR PATCH CORD LEAGW AAD COLORS. PATCHING IN THE IDF SHALL BE C00WIM47ED NITY THE OWNER. U. ALL CABLIAG SHALL BE LABELED USING A P-TOUCH OR SIMILAR AECHANICAL DEVICE. HARD WRITTEN LABELS ARE ACT ACCEPTABLE. V. COAX SHHALL BE QUAD -SHIELD. LlOaWii ANTri Af27M A. REFERENCE rHE AU 910 VISUAL L RAWINGS FOR ALL AHD10 VISUAL CABLING REOUIREAENTS. B. COORDINATE AOAVi HEICHT O- TV AAD NAP LOCATIONS WITH AXIIO VISUAL DRAHIHDS AAD ELECTRICAL D RAHIIVGS. C. COOWINATE PATHWAY LOCATIOV AHD INSTALLATIOV WITH ALL AECHANICAL AAD ELECTRICAL illi ABOVE THE CEILING. D. REFERENCE THE SEORITY DRAWINGS FCR IP CAAERA LOCATIONS AHD REOUIREAENTS. E. PROVIDE THE TAG917MG AAO ALL G TAG AAD BOmDIAG TO THE BUILDING AHD MAIN ELECTRICAL PAAEL IN PE IDF. AEYPD A07ES 1. COt9AECTIOVS BETWEEN LAY TV AAD CREDENZA: A SB PAC BACK BOX EAGLOS1pRE SHALL BE PROVIDED BY 77E G. C. CHARLES SCHWAB WILL PROVIDE A CREDENZA WHICH WILL BE INSTALLED HEAR 77E EAD CF 77E PRO,ECT WITH 77E 077ER FtRN17U1?E. G. C. IS TO PROVIDE PATHWAY FROM SB PAC BACK BOX TO AEAR THE BOTTOM OF THE WALL WHERE THE CREDENZA WILL BE INSTALLED PER COS. LOW-VOLTAKE VET IS TO PROVIDE THE FULLONING WORK (1) CL2 RATED "I CABLE 15FT (AWT HAVE MINI" 3FT O- SLACK OV EACH EAD) FROM SB PAC BACK BOX AAD EXITIAG AT 77E BOTTOM O- THE WALL PER TIE COS. ALL COtIECTIOVS TO EO/IPAENT (AV COUNTS) WILL BE HANDLED BY CHARLES SCHHAB. 2. AT WAP LOCATIONS PROVIDE A SURFACE MOMITED BOX MOUVTED ABOVE CEILING. PROVIDE 5FT COILED WIRE AT BOX FOR FINAL COtAECTIOV. J. C CTIOVS AT C15FEREACE ROOM TV., A SB PAC BACK BOX EAuLOSURE 57NALL BE PROVIDED BY 77-E G. C. PROVIDE PATHWAY FROM SB PAC BACK BOX TO 77E AV EQUIP,IENT. PROVIDE DEEP 1900 BOX WITH RVMI PASS Th1RO/6H PLATE WI7H 1 1/4 " COyOIIIT FROM BOX TO SB PAC BACK BOX. LON- Va TAGE VENDOR IS TO PROVIDE 77E FOLLOWING WORK.• (1) a2 RATED hOVI CABLE 25FT (Mini HAVE MINI" JFT O- SLACK OV EACH EAD) FROM SB PAC BACK BOX AAD EXITIAG AT TIE BOTTOM CF TIE WALL PER 77E COS. ALL COiAECTIOVS TO EOVIPAENT (AV COMa0ENTS) WILL BE HAHDLED BY ONARLES SCHHAB. ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, CH 45202 www.neisonworldwide.com Schnackel engineers, Ni York Miami •Omaha• Wk Mgelea• Semite • Homlu II 11100mi- 96.i wwadMKkd.mm C&dam" SCHWAB ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 PERMIT BID LANDLORD REVIEW CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS Q1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. JF `,� ���r�TH �� o GREGORY ROY Z U SCHNACKEL .e 15 S�ONAI E Date.- 10/11/22 CDA P 0407 005M7 PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB Charlottesville IBS 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 PROJECT #: 22.0000289.00 SHEET INFORMATION TELECOM & DATA SYSTEMS PLAN DRAWN BY: SAL REVIEWED BY: GRS SCALE: As noted E5.1 10 12 13 14 15 17 18 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 F� NI LI KI HI GI FI EI u CI FA m CHARLES SCHWAB IBS LOW VOLTAGE HARING SPECIFICATIONS PURPOSE THIS DOCUMENT ESTABLISHES THE STANDARDS AND DEFINES THE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR COMMUNICATION WIRING FOR CHARLES SCHWAB IBS LOCATIONS. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO OBTAIN PRICE PROPOSALS DIRECTLY FROM LOCAL HUBBELL CERTIFIED INSTALLERS FOR THE SCOPE OF THE PROJECT AS OUTLINED IN THE CD'S. HUBBELL CERTIFIED INSTALLERS CAN BE FOUND BY CONTACTING 602-326-4422 OR 475-882-4814. WWW.HUBBELL—PREMISE.COM/CONTACT.ASPX. CHARLES SCHWAB HAS NATIONAL REGISTERED PRICING THROUGH ACCU—TECH FOR MATERIAL FOR PRICING, CONTACT MATTHEW PASCHKE AT 800-824-018OX103 OR MATTHEW.PASHKEOA000—TECH.COM CABLE STANDARDS THE INSTALLATION WALL CARRY HUBBELL MANUFACTURES WARRANTY THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS THE ANSI/T1A/EIA 568—C STANDARD. ONLY CERTIFIED INSTALLERS FOR THE MANUFACTURER WILL BE USED. AFTER COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT, CABLE INSTALLERS ARE REQUIRED TO REGISTER THE INSTALLATION WITH HUBBELL AND PROVIDE THIS DOCUMENTATION TO SCHWAB THROUGH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. ALL PART NUMBERS CAN BE FOUND IN THE TABLE ON THIS PLAN. WIRING CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE ANY CONTRACTOR PERFORMING TELECOMMUNICATIONS WIRING WORK FOR CHARLES SCHWAB SHALL BE A CERTIFIED INSTALLER FOR HUBBELL THE CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE AT LEAST ONE PERSON ON HIS/HER STAFF THAT IS BICSI RCDD CERTIFIED. WIRING CONTRACTORS, THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS, OR SUPPLIERS ARE NOT AUTHORIZED TO USE SCHWAB'S NAME IN ADVERTISING OR PROMOTIONAL MATERIALS WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM CHARLES SCHWAB & CO., INC. ALL WIRING CONTRACTORS MUST AGREE TO COMPLY WITH ALL LOCAL, STATE AND FEDERAL LAWS REGARDING BUILDING CODES, SAFETY CODES, ENVIRONMENTAL CODES, NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE AND ANY OTHER APPLICABLE LAWS WITHIN THE JURISDICTION OF THE PROJECT. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR INSURING THAT ALL UTP CABLES MEET APPLICABLE GOVERNING BODY FLAME RETARDANT SPECIFICATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR MUST BE LICENSED IN THE SUBJECT STATE FOR INSTALLATION OF "LOW VOLTAGE WIRING INSTALLATIONS AS REQUIRED BY STATE LAWS AND REGULATIONS. ALL WIRING CONTRACTORS SHALL EXTEND A MINIMUM OF ONE(1) FULL YEAR PARTS AND LABOR WARRANTY ON THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS WIRING WORK PERFORM FOR CHARLES SCHWAB. ANY TRAVEL COSTS ASSOCIATED WITH THE WARRANTY SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR AND SHALL NOT BE BILLED BACK TO THE OWNER. DAMAGE TO PARTS AND EQUIPMENT RESULTING FROM THE FAULT OR NEGLIGENCE OF THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE REPAIRED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT NO COST TO THE OWNER. THIS WARRANTY IS IN ADDITION TO THE STANDARD MULTI —YEAR WARRANTY PROVIDED UNDER THE HUBBELL STRUCTURED WIRING SYSTEMS. THE CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE DOCUMENTATION IDENTIFYING WIRING INSTALLATIONS WARRANTY PROVISIONING FOR THE WARRANTY LIFE OF THE WIRING INSTALLATIONS. THIS DOCUMENTATION MUST SPECIFICALLY IDENTIFY WHO (SUBCONTRACTOR, HUBBELL, ETC.) WILL SUPPORT THE WIRING INSTALLATIONS WARRANTY IN THE EVENT THAT THE CONTRACTOR SHOULD CEASE BUSINESS OPERATIONS DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD. THE DOCUMENTATION SHOULD ALSO PROVIDE DETAILS ON THE TYPE OF CABLE END —TO —END WARRANTY THAT IS BEING OFFERED, I.E. "CHANNEL WARRANTY" OR 'LINK WARRANTY". A COPY OF THE WARRANTY AND CERTIFICATION TO BE PROVIDED AT THE END OF THE PROJECT AND KEPT WITH THE FACILITIES PROJECT FILE. FOR NEW INSTALLATIONS THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR MUST SUPPLY AS —BUILT DRAWINGS IN SOFT AND HARD FORM. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR MUST HAVE SCHWAB LEGAL AGREEMENTS IN PLACE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, STANDARD CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT, CONFIDENTIALITY AND NONDISCLOSURE AGREEMENT AND PROOF OF INSURANCE. HIRING SUBCOMPONENTS ALL HORIZONTAL CABLING SHOULD QUALIFY TO BE PART OF THE MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFIED SOLUTION. ALL HORIZONTAL CABLING SHOULD BE ROUTED IN A MAIN BUNDLE AND ALWAYS MAKE 90 DEGREE TURNS (NO DIAGONAL ROUTES). ALL CABLING SHALL BE SECURED USING VELCRO ONLY. THE CABLING IS TO BE SUPPORTED SUFFICIENTLY TO MEET LOCAL CODES. ALL HORIZONTAL CABLING IS TO BE BLUE. LABELING ALL WORKSTATION JACKS AND CABLES ARE TO BE LABELED WITH THE DESIGNATED PANEL NUMBER FROM THE TABLE BELOW. THESE SAME IDENTIFYING LABELS ARE TO BE USED ON THE ORIGINATING ENDS. THESE LABELS SHOULD APPEAR ON THE PATCH PANEL, EACH END OF THE CABLE AND ON THE WORKSTATION JACK. ALL LABELS SHOULD BE A MACHINE —GENERATED WRAP —AROUND LABEL WITH NO HAND—WRITTEN LABELS ALLOWED ON ANY OF THE CABLING. g I o 0 0 o w o 0 0 Q N, ED 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1819 20 21 22 23 24 t ww" t®+®+ +®+®t n CD TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET INSTALLATION & LAYOUT SCHWAB WILL PROVIDE TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET FOR THE LOW —VOLTAGE VENDOR TO INSTALL. THE AREA BEHIND THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET SHOULD BE INSTALLED WITH 3/4 INCH FIRE —TREATED PLYWOOD, BETWEEN THE STUDS, BEHIND THE SHEET —ROCK, TO BE PROVIDED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR OF THE PROJECT. SCHWAB PROVIDES SOME OF THE COMPONENTS FOR THE TELECOMMUNICATION CABINET AND THE LOW —VOLTAGE VENDOR MUST PROCURE THE REMAINDER AND INSTALL THE CABINET/COMPONENTS. PLEASE SEE TABLE ON THIS PLAN FOR PART UST/NUMBERS AND THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET DRAWING FOR PLACEMENT OF COMPONETS. SCHWAB WILL PROVIDE: * THE CABINET ITSELF * ONE SHELF * ONE 4' FAN KIT (INSTALLED IN THE TOP REAR KNOCKOUT OF THE CABINET, CLOSEST TO THE WALL WHERE MOUNTED) * TWO 14—OUTLET POWER STRIPS THE LOW —VOLTAGE VENDOR WILL PROVIDE: * ONE OR MORE CAT6 24—PORT PATCH PANEL AS REQUIRED ALL HORIZONTAL CABLING AND ANY POWER CORDS IN THE CABINET SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH ENOUGH SLACK TO HERE THE CABINET DOOR WILL BE ABLE TO SWING OPEN. CABLES SHOULD BE ROUTED DOWN THE WALL BEHIND THE CABINET AND ENTER THE CABINET AT THE PUNCH OUT IN THE REAR OF THE CABINET. GENERAL CONTRACTOR WILL PROVIDE 2' RING/STRING ACCESS WITH A BUSHING A 2" EMT CONDUIT SHALL BE PROMDED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO ROUTE ANY CABLING FROM THE DMARC TO THE SCHWAB SUITE. OFFICES: TWO (2) EACH, CAT 6 UTP CABLES TO EACH WORKSTATION WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS: ONE (1) CAT 6 UTP CABLE TO EACH ACCESS POINT. THE NUMBER OF CAT 6 UTP CABLES FOR ALL OTHER LOCATIONS IS AS SPECIFIED IN THE CD'S. THE FIRE RATING OF ALL CABLE MUST COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS. UPON COMPLETION OF STATION CABLING, LOW —VOLTAGE VENDOR TO PROVIDE SOFT AND HARD COPY OF CABLING PLAN WITH JACK NUMBERING. A HARD, LAMINATED COPY TO BE POSTED ON THE WALL MOUNTED CABINET DOOR. SOUD—WALL LOCATIONS REQUIRED A DRYWALL RING WITH FLUSH —MOUNTED JACK ASSEMBLIES (WHITE). ALL JACKS WILL BE COMPATIBLE WITH THE OFFERED HARING SOLUTION AND TERMINATED 5688. ALL JACKS SHALL BE WHITE IN COLOR. ALL FOUR PAIRS OF THE CABLE MUST BE TERMINATED ON THE STATION JACK IN ORDER TO MAINTAIN THE ANSI/TIA/EIA-568—C STANDARD. ALL CABLES SHALL BE TERMINATED IN THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET DIRECTLY TO THE CAT 6 PATCH PANEL. 1. HDMI CONNECTION BETWEEN LOBBY TV AND AV CREDENZA A PAC-526 ENCLOSURE SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. SCHWAB WILL PROVIDE A CREDENZA WHICH WILL BE INSTALLED NEAR THE END OF THE PROJECT WITH THE OTHER FURNITURE. GC IS TO PROVIDE PATHWAY FROM THE PAC-256 ENCLOSURE WHERE THE TV WILL BE INSTALLED, TO NEAR THE BOTTOM OF WALL WHERE THE CREDENZA WIL LBE INSTALLED PER CD'S. LOW VOLTAGE VENDOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL (1) CL2 RATED HDMI CABLE 15FT (MUST HAVE MINIMUM OF 3FT OF SLACK ON EAH END) FROM SP PAC BACK BOX AND EXITING AT THE BOTTOM OF THE WALL. ALL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT (AV COMPONENTS) SHALL BE HANDLED BY SCHWAB. 2. HDMI CONFERENCE ROOM TV CONNECTION A PAC-256 ENCLOSURE, DEEP 1900 BOX, AND HDMI PASS THROUGH PLATE SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. GC TO COORDINATION PATHWAY FROM THE PAC ENCLOSURE WHERE THE TV WILL BE INSTALLED, TO LOCATION OF AV EQUIPMENT WITH SCHWAB VENDOR PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. LOW —VOLTAGE VENDOR IS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL: * CLD2—RATED HDMI CABLE (LENGTH DEPENDENT ON APPLICATION) FROM PAC ENCLOSURE TO AV COMPONENT LOCATIONS. CABLE MUST HAVE MINIMUM 3 FEET SLACK ON EACH END. * ALL CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT (AV COMPONENTS) WILL BE HANDLED BY SCHWAB. ii �I`.DI�Ir7rP!_1 I� LOW —VOLTAGE VENDOR WILL PROVIDE CABLE TO EXTEND THE DMARC FROM THE MPOE OF THE BUILDING TO SCHWAB'S TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET. THE EXTENDED DMARC SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF TWO (2) CAT 6 CABLES MEETING LOCAL BUILDING CODES FOR FIRE SAFETY. THE CABLE SHOULD ORIGINATE ON A 66 BLOCK IN THE BUILDING MPOE AND TERMINATE ON A TWO (2) PORT SURFACE MOUNT BOX MOUNTED WITHIN THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET LOCATED IN THE SCHWAB SUITE. LOW —VOLTAGE VENDOR SHALL ALSO PROVIDE TWO (2) QUAD SHIELD RG6 COAX CABLES EXTENDED FROM THE MPOE. ONE (1) CABLE WILL TERMINATE IN THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET AND ONE LOBBY CREDCABLE ENZA NOTE:OCABLE TO HAVE 1THE 0' SLACKABINET AND AT CREDENZA TERMINATES MAY ALSO NEED TO SPLIT THIS RG6 CABLE AND RUN TO LARGE OFFICE TV CABLE RECEIVERS AND KEEP SPUTTER IN TELECOM CABINET. �i1�I:Iill9ty_1:1i11�YA LOW VOLTAGE VENDER WILL EXTEND POTS LINES FROM THE MPOE (VIA THE CAT 6 CABLES MENTIONED ABOVE) INTO THE SUITE AND TERMINATED ON THE 2 PORT SURFACE MOUNTED BOX. WHEN APPLICABLE, THE LOW —VOLTAGE VENDOR WILL ALSO EXTEND THE DSL LINE FROM THE MPOE INTO THE SUITE VIA THE 2 CAT 6 CABLES. A 4 PAIR SPUTTER SHALL BE USED TO BREAK OUT THE PAIRS FROM THE "A" JACK ON THE 2 PORT SURFACE MOUNTED BOX FOR ANY POTS LINE OR DSL CONNECTIONS. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A SCHWAB PROVIDED WIRELESS ACCESS POINT (WAP) ARUBA AP225 SHALL BE INSTALLED ON THE BEIUNG GRID BY LOW VOLTAGE CABLE VENDOR. THE LOCATION OF THE WAP SHALL BENOTED ON THE DRAWING. THE LOW —VOLTAGE VENDOR SHALL INSTALL ONE (1) CAT 6 UTP CABLE IN A SURFACE MOUNTED BOX ABOVE THE CEILING GRID AND PROVIDE A SEVEN FOOT PATCH CORD FOR IT. THE CABLE SHALL BE TERMINATED IN THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET ON THE PATCH PANEL. THE LOW —VOLTAGE VENDOR SHALL ALSO PROVIDE A PATCH CORD FOR THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET SO THAT THE DEVICE CAN BE PATCHED INTO THE NETWORK SWITCH. GROUNDING LOW —VOLTAGE VENDOR IS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL A #6AWG COPPER BOUNDING CONDUCTOR FROM THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET TO THE NEAREST AC ELECTRICAL GROUND OR TELECOMMUNICATIONS MAIN GROUND BUSBAR (TMGB). PATCH CABLES FOR THE DATA AND VOICE EQUIPMENT TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET CABLE VENDOR IS TO PROVIDE A CAT 6 DATA PATCH CABLE FOR ALL DATA AND VOICE JAX LOCATIONS FOR THE PROJECT. THESE PATCH CORDS MUST BE THREE (3) FEET LONG AND GRAY IN COLOR. SCHWAB WILL USE THESE CABLES TO CROSS —CONNECT THE JACK TO THE PATCH PANEL IN THE NETWORK CABINET. VNIIV Wt fill IIs] Zi0 CABLE VENDOR IS TO ALSO PROVIDE A CATS STATION —SIDE PATCH CABLE FOR EACH DATA AND VOICE PORT CONNECTION IN EACH LOCATION FOR ITEMS SUCH AS PHONES, COMPUTERS, AND PRINTERS. THESE PATCH CORDS MUST BE TEN (10) FEET LONG, WITH EXCEPTION OF THE GREETER DESK PATCH CORDS, WHICH MUST BE FIFTEEN (15) FEET LONG, AND GRAY IN COLOR. PATCH CABLES FOR THE POTS VOICE EQUIPMENT THE LOW —VOLTAGE VENDOR SHALL PROVIDE (3) 12'RJ-11 PATCH CORDS TO BE USED AT THE MULTI —FUNCTION PRINTER (FAX), SONITROL ALARM BOX, AND DSL IF REQUIRED. TELCO COMPLETE THE INSTALLATION OF THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABINET WALL BE 100% COMPLETE WITH CONSTRUCTION — ASSEMBLED, INSTALLED, POWER, GROUND, MPOE CABLES INSTALLED, BACKBOARD, PAINT, FLOORING, CEILING TILES, DOORS AND LIGHTING, RACKS, RACK MOUNTED POWER SUPPLY UNITS, EXTENDED DMARC, STATION CABLING AND JACKS, TESTED, LABELED AND CERTIFIED BY THE END OF THE 2ND WEEK OF CONSTRUCTION. ALL EQUIPMENT AND INFRASTRUCTURE INSTALLED SHALL ALSO BE CLEAN AND DUST FREE. FAILURE TO TURN OVER THE EQUIPMENT ROOM 100% COMPLETE BY THE END OF THE SECOND WEEK OF CONSTRUCTION WILL RESULT IN DELAY OF PROJECT COMPLETION. SCHWAB WILL ALSO REQUIRE THE CABLE VENDOR TO BE ON —SITE FOR THE DAY OF THE NETWORK TURN —UP. THAT DATE WILL BE CALLED CUT BY THE TECHNICAL TEAM DURING PROJECT MEETINGS. LAST DAY THE DAY OF THE BRANCH MOVE OR PROJECT FINISH SCHWAB REQUIRES ON PERSON FROM THE LOW VOLTAGE CABLING COMPANY BE ON SITE TO ADDRESS ANY CABLING ISSUES THAT MAY COME UP. THE DATE AND TIME WILL BE SCHEDULED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND THE FACILITIES PROJECT MANAGER. CREDENZA LAYOUT INSIDE CREDENZA PARTS LIST PARTS TO BE SUPPLIED BY LOW —VOLTAGE —VENDOR —QUANTITIES AND LENGTHS VARY PER LOCATION: DESCRIPTION MFG PART NUMBER 24—PORT PATCH PANEL, CAT 6 HUBBELL P6E24U 2 PORTISB SURFACE MOUNT BOX HUBBELL ISB2W FACEPLATES HUBBELL IFP14W WHITE FACEPLATES FOR MODULAR FURNITURE HUBBELL IFP14W WHITE XCELERATOR CAT6 JACKS HUBBELL HXJ6—XX PATCH CORDS CAT6 HUBBELL HC6GY—XX CAT6 NEXTSPEED (RISER) HUBBELL C6RRB CAT6 NEXTSPEED (PLENUM) HUBBELL C6RPB 4 PAIR SPUTTER SIEMON'S YA4-4U1 RJ-11 PATCH CORDS CABLE EXCHANGE SSRJ11ST-12FT PARTS SUPPLIED BY SCHWAB: DESCRIPTION BRAND PART NUMBER WALL MOUNT CABINET GREAT LAKES GL24WMS SINGLE 4" FAN KIT GREAT LAKES 7217-04 POWER STRIP GREAT LAKES 7219—SR14 A — HDMI SWITCH B — DIRECTV SATELLITE RECEIVER C — DMS PC DUPLEX DATA QUAD LOW RECEPTACLE OUTLET RECEPTACLE VOLTAGE PLASTER RING O ALL VOICE & DATA CABLES SHALL BE TERMINATED ON THE 24 PORT PATCH PANEL. o TERMINATE THE 2 CAT5 CABLES FROM THE BUILDING MPOE TO 2—PORT SURFACE MOUNT BOXES MOUNTED WITHIN THE CABINET o ENOUGH SLACK SHALL BE LEFT IN THE VOICE/DATA CABLES AND THE POWER STRIP POWER CORD SO THE CABINET DOOR WILL BE ABLE TO SWING FULLY OPEN O POWER STRIPS SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE FRONT OF THE CABINET. 2 CABLE/DSL MODEMS 1 ARUBA 7024 SWITCH 2 MIKROTIK ROUTERS NOTE: PLEASE REFER TO A4.1 — HUNG IT CABINET ELEVATION. " F1RE RATED PLYWOOD BAC INN BMIND SH€ETR CX ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com Schnackelrs enginee Hex Ydkl Muml*OmNal lns Mpeh *Seatlpl Xonolulu BDDb81-0963 ww�dllyedrlmin Charles a a u a` z 8 E n d 0 5 v 9 0 n O d 16E 2 m S a U z s n n s N 5 0 0 a n a SCHWAB d rxTH OF 8 pt d Q 9 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 NELSON P 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.neisonworldwide.com COMcheck Software Version 4.1.5.5 A B C D E COMcheck Software Version 4.1.5.5 Fixture ID : Description / Lamp / Wattage Per Lamp / Ballast Lamps/ # of Fixture (C X D) Interior Lighting Compliance Certificate Fixture Fixtures Wan. Inspection Checklist N Freeze protection and snow/Ice ;❑Complies Requirement will be met. Type BC4-EM: BC4-EM: 2x4 Recessed LED w/ EM: Other: 1 1 32 32 melting system sensors for future❑Does Not Total Proposed Watts = 678 Energy Code: 90.1 (2016) Standard connection to controls. ;❑Not Observable' Interior Lighting PASSES Requirements: 100.0% were addressed directly in the COMcheck software j❑Not Applicable Project Information Text in the "Comments/Assumptions" column is provided by the user in the COMcheck Requirements screen. For each Additional Comments/Assumptions: Energy Code: 90.1 (2016) Standard Interior Lighting Compliance Statement requirement, the user certifies that a code requirement will be met and how that is documented, or that an exception Project Title: Charles Schwab Compliance Statement: The proposed interior lighting alteration project represented in this document is consistent with the is being claimed. Where compliance is itemized in a separate table, a reference to that table is provided. building plans, specifications, and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed interior lighting Project Type: Alteration systems have been designed to meet the 90.1 (2016) Standard requirements in COMcheck Version 4.1.5.5 and to comply with /�r any applicable mandatory requirements listed in the Inspection Chec Its Rhnac QI g g /4f October 10, 2022 4.2.2, [Plans, specifications, and/or ;❑Complies Requirement will be met. Qe�.f(�n�i Construction Site: Owner/Agent: ent: Designer/Contractor: ner/Contractor: Gregory R. Schnackel rxj 220 Twentyninth Place Gregory Schnackel Name - Title Signature Date 6.4.4.2.1, !calculations provide all information❑Does Not.,York . Miami .omana.�,fa,9elesSemite .Ao.i M Suite S20 Schnackel Engineers 6.7.2 :with which compliance can be :[:]Not Observable; 806581-0963 wwadw°d°d'mr" Charlottesville, VA 22901 3035 South 72nd Street 1, H Op 1PR211 ,determined for the mechanical Omaha, NE 68124 ��,i y !systems and equipment and❑Not Applicable (402) 391-7680 document where exceptions to the (.� Istandard are claimed. Load y kalculations per acceptable CREGORY ROY [engineering standards and Allowed Interior Lighting Power SCHNAICKEL > ihandbooks. A B C D 4.2.2, !Plans, specifications, and/or ;❑Complies Requirement will be met. provide Area Category Floor Area Allowed Allowed Watts w � I NIL031596 7.7.1, 'calculations all information ❑Does Not tt2 Watts / ft2 B X C '� 10.4.2 !with which compliance can be ( ) ( ) A' (Pi !determined for the service water []Not Observable 1-Common Space Types:Office - Open Plan 533 0.81 432 FSS/OVAL i(heating systems and equipment and❑Not Applicable 2-Common Space Types:OHice -Enclosed 582 0.93 541 [document where exceptions to theI ,standard are claimed. Hot water L 3-Common Space Types:Corridor/Transiticn <8 ft wide 124 0.66 82 ;system sized per manufacturer's 4-Common SpaceTypes:Restrooms 75 0.85 64 02.21PIans, sizingguide. 5-Common Space Types:Electrical/Mechanical 10 0.43 4 Plans, specifications, and/or❑Complies Requirement will be met. 6-Common Space Types:Conference/Meeting/Multipurpose 181 1.07 194 calculations provide all information❑Does Not Total Allowed Watts= 1317 with which compliance can bej❑Not Observable; determined for the electrical systemsProposed Interior Lighting Powerexcand equipment and document here❑Not Applicable eptions are clamed. Feed-WIlk p B C D E connectors sized in accordance with Fixture ID : Description / Lamp / Wattage Per Lamp / Ballast Lamps/ # of Fixture (C X D) approved plans and branch circuits Fixture Fixtures Watt. sized for maximum drop of 3%. specifications, and/or Complies ; Requirement will be met. Common Space Types:Ofice - Open Plan (533 sc.ft.) 9.4.3, 9.7 !calculations provide all information ❑Does Not Type BC: BC: 2x2 Recessed LED: Other: 1 7 31 217 [PR411 ;with which compliance can be [❑Not Observable; K Type BC-EM: BC-EM: 2x2 Recessed LED w/ EM: Other: 1 2 31 62 (determined for the interior lighting land electrical systems and equipment ;❑Not Applicable Common Space Types:cesse - Enclosed (582 sc.ft.l land document where exceptions ti �II � I V#/ Type BC4: BC4: 2x4 Recessed LED: Other: 1 7 32 224 ;the standard are claimed. Information Type BC4-EM: BC4-EM: 2x4 Recessed LED w/ EM: Other: 1 1 32 32 !provided should include interior ;lighting power calculations, wattage of; SCHWABon :Space: L D DowCorri:Otheransition <8 ft wide (124 sc.ft.l bulbs and ballasts, transformers and ,�. i . • f, i Type AA: AA: LED Downlight: Other: 1 1 12 12 'control devices. TIlkype AA-EM: AA-EM: LED Downlight w/ EM: Other: 1 2 12 24 6.7.2.4 ;Detailed instructions for HVAC❑Complies Requirement will be met. ^ ([PRS11 systems commissioning included on❑Does Not Common Space Tvoes:Restrooms 75 sc.ft.l7 ' ! ; Type AA: AA: LED Downlight: Other: 1 1 12 12 ,the plans or specifications for projects I❑Not Observable; Type AA-EM: AA-EM: LED Downlight w/ EM: Other: 1 1 12 12 I>=50,000 ft2.❑Not Applicable Common Space Types:Electrical/Mechanical (10 sett.) Additional Comments/Assumptions: Type S2: S2: LED Strip: Other: 1 1 19 19 J Common Space Types:Conference/Meeting/Mult[purpose (181�a.ft.1 Type BC4: BC4: 2x4 Recessed LED: Other: 1 1 32 32 11 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) 111 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) Ilk Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/1022 Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 1 of 14 Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 2 of 14 Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 4 of 14 Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 5 of 14 H rHeat re controls Installed on Complies Requirement will be met. HVAC equipment efficiency 1 Efficiency:_ Efficiency:_ ;See the Mechanical list Thermally Ineffective panel ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. Parallel -flow fan -powered VAV air ❑Complies ! Requirement will be met. ter heating systems ❑Does Not verified. Non-NAECA HVAC ❑Does Not l for values. surfaces of sensible heating ❑Does Not terminals have automatic ❑Does Not to maximum temperature equipment labeled as meeting panels have insulation >= R-3.5. controls to a) turn off the ISSUE INFORMATION d use).❑Not Observable; 90.1.❑Not Observable I ❑Not Observable terminal fan except when space ❑Not Observable I ❑Not Applicable❑Not Applicable ❑Not Applicable I heating is required or if required ❑Not Applicable ISSUED FOR installed on non-circulating❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. Stair and elevator shaft vents ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. Ducts and plenums having ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. for ventilation; b) turn on the ter tanks. Complies Not have motorized dampers that ❑Does Not pressure class ratings are Seal ❑Does Not terminal fan as the first stage of CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 automatically close. Class A construction. heating before the heating coil is G❑Not Observable; ❑Not Observable ❑Not Observable activated; and c) during heating PERMIT ❑Not Applicable ❑Not Applicable ❑Not Applicable I for warmup or setback BID Additional Comments/Assumptions: Outdoor air and exhaust systems ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. Electrically operated DX-DOAS ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. temperature control, either operate the terminal fan and have motorized dampers that ❑Does Not units meet requirements per ❑Does Not LANDLORD REVIEW automatically shut when not in Tables 6.8.1-15 or 6.8.1-16. heating coil without primary air use and meet maximum leakage ❑Not Observable I ❑Not Observable I or reverse the terminal damper rates. Check gravity dampers ❑Not Applicable I ❑Not Applicable I logic and provide heating from Ilk where allowed. Ductwork operating >3 in. water ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. the central air handler through Enclosed parking garage ❑Complies 1Requirement will be met. column requires air leakage ❑Does Not primary air. ventilation has automatic ❑Does Not testing. [_]Not Observable I Required minimum outdoor air ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. contaminant detection and rate is the larger of minimum ❑Does Not capacity to stage or modulate ❑Not Observable I ❑Not Applicable outdoor air rate or minimum CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ----- ❑Not Applicable j exhaust air rate required by ❑Not Observable I ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED _ --_ fans to 50% or less of design PP Dehumidification controls ❑Complies !Requirement will be met. q ❑Not Applicable capacity. provided to prevent reheating, ❑Does Not Standard 62.1, Standard 170, or PP Ventilation fans >0.75 h have ❑Com lies ; Re uirement will be met. retooling, mixing of hot and cold applicable codes or accreditation "CONSTRUCTION SET' HEREIN ---- airstreams or concurrent heating standards. Outdoor air ventilation F ___ _ p P q ❑Not Observable _____- automatic controls to shut off fan ❑Does Not and cooling of the same ❑Not Applicable I systems shall comply with one of REVISIONS _______ _.. when not required. _ ❑Not Observable I airstream. the following: a) design minimum ❑Not Applicable Humidifiers with airstream ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. system outdoor air provided < Q 1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 6.4.3.8�IDemand control ventilation ❑Com lies ; Requirement will be met. __ mounted preheating jackets have ❑Does Not 135 h of the required minimum 1 p q - - — reheat auto -shutoff value set to outdoor air rate, b) dampers, [ME6) !provided for spaces >500 ft2 and ❑Does Not - �= p ❑Not Observable ductwork, and controls allow the — >25 people/1000 ft2 occupant activate when humidification is system to supply <= the Ilk Idensit and served b systems ❑Not Observable not required. ❑Not Applicable Y minimum _ Y Y Y required minimum outdoor air (with air side economizer, auto ❑Not Applicable Humidification system dispersion ❑Complies ! Requirement will be met. rate with a single set -point ;modulating outside air damper tube hot surfaces in the ❑Does Not adjustment., or c) system ,control, or design airflow >3,000 airstreams of ducts or air- includes exhaust air energy_ 1cfm. handling units insulated >= R- [_-]Not Observable I recovery complying with Section DX cooling systems >= 75 kBtu/h ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. 0.5. ❑Not Applicable I 6.5.6.1. i _ (>= 65 kBtu/h effective 1/2016) ❑Does Not Preheat coils controlled to stop ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. _ Multiple zone VAV systems with ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. E and chilled -water and !See the Mechanical Systems list heat output whenever ❑Does Not DDC of individual zone boxes ❑Does Not ndwoolen fan motor ❑Not Observable [for values. evaporative9 P mechanical cooling, including have static pressuresetpoint [see the Mechanical Systems list >= Y4 designed to vary supply ❑Not Applicable ❑Not Observable ------------ economizer operation, is active. _____________= reset controls. ❑Not Observable ;for values. — fan airflow as a function of load ❑Not Applicable - - -- _- ❑Not Applicable and comply with operational Units that provide ventilation air ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. -_ HVAC pumping systems with >= ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. — requirements. ___ to multiple zones and operate in ❑Does Not 3 control values designed for ❑Does Not _ Insulation exposed to weather ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. conjunction with zone heating variable fluid flow (see section protected from damage. ❑Does Not and cooling systems are ❑Not Observable ❑Not Observable -_-_= details). --____� _ ------- Insulation Insulation outside of the prevented from using heating or ❑Not Applicable I _ ❑Not Applicable NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. ___ --- conditioned space and associated ❑Not Observable heat recovery to warm supply air _______— with cooling systems is vapor ❑Not Applicable above 604F when representative 6.5.6.11 ,Exhaust air energy recovery on ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. [ME56]:systems meeting Tables 6.5.6.1- ❑Does Not -- retardant. i building loads or outdoor air i I1, and 6.5.6.1-2. a` temperature indicate that most ' ❑Not Observable I rdal- OF HVAC ducts and plenums ; R R-❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. p ! zones demand cooling. ! ❑Not Applicable % z insulated per Table 6.8.2. Where !❑Does Not �,P ducts or plenums are installed in Motors for fans >= 1/12 hp and ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. Conditioned supply air to space ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. �+ D or under a slab, verification may❑Not Observable I < 1 hp are electronically- ❑Does Not with mechanical exhaust <= the ❑Does Not a y need to occur during Foundation ;❑Not Applicable commutated motors or have a greater of criteria of supply flow, RY ROY " ❑Not Observable ; ❑Not Observable IE Inspection. minimum motor efficiency of required ventilation rate, exhaust IACKEL > HVAC piping insulation thickness. ; in. in.❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. 70%. These motors are also ❑Not Applicable flow menu the available transffer ❑Not Applicable L piping g speed adjustable for either air (see section details). Where i !n is installed in or Not .e 15 t balancing or remote control. Kitchen hoods >5,000 cfm have ❑Com lies ; Re uirement will be met. under a slab, verification may balancing Observable I p q need to occur during Foundation make up air >=50% of exhaust ❑Does Not3 Inspection. Applicable air volume. S ❑Not Observable /p,)AL Ea ❑Not Applicable 0 Date.- 10/11/22 COA it 0407 005J57 9 O d N 1 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) 1 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) 1 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) 1 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) a C PROJECT INFORMATION Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 a Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 6 of 14 Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 7 of 14 Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 8 of 14 Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 9 of 14 CHARLES SCHWAB A Charlottesville IBS 3 m 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct PROJECT #: supervision. It is my professional judgment that 22.0000289.00 (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia a B Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are Z deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes SHEET INFORMATION and regulations. ECS recommends to Building a Department Staff that they be Approved for Code ENERGY COMPLIANCE o Compliance. d This certification does not relieve the registered O1 design professional(s) of record and other o parties of their responsibilities for the design or d construction of the project. DRAWN BY: SMD 3 d REVIEWED BY: ° A GRS d SCALE: a As noted o William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO3 Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge E 61 9 DPOR License # 0402021900 o, M • O M O m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 0 W w N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 NELSON P 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.neisonworldwide.com N Approved field test used to ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. At least 50% of all 125 volt 15- and ❑Complies ; Exception: Space type Is not private office, open office, or Thermostatic controls have a 5 °F ;❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. Furnished O&M instructions for ❑Complies Requirement will be met. evaluate design air flow rates ❑Does Not 20-Amp receptacles are controlled by❑Does Not ; computer classroom. deadband.❑Does Not systems and equipment to the❑Does Not and demonstrate proper capture ❑Not Observable ' an automatic control device. ;❑Not Observable; I❑Not Observable; building owner or designated ;❑Not Observable; and containment of kitchen representative. exhaust systems. ❑Not Applicable j❑Not Applicable j❑Not Applicable j j❑Not Applicable j Unenclosed spaces that are ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. New buildings have electrical energy ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. Temperature controls have setpoint ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. 9.2.2.3 I Interior installed lamp and fixture❑Complies ;see the Interiorlighting fixture schedule for values. heated use only radiant heat. ❑Does Not use measurement devices installed. ❑Does Not overlap restrictions. ❑Does Not [FI18]1 I lighting power is consistent with what ❑Does Not Where tenant spaces exist, each I is shown on the approved lighting ❑Not Observable❑Not Observable: Observable;❑Not Observable; tenant is monitored separately. In plans, demonstrating proposed watts ❑Not Applicable buildings with a digital control system ;❑Not Applicable ;❑Not Applicable .are less than or equal to allowed I❑Not Applicable 6.5.9 Hot gas bypass limited to: <=240 ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. the energy use is transmitted to to HVAC systems equipped with at least❑Complies Requirement will be met. !watts• �.r ■ �I [ME35]1 lkBtu/h - 15% >240 kBtu/h - 10% ❑Does Not control system and displayed one automatic shutdown control. ❑Does Not 9.4.4 ;At least 75% of all permanently ❑Complies Requirement will be met. a.`i/``�'',� ❑Not Observable graphically. []Not Observable; [F12011 jinstalled lighting fixtures in dwelling ❑Does Not j engineers Automatic control requirements ❑Complies Requirement will be met. ;units have >= 55 ImAN efficacy or a ! ❑Not A Applicable j❑Not Applicable j ❑Not Observable; PP prescribed in Table 9.6.1, for the ❑Does Not >= 45 Im/W total luminaire efficacy. Ni York Miami m0ma„a.L kMge,es.Semite . NonoloFv M Service water heating equipment ❑complies appropriate space type, are installed. Setback controls allow automatic❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. I❑Not Applicable B00.581-096.9 wwmedxlmm Mandatory lighting controls (labeled Observable restart and temporary operation as '❑ meets efficiency requirements. ❑Does Not ry 9 9 ❑Not Applicable e ; P ry P ; Does Not Elevators are designed with the ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. as 'REQ') and optional choice controls PP required for maintenance. Not Observable; proper lighting, ventilation power, and❑Does Not ❑Not Observable ', ❑ (labeled implemented. l' and 'ADD2') are ❑Not Applicable standby mode. ❑Not Observable; ❑Not Applicable implemented. ' Heating for vestibules and air ❑complies Requirement will be met. Independent lighting controls installed ❑Complies Requirement will be met. Air economizer has a fault detection I❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. j❑Not Applicable j curtains with integral heating ❑Does Not per approved lighting plans and all❑Does Not and diagnostics (FDD) system (see ❑Does Not j First 8 ft of outlet piping in❑Complies Requirement will be met. include automatic controls that manual controls readily accessible and: details for configuration and ;❑Not Observable; nonrecirculating storage system, or ❑Does Not shut off the heating system when ❑Not Observable visible to occupants. Observable: operational requirements). branch piping connected to outdoor air temperatures>45F. ❑Not Applicable Applicable PP ❑Not Applicable recirculated, heat traced, or Observable: Vestibule heating and cooling 9.4.1.1f ,Daylight areas under skylights and❑Complies Requirement will be met. When humidification and❑Complies Requirement will be met. impredance heated piping is❑Not Applicable systems controlled by a [EL13]1 I roof monitors that have more than '❑ dehumidification are provided to a❑Does Not insulated. thermostat in the vestibule with j 1 Does Not zone, simultaneous operation is 150 W combined input power for zone, Observable; Additional Comments/Assumptions: tions: heating setpoint <= 60F and general lighting are controlled by❑Not Observable; --_ _ _ prohibited. Humidity control prohibits P cooling setpoint >= 80F. f photocontrols.❑Not Applicable - -- the use of fossil fuel or electricity to❑Not Applicable L produce RH > 30% in the warmest Doors separating conditioned ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. 9.4.1.3 !Separate lighting control devices for❑Complies Requirement will be met. zone humidified and RH < 60% in the space from the outdoors have ❑Does Not [EL4]1 specific uses installed per roved '❑ controls that disable/reset ? P PP Does Not coldest zone dehumidified. ❑Not Observable lighting plans. heating and cooling system when { I❑Not Observable; Furnished HVAC as -built drawings ;❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. open. Not Applicable ;❑Not Applicable _ _ __== submitted within 90 days of system ❑Does Not Additional Comments/Assumptions: 9.6.2 (Additional interior lighting power ❑Complies Requirement will be met. acceptance. ❑Not Observable; [EL8]1 allowed for special functions per the ❑Does Not ;❑Not Applicable Ilk approved lighting plans and is ;❑Not Observable; _ Furnished O&M manuals for HVAC ❑Com lies Requirement will be met. {separated from general lighting. Applicable Y Y automatically controlled and Not A Iicable systems within 90 days of system Not q Electric motors meet requirements I❑Complies Requirement will be met. acceptance. ❑Not Observable; where applicable. ❑Does Not ;❑Not Applicable ❑Not Observable; An air and/or hydranic system ;❑Complies Requirement will be met. K ;❑Not Applicable [FI9)1 balancing report is provided for HVAC j❑Does Not systems serving zones >5,000 ft2 of Additional Comments/Assumptions: ;conditioned area.❑Not Observable: ,❑Not Applicable 6.7.2.4 1 HVAC control systems have been ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. [FI10]1 nested to ensure proper operation, Complies Not SCHWAB !calibration and adjustment of controls. ❑Not Observable; ;❑Not Applicable -� Ilk NPublic lavatory faucet water❑Complies Requirement will be met. temperature <=110°F.❑Does Not :[-]Not Observable: ❑Not Applicable Furnished as -built drawings for I❑Complies Requirement will be met. J el cute powerystem systemsptance. within 30 days ❑Does Not j ❑Not Observable ; ❑Not Applicable j 1 IHigh Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) 1 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) 11 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) 1 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) Ilk Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Data filename: V:\Energy-Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 10 of 14 Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 11 of 14 Data filename: V:\Energy-Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 12 of 14 Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 13 of 14 H ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 G PERMIT BID LANDLORD REVIEW Ilk CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED F "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS Q1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 E NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. 2 a OF 41 D . cy o SG�NAACKELLY > a ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these .e 15 0 plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that3 (a) the plans were designed and presented as g outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia TONAL E .o Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered o systems and/or construction features are Dote.• 10/11/22 deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes COA it 0407 005J57 a and regulations. ECS recommends to Building ° a Department Staff that they be Approved for Code C Compliance. PROJECT INFORMATION Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 This certification does not relieve the registered a Data filename: V:\Energy-Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 14 of 14 design professionals) of record and other CHARLES SCHWAB parties of their responsibilities for the design or A construction of the project. Charlottesville IBS E m 3 m 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 ` PROJECT #: William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO 22.0000289.00 Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge a` B DPOR License # 0402021900 z SHEET INFORMATION ENERGY COMPLIANCE a m m a 0 m DRAWN BY: SMD 3 d REVIEWED BY: ° A GRS d SCALE: As noted 3 m 9 M E6.2 O M O m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 0 W w N 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 IN N K K H G IN C ra m In NOTE: FIRE SPRINKLER HEAD LAYOUT AND DETAILS ARE FOR DESIGN INTENT REFERENCE ONLY. FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE AND SUBMIT COMPLETE SHOP DRAWINGS TO THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION, INCLUDING HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS, AS REQUIRED FOR APPROVAL. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FINAL SPRINKLER HEAD QUANTITIES, LOCATIONS, AND TEMPERATURES. FIRE PROTECTION PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = V-0" NORTH GEAERAL NOTE3R A. FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOUND HEREWITH ARE TO ESTABLISH THE SCOPE OF WORK AND PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SYSTEM ONLY. DETAILED FIRE SPRINKLER SHOP DRAWINGS AND HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE INSTALLING CONTRACTOR UNDER A DEFERRED SUBMITTAL. B. PERFORM WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH LANDLORD CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS, INCLUDING ANY TENANT CRITERIA MANUALS AND LEASE EXHIBITS, WHERE APPLICABLE. FIRE SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN ALL APPLICABLE MANUALS PRIOR TO BIDDING. C. FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL BE INSTALLED IN STRICT CONFORMITY WITH ALL LATEST REQUIREMENTS OF THE STATE BUILDING CODE, THE LOCAL FIRE DEPARTMENT, ALL LOCAL RULES AND REGULATIONS AS DEFINED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION AND THE NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA). D. TESTING OF SYSTEM SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL RUN AND PAY FOR ALL TESTS REQUIRED TO ENSURE THE SYSTEM HAS ADEQUATE FLOW AND PRESSURE. E. PROVIDE ALL CODE REQUIRED SIGNAGE FOR FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. F. SPARE HEAD CABINETS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH THE APPROPRIATE NUMBER OF SPRINKLERS AND WRENCHES IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA REQUIREMENTS. G. PROVIDE ALL CODE REQUIRED CLEARANCE ABOVE AND AROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. H. COORDINATE SPRINKLER HEAD LOCATIONS WITH ALL TRADES PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR INSTALLATION. LOCATIONS OF FIRE SPRINKLER HEADS AND PIPES ARE SHOWN FOR GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION ONL Y. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING COMPLETE FIRE SPRINKLER COVERAGE BASED ON ACTUAL CONDITIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. SPRINKLER PIPINIG SHALL ROUTE AROUND, PROVIDE PROPER CLEARANCES FOR, AND AVOID CONFLICT WITH BUILDING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS. I. ENTIRE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL BE INSTALLED LEVEL OR SLOPED TOWARD THE SERVICE ENTRANCE TO FACILITATE DRAIN DOWN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. DRAINS SHALL BE SIZED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL AND NFPA CODES. ALL FLOATING MAINS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH AN AUXILLARY DRAIN ROUTED TO THE EXTERIOR. ✓. ALL SPRINKLER LINES 2" AND SMALLER SHALL BE SCHEDULE 40 WITH THREADED FITTINGS OR ROLL GROVED CONNECTIONS. ALL SPRINKLER LINES AND MAINS 2-1/2""AND LARGER SHALL BE SCHEDULE 10 WITH ROLL GROOVE CONNECTIONS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. THE USE OF WELD—O—LETS IS ACCEPTABLE. UNDERGROUND PIPING SHALL BE DUCTILE IRON WITH PVC WRAP TO PROVIDE PROTECTION FROM CORROSIVE SOILS. K. SEE ELECTRICAL/FIRE ALARM PLANS FOR FIRE ALARM BELL LOCATION AND INFORMATION. L. SPRINKLER HEAD DEFLECTORS SHALL BE INSTALLED SO THAT THE DISTANCE MEASURED FROM THE DEFLECTOR TO TOP OF STRUCTURE IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION AND NFPA REQUIREMENTS. M. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS SHALL BE OF THE OPERATING TEMPERATURE AS REQUIRED BY THE SPRINKLER LOCATION. FINAL HEAD TEMPERATURES SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH NFPA 0 TO COMPENSATE FOR FIELD CONDI TIONS. N. SPRINKLER DESIGN IS BASED ON L IMI TED FIELD INFORMATION. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS AND PROVIDING A FULLY COMPLIANT SPRINKLER SYSTEM AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE OWNER. 0. THE CUMULATIVE HORIZONTAL LENGTH OF AN UNSUPPORTED ARMOVER TO A SPRINKLER, SPRINKLER DROP, OR SPRIG —UP, AND THE UNSUPPORTED LENGTH BETWEEN THE END SPRINKLER AND THE LAST HANGER ON THE LINE, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE LIMITS AS ALLOWED FOR BY NFPA IJ. P. THE DISTANCE BETWEEN A HANGER AND THE CENTERLINE OF AN UPRIGHT SPRINKLER SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN J INCHES. 0. ANY EXISTING SPRINKLER HEAD OUTLETS THAT ARE NO LONGER REQUIRED SHALL BE PLUGGED. R. NO MORE THAN TWO SPRINKLER HEADS SHALL BE FED FROM ANY ONE EXISTING SPRINKLER OUTLET. S. THE ENTIRE AREA UNDER CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A COMPLETE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM IN ALL RESPECTS. RELOCATE/ADD NEW SPRINKLER DROPS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS WHERE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE COMPLETE COVERAGE THROUGH THE AREA OF CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING AND HEAD LOCATIONS WITH ALL TRADES PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR INSTALLATION. IF CONFLICTS OCCUR BETWEEN FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING/HEADS AND LIGHTS, DIFFUSERS, DUCTWORK, ETC., THE FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING/HEADS SHALL BE RELOCATED OR REROUTED AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE PROJECT. AN ADEQUATE SUPPLY OF EXTRA PIPING AND FITTINGS SHALL BE MAINTAINED ON SITE TO ALLOW FOR FIELD MODIFICATIONS. APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS DO NOT PRECLUDE REROUTING IF SO REQUIRED BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. SPRINKLER HEAD SCHEDULE MANUF. MODEL TYPE ORIFICE K" FACTOR TEMP. (DEG. F.) SYMBOL FINISH ESCUTCHEON VIKING VK462 PENDENT 1/2 5.6 155- ® WHITE CONCEALED *NOTE: FINISH AND ESCUTCHEON TYPE IN FIRE SPRINKLER HEAD SCHEDULE TAKES PRECEDENCE OVER PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, CH 45202 www.neisonworldwide.com 0 Sl6nexl el engineers, Now York Mlaml •Omaha• Ws M9elesM 6eal,le • Honolulu 800mi-a .9 wwwadmKkd.mm SCHWAB ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 PERMIT BID LANDLORD REVIEW CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS Q1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB Charlottesville IBS 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 PROJECT #: 22.0000289.00 SHEET INFORMATION FRE PROTECTION PLAN DRAWN BY: EMC REVIEWED BY: GRS SCALE: As noted FP1.1 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 M NI MI LI ICA JI HI GI FI EI u CI ME N N m 0 w 0 F:3yl [(:lp'3[i i rII� (: 3_[:::: a.Si (t:[c 3: b:nWeE(I r7 H VIA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 APPLICABILITY A. This section supplements all sections of the Specifications for Division 21 and shall apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the Drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of approved fire suppression systems. B. The Drawings, General Conditions and General Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section and the other Sections of Division 21 of the specifications. Where conflicts arise between these documents, the more stringent provision will be applicable, subject to the interpretation of the Engineer. C. Furnish all labor, material, services, and skilled supervision necessary for the construction, erection, installation, connections, testing, and adjustment of all materials and electrical equipment specified herein, or shown or noted on the Drawings, and its delivery to the Owner, complete in all respects and ready for use. D. Products furnished but not installed under this section: 1. Where plans indicate fixtures or equipment will be furnished by this Contractor for installation by other Contractors, this Contractor shall furnish all such equipment, complete in all respects and ready for installation. 2. Drawings, instructions, and manuals supplied with equipment furnished under Division 21, but installed under other Divisions shall be carefully preserved and turned over to the installing Contractor. E. Products installed but not furnished under this section: 1. Where plans indicate fixtures or equipment will be furnished by others, this Contractor shall provide all rough -in and supplies and shall connect such equipment to the fire suppression systems. 2. Drawings, instructions, and manuals supplied with equipment furnished under separate Divisions but installed under Division 22 shall be carefully preserved and turned over to the Architect. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. "Work" is hereby defined as, "The construction and services required by the Contract Documents whether completed or partially completed and includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The work may constitute the whole or a part of the roject." P 1 B. °Furnish° is hereby defined as, "To supply and deliver, unload, and inspect for damage." C. Install" is hereby defined as, "To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, connect, and place into operation into the work." D. "Provide" is hereb defined as "To furnish and install." Y E. "Connect" is hereb defined as "To brio service to the a ui ment and make final Y 9 q P attachment including necessary switches, outlets, boxes, terminations, etc." F. "Concealed" is hereby defined as, "Hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, embedded in construction, in crawl spaces, or buried. G. "Exposed" is hereby defined as, "Not installed underground nor concealed as defined by the Specifications." H. "Drawings" is hereby defined as, "AII plans, details, equipment schedules, diagrams, sketches, etc. issued for the construction of the work.° I. Subgrade Elevations: 4 inches below finish grade elevations indicated on drawings, unless otherwise indicated. J. Finish Grade Elevations: 4 inches above subgrade elevations indicated on drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Perform work in accordance with the applicable Building Code, Electrical Code, Fire Code, Mechanical Code, Plumbing Code, Energy Code, and all other applicable codes, amendments, and ordinances. Also perform all work in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) including Fire Morshol(s). B. Perform work in accordance with Landlord requirements, including any Tenant Criteria Manuals and Lease Exhibits, where applicable. C. Perform work in accordance with the applicable utility companies serving the project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper coordination of the work. D. Recognized Standards: Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under the requirements of these ecifications shall conform to the latest ublications or standard rules of SP P National Fire Protection Association NFPA Factor Mutual Global where ( ), Y a licable FMG Underwriters Laboratories Inc. U.L. American Societ for Testing and Materials (ASTM), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), National Electrical Code (NEC), and National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) E. The Contract Documents shall take recedence where the Contract Documents exceed P code, Landlord, utility, or recognized standards requirements. F. The Contract Document Plans shall take precedence where the Plans conflict with the Contract Document Performance Specifications found herewith. 1.04 PERMITS AND FEES A. Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the work under this Contract shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless otherwise indicated. B. All fees and scheduling associated with obtaining an accurate water flow test shall be at the Contractor's expense. 1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor is responsible to obtain, fully understand, and coordinate the work with the co lete set of Contract Documents. An re uired corrections includin InP Y q 9 all associated costs, arising from issues caused by the Contractors failure to understand and/or coordinate the work with the complete set of Contract Documents are the Contractor's sole responsibility. B. Work under these sections is diagrammatic unless indicated otherwise and is intended to conve the sco a of work and indicate the eneral arran ement of Y P 9 9 piping, equipment, end accessories. Follow these drawings in laying out the work and verify spaces for the installation of these materials and equipment. Wherever a question exists as to the exact intended location of pipe, sprinklers, or e ui ment obtain instructions from the Architect before roceedin with the work. q P P 9 C. Notify the Architect/Engineer for resolution if a discrepancy is discovered within the Contract Documents. Failure of the Contractor to notif the Architect En ineer Y / 9 of discrepancies shall result in the resolution becoming the Contractor's responsibility and subject to the Architect/Engineer's review and possible rejection. Should the Architect/Engineer reject a discrepancy resolution of which they were not notified, the Contractor is fully responsible to correct the installation, including all associated costs, until approval of the installation is given by the Architect/Engineer. 1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify all existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. An existin conditions indicated in the Contract Documents are based on Y 9 information drawin s rovided b others and ossibl limited field verification. 9 P Y P Y The Contractor shall cd'ust for actual field conditions at no additional ex ense to 1 P the Owner. C. The Contractor shall visit the project site, review existing conditions against the Contract Documents, and familiarize himself with the work prior to bidding and start of the work. By signing the Contract, the Contractor acknowledges the site visit has been completed and the existing conditions are accepted. D. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of major discrepancies in writing so the appropriate modifications to the design can be made without delay to the project. The Contractor assumes full responsibility of adjusting for discrepancies of which the Architect is not informed. F. The Owner shall have first salvage right on all demolished equipment and materials. The Contractor shall dispose of all demolished equipment and materials the Owner rejects. G. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of field discrepancies in writing so the appropriate modifications to the design can be made without delay to the project. The Contractor assumes full responsibility of adjusting for discrepancies of which the Architect/Engineer is not informed. H. Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made by using materials and methods to suit the actual conditions. I. Where existing conditions are shown to be removed, by means of a hatched pattern, on the Drawings, this Contractor shall perform all work required for removal. Existing pipe run -outs shall be removed all the way back to mains and capped using appropriate methods. J. Where existing work is to be modified, it shall be done in conformance with these specifications. Materials used shall be same as existing except where specified otherwise. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Furnish the Architect/Engineer shop drawing portfolios containing names of manufacturer and cut sheets of equipment to be used on the project. Use manufacturer's specification sheets identified by number indicated on drawings or schedules. Indicate catalog number on the cut sheets. As applicable, provide construction data, weight and dimensional data, erformance data and Iistin data as art of the sho drawin submittal. P 9 P P 9 Provide sho drawin s for: P 9 a. Fire Protection fixtures and a ui ment. q P b. Fire Protection materials and accessories. c. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalo ue information. Indicate 9 valve data and ratings. 2. Submittals are reviewed onl for eneral co liance with the Contract Y 9 nP Documents. Dimensions, quantities and details are not checked during submittal review. Review of the submittals does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing all materials, equipment and accessories necessary for a complete and operational system meeting the requirements of the project and the intent of the Contract Documents. The responsibility for coordination of substituted materials and equipment lies solely with the substituting Contractor. 3. Approval shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors on the shop drawings. 4. If the shop drawings deviate from the contract documents, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the deviations in writing accompanying the shop drawings, including the reasons for the deviations. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tag numbering. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists. D. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience, approved by manufacturer. C. Products: 1. Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2. Listed and classified by the local Department of Buildings and furnished with an acceptance number, where applicable. 3. Listed and classified by the Landlord's and/or Owner's insurance carrier, where applicable. D. All equipment and components shall be free of all rust/corrosion or any visible damage. AII items not complying with this requirement shall be replaced without any change in the Contract amount. E. Equipment performance and accessories shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and specified herein. Inclusion in both locations is not a prerequisite to inclusion in the Contract. Equipment and accessories specified in either location shall be included in the Contract. Provide all necessary accessories and connections as required for a complete, functional system, including all required components reasonably inferred to as necessary although such components may or may not be specifically indicated in the Contract Documents. F. Code or utility company requirements shall supersede any conflicting requirements of this section. G. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on actual materials used; Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. E. Equipment: Protect equipment from physical damage by storing off site until the project is ready for immediate installation. Provide temporary caps on all pipes to prevent debris from entering the pipe. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The manufacturers listed are listed to set minimum standards for quality, design, and functionality. The products of other manufacturers may be submitted, at the Contractor's option, during shop drawing review unless indicated otherwise. The products of other manufacturers shall meet or exceed all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor accepts all responsibility for costs and coordination issues arising out of the substitution of materials or equipment, and the coordination of such substitutions with all other contractors and subcontractors. 1 2 3 B. Sprinkler Systems: Conform work to NFPA 13 and all local requirements. C. Standpipe and Hose Systems: Conform to NFPA 14 and all local requirements. D. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Examine the Contract Documents as a whole for the work of other trades. Coordinate all work accordingly. B. Work lines and established heights shall be in strict accordance with architectural drawings and specifications insofar as these drawings end specifications extend. Verify all dimensions shown and establish all elevations and detailed dimensions not shown. C. Promptly report to the Architect any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of the work, which might prevent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of others. Failure to so report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other trades as being fit and proper for the execution of this work. D. Plan, lay out, and coordinate the work with all trades well enough in advance so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference to work that has not been completed and work that is in progress. Inform all trades of openings required for the work and provide all special frames, sleeves, and anchor bolts required. The fire suppression system layout may be altered to suit the conditions, prior to the installation of any work and without additional cost to the Owner. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. E. Wherever i e runs in or above ceilin s or walls the Contractor shall arran a the PP 9 9 run of i e in such a manner that it does not interfere with rilles diffusers PP 9 . outlet boxes, luminaires, or other ceiling mounted items. F. Install systems, materials and equipment to provide for maximum headroom, where no ceiling height is established or indicated on the Drawings. Maintain access to equipment requiring service when selecting mounting elevations. G. Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel and er endicular to buildin lines where ex osed to view unless otherwise indicated. P P 9 P H. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. The Fire Suppression Contractor shall pay for all extra cutting and patching made necessary by his failure to properly direct such work at the correct time. I. Perform all work in conformit with the Contract Documents and afford other trades Y reasonable opportunity for the execution of their work. Properly connect and coordinate this work with the work of other trades at such time and in such a manner as not to delay or interfere with their work. J. Manufacturer's instruction sheets shall be followed explicitly in the installation of all equipment. Where manufacturer's instruction sheets conflict with requirements of these specifications or the Drawings, such conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for clarification. K. All roofing penetrations shall be flashed and weather sealed by the roofing manufacturer s authorized roofing contractor at this Contractor s expense. This Contractor shall contract with the factory authorized roofing contractor for the specific roofing system applicable to this Project. The use of an unauthorized roofing contractor may result in removal and replacement of the penetration systems at this Contractor s expense. L. Although all such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. M. Verify and coordinate all requirements and installation details of all materials and equipment that are to be furnished under other Divisions and installed or connected under Division 22 prior to rough -in. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. As such, the Contractor is responsible to: 1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. 2. Determine connection locations and requirements. 3. Sequence rough -in of fire suppression connections to coordinate with installation of equipment. 3.02 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of l/4"=1'-O" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of fire suppression equipment and materials in relationshi with other s stems installations and buildin co onents. Indicate P Y 9 mP locations where s ace is limited for installation and access and where se uencin P q 9 and coordination of installations are of im ortance to the efficient flow of the P work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Indicate the ro osed locations of conduits a ui ment and materials. P P q P . Include the followin : 9 a. Clearances required for maintaining Code required working space. b. Equipment connections and support details. c. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. d. Fire -rated wall and floor penetrations. e. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. f. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. g. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on the Drawings. B. Verify all pipe locations and sizes in field prior to fabrication or installation. C. Verify all equipment locations in field prior to installation. Coordinate final locations with all trades. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install all pipe, equipment, and accessories to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide tests as necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status, and suitable operation of each system. Tests shall be conducted under the supervision of the Architect. B. Install all equipment, devices, pipe, and materials securely and in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with all applicable standards and codes. C. Install all equipment, pipe, and materials plumb and level and align and adjust for satisfactory operation. D. Install all equipment, pipe, and materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. E. Inspect all equipment, pipe, and materials for defects. 3.06 ERECTION A. Rigging: 1. The Fire Su ression Contractor shall arran a for all labor and a ui ment PP 9 9 P required for the proper installation of the fire Suppression equipment in the locations indicated on the Drawings. Where crane rental or other erection is re uired such costs shall be included in the Fire Su ression Contract 9 PP unless specific arrangements are made with the General Contractor to cover these costs. B. Supplemental Framing: 1. Provide the design, fabrication, and erection of supplementary structural framing required for attachment of hangers or other devices supporting fire Suppression equipment. Provide framing members of standard rolled steel shapes, A-36 steel. Provide members welded to structural members equal to the specification for the main structural member. Provide "simple beam" type framing with end connections welded or bolted for shear loads. Use cantilevers when detailed or specifically approved by the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer's approval is required for location of supplementary framing. Use only certified welders. Design framing members for their actual loads, with allowable stresses specified by AISC, without excessive deflection and with consideration for rigidity under vibration, in accordance with standard structural practices. Show on shop drawing supplementary framing, including design loads, member size and location. 3.07 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND PIERCING A. Cutting of openings and installation of sleeves or frames through walls and surfaces shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner. Openings shall be cut only as large as required for the installation; sleeves and/or frames installed flush with finished surfaces and grouted in place. Surfaces around openings shall be left smooth and finished to match surrounding surface. B. Obtain written ermission of the Architect En ineer before cuttin or iercin P / 9 9 P 9 structural members. Use craftsmen skilled in their respective trades for cutting, fitting, repairing, patching of plaster, and finishing of materials including carpentry work, metal work or concrete work required for this work. C. Do not weaken walls, partitions, or floors with cutting. Holes required to be cut in floors must be drilled without breaking out around the holes. The Architect/Engineer will determine suitability of patching and/or refinishing requirements. D. The Fire Suppression Contractor is responsible for patching of all openings resultin from the installation or removal of fire Su ression a ui ment or 9 PP 9 P materials. E. Provide and maintain tem orar artitions or dust barriers ade uate to revent the P YP q P spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. F. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Subcontractors. G. Fire and Smoke Partition Penetrations: The Contractor shall familiarize himself with all fire rated construction and install his work so as to maintain the inte rit of the fire code ratio . Maintain ratio of fire rated and smoke rated 9 Y 9 9 construction. Seal annular space around conduits. For fire and smoke rated floors, walls and partitions, use UL listed material that maintains fire rated wall and floor integrity. 3.08 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean fire suppression parts to remove harmful materials. B. Clean exposed surfaces of all pipe, equipment, and accessories of all dirt, debris, splatter, and other deleterious materials. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning as applicable. C. Repair or replace damaged pipe, equipment, and accessories, as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Architect, where marring or disfigurement has occurred. All pipe, equipment, and accessories shall be new. 3.09 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Upon completion, the entire system shall be tested under operating conditions. 1. All equipment shall be tested under service conditions and proven to operate properly and noiselessly. 2. AII additional tests as required throughout this Specification shall be completed with results reported back to the Architect/Engineer for review. B. Operate all equipment, after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation and correct deficiencies as required. C. Inspection: 1. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain certificates of inspection and approval from all City and State Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 3.10 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: At project closeout, provide one printed copy and one electronic copy of project record drawings to the Owner. Information contained on project record drawings shall include, as a minimum,: 1. Actual locations of all pipe, equipment, accessories, etc. 2. Actual pipe sizes and elevations. 3. Actual routing of all underfloor or below grade piping. 4. Hydraulic calculation remote area data and associated flow test information. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: At project closeout, submit to the Architect two copies of descriptive literature, maintenance and operation data for all piping, e ui ment accessories and materials used. Include maintenance rocedures q P P intervals, and parts list of each item installed under this contract. Include all manufacturer's guarantees and warranties. Also include: ENO OF SECTION SECTION 2105M - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for systems as applicable to this project. Sprinkler systems: New systems; Dry pipe systems; Wet pipe systems; Standpipe/hose systems; Below ground piping; Above ground piping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS A. Water Supply Testing for All Systems: Perform tests of all supply water sources to determine the potential for corrosion in the fire protection system including tests for microbes most commonly associated with Microbiologicclly Influenced Corrosion (MIC). Water samples shall be collected as directed by the product literature of the testing organization. Samples shall be delivered to the approved testing laboratory within 72 hours of the time the water sample is obtained. Test results shall be forwarded to the Owner and Engineer along with a report summarizing the recommended corrective action to mitigate the potential for MIC or other types of corrosion. B. The Contractor may use any of the following piping materials, at his option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and any utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected piping material is the sole responsibility of the installing 4 5 6 Contractor. 2.02 ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 795 Schedule 10, ASTM A 53 Schedule 40, ASTM A 135 Schedule 10, ASTM A 135 UL listed li ht wall t e or ASTM A 795 Schedule 40 block: Steel 9 YP . Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded, ASME B16.5, buttweld ends, ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought carbon steel or alloy steel, ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings, or ASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and threaded; Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe; Mechanical Formed Fittings: Carbon steel housing with integral pipe stop and O-ring pocked and O-ring, uniformly compressed into permanent mechanical engagement onto pipe; Schedule 10 steel pipe will not be allowed on any dry pipe sprinkler systems, no exceptions; Threaded or cut groove fittings will not be allowed on any Schedule 10 system, no exceptions. B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) or ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), H58 drawn temper: Type: Type M (C); Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze solder joint, pressure type; Joints: AWS A5.8 Classification BCuP-3 or BCuP-4 copper/silver braze or ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. C. CPVC Pi e: ASTM F 442 F 442M SDR 13.5. Not ermitted in lenum return air ceilingpspaces.): Fittings: ASTM F 438 Schedule 40, or ASTM F 439 schedule 80, CPVC; Joints: Solvent welded, using ASTM F 493 cement. 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. C. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. G. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. H. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.04 GATE VALVES A. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, solid wedge or disc, threaded ends. B. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre -grooved for mounting tamper switch, handwheel, OS&Y, solid bronze or cast iron wedge, flanged or grooved ends. C. Over 4 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, non -rising stem with bolted bonnet, solid bronze wedge, flanged ends, iron body indicator post assembly. 2.05 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Bronze Body: Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable sect, threaded or grooved ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built-in tamper proof switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. B. Cast or Ductile Iron Body: Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends, extended neck, handmeel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and internal tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. 2.06 CHECK VALVES A. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat, threaded ends. B. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. C. 4 inches and Over: Iron body, bronze disc, stainless steel spring, resilient seal, threaded, wafer, or flanged ends. 2.07 DRAIN VALVES A. Compression Stop: Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap. B. Ball Valve: Bross with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install sprinkler system and service main piping, hangers, and supports in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Install stand i e i in han ern and su orts in accordance with NFPA 14. PP PP 9. 9 PP C. Co with all materials desi n and installation re uirements of Factor Mutual. mP Y 9 q Y D. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain radient. 9 E. Install i in to conserve buildin s ace to not interfere with use of s ace and P P 9 9 P P other work. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. G. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls, and floors. H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. I. Inserts: Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork; Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams; Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches; Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface; Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through -bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. J. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work; Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow; Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe; Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping; Where several pipes can be installed in parallel end at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers; Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. K. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. L. Where exposed to view in finished areas, prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. M. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated or where approval from the project Structural Engineer has been given in writing. N. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings and floors. Seal and fire stop pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. 0. When installin more than one i in s stem material ensure s stem co onents are 9 P P 9 Y Y mP co atible end joined to ensure the inte rit of the s stem. Provide necessar InP 1 9 Y Y Y joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing ore consistently provided. P. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to installation. Q. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. END OF SECTION SECTION 210548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE SUPPREw'SSION PIPING AN) EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete housekeeping pads; Inertia bases for fire pumps; Vibration isolators; Seismic restraints. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Isolation Technology, Inc; Kinetics Noise Control, Inc; Mason Industries. 2.02 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A. Type: Non -directional and double acting unit consisting of interlocking steel members restrained by neoprene elements. B. Elements: Replaceable neoprene, minimum of 0.75 inch thick with minimum 1/8 inch air gap. C. Capacity: 4 times load assigned to mount groupings at 0.4 inch deflection. D. Attachment Points and Fasteners: Capable of withstanding 3 times rated load capacity of seismic snubber. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. On closed s rin isolators adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal P 9 1 o eratin conditions. P 9 C. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers for scheduled distance: Up to 4 Inches Pipe Size: First three points of support; 5 to 8 Inches Pipe Size: First four points of support; 10 inches Pipe Size and Over: First six points of support; Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or static deflection of isolated a ui ment. Select remainin isolators for minimum 1.0 inch q P 9 static deflection or 1 2 static deflection of isolated a ui ment. / q P 3.02 FIELD QUALIN CONTROL A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include static deflections. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Isolation Schedule. 1. 1 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 120 diameters from equipment. 2. 2 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 90 diameters from equipment. 3. 3 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 80 diameters from equipment. 4. 4 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 75 diameters from equipment. 5. 6 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 60 diameters from equipment. 6. 8 Inch Pipe Size: Isolate 60 diameters from equipment. END OF SECTION SECTION 210553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING AN) EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INLLDES A. Nameplates; Tags; Stencils; Pipe Markers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Corporation; Champion America, Inc; Satan Identification Products. 2.02 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved letters: Letter Color: White; Letter Height: 1/4 inch; Background Color: Black. 2.03 TAGS A. Plastic Togs: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved block letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. 2.04 STENCILS A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch high letters. 2. 1-1 2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pi e: 8 inch Ion color / P 9 field, 3/4 inch high letters. 3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1-1/4 inch high letters. 4. 8 to 10 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24 inch long color field, 2-1/2 inch high letters. 5. Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters. B. Semi -gloss enamel, colors conforming to ASME A13.1. 2.05 PIPE MARKERS A. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic and plastic tape pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Identify pumps and valves with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in -line pumps, may be identified with tags. C. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. ENO OF SECTION SECTION 210M - FIRE STOPPING FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS 7 8 9 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping materials and Firestopping of all penetrations and interruptions to fire rated assemblies, whether indicated on the Drawings, and other openings indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements: Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or FM or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 or ASTM E 119 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single or multiple component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant; conforming to the following: Durability and Longevity: Permanent; Color: Manufacturer's standard color; Manufacturers: A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc; 3M Fire Protection Products; Specified Technologies, Inc. B. Foam Firestoppping: Single or multiple component foam compound; conforming to the following: Durability and Longevity: Permanent; Color: Manufacturer's standard color; Manufacturers: A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc; 3M Fire Protection Products; Specified Technologies, Inc. C. Fiber Packing Material: Mineral or ceramic fiber packing insulation; conforming to the following: Durability and Longevity: Permanent; Manufacturers: A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc; 3M Fire Protection Products; Pecora Corporation; Specified Technologies, Inc; USG. D. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows; conforming to the following: Durability and Longevity: Permanent; Manufacturers: A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc; Grace Construction Products; 3M Fire Protection Products; Nelson Firestop Products; Specified Technologies, Inc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material. B. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install labeling required by code. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation. END OF SECTION SECTION 211300 - FIRE-SII14%SSION SPRINtM SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wet -pipe sprinkler system; System design, installation, and certification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Sprinkler System: Provide coverage for entire building unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Occupancy: As required by NFPA hazard classifications or as indicated on the Drawings whichever is more stringent. C. Water Supply: Determine volume and pressure from water flow test data. D. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. E. Provide fire department connections in the location(s) indicated on the Drawings and as approved by the local authority. 2.02 SPRINKLERS A. AII Sprinkler Fusible Links: Fusible solder link type or glass bulb type, to erature rated for s ecific area hazard. mP P B. Finished Ceilin s: Full -recessed concealed endant t e with flush cover late• 9 Y / P YP P Finish: Brass, Chrome or Enamel; Cover and Escutcheon Plate Finish: Enamel white; Adjustment: 1/2" minimum. D. Ex osed Area T e: Standard u ri ht t e• Finish: Chrome. P YP P 9 YP . E. Sidewall Type: Semi -recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate; Finish: Chrome plated or Enamel white; Escutcheon Plate Finish: Chrome plated or Enamel white. F. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler finish. 2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts; rated 10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC. B. Supervisory Switches: As required by NFPA and Local Authorities. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with referenced NFPA design and installation standard. B. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Provide approved backflow preventer assembly at sprinkler system water source connection. G. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work. H. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings. I. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required. J. Center all sprinklers symmetrically with respect to all soffits, light fixtures, air diffusers and other ceiling features. Approval of the Architect and Engineer at shop drawing review will be required for all sprinkler head layouts. Provide offsets and adjustments as re uired b the Architect En ineer's review comments. 1 q Y / 9 K. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinklers, cover plates, and sprinkler escutcheons do not receive field paint finish. Remove after painting. Replace painted sprinklers. L. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter. M. Install guards on sprinklers where exposed to damage. N. Hydrostatically test entire system. 0. Require test be witnessed by Fire Marshal and authority having jurisdiction. 3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Ensure re uired devices are installed and connected as re uired to fire alarm 9 q system. B. Verify that proper power supply is available prior to ordering equipment. Verify proper voltage, phase and current rating of power supply and inform Engineer of any deviations prior to order, connection of equipment or start-up. Responsibility for verification of proper power supply voltage and any product returns or damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor. END OF SECTION WALL ASSEMBL Y GYPSUM BOARD WALL ASSEMBLY STUDS I� A FILL VOID OR " CA NTY MA7ER/AL r " CAULK P/PE OR CONDO/T P/PE OR CONDUIT I � A RLL, VOID OR CAVITY MA7ER/AL ELEVATION CAULK * DETAIL FOR THROUGH PENETRATION OF METAL PIPE OR CONDUIT THROUGH 1,2,3 SECTION A -A OR 4 HOUR RATED GYPSUM WALL RATED PENETRATION DETAIL SPARE SPRINKLER CABINET CONTENTS SIZE OF MIN MIN WRENCH LIST OF SPRINKLER FACILITY HEAD HEADS PER HEAD SPRINKLERS ESCUTCHEONS OTY PER TYPE TYPE INSTALLED PER TYPE 0-300 SPRINKLERS 6 2 1 1 2 300-1000 SPRINKLERS 12 2 1 1 2 +1000 SPRINKLERS 24 2 1 1 2 NOTE: SPRINKLERS SHALL BE KEPT WHERE TEMPERATURE DOES NOTE EXCEED 100°F. MAXIMUM PROTECTION AREAS AND MAXIMUM SPACING FOR STANDARD SPRAY UPRIGHT & PENDENT HEADS PROTECTION AREA MAX DISTANCE CONSTRUCTION TYPE SYSTEM TYPE MAX (SO.FT.) MAX SPACING TO WALL (FT) LIGHT HAZARD: NONCOMBUSTIBLE OBSTRUCTED + PIPE P00 15'-0" 7'-6" UNOBSTRUCTED & COMBUSTIBLE SCHEDULE UNOBSTRUCTED WITH MEMBERS HYD. CALC. 225 15'-0" 7'-6" 3FT OR MORE O.C. COMBUSTIBLE OBSTRUCTED WITH ALL 168 15'-0" 7'-6" MEMBERS 3FT OR MORE O.C. COMBUSTIBLE OBSTRUCTED + UNOBSTRUCTED WITH MEMBERS ALL 130 15'-0" 7'-6" LESS THAN 3FT O.C. 15'-0" 7'-6" SPACE UNDER A PITCHED ROOF PARALLEL TO PARALLEL TO HAVING COMBUSTIBLE WOOD SLOPE SLOPE JOIST OR WOOD TRUSS ALL 120 CONSTRUCTION WITH MEMBERS 10'-0" 5'-0" LESS THAN 3FT O.C. WITH SLOPES HAVING A PITCH OF PERP. TO PERP. TO SLOPE SLOPE ORDINARY HAZARD: ALL ALL 130 15'- 0" 7'- 6" EXTRA HAZARD: PIPE 90 12'-0" 6'-0" SCHEDULE ALL HYD. CALC. 100 12'-0" 6'-0" DENSITY=.25+ HYD. CALC. 130 15'-0" 7'-6" DEN SI TY<.25 HANGER LOCATIONS (MAX PRESSURE < 100 PSI) HANGER ROD SIZES HANGER LOCATIONS (MAX PRESSURE > 100 PSI) PIPE SIZE A (MAX) A (MIN) B (MAX) PIPE SIZE DIAMETER PIPE SIZE A (MAX) A (MIN) B (MAX) 1" 36" 3" 24" UP TO 4" 3/8" 1" 12" 3" 12" 1 1 4 n 48 3 24 5 TO 8 1 2 1 1 4 " 12 3 12 >-1 1/2" 60" 3" 24" 10" & 12" 5/8" _>1 1/2" 12" 3" 12" e A B STEEL PIPE ONLY MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN HANGERS (FT. - IN.) PIPE TYPE NOMINAL PIPE SIZE (IN) 3/4 1 1 1/41 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 3 1/2 4 5 6 8 STEEL PIPE EXCEPT THREADED LIGHT WALL N/A 12-0 12-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 15-0 THREADED LIGHT WALL STEEL PIPE N A / 12-0 12-0 12-0 12-0 12-0 12-0 N A / N A / N A / N A / N A / ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these tans and su ortin documents under m direct p PP 9 Y su ervision. It ism rofessional 'ud ment that P YP 1 9 (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building De artment Staff that the be roved for Code P Y APP Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 1 " 90 EL. NEW 1 " X O'-2" NIPPLE CUT INTO EXIST. BR. LINE WITH SNAP O LET OR MECH TEE CEILING VERTICAL PLANE CEILING TREATED AS WALL X X X < 36" X > 36" S = MAX HEAD S = MAX HEAD SPACING rS/2 SPACING NOTE.- STANDARD NOTE.- STANDARD OBS7PUCTION ELEVATION OBS7RUCPON RULES APPL Y. RULES APPL Y. VERTICAL CEILING CHANGE RULE NOT TO SCALE � NOT TO SCALE STRUCTURAL MEMBER BEAM CLAMP A� CEILING ALL THREAD ROD OBSTRUCTION PIPE RING m PIPE SIZES: WHERE: D < 30" 1" THRU 4" = 3/8" ROD J 66" THRU 8" = 1/2" ROD J a 3 ELEVATION UPRIGHT/PENDENT PIPE HANGER SOFFIT BEAM CLAMP OBSTRUCTION RULE 6 4 NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE 10 11 12 13 14 15 EXIST/NG BRANCH L/NE NEW 1 " TO NEW FAD LOC 77ON ySEE PLAN i � 1 90 EL. NEW ' " X OROP CONCENTRIC REDUCER SUSPENDED CEILINGS CONCEALED SPRINKLER ARMOVER ASSEMBLY DETAIL NOT TO SCALE A > 3C OR 3D A < 24" GREATER OF C & D �A� SPRINKLER m o L OBSTRUCTION D PLAN VIEW STANDARD SPRAY UPRIGHT/PENDENT 16 CEILING OBSTRUCTION DISTANCE NOT TO SCALE A \o/ U 7 N m m O �A�I ELEVATION STANDARD SPRAY UPRIGHT/PENDENT OBSTRUCTION RULE NOT TO SCALE 17 18 NELSOA 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 wuvw. nelsonworldwide. cam Schnackel engineers, New Yoh � Miami � O ma�a � Las Angeles" Seatlle � Honolul u 800.5W1-0%i wwttdmdrolmm SC�]CWAB ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 PERMIT BID LANDLORD REVIEW CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS Q1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11122 NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB Charlottesville IBS 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 PROJECT #: 22.0000289.00 SHEET INFORMATION FFIE PF1C7'ECTICN SPECFICATIONS DRAWN BY: EMC REVIEWED BY: GRS SCALE: As noted FP2.1 0 d z `o E a d 0 3 d 0 i; 9 9 2 a E 9 d a 0 z 0 a 2 a d m a 0 d 6 0 0 9 a m 3 A 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 N M 119 H E G 100 E N C ►:. HVAC FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" NORTH GENERAL A107E.S A. EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE BASED ON RECORD DRAWINGS PROVIDED BY THE OWNER AND/OR LIMITED FIELD VERIFICATION BY OTHERS. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST TO ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE PROJECT. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELD VERIFICATION OF ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING THE BID. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSA TION WILL SE PROVIDED FOR ANY EXTRAS DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO VISIT THE PROJECT SITE PRIOR TO SUBMITTING THE BID. ANY DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY REPORTED TO THE ENGINEER FOR RESOLUTION. C. ALL CONTRACTORS SHALL REVIEW A COMPLETE SET OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. D. CONTRACTORS SHALL FAMILIARIZE THEMSELVES WITH DEMOLITION WORK PRIOR TO BIDDING AND START OF WORK. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO DEMOLISH ALL EXISTING AS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLA TION/CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK. E. ALL WORK SHALL BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE GOVERNMENT AND LOCAL CODES. F. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR FOR ALL POWER REQUIREMENTS. G. ALL CONTRACTORS SHALL REVIEW A COMPLETE SET OF CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND COOPERATE WITH THE OTHER TRADES SO THAT THE INSTALLATION OF ALL EQUIPMENT MAY BE PROPERL Y COORDINATED. H. ALL EQUIPMENT FURNISHED SHALL FIT THE SPACE AVAILABLE WITH CONNECTIONS IN THE REQUIRED LOCA TIONS AND WITH ADEQUA TE SPACE FOR OPERA TING AND SERVICING. THE DRAWINGS ARE GENERALLY DIAGRAMMA TIC AND INDICATE THE INTENT OF THE INSTALLA TION WHILE THE SPECIFICATIONS AND EQUIPMENT LIST DENOTE THE TYPE AND QUALITY OF MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP TO BE USED. THE DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE SCALED FOR EXACT MEASUREMENTS. WHERE A CONFLICT EXISTS BETWEEN THE DRAWINGS AND THE SPECIFICATIONS, THE HIGHER AND/OR MORE COSTLY STANDARD WILL APPLY. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROMPTLY NOTIFY THE ENGINEER WHOSE DECISION SHALL BE FINAL. NO ALLOWANCE WILL BE MADE SUBSEQUENTL Y IN THIS REGARD ON BEHALF OF THE CONTRACTOR AFTER AWARD OF THE CONTRACT. I. COORDINATE DUCT ROUTING AND HEIGHTS WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR. VERIFY ALL CLEARANCES BEFORE STARTING WORK. ✓. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO THE STRUCTURE, AVOID OBSTRUCTIONS, PRESERVE CEILING HEIGHTS AND HEADROOM AND MAKE ALL EQUIPMENT REQUIRING MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR ACCESSIBLE. K. ALL DUCT CONNECTIONS TO HVAC EQUIPMENT MUST BE MADE WITH FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS. L. DO NOT ATTACH ANYTHING TO DECK ABOVE. ATTACH TO STRUCTURE (i.e. BEAMS, JOISTS) ONLY. DUCT HANGERS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL CODE. ALL CONNECTIONS TO JOISTS SHALL BE MADE AT THE TOP CORD. M. ALL DUCT DIMENSIONS INDICATED ARE CLEAR INSIDE DIMENSIONS. ALL SUPPLY AND UNTEMPERED OUTDOOR AIR DUCTWORK SHALL BE LINED WITH 1" ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINER OR WRAPPED WITH 1-1/2" THICK FIRE RETARDANT FIBERGLASS WITH A REINFORCED ALUMINUM FOIL JACKET AND SHALL BE APPROVED FOR USE BY SMACNA AND NAIMA. RETURN AIR TRANSFER DUCTS AND RETURN DUCTWORK WITHIN 10 FEET OF THE UNIT FAN SHALL BE LINED WITH 1" ACOUSTICAL DUCT LINER. N. AT THE START OF CONSTRUCTION, THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT AND RUN TEST ALL EXISTING HVAC UNITS DESIGNA TED FOR REUSE. CONTRACTOR SHALL INFORM THE ENGINEER OF ANY NECESSARY REPAIRS FOR APPROVAL IN A TIMELY MANNER, AS TO NOT DELAY THE PROJECT OPENING DATE. 0. PROVIDE REMOTE VOLUME DAMPER CONTROL MANUFACTURED BY YOUNG RECULA TOR OR UNITED ENERTECH FOR DAMPERS LOCATED ABOVE INACCESSIBLE CEILINGS. LOCATE CONTROLLER ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING LOCATION. P. TENANT'S CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE FIELD VERIFICATION OF ALL UTILITY RUNS AND/OR OTHER IMPROVEMENTS LOCA TED ON THE PREMISES PRIOR TO BIDDING. TENANT'S CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL COSTS RELATING TO THE RELOCATION OF, DAMAGE TO, REPAIR OF ANY EXISTING UTILITY RUNS AND/OR IMPROVEMENTS WHICH ARE DAMAGED AS A RESULT OF TENANT'S WORK IN OR AROUND THE PREMISES. Q. ALL ROOFING WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED BY LANDLORDS APPROVED ROOFING CONTRACTOR AT TENANT'S EXPENSE, IF REQUIRED IN LEASE OR TENANT CRITERIA MANUAL. R. ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE LABELED WITH THE TENANT NAME AND SPACE NUMBER WITH J" HIGH WEATHER PROOF LETTERS. S. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TENANT WITH A WRITTEN ONE (1) YEAR MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY ON ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT PROVIDED AND / OR INSTALLED. THE WARRANTY SHALL INCLUDE ALL LABOR, MATERIALS AND THREE (J) ROUTINE SERVICES INCLUDING FILTER CHANGES DURING A ONE (1) YEAR PERIOD. T. AT THE COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION AN NEBB, AABC OR TABB CERTIFIED AIR BALANCE REPORT SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER AND LANDLORD. THE BALANCING MUST BE COMPLETED BY AN INDEPENDENT, THIRD PARTY CONTRACTOR WITH NO TIES TO THE INSTALLING CONTRACTORS. CONTRACTOR TO SUBMIT BALANCING REPORT TO LAKE ZURICH BUILDING AND ZONING DEPARTMENT, PRIOR TO FINAL INSPECTION. U. GC IS TO PROTECT IN PLACE ALL EXISTING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SLATED FOR REUSE DURING ALL PHASES OF WORK. GC IS TO REPLACE ALL HVAC FILTERS AT THE BEGINNING AND END OF THE PROJECT. BUILDING C00RDIAUT1W AA. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN A COPY OF THE LANDLORD'S TENANT CRITERIA MANUAL. TENANT CRITERIA MANUAL IS AN INTEGRAL PART OF THIS CONTRACT. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLYING WITH LANDLORD REQUIREMENTS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE TENANT. AB. PARTS OF THE BASE BUILDING SYSTEMS THAT FALL INTO LEASE LINE SHALL REMAIN UNDISTURBED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. AC. PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY WIRING, RELAYS, DETECTORS, COMPONENTS, ETC., FOR FIRE ALARM OR CONTROL SYSTEM INTERLOCK IF APPLICABLE. VERIFY WITH BUILDING PERSONNEL BEFORE BID. AD. TENANT TO USE LANDLORD ROOFER FOR ALL NEW ROOF PENETRATIONS. AE. TENANT TO INSTALL FIRE DAMPERS AS REQUIRED BY LAW. AF. NO DUCTWORK, PIPING, CONDUIT, ETC. SHALL BE SUSPENDED OR ATTACHED TO ROOF DECK. ALL SUCH ITEMS MUST BE SUSPENDED ONLY FROM JOISTS AND/OR BEAMS. AG. ANY EQUIPMENT THAT EXTENDS PASSED THE LEASE LINE, TENANT SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO INSTALL AN EXTENSION, OR RELATE THE FAN, IF THERE ARE COMPLAINTS REGARDING EXHAUST ODORS. HVAC A07FS:- 1. EXISTING LENNOX, GSC16-072, 6 TON ROOFTOP UNIT TO BE REPLACED, RE —USE EXISTING CURB. VERIFY EXACT LOCA TION IN THE FIELD. SEE SHEET M2.1 FOR ROOFTOP UNIT SCHEDULE. INSTALLATION MAY REQUIRE TRANSITION CURB ADAPTOR, RETAIL AIR SYSTEMS, CUSTOM CURB, OR EQUAL MANUFACTURER. 2. DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR ON RETURN SIDE DUCT AND SHUTDOWN RELAY SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR FOR INSTALLATION BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. ALL WIRING SHALL BE BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. J. PROVIDE NEW EXHAUST FAN AS NOTED ON PLANS AND SCHEDULED ON SHEET M2.1. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY THAT THE LOCATION SHOWN IS A MINIMUM OF 15'-0" FROM ANY OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE. 4. PROVIDE 870 EXHAUST AIR DUCT UP TO EF-1 ON ROOF. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL UNDERCUT DOOR J14 ". 6. PROVIDE NEW FULLY DIGITAL 7 DAY PROGRAMMABLE TYPE THERMOSTAT WITH AUTO CHANGE OVER AND AUTO SET BACK. MOUNT THERMOSTAT AT 48" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT AND LIGHT SWITCHES. 7. PROVIDE ADD —AL TERNA TE PRICING FOR DUCTED MAKE—UP IN LIEU OF UNDERCUTTING DOOR AS PER NOTE 5. UP ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 � a s z 0 E 0 3 0 a 9 D N a °c E E 9 d a 0 m z a a 9 N P a O N N 0 9 N a 3 m ss NELSON Honshu 0ss 0 tss t 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 CODE: 2018 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE BLOCK LOAD (6T) TABLE 403.3.1.1 TABLE 403.3.1.1 TABLE 4.1 � - � N E L S O A Az RRIPRa OCCUPANT PANTVpz Vpzm INTERPOLATED ROOM AREA TABLE 403.3.1.1 PEOPLE CA AREA CA DENSITY Pz Vbz TABLE 403.3.1.1.1.2 Voz MAX SUPPLY MIN SUPPLY TABLE 403.3.1.1.2.3.2 P # NAME FT2 OCCUPANCY CATEGORY CFM/PER CFM/FT2 #/1000 FT2 # R `Pz Ra'Az CFM Ez CFM CFM CFM ZP Ev 101 TOWNSQUARE 501 RECEPTION AREAS 5.0 0.06 30 16 80 30 110 0.80 138 1000 1000 0.138 1.00 102 OFFICE 131 OFFICE SPACES 5.0 0.06 5 3 15 8 23 0.80 29 250 250 0.114 1.00 74) 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 103 OFFICE 131 OFFICE SPACES 5.0 0.06 5 3 15 8 23 0.80 29 100 100 0.286 0.86 10 Cincinnati, OH 45202 104 HALLWAY 109 CORRIDORS 0.0 0.06 0 0 0 7 7 0.80 8 50 50 0.164 0.99 105 ALL GENDER RESTROOM 57 NO LISTING 0.0 0.00 0 0 0 0 0 0.80 0 50 50 0.000 1.00 www.nelsonworldwide.com 106 BACK OFFICE 115 OFFICE SPACES 5.0 0.06 5 1 5 7 12 0.80 15 400 400 0.037 1.00 107 MOP CLOSET 7 STORAGE ROOMS 0.0 0.12 0 0 0 1 1 0.80 1 0 0 0.000 1.00 108 OFFICE 131 OFFICE SPACES 5.0 0.06 5 3 15 8 23 0.80 29 100 100 0.286 0.86 109 CONF. ROOM 158 CONFERENCE ROOMS 5.0 0.06 50 8 40 9 49 0.80 62 450 450 0.137 1.00 ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct 90 FIVE SECTION ELBOW 45' THREE SECTION ELBOW 1,340 34 170 77 247 1 309 2400 2400 0.286 0.86 supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as N outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia OUTDOOR AIR CALCULATIONS PER EQUATION 4-1: Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered 1Q0 systems and/or construction features are SYMBOL VALUE DESCRIPTION deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes QS Ps = 34 SYSTEM POPULATION and regulations. ECS recommends to Building SPz = 34 ZONE POPULATION Department Staff that they be Approved for Code D = 1.00 OCCUPANT DIVERSITY Compliance. Von = 247 UNCORRECTED OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE This certification does not relieve the registered - - Zp (max) = 0.286 ZONE PRIMARY OUTDOOR AIR FRACTION (MAXIMUM) design professionals) of record and other Ev = 0.86 SYSTEM VENTILATION EFFICIENCY parties of their responsibilities for the design or SVpz= 2400 ZONE PRIMARY AIRFLOW construction of the project. 90' BRANCH TAKE -OFF 45' BRANCH TAKE -OFF khnwkel Vot = 286 CODE REQUIRED OUTDOOR AIRFLOW RATE, CFM engineers, Vot = 290 DESIGN OUTDOOR AIRFLOW RATE, CFM M eao1 Omahas Las Angeles seMAviLl AIR DUCT 7'.. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO 3 NOT TO TYPICAL ROUND DUCT FITTINGS RETURN TUBE Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 SCALE ROOF TOP UNITS DUCT SMOKE COOLING HEATING ELECTRICAL DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . PAIR AT PAIR AT PAIR AT PAIR AT SUPPLY EXT. MAXIMUM L MARK SEN TOT COOL IN OUT AIR S.P. FAN WEIGHT SEER CARRIER 10 FT. SPACING 8 FT. SPACING 5 FT. SPACING 4 FT. SPACING BHP VOLT PH MCA MOCP (LBS) /EER MODEL NUMBER REMARKS HALF OF (MBH) (MBH) (TON) (MBH) (MBH) (CFM) (IN) DUCT PERIMETER STRAP STRAP STRAP STRAP WIRE/ WIRE/ WIRE/ WIRE/ RTU-1 54.1 1 71.9 1 6 1 150.0 1 120.0 1 2,400 10.70 1.5 208 3 28.0 45 691 11.0 48FCM07A [1-91 ROD ROD ROD ROD CARRIER IS THE BASIS OF DESIGN. HIGH EFFICIENCY AAON, LENNOX, TRANE OR YORK ARE EQUAL. P 10 GA. 10 GA. 12 GA. 12 GA. COOLING CAPACITIES ARE BASED ON AHRI STANDARD 210/240 OR 340/360: 80°F DB/ 67°F WB INDOOR ENTERING AIR SAMPLING TUBEA 2 = 30" 1" x 22 GA. (135") 1" x 22 GA. (,135") 1 x 22 GA. (,106") 1" x 22 GA. (,106") TEMPERATURE, 95°F DB AIR ENTERING OUTDOOR FAN. SCHEDULED UNIT MAY DIFFER FROM AHRI STANDARD CFM. REMARKS: P = 72" 1" x 18 GA. 3/8" 1" x 20 GA. 1/4" 1" x 22 GA. 1/4" 1" x 22 GA. 1/4" 1. PROVIDE EQUIPMENT WITH SCCR GREATER THAN THE AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AT THE EQUIPMENT OR UPSTREAM PANELBOARD. 2 REFER TO THE ELECTRICAL ONE LINE DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULES FOR AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT AT UPSTREAM PANELBOARD. NOTE. 2. PROVIDE WITH FACTORY INSTALLED DISCONNECT, UNPOWERED CONVENIENCE OUTLET, THROUGH THE BASE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION. 1. DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR ON RETURN AND/OR SUPPLY SIDE DUCT AND SHUTDOWN RELAY p 3. PROVIDE WITH DRY BULB ECONOMIZER AND BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPER. SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR FOR INSTALLATION BY THE - = 96" 1" x 16 GA. 3/8" 1" x 18 GA. 3/8" 1" x 20 GA. 3/8" 1" x 22 GA. 1/4" K 4. ECONOMIZER SHALL INCLUDE FAULT DETECTION DIAGNOSTICS (FDD). DAMPER LEAKAGE SHALL MEET APPLICABLE ENERGY CODE. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. ALL WRING SHALL BE BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 2 5. PROVIDE WITH CONDENSER COIL HAIL GUARD. P C&dlff 6. DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR ON THE RETURN SIDE DUCT AND SHUTDOWN RELAY SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE ELECTRICAL = 120" 1 1/2" x 16 GA. 1/2" 1" x 16 GA. 3/8" 1" x 18 GA. 3/8" 1" x 20 GA. 1/4" CONTRACTOR FOR INSTALLATION BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. ALL WIRING SHALL BE BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. DUCT SMOKE 2 7. PROVIDE WATER LEVEL MONITORING DEVICE IN DRAIN PAN TO SHUT OFF UNIT IF THE DRAIN LINE BECOMES RESTRICTED. DETECTOR DETAIL 2 / / / SCHWAB8. UNITS WITH COOLING CAPACITY GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 65 MBH SHALL HAVE MULTI -STAGE CAPABILITY - = 168 1 1 2 x 16 GA. 1/2" 1 1/2" x 16 GA. 1 2" 1' x 16 GA. 3 8" 1" x 18 GA. 3/8" PER APPLICABLE ENERGY CODE. 9. PROVIDE ADAPTOR CURB. NOT TO SCALE P = 192" --- 1/2" 1 1/2" x 16 GA. 1/2" 1" x 16 GA. 3/8" 1" x 16 GA. 3/8" 2 EXHAUST FANS P = 193" UP SPECIAL ANALYSIS REQUIRED MAX. OF 12" TO BRANCH CONNEC77ON 2 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE AIRFLOW EXTERNAL MOTOR DATA MARK LOCATION SERVICE (CFM) STATIC SONES FAN VOLT pH RPM MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER REMARKS GALVANIZED SHEET METAL WHEN STRAPS ARE LAP JOINED SINGLE HANGER MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE LOAD (IN H20) (hp) DUCT AND INSULA7USE THESE MINIMUM FASTENERS: ON STRAP WIRE OR ROD (DIA.) PER SPECIFICA TIONS EF-1 ROOF RR &MOP SINK 170 C 6.1 0.3 115 1 1,298 GREENHECK G-097-VG 1-4 1" x 18, 20, 22 GA. - TWO #10 OR ONE 1/4" BOLT 1" x 22 GA. - 260 LBS. 0.106" - 80 LBS. REMARKS: 1" x 16 GA. - TWO 1/4" DIA. 1" x 20 GA. - 320 LBS. 0.135" - 120 LBS. 1. PROVIDE SOLID STATE SPEED CONTROL. - - - - - - - - - - - 1" x 16 GA. - TWO 3/8" DIA. 1" x 18 GA. - 420 LBS. 0.162" - 160 LBS. 2. PROVIDE MOTORIZED BACKDRAFT DAMPER. I USE RIGID GALVANIZED PLACE FASTENERS IN SERIES, NOT SIDE BY SIDE. 1" x 16 GA. -700 LBS. 1/4" - 270 LBS. 3. PROVIDE MINIMUM 12 INCH HEIGHT ROOF CURB. I 90 DEGREE ELBOW 1 1/2" x 16 GA. - 1100 LBS. 3/8" - 680 LBS. 4. EXHAUST FAN CONTROLS TO BE INTERLOCKED WITH THE SUPPLY FAN OF UNIT SERVING THE SAME AREA. 1/2" - 1250 LBS. METAL STRAP CLAMP GAL VAN/ZED SHEET METAL (TYPICAL) 2 PLACES 5/4" - 3000 LBS. 3/4" - 3000 LBS. H DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS DUCT AND INSULATION INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT PER SPECIFICA TIONS (MIN. 2' MAX. 5' NO MORE NOTES: VOLUME DAMPER LOCATED OPPOSED THAN ONE 90' BEND) 1. DIMENSIONS OTHER THAN GAUGE ARE IN INCHES. MARK SERVICE LOCATION CEILING TYPE MOUNTING TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER REMARKS IN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION. BLADE DAMPER 2. TABLES ALLOW FOR DUCT WEIGHT, 1 LB./SF INSULATION WEIGHT AND NORMAL REINFORCEMENT PROVIDE ACCESS DOOR OR AT DIFFU TRANSITION FITTING AND TRAPEZE WEIGHT, BUT NO EXTERNAL LOADS. D-1 SUPPLY CEILING AC TILE LAY-IN,NARROW-TEE TITUS OMNI-NT X 24x24 26 AG-75 1,2 CABLE OPERATOR IF NOT AS REQUIRED 3. STRAPS ARE GALVANIZED STEEL; OTHER MATERIALS ARE UNCOATED STEEL. ACCESSIBLE. INSULATE DIFFUSER 4. ALLOWABLE LOADS FOR P/2 ASSUME THAT DUCTS ARE 16 GA. MAXIMUM, EXCEPT THAT WHEN D-2 SUPPLY CEILING GYP. BOARD LAY-IN,TRM TITUS OMNI X 3 12x12 26 AG-75 1,2,3 SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER MAXIMUM DUCT DIMENSION W IS OVER 60" THEN P 2 MAXIMUM IS 1.25 W. ISSUE INFORMATION G-1 RETURN CEILING AC TILE LAY-IN,NARROW-TEE TITUS 350RL-NT X XX 3 26 AG-15 1,2 BACK AND SEAL WITH TYPE AS INDICATED ( ) / VAPOR BARRIER TAPE 5. 12, 10 OR 8 GA. WIRE IS STEEL OF BLACK ANNEALED, BRIGHT BASIC OR GALVANIZED TYPE. G-2 EXHAUST CEILING GYP. BOARD SURFACE TITUS 25RL X X 1 26 AG- 35 1,2 ON SCHEDULE 6. DUCTS SHALL BE SUPPORTED AT INTERVALS NOT EXCEEDING 10 FEET. ISSUED FOR G-3 ETURN/TRANSFER CEILING I GYP. BOARD I SURFACE I TITUS I 25RL X X 1 26 AG-35 1,2 CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 G REMARKS: PERMIT 1. TITUS IS THE BASE OF DESIGN. KRUEGER, OR PRICE ARE EQUAL. NO EXCEPTIONS. 2. SEE PLAN FOR NECK SIZE. I BID 3. PROVIDE WITH MODEL TRM FRAME. RECTANGULAR DUCT HANGER TABLE LANDLORD REVIEW 5 TYPICAL DIFFUSER CONNECTION NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED F "CONSTRUCTION SET' HEREIN STRAP OR ROD REVISIONS HANGER STRAPS I ANGLE A Q 1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 I 6 0 MAX. 45° DIVERGING, 60° CONVERGING 0 MAX. 45° DIVERGING, 60° CONVERGING - 60" MAX. UNLESS FOOT OF STRAP I DUCT A 15° OR LESS AIR - A/ /S PLACED UNDER A I L p B R �LO 11:::J 0� - BOTTOM REINFORCEMENT I FLOW - DUCT I TRANSFORMATION EXPANSION CONTRACTION - E I - I _ I DUCT SHOULD ---------- TURNING - FOR SEVERAL NCHESDFROM STRAIGHT AHT VANE o c CONNECTON BEFORE BEND/NG s" 7L11 MIN. TURNING o NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. S ON SCREW SCREWS MA Y BE OMM/TED SIZE BOL T(S) VANES X 2 /F HANGER LOOPS FOR LOAD �? R;? TH OF °OMM, 1" (25mm) MINIMUM STRAP HANGER TRAPEZE HANGER THREE 2 3D ���`�� P/ D Mq� jMU 90' ELBOW TURNING VANES /D O G�Z N GORY 45' ELBOW SIMILAR NO THROAT RADIUS SHORT RADIUS FULL RADIUS SCHI ACKEL > HANGER LOAD RATED e 0 15 0 MAX. SAG 112 " PER FASTENER O FOOT (41.7 mm PER m) 1" (25mm) BAND CLAMP o s/ONAL E OF SUPPORT SPACING t WITH WIRE IS OPTIONAL HANGER RODS, SECURE WIRE BAND OF WIRES OR STRAPS O SLOPE - Dore: /0/11/22 SAME SIZE /� D SLOPE - 1" IN 7" MAX. con o4°� oosss� o AS HANGER +/ 1" IN 7" MAX. 1" IN 4" MIN. �j STRAP 1" IN 4" MIN. C S°0 PROJECT INFORMATION M/j] a ,7,1M RE SUPPLY OR RETURN WYE TURNING VANES CHARLES SCHWAB MAX. SAG 1/2" PER ¢ �M RECTANGULAR DUCT) ^xo Charlottesville IBS FOOT (41.7 mm PER m) OF SUPPORT SPACING 220 Twentyninth Place W Suite S20 24"0 MAX. 0 Charlottesville, VA 22901 000 I� 1" (25mm) MINIMUM 10"0 MAX. BAND 'J� �i PROJECT#: CLOSER MAXIMUM INTERVALS MAY BE SPECIFIED ONE BEHALF-ROUND USED IF Q D1 � a MAYBE USED N 22.0000289.00 DUCT SHAPE IS L=W/4, 4" MIN. IV B AS A CONDITION OF U.L. LISTING, PARTICULARLY 36"� MAX. MAINTAINED o IN FIRE RATED FLOOR - CEILING ASSEMBLIES q 45 DEGREE ENTRY 0 45' 90' ELBOW TAKE -OFF SHEET INFORMATION BRANCH TAKE -OFF USE ONLY IN AREAS FULL RADIUS ELBOW HVAC SCHEDULES a NOTE: HANGERS MUST NOT DEFORM DUCT SHAPE FITTING WHERE SPACE IS LIMITED TAKE -OFF AND DETALs as 0 " 7 FLEXIBLE DUCT SUPPORTS 4 DUCT HANGER DETAIL DUCTWORK DETAILS DRAWN BY: t REVIEWED BY: ° A NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE GRS SCALE: As noted 3 m 9 m W it l 0 ii N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 M w N 2 3 4 5 0 7 0 0 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PI NI MI LI KI JI HI GI FI EI DI CI AI ROOF TOP UNIT SE( CURB EXIS77/ ROOF ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 ROOF TOP UNIT I GASKET I I k-- I 2 CURB ADAPTER NOT TO SCALE RN INSULA77ON�� METAL DECK ROOF JOIST ROOF MEMBRANE FLEXIBLE CONNEC770N RETURN AIR DUCT SUPPLY AIR DUCT M7TM 1. PROVIDE THROUGH CURB ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS. NO ROOF PENETRATIONS OF ELECTRICAL CONDUITS WILL BE ACCEPTABLE. 2. DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR SHALL BE MOUNTED AND INSTALLED PER LOCAL CODES. ROOF TOP UNIT. REFER TO SCHEDULES AND SPECIFICA TONS FOR SIZES AND ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FACTORY ROOF CURB WITH FULL PERIMETER NEOPRENE PAD BETWEEN CURB AND UNIT. PRO VIDE OPEN OR CLOSED RES7RAINED SPRING WBRA T/ON ISOLATORS WHEN INDICATED ON DRAWINGS GAS PIPING (IF APPLICABLE). PROVIDE GAS COCK, UNION, AND DIRT LEG. PROVIDE THROUGH THE BASE PENETTA77ON WHEN SPECIFIED ROOFTOP UNIT CONDENSA TE DRAIN. PIPE SIZE SHALL BE NO LESS THAN DRAIN CONNEC77ON ON UNIT. REFER TO PLUMBING PLANS FOR ROUTING, SIZE, AND DISCHARGE LOCATION OF CONDENSATE TYPICAL ROOF TOP UNIT DETAIL NOT TO SCALE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com Schnackel engineers, New Yoh 0 Miami s Omahas Las Angeles m Seatlle a s z 0 E 0 3 a s a 9 D a E a 0 z a a 0 0 0 9 N a 9 NELSON C&dlff s Honshu 0 sa i\T H OF a as tCa sa sa sa t 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 NELSON a N M L I:a H G F E u C FE M O N N m 0 m N SECTION 230000 - HVAC GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 APPLICABILITY A. This section supplements all sections of the Specifications for Division 23 and shall apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the Drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of approved HVAC systems. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. "Work" is hereby defined as, "The construction and services required by the Contract Documents whether completed or partially completed and includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The work may constitute the whole or a part of the Qroject." B. "Furnish is hereby defined as, "To supply and deliver, unload, and inspect for damage." C. "Install" is hereby defined as, "To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, connect, and place into operation into the work." D. "Provide is hereby defined as, "To furnish and install." E. "Connect" is hereby defined as, "To bring service to the equ!Pment and make final attachment including necessary ductwork, piping, wiring, etc. F. "Concealed" is hereby defined as, "Hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, embedded in construction, in crawl spaces, or buried." G. "Exposed" is hereby defined as, "Not installed underground nor concealed as defined by the Specifications." H. "Drawings" is hereby defined as, "All plans, details, equipment schedules, diagrams, sketches, etc. issued for the construction of the work." 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Perform work in accordance with the applicable Building Code, Electrical Code, Fire Code, Mechanical Code, Plumbing Code, Energy Code, and all other applicable codes, amendments, and ordinances. Also perform all work in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) including Fire Morshol(s). B. Perform work in accordance with Landlord requirements, including any Tenant Criteria Manuals and Lease Exhibits, where applicable. C. Perform work in accordance with the applicable utility companies serving the project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper coordination of the work. D. Recognized Standards: Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under the requirements of these Specifications shall conform to the latest publications or standard rules of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.), American Society for Testing and Materials WTM), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), and National Electrical Code C), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), and the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). E. The Contract Documents shall take precedence where the Contract Documents exceed code, Landlord, utility, or recognized standards requirements. 1.04 PERMITS AND FEES A. Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the work under this Contract shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless otherwise indicated. 1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor is responsible to obtain, fully understand, and coordinate the work with the complete set of Contract Documents. Any required corrections, including all associated costs, arising from issues caused by the Contractors failure to understand and/or coordinate the work with the complete set of Contract Documents are the Contractor's sole responsibility. B. Work under these sections is diagrammatic unless indicated otherwise and is intended to convey the scope of work and indicate the general arrangement of ductwork, piping, equipment, and accessories. Follow these drawings in laying out the work and verify spaces for the installation of these materials and equipment. Wherever a question exists as to the exact intended location of ductwork, piping, or equipment, obtain instructions from the Architect before proceeding with the work. C. Notify the Architect for resolution if a discrepancy is discovered within the Contract Documents. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect of discrepancies shall result in the resolution becoming the Contractor's responsibility and subject to the Architect's review and possible rejection. Should the Architect reject a discrepancy resolution of which they were not notified, the Contractor is fully responsible to correct the installation, including all associated costs, until approval of the installation is given by the Architect. 1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify all existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Any existing conditions indicated in the Contract Documents are based on information drawings provided by others and possibly limited field verification. The Contractor shall adjust for actual field conditions at no additional expense to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall visit the project site, review existing conditions against the Contract Documents, and familiarize himself with the work prior to bidding and start of the work. By signing the Contract, the Contractor acknowledges the site visit has been completed and the existing conditions are accepted. D. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of major discrepancies in writing so the appropriate modifications to the design can be made without delay to the project. The Contractor assumes full responsibility of adjusting for discrepancies of which the Architect is not informed. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Furnish the Architect shop drawing portfolios containing names of manufacturer and cut sheets of equipment to be used on the project. Use manufacturer's specification sheets identified by number indicated on drawings or schedules. Indicate catalog number on the cut sheets. As applicable, provide construction data, weight and dimensional data, voltage ratings, performance data, listing data, pump curves, fan curves and sound data as part of the shop drawing submittal. 2. Submittals are reviewed only for general compliance with the Contract Documents. Dimensions, quantities and details are not checked during submittal review. Review of the submittals does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing all materials, equipment and accessories necessary for a complete and operational system meeting the requirements of the project and the intent of the Contract Documents. The responsibility for coordination of substituted materials and equipment lies solely with the substituting Contractor. 3. Electrical Characteristics: Verify that proper power supply is available prior to ordering equipment. Verify proper voltage, phase and current rating of power supply and inform Engineer of any deviations prior to order, connection of equipment or start-up. Responsibility for verification of proper power supply voltage and any product returns or damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor. B. Project Record Documents: Provide as specified. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. D. Test Reports: Provide as specified. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section, with minimum Hive years experience. C. Products: 1. Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. All equipment and components shall be free of all rust/corrosion or any visible damage. All items not complying with this requirement shall be replaced without any change in the Contract amount. E. Equipment performance and accessories shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and specified herein. Inclusion in both locations is not a prerequisite to inclusion in the Contract. Equipment and accessories specified in either location shall be included in the Contract. Provide all necessary accessories and connections as required for a complete, functional system, including all required components reasonably inferred to as necessary although such components may or may not be specifically indicated in the Contract Documents. F. Code or utility company requirements shall supersede any conflicting requirements of this section. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Rooftop Equipment: Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are in place, ready for immediate installation of units. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. C. Protect dampers and accessories from damage to operating linkages, blades and finishes. D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. 1.10 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE A. Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. B. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for pumps. C. Provide three year manufacturers warranty for solid state ignition modules. D. Provide five year manufacturers warranty for compressors, heat exchangers, condensing units, and electronic air cleaners. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The manufacturers listed are listed to set minimum standards for quality, design, and functionality. The products of other manufacturers may be submitted, at the Contractors option, during shop drawing review unless indicated otherwise. The products of other manufacturers shall meet or exceed all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor accepts all responsibility for costs and coordination issues arising out of the substitution of materials or equipment, and the coordination of such substitutions with all other contractors and subcontractors. B. The Contractor may use any of the following ductwork, piping or insulation materials at his option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and any utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected material is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Examine the Contract Documents as a whole for the work of other trades. Coordinate all work accordingly. B. Promptly report to the Architect any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of the work, which might prevent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of others. Failure to so report shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other trades as being fit and proper for the execution of this work. C. Plan, lay out, and coordinate the work with all trades well enough in advance so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference to work that has not been completed and work that is in progress. Inform all trades of openings required for the work and provide all special frames, sleeves, and anchor bolts required. The HVAC system layout may be altered to suit the conditions with engineer approval, prior to the installation of any work and without additional cost to the Owner. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. D. Perform all work in conformity with the Contract Documents and afford other trades reasonable opportunity for the execution of their work. Properly connect and coordinate this work with the work of other trades at such time and in such a manner as not to delay or interfere with their work. E. All roofing penetrations shall be flashed and weather sealed by the roofing manufacturer's authorized roofing contractor at this Contractor's expense. This Contractor shall contract with the factory authorized roofing contractor for the specific roofing system applicable to this Project. The use of on unauthorized roofing contractor may result in removal and replacement of the penetration systems at this Contractor's expense. F. All temperature control wiring, thermostat wiring, damper interlock wiring, control panel interlock wiring and miscellaneous low voltage wiring associated with the equipment furnished or installed under this contract shall be furnished and installed by the mechanical contractor or his sub -contractor. All wiring installed under this contract shall be in full compliance with the National Electrical Code, all State and local codes and requirements of the Electrical Specifications for this project. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on the Drawings. B. Verify all equipment locations prior to rough -in. Maintain adequate equipment service clearance per manufacturer and code. C. Verify routing of all ductwork and piping in field prior to fabrication or installation. Verify adequate clearance with structure, light fixtures, and ceiling heights. D. Verify that proper fuel and power supply is available for connection. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install all ductwork, pipe, equipment, and accessories to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide tests as necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status, and suitable operation of each system. Tests shall be conducted under the supervision of the Architect. 3.05 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean fire suppression parts to remove harmful materials. B. Clean exposed surfaces of all ductwork pipe, equipment, and accessories of all dirt, debris, splatter, and other deleterious materials. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning as applicable. C. Repair or replace damaged ductwork, pipe, equipment, and accessories, as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Architect, where marring or disfigurement has occurred. All pipe, equipment, and accessories shall be new. 3.06 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: At project closeout, provide one printed copy and one electronic copy of project record drawings to the Owner. Information contained on project record drawings shall include, as a minimum: 1. Actual locations of all equipment, ductwork, air inlets/outlets, accessories, etc. 2. Actual routing of ductwork with sizes and elevations. 3. Actual locations of control devices including valves and volume dampers. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: At project closeout submit to the Architect two P P le copies of descriptive literature, maintenance and operation data for all hvac equipment, control systems, accessories, and materials used. Include maintenance procedures, intervals, and parts list of each item installed under this contract. Include all manufacturer's guarantees and warranties. C. Maintenance Materials: At project closeout, furnish to the Owner the following: 1. One set of replacement filters for all hvac equipment. 2. The maintenance contract for the hvac system, if applicable. D. Test Reports: At project closeout, submit to the Architect two copies of the following: 1. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report END OF SECTION SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vibration isolators. B. Equipment: 1. Fans, axial and centrifugal 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Isolation Technology, Inc.; Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.; Mason Industries. 2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Restrained Open Spring Isolators: 1. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Spring Mounts: Provide with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware. 3. Sound Pads: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators. 4. Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops. 5. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. B. Spring Hanger: 1. Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for load carrying capacity. 2. Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators or rubber hanger with threaded insert. 3. Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree hanger rod misalignment. 4. For Exterior and Humid Areas: Hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. C. Neoprene Pad Isolators: 1. Rubber or neoprene waffle pads. a. Hardness: 30 durometer. b. Thickness: Minimum 1/2 inch. C. Maximum Loading: 50 psi. d. Rib Height: Maximum 0.7 times width. 2. Configuration: Single layer. D. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.4 inch deflection with threaded insert. E. Glass Fiber Pads: Neoprene jacketed pre -compressed molded glass fiber. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions. C. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal. D. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers to nearest flexible pipe connector. E. Provide flexible connections on all piping and ductwork connections to equipment. Refer to other sections of this Specification for the acceptable types of flexible connectors to be used. F. Selection of type, thickness and deflection of vibration isolation shall be by the vibration control manufacturer based on the specific equipment type and size, as scheduled on the Drawings and indicated below. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. Equipment Isolation Schedule: (Minimum deflection as sized by the isolation equipment manufacturer.) 1. Fans, axial and centrifugal. a. Small fans up to 22" diameter wheel: 1. Rubber Mount or Hanger END OF SECTION SECTON 230593 -TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. 1. Air handling units; Packaged heating and/or cooling equipment; Fans. (Exhaust and supply; Coils; Terminal equipment; Air inlets and outlets. (Diffusers, grilles, louvers, etc.) B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. C. Independent agency requirements. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervisor for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. Provide TAB Agency qualifications. B. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Submit to the Construction Manager within two weeks after completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing. 2. Provide reports in bound manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat and equipment locations. 3. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 4. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111. 5. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name, address and telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. b. Project: Name; location; Engineer; Contractor, Report date. 1.03 WARRANTY A. The Balancing Contractor shall be prepared to return to the site at no additional cost to re -adjust air quantities as required to provide uniform temperatures, eliminate drafts and objectionable noises during the first year of occupancy, including one full heating and one full cooling season, after the acceptance of the final balancing report. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 4. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the Project. C. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction. D. TAB Agency Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this Section with a minimum of five years experience. 2. Certified by one of the following: a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council; upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute. END OF SECTION 3. The TAB Agency must be a completely independent, third party balancing contractor with no financial, common owners or other ties to the installing contractors. SECTION 233100 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 E. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by some organization as Cincinnati, OH 45202 TAB agency. PART 1 GENERAL 3.02 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems; Air Outlets and Inlets; Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES www.nelsonwoddwide.com plus or minus 15 percent of design. A. Metal ductwork. 3.03 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING B. Nonmetal ductwork. A. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing C. Round spiral ductwork settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. Duct cleaning. B. Mark on the Drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements 1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS were taken and cross reference the location in the final report. A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. 3.04 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts, only after approval of the return, and exhaust air quantities. Engineer. Sizes shown on design drawings are air dimensions. Contractor may B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross increase duct size without engineer approval, provided all ceiling and shaft sectional area of duct. clearances can be maintained. Additional charges for increased duct size will not C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. be accepted by the owner. lir D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from B. Report all conflicts with structure or other obstructions, prior to fabrication of objectionable drafts and noise. any ductwork. Suitable adjustments in the sizes of ducts shall be accommodated E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that without any additional expense to the Owner. adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume 1.03 SUBMITTALS control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. Do not use A. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, diffuser, grille or register integral dampers for balancing adjustments unless the and configuration prior to start of work for all systems. No ductwork shall be plans do not indicate duct mounted devices. fabricated until engineer approved shop drawings have been received by the F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive Contractor. Identify on ductwork shop drawings any deviations in sizes or shapes Rhmickel changes required at no additional expense to the Owner. Vary branch air quantities made necessary by the obstructions of other trades. by damper regulation. B. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, engineers, G. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 Test Manual. New Yek s Miami s Omahas l "alas" Seatlk" Monch, percent loading of filters. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1 61105814M H. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, and NFPA 96 standards. for design conditions in all operating modes as indicated in the sequence of B. Code or utility company requirements shall supersede any conflicting requirements control. of this Section. I. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS to check leakage. A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by J. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme sealant manufacturers. ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these conditions and at all intermediate operating conditions specified in the sequence B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct plans and supporting documents under my direct of control. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full sealants. supervision. It is my professional judgment that cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. (a) the plans were designed and presented as 3.05 SCOPE PART 2 PRODUCTS outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (if present on the project): Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered 1. HVAC Pumps; Boilers; All Air Handling Equipment; All Packaged Heating and/or 2.01 MATERIALS systems and/or construction features are Cooling Equipment; All Coil; All Heat Exchangers; Terminal Heat Transfer A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot -dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M FS deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes Units; Air Terminal Units; Air Inlets and Outlets Type B, with G9O/Z275 coating. and regulations. ECS recommends to Building 3.06 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS, cold -rolled commercial steel. Department Staff that they be Approved for Code A. Report (as applicable to the project): C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-1-114. Compliance. 1. Summary Comments: Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T651 or of equivalent strength. a. Design versus final performance D. Insulated Flexible Ducts: This certification does not relieve the registered b. Notable characteristics of system 1. The Contractor may use any of the following ductwork materials, at his design professional(s) of record and other C. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, parties of their responsibilities for the design or pressurization local authorities and utility company requirements. Verification of construction of the project. d. Nomenclature used throughout report and test conditions. compliance of the selected ductwork material is the sole responsibility of B. Electric Motors and drives: the installing Contractor. 1. Manufacturer; Model/Frame; HP/BHP; Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, 2. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass actual, no load; RPM; Service factor; Sheave Make/Size/Bore. 2. V-Belt Drives: Identification/location; Required driven RPM; Driven sheave, insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. ��' diameter and RPM; Belt, size and quantity, b. Maximum Velocity. 4000 fpm. �m �-(' C. Cooling and Heating Coils: c. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F. ,L r . / 1. Identification/number; Manufacturer d. Minimum R-Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable energy 2. Air flow, design and actual codes. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO 3. Air pressure drop, design and actual 3. Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge 4. Entering and leaving air DB and WB temperature, design and actual insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. DPOR License # 0402021900 iw 5. Water flow, design and actual (if applicable) a. Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG positive and 0.5 inches WG negative. 6. Water pressure drop, design and actual (if applicable) b. Maximum Velocity. 4000 fpm. vt svvVir Yiv� 7. Entering and leaving water temperature, design and actual (if applicable) C. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 175 degrees F. D. Air Moving Equipment: d. Minimum R-Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable energy Manufacturer; Model number; Serial number; Arrangement/Class/Discharge codes. SCHWAB! •L 2. Air flow, specified and actual 4. Multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound spring �/ i 3. Inlet; Discharge; Total static pressure (total external), specified and steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. actual a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches negative. E. Air Distribution Tests: b. Maximum Velocity. 4000 fpm. 1. Air terminal number C. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F. 2. Room number/location d. Minimum R-Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable energy 3. Terminal type codes. 4. Terminal size 5. UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive 5. Area factor supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; 6. Design velocity aluminized vapor barrier film. 7. Design air flow a. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG positive and 1.0 inches WG negative. 8. Test final velocity b. Maximum Velocity. 4000 fpm. 9. Test final air flow C. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 210 degrees F. 10. Percent of design air flow d. Minimum R-Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable energy codes. END OF SECTION 6. UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. a. Pressure Rating: 8 inches WG positive or negative. SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION b. Maximum Velocity. 5000 fpm. C. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 250 degrees F. PART 1 GENERAL d. Minimum R-Value: 4.2 or greater as required by the applicable energy codes. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES E. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non -hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold A. Duct insulation. resistant. B. Duct liner. 1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint C. Insulation jackets. configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer D. Supply, return or exhaust ducts in ceiling spaces. for pressure class of ducts. E. Supply, return or exhaust ducts in interior unconditioned areas. 2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water. F. Supply, return or exhaust ducts in exposed locations. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of 1.02 FIELD CONDITIONS zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of 4. For Use With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled. adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. 5. Ductwork Exposed to the Weather: Hard cast VersaGrip 102, (VG-102), UL B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. 181-AM compliant duct joint sealer, as manufactured by Carlisle, with fiberglass scrim tape reinforcement on all seams and joints, lateral and ISSUE INFORMATION PART 2 PRODUCTS longitudinal. ISSUED FOR F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A 36/A 36M; steel; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION continuously threaded. A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, 2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. A. Fabricate, support and seal in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction B. Manufacturer: Knouf Fiber Glass; Johns Manville Corporation; Owens Corning Corp.; Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, PERMIT Certain Teed Corporation. reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. 2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of BID A. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 'K' duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, LANDLORD REVIEW 1. value: 0.31 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 518. provide turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight. C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. convergence downstream. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability. 0.029 ng/Pa s m (0.02 perm inch), when tested D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M. duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints. CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD C. Vapor Barrier Tape: E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, degree conical tee connections may be used. ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. F. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN D. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: louver frame, provide blank -out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use some 1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black material as duct, painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct. color. 2.03 DUCT MANUFACTURERS REVISIONS E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. A. Metal -Fab, Inc.; SEMCO Incorporated; United McGill Corporation. Q 1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10111/22 2.03 DUCT LINER 2.04 MANUFACTURED METAL DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Insulation: Incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071; flexible A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and blanket, rigid board, and preformed round liner board; impregnated surface and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing - edges coated with acrylic polymer shown to be fungus and bacteria resistant by for operating pressures indicated. testing to ASTM G 21. B. Round Spiral Ducts: Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct with light - 1. Apparent Thermal Conductivity. Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F. reinforcing corrugations; fittings manufactured of at least two gages heavier metal 2. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F. than duct. - 3. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum. C. Double Wall Insulated Round Ducts: Round spiral lockseam duct with galvanized 4. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients: steel outer wall, 1 inch thick fiberglass insulation, perforated galvanized steel - a. 1/2 inch Thickness: 0.30. inner wall; fitting with solid inner wall. b. 1 inch Thickness: 0.45. D. Transverse Duct Connection System: SMACNA "E" rated rigidly class connection, - c. 1-1/2 inches Thickness: 0.60. interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, d. 2 inch Thickness: 0.70. and comer clips. - B. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire -retardant type. C. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad or impact applied with PART 3 EXECUTION integral, or press -on head. 3.01 EXAMINATION I- PART 3 EXECUTION A. Examine drawings for the Architectural, Structural, Electrical and all other trades prior to preparation of ductwork shop drawings and prior to the fabrication of any 3.01 INSTALLATION ductwork. A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions and NAIMA National B. Resolve any conflicts encountered with the Engineer prior to fabrication. NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. Insulation Standards. C. Identify on ductwork shop drawings any deviations in sizes or shapes made necessary B. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: by the obstructions of other trades. 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 3.02 INSTALLATION 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. P P la A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H T 0 F 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct B. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes F t�� � / penetrations. inside lining. 'pC 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, C. Install and seal metal and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct flexible connections, and expansion joints. Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Z O GREGORY ROY C. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature: D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and u SCHNAML :1" 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. 0 15 seal ends of insulation. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material .14p , D. External Duct Insulation Application: inside a metal ring. O 1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and vapor barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket. maintenance activities. S/ONAL E 2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires. F. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and 3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. Date: 10111122 22110�� and insert spacers. H. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. COA ,y.'0407 005J57 4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier I. Support flexible duct runs every five feet in the horizontal direction to avoid adhesive. dips and sags. 5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow J. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with one foot maximum length of flexible PROJECT INFORMATION operation without disturbing wrapping. duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. E. Duct and Plenum Liner Application: K. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts directly or with 5 feet maximum length of 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage. flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. Longer duct lengths are CHARLES SCHWAB 2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct acceptable if depicted on the design drawings and allowed per local code. A Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for spacing. maximum of one 90 degree bend, or equivalent, will be allowed in flexible duct Charlottesville IBS 3. Seal and smooth pints. Seal and coat transverse joints. runs. 4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. L. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on 220 Twentyninth Place 5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. M. All exposed ducts in finished areas must be completely free from all dents or Suite S20 3.02 SCHEDULES imperfections in the galvanized coating and shall be sealed CAREFULLY AND NEATLY Charlottesville, VA 22901 A. The Contractor may use any of the following insulating materials, at his option, with duct sealer completely contained within the joint. Duct wrap will not be provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local permitted in exposed locations. PROJECT #: authorities and utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the N. All roofing penetrations shall be flashed and weather sealed by the roofing 22.0000289.00 selected insulating material and thickness with all State and local codes and manufacturer's authorized roofing contractor at this Contractor's expense. This utility company requirements is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor shall contract with the factory authorized roofing contractor for the Contractor. specific roofing system applicable to this Project. The use of an unauthorized B. Supply air ducts in ceiling spaces: roofing contractor may result in removal and replacement of the penetration systems 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1-1/2 inches thick. at this Contractor's expense. SHEET INFORMATION 2. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Liner Insulation: 1 inches thick. 3.03 CLEANING I"I AC SPECFICAMNS I C. Supply, return or exhaust air ducts in crawl spaces, attics or other unconditioned A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated areas: dust or clean with high power vacuum machines. To obtain sufficient air, clean 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 3 inches thick. half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt D. Supply air ducts exposed in finished areas: with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Liner Insulation: 1 inches thick. 3.04 SCHEDULES E. Return or exhaust air ducts exposed in finished areas: None. A. Ductwork Material: B. The Contractor may use any of the following ductwork materials, at his option, DRAWN BY: AE REVIEWED BY: GRS SCALE: As noted M11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 3 4 5 0 7 0 E 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 a N M L H G F E u C F:E Ern ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. Wiliam F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected piping material is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. 1. Low Velocity Supply (Heating Systems): Galvanized Steel, Aluminum. 2. Low Velocity Supply (System with Cooling Coils): Galvanized Steel, Aluminum. 3. Return and Relief: Galvanized Steel, Aluminum. 4. General Exhaust: Galvanized Steel, Aluminum. 5. Outside Air Intake: Galvanized Steel. C. Ductwork Pressure Class: 1. Low Velocity Supply (Heating Systems): Scheduled System ESP+0.25", round up to next higher pressure class. 2. Low Velocity Supply (Systems with Cooling): Scheduled System ESP +0.5", round up to next higher pressure class. 3. Return and Relief: 1 inch. 4. General Exhaust: Scheduled System ESP +1.0", round up to next higher pressure class. 5. Outside Air Intake: 1 inch. END OF SECTION SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Volume control dampers. C. Flexible duct connections. D. Duct access doors. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Manufacturers: Krueger; Ruskin Company, Titus. B. Multi -blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2.02 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Louvers & Dampers, Inc.; Nailor Industries Inc.; Ruskin Company, Prefco Inc. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. D. Multi -Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. E. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil -impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. F. The contractor shall provide either a mechanical or electrical cable operated system wherever dampers are located in non -accessible areas. 1. Mechanical cable operator system shall be similar and equal to Young Regulator Company, "Bowden Cable Control" system including damper, flexible cable with casing and concealed ceiling regulator control. 2. Electrically operated damper control system shall be similar and equal to United Enertech Corporation, "Power Balance" system including motor operated damper, RJ-11 plenum rated cabling and flush ceiling or wall mounted RJ-11 jack in remote plate. Include one hand held battery pack operator pack to be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the balancing. 2.03 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide. 2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel. 2.04 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Acudor Products Inc.; Nailor Industries Inc.; Ruskin Company, SEMCO Incorporated. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. C. Fabrication: Rigid and close -fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ducts, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 1. Less Than 12 inches Square: Secure with sash locks. 2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. D. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. C. Locate all dampers and control elements in accessible areas wherever possible to avoid access doors. Provide ceiling access doors for access to all dampers and control elements located above inaccessible ceiling areas. Provide minimum 12 x 12 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. D. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take -off. E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. Do not locate dampers closer than 5 feet or 10 duct diameters from the air terminal device, whichever is greater. F. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment. G. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment END OF SECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof exhausters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Greenheck; Loren Cook Company, PennBarry; CoptiveAire. 2.02 POWER VENTILATORS - GENERAL A. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bearing AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. D. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2.03 ROOF EXHAUSTERS AND VENTILATORS A. Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven as indicated, with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor; 1/2 inch mesh, 0.62 inch thick aluminum wire birdscreen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets. B. Roof Curb: 20 inch high above the finished roof surface (compensate for roof insulation thickness at fan location) self -flashing of galvanized steel or aluminum construction with continuously welded seams, built-in cant strips, insulation and curb bottom, and factory installed nailer strip. C. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non -fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor. D. Backdraft Damper: Motor actuated (or gravity damper if depicted on design drawings), aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked, and line voltage motor drive, power open, spring return. E. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid -position; fan shaft with self -aligning pre -lubricated ball bearings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide sheaves required for final air balance at no additional expense to the project. C. Secure roof and wall exhausters with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb or structure. D. Extend ducts to roof and wall exhausters into roof curb or wall structure. Counterflosh duct to roof or wall opening. E. Install backdraft dampers (gravity or motorized as depicted on design drawings) on inlet to roof and wall exhausters. F. All roofing penetrations shall be flashed and weather sealed by the roofing manufacturers authorized roofing contractor at this Contractors expense. This Contractor shall contract with the factory authorized roofing contractor for the specific roofing system applicable to this project. The use of an unauthorized roofing contractor may result in removal and replacement of the penetration systems at this Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION SECTION 233700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rectangular ceiling diffusers. B. Ceiling exhaust and return registers and grilles. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, accessories, and noise level. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L. C. Code requirements shall supersede any conflicting requirements of this Section. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this Section, with minimum five years of documented experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Titus; Krueger; Price Industries; Nailor Industries Inc.; Hart & Cooley, Ruskin, Greenheck. 2.02 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Type: Square, adjustable pattern, stamped, multi -core, or architectural plaque diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern with sectorizing baffles where indicated. B. Frame: Inverted T-bar type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame. (To allow lift -out removal of the diffuser without removal of the plaster frame.) C. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel off-white finish. D. Accessories: Opposed blade damper and multi -louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. 2.03 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades set at 45 degrees, horizontal face. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white enamel finish. D. Damper (if specified on drawings): Integral, gang -operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face where not individually connected to exhaust fans. E. Rough Service: Provide front pivoted or welded in place blades, securely fastened to be immobile. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. END OF SECTION SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED OUTDOOR ROOF TOP UNITS - GAS FIRED PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Packaged roof top units. B. Thermostat controls. C. Roof mounting curb and base. D. Economizer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Carrier Corporation; Trans Inc.; Lennox Industries; York; AAON Incorporated. 2.02 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. General: Roof mounted units having gas burner and electric refrigeration. B. Description: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and prewired, consisting of cabinet and frame, supply fan, heat exchanger and burner, controls, air filters, refrigerant cooling coil and compressor, dry bulb economizer and power exhaust fan where indicated on the Drawings, condenser coil and condenser fan. C. Electrical Characteristics: As scheduled on the Drawings. D. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, including access panels with screwdriver operated flush cam type fasteners or doors with piano hinges with locking handles. Structural members shall be minimum 18 gage, with access doors or panels of minimum 20 gage. B. Insulation: one inch thick neoprene coated glass fiber with edges protected from erosion. C. Heat Exchangers: Aluminized steel or stainless steel where indicated on the Drawings, of welded construction. D. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive, adjustable variable pitch motor pulley, and rubber isolated hinge mounted motor or direct drive as indicated. Isolate complete fan assembly. E. Air Filters: 2 inch thick disposable media in metal frames. F. Roof Mounting Curb: Galvanized steel, channel frame, insulated with gaskets, nailer strips. Provide roof curb of adequate height to provide a unit mounting height of 12" or greater above the top of the roof surface with the curb mounted to the building structure. Roof curb height must compensate for the roof insulation thickness to meet this requirement. G. Vibration Isolation Curb: Only when indicated on the Drawings. 2.04 BURNER A. Gas Burner. Induced draft or forced draft type burner with adjustable combustion air supply, pressure regulator, gas valves, manual shut-off, intermittent spark or glow coil ignition, flame sensing device, and automatic 100 percent shut-off pilot. B. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame, prevent opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, energize blower motor, and after air flow proven and slight delay, allow gas valve to open. C. High Limit Control: Temperature sensor with fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de -energize burner on excessive bonnet temperature and energize burner when temperature drops to lower safe value. D. Supply Fan Control: Temperature sensor sensing bonnet temperatures and independent of burner controls, with provisions for continuous fan operation. 2.05 EVAPORATOR COIL A. Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with galvanized drain pan and connection. B. Provide capillary tubes or thermostatic expansion valves for units of 6 tons capacity and less, and thermostatic expansion valves and alternate row circuiting for units 7.5 tons cooling capacity and larger. 2.06 COMPRESSOR A. Provide hermetic or semi -hermetic compressors, 3600 rpm maximum, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high and low pressure safety controls, motor overload protection, suction and discharge service valves and gage ports, and filter drier. B. Five minute timed off circuit to delay compressor start. C. Outdoor thermostat to energize compressor above 35 degrees F ambient. 2.07 CONDENSER COIL A. Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with subcooling rows and coil guard. B. Provide direct drive propeller fans, resiliently mounted with fan guard, motor overload protection, wired to operate with compressor. 2.08 MIXED AIR CASING A. Dampers: Provide outside, return, and relief dampers with damper operator and control package to automatically vary outside air quantity. Outside air damper to fail to closed position. Relief dampers may be gravity balanced. B. Gaskets: Provide tight fitting dampers with edge gaskets maximum leakage 5 percent at 2 inches pressure differential. C. Damper Operator: 24 volt with gear train sealed in oil. D. Damper Operator, Units 7.5 Ton Cooling Capacity and Larger: 24 volt with gear train sealed in oil with spring return on. E. Mixed Air Controls: Maintain selected supply air temperature and return dampers to minimum position on call for heating and above 75 degrees F ambient, or when ambient air temperature exceeds return air temperature. 2.09 INTEGRATED ECONOMIZER (FOR UNITS ABOVE 5 TONS OR WHERE CODE REQUIRES): A. Economizer shall be furnished and installed complete with outside air and relief dampers and controls. B. Provide low -leakage, opposed blade dampers 1. Meet all leakage requirements of applicable energy code. C. Economizer shall be capable of introducing up to 100% outdoor air for minimum ventilation as well as free cooling. D. Damper actuator shall be electronic, fully modulating design. E. Economizer outdoor hood shall be pre -painted and fully integrated with the unit. F. Dry Bulb Control: Provide dry bulb sensor capable of measuring temperature of outdoor air and controlling economizer cut -in point at the most economical level. High level cutoff shall be set per applicable energy code. 1. Provide economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD). 2.10 OPERATING CONTROLS A. Provide low voltage, adjustable thermostat to control heater stages in sequence with delay between stages, compressor and condenser fan, and supply fan to maintain temperature setting. 1. Include system selector switch (off -heat -auto -cool) and fan control switch (auto -on). 2. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide all control wiring between thermostat and unit control panel and any required remote sensors. 3. Locate thermostat in room as shown. 4. Electric solid state microcomputer based room thermostat, located as indicated. Provide remote sensors when indicated on the Drawings. a. Room thermostat shall incorporate: 1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point. 3. Automatic Start Capabilities: Controls shall be capable of automatically adjusting the daily start time of the HVAC system in order to bring each space to the desired occupied temperature immediately prior to scheduled occupancy. 4. Set-up for four separate temperatures per day. 5. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from one hour to 31 days. 6. Short cycle protection. 7. Programming based on weekdays, Saturday and Sunday. 8. Switch selection features including imperial or metric display, 12 or 24 hour clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on -auto. b. Room thermostat display shall include: 1. Time of day. 2. Actual room temperature. 3. Programmed temperature. 4. Day of week. 5. System mode indication: heating, cooling, auto, off, fan auto, fan on. 6. Stage (heating or cooling) operation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 90A. B. Mount units on factory built roof mounting curb providing watertight enclosure to protect ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb level. Install roof mounting curb so that it bears on the building structure, not on top of the roof deck or roofing materials. Provide restraints where required by local codes. C. Provide cooling condensate drain piping (and overflow piping if required) to approved location. Condensate piping shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, Type L copper tube, or PVC. Contractor shall verify the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected piping material is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. 1. Condensate piping located within the building shall be insulated with 1/2 inch thick glass fiber or flexible elostomeric cellular foam insulation. Only metallic piping systems will be allowed in return air plenum ceiling space. END OF SECTION LSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonwoddwide.com Schnackel engineers® New Yo�X"Miami "OmaM1a"lus Ngeka"Seatlk"Honolulu itooas1o9s3 � charles SCHWAS ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 PERMIT BID LANDLORD REVIEW CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS Q1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10111/22 NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. �,TLi �,of Z GREOORY ROY � SCHNACKEL > .e .0 TS O S/ONAL E Oats: 10/11/22 COA �' 0407 005357 2 3 4 5 M 7 r*1 I.i 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PI NI MI LI KI JI HI GI FI EI DI CI BI AI DOMESTIC WATER RISER 4 NOT TO SCALE SANITARY SEWER RISER 3)--NOT TO SCALE G70T4 NOTE EXISTING GAS METER L OCA TED 0 NOTE 10 APPROX. 100' FROM SPACE. IF 5 a ALL GENDERII LAV-1 RESTR00 T/4 NOTE 9 ins ^ 3"FD-1 a NO IF 7 TP-1 NOTE 8 WC-1 NOTE 1 I o 1/2RTU-1 / BACK OFFICE 150 MBH 106NOTE 11 USE COPPER TO I I TOP OF MILLWORK AND BRAIDED L STAINLESS TO EACH COMPONENT. NO PLASTIC SHALL BE USED. OFFICE II I p II ,oa HALLWAY oa OFFICE (-� OFFICE toe TOWNSOLIARE lot I D O DOMESTIC WATER PLAN L % SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" ALL GENDER SANITARY SEWER PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 fi NORTH NORTH GENERAL NOTES - A. THE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE BASED ON 'AS —BOIL T" DRAWINGS AND/OR LIMITED FIELD VERIFICATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST TO ACTUAL FIELD CONDITIONS A T NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE PROJECT. NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE PROVIDED FOR ANY EXTRAS DUE TO THE CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO VISIT THE PROJECT SITE AND/OR PREDETERMINA TION OF EXISTINC CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING THE BID. ANY DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE IMMEDIA TEL Y REPORTED TO THE ARCHI TECT/ENGINEER FOR RESOLUTION. B. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FAMILIARIZE HIMSELF WITH THE INCIDENTAL DEMOLITION WORK PRIOR TO BIDDING AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR DEMOLITION OF ALL EXISTING EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED FOR THE INSTALLATION/CONSTRUCTION OF NEW WORK. C. ALL WORK SHALL BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE GOVERNMENTAL AND LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. D. PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW ACCESS TO VALVES, EQUIPMENT, ETC. LOCATED ABOVE INACCESSIBLE CEILINGS AND WALL CAVITIES. E. ALL SANITARY LINES AND PLUMBING FIXTURES ON THE PROJECT SHALL HAVE AN APPROVED MEANS OF SEWAGE BACKFLOW PREVENTION. FIXTURE SPECIFIC BACKFLOW PREVENTION INCLUDING AIR GAPS AND VACUUM BREAKERS ARE AN ACCEPTABLE MEANS OF BACKFLOW PREVENTION. F. PIPE SIZES INDICATED ON THE PLANS ARE MINIMUM. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PIPE SIZES EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN THE SPECIFIED SIZES. THE CONTRACTOR MAY INCREASE PIPE SIZES AS REQUIRED A T NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE PROJECT. G. REFER TO THE PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE FOR INDIVIDUAL PLUMBING FIXTURE CONNECTION SIZE REQUIREMENTS. H. COORDINATE ALL SLAB PENETRATIONS WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 2" CLEARANCE FROM THE EDGE OF THE SLAB OPENING TO ANY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND PIPES. 1. SLEEVE OR CORE —DRILL FLOOR SLABS, WALLS, ETC. AS REQUIRED FOR PIPING AND FIRE —STOP OPENING AROUND PIPE. VERIFY LOCATION OF STRUCTURAL BEAMS, JOISTS, ETC. BEFORE DRILLING. J. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN A COPY OF THE LANDLORD'S TENANT CRITERIA MANUAL FROM PM/CM/OM PRIOR TO BIDDING. THE TENANT CRITERIA MANUAL REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACTOR CONTRACT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPL YING WITH THE LANDLORD REQUIREMENTS AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE PROJECT. K. PROVIDE TEMPORARY COVERS, CAPS, OR PLUGS ON SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM THROUCHOUT THE DURATION OF CONSTRUCTION. RAG WADS, DUCT TAPE, OR OTHER SIMILAR METHODS OF TEMPORARY COVERS SHALL NOT BE UTILIZED. UPON COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION, COMPLETELY REMOVE ANY AND ALL OBSTRUCTIONS INSIDE THE ENTIRE SYSTEM BY SNAKING, RODING, OR JETTING THE SYSTEM IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO PROJECT TURNOVER TO THE OWNER. L. ALL BELOW GRADE SANITARY LINES SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 2" OR IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. M. SANITARY TEE FITTINGS SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED IN DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT (DWV) SYSTEMS. N. INSTALL SANITARY PIPING 2 112" OR SMALLER AT A SLOPE OF 114" PER FOOT AND SANITARY PIPING J" AND LARGER AT A SLOPE OF 118" PER FOOT. 0. GC SHALL COORDINA TE CLEANOUT HEIGHTS WITH ARCHITECT. P. THIS PROJECT UTILIZES A PLENUM RETURN AIR CEILING. ALL EQUIPMENT AND MA TERIALS INSTALLED IN THE PLENUM RETURN CEILINGS MUST MEET THE FLAME SPREAD AND SMOKE DEVELOPED RA TINGS OF 25150 AND BE APPROVED FOR USE IN PLENUM RETURNS CEILINGS. MO PVC/ABS PIPING WILL BE PERMITTED IN CEIL INC SPACES. Q. ALL PUBLIC USE LAVATORY FAUCETS SHALL HAVE AN AUTOMATIC SAFETY WATER MIXING DEVICE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI/ASSE 1017 OR 1070 AS APPLICABLE. R. ALL HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBLE WATER CLOSETS SHALL HAVE THE FLUSHING HANDLE ON THE WIDE SIDE OF THE HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBLE STALL AS REQUIRED BY ADA REQUIREMENTS. S. THE ENTIRE AREA UNDER CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH A COMPLETE FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM IN ALL RESPECTS. RELOCATE/ADD NEW SPRINKLER DROPS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS WHERE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE COMPLETE COVERAGE THROUGHOUT THE AREA OF CONSTRUCTION. COORDINATE FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING AND HEAD LOCATIONS WITH ALL TRADES PRIOR TO FABRICATION AND/OR INSTALLATION. IF CONFLICTS OCCUR BETWEEN FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING/HEADS AND LIGHTS, DIFFUSERS, DUCTWORK, ETC., THE FIRE SPRINKLER PIPING/HEADS SHALL BE RELOCATED OR REROUTED AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO THE PRO✓ECT. AN ADEQUA TE SUPPLY OF EXTRA PIPING AND FITTINGS SHALL BE MAINTAINED ON SITE TO ALLOW FOR FIELD MODIFICATIONS. PERFORM HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS AS REQUIRED BY NFPA, LOCAL, STATE CODES, AND THE OWNER'S INSURANCE AGENCY. APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS DO NOT PRECLUDE REROUTING IF SO REQUIRED BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. LYIENT GENERAL At2TEs. A. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST ANGLE VALVE AT WATER CLOSET TO MINIMUM ALLOWABLE PRESSURE PER MANUFACTURER SPECIFICA TIONS. PLLNl9IAG Al 1. THIS SPACE IS RESERVED FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. NO PIPING SHALL PASS BELOW, ABOVE, OR AROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE CODE REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE ABOVE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ACCESS SPACE. 2. CONNECT THE NEW SANITARY SEWER TO THE EXISTING SANITARY SEWER OF EQUAL OR GREATER SIZE. FIELD VERIFY THE EXACT LOCATION, SIZE, AND INVERT ELEVATION OF THE EXISTING SANITARY SEWER PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. ADJUST THE NEW SANITARY SEWER AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR CONNECTION TO THE EXISTING SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM. MAINTAIN CODE MINIMUM PIPE SLOPES. J. CONNECT THE NEW VENT TO THE EXISTING VENT SYSTEM TERMINA TING THROUGH THE ROOF. FIELD VERIFY THE EXACT SIZE AND LOCATION OF THE EXISTING VENT THROUGH ROOF PRIOR TO SUBMITTING BID AND COMMENCING CONSTRUCTION. 4. ROUTE THE CONDENSATE PIPING FROM THE ROOFTOP UNIT TO A CODE COMPLIANT DISCHARGE POINT INSIDE THE TENANT SPACE. THE CONDENSATE SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE ROOFTOP UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDA TIONS. VERIFY CONDENSA TE REMOVAL REQUIREMENTS WITH LOCAL JURISDICTION PRIOR TO INSTALLA TIOV. IF CONFLICTS OCCUR, NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER IMMEDIA TEL Y. 5. CONNECT THE NEW DOMESTIC COLD WA TER LINE TO AN EXISTING COLD WA TER LINE OF EQUAL OR GREATER SIZE. FIELD VERIFY THE EXACT LOCATION AND SIZE OF THE EXISTING WATER LINE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. ADJUST THE NEW WATER LAYOUT AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW FOR CONNECTION TO THE EXISTING WA TER SYSTEM. 6. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER HEATER AND EXPANSION TANK AS INDICATED ON THE PLANS. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS FOR WATER HEATER SHELF REQUIREMENTS AND EXACT LOCATION. PIPE WATER HEATER RELIEF AND SECONDARY DRAIN PAN DISCHARGE TO THE NEAREST MOP SINK OR FLOOR DRAIN BELOW THE WATER HEA TER. PROVIDE A CODE APPROVED AIR GAP ON THE DISCHARGE OF THE WA TER HEATER RELIEF AND SECONDARY DRAIN. REFER TO DETAILS SHEET FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 7. 112" FLEXIBLE CONTINUOUS TYPE K" COPPER TUBING BELOW GRADE FROM TRAP PRIMER TO FLOOR DRAIN. NO FITTINGS OR SPLICES ARE ALLOWED BELOW GRADE. 8. INSTALL TRAP PRIMER PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION IN THE FIELD. FURNISH AND INSTALL A LOCKABLE, METAL ACCESS PANEL AS NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN EQUIPMENT. 9. PROVIDE THERMOSTA TIC MIXING VALVE, POWERS #LFE480 OR EQUAL, BELOW FIXTURE. SET TEMPERA TURE AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL JURISDICTION. THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ANSI/ASSE 1070. 10. EXISTING NATURAL GAS METER SERVING 150 MBH. THE SYSTEM DESIGN IS BASED ON 0.25 PSI DELIVERY PRESSURE WITH A PRESSURE DROP OF 0.5 INCHES OF WATER COLUMN AND A TOTAL DEVELOPED LENGTH OF 150 FEET. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THE METER PLACEMENT, AVAILABLE PRESSURE, AND ANY NEW SERVICE REQUIREMENTS WITH THE LOCAL UTILITY PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. PROVIDE SEISMIC SHUT—OFF VALVE, LITTLE FIREFIGHTER (OR EQUAL). IF THE DELIVERY PRESSURE INDICATED IS NOT AVAILABLE FROM THE UTILITY COMPANY, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHI TECT/ENGINEER IMMEDIA TEL Y. CONTRACTOR TO REPLACE METER IF NEW LOAD EXCEEDS METER CAPCEITY 11. CONNECT NATURAL GAS SERVICE TO ROOFTOP UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. REFER TO DETAIL SHEET FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMA TION. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF NATURAL GAS CONNECTION ON ROOFTOP UNIT WITH EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO PIPE INSTALLATION. NO ACCESS PANELS OR WALL CLEANOUT COVERS ARE TO BE INSTALLED IN TILED OR WALLCOVERING WALLS. INSTALL TRAP PRIMER, WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS, VALVES, AND ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT REQUIRING ACCESS IN CEILING SPACE WITH ACCESS PANEL IN DRYWALL CEILING. GROUP EQUIPMENT TO BE ACCESSED WITH SINGLE ACCESS PANEL. ALL FLOOR CLEANOUTS TO BE INSTALLED FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR. ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 � s z sa 0 0 3 9 0 0 9 n m D N a 4 E 9 t 0 z d as a 9 N a O N 0 0 9 3 m 9 NELSON Honshu 0 as asa 2 3 `' 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PI NI LI KI JI HI GI EI DI CI BI AI MITER THE INSULA7ON AT 7EES AND ELBOWS SO THAT THERE ARE NO GAPS AT ✓0/1VT5 PROVIDE ONE—PIECE PRE —MOLDED PVC FIT77NG COVERS COVER VAL VE BODIES WITH INSULA770N, BUT NOT UNIONS TAPE JOINTS OF FIBERGLASS INSULA7ON PROVIDE A ONE FOOT LENGTH PROVIDE INSULA7ON ON OF NON —COMPRESSIBLE DOMES77C HOT/COLD INSULATION AT HANGERS FOR WATER PIPES, STORM WATER ALL PIPE 2" AND LARGER PIPES, AND CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING IN WALLS AND REFER TO OTHER DETAILS CHASES FOR TREA 7MENT OF INSULA 77ON AT PENE - IRA 7701V OF WALLS AND FIREWALLS. MATE PROVIDE FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ALL —SERVICE JACKET WITH VAPOR BARRIER ON ALL COLD/HOT WATER PIPING AND CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURTHER INFORMATION REGARDING INSULATION. INSTALL ALL ITEMS PER SPECIFICATIONS AND MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS. MAINTAIN VAPOR BARRIER ON COLD PIPING BY MEANS OF SEALANT AND TAPE. FLAME —SPREAD AND SMOKE —DEVELOPED INDEXES SHALL NOT EXCEED 25150. SEAL EXPOSED ENDS OF FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ADHESIVE MASTIC. PIPE INSULATION DETAIL NOT TO SCALE SLOPE FLOOR TO FLOOR DRAIN FLOOR DRAIN 4 a a 4 a TRAP WA7ER LEVEL FLOOR DRAIN DETAIL NOT TO SCALE SYMB=L-S P L U M B I N G SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SANITARY DRAIN ABOVEGROUND --C—P CLEAN OUT SANITARY DRAIN BELOWGROUND G� GRADE CLEAN OUT GW GREASE WASTE ABOVEGROUND j}iWco WALL CLEAN OUT —GW— GREASE WASTE BELOWGROUND N.I.C. NOT IN CONTRACT —AW— ACID WASTE ABOVEGROUND VTR VENT THROUGH ROOF —AW— ACID WASTE BELOWGROUND BALL VALVE — — — VENT LINE CHECK VALVE —AV— — ACID VENT PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE (PRV) —WAG➢— WASTE ANESTHESIA GAS DISPOSAL —S— STORM DRAIN ABOVEGROUND GAS COCK S STORM DRAIN BELOWGROUND PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE (PRV) AND GAS COCK —as OVERFLOW STORM DRAIN --- COLD WATER (CW) 07 MIXING VALVE ---- HOT WATER (HW) 4D GAS COCK HOT WATER CIRCULATING (HWC) +� VALVE IN RISE -140• --- HOT WATER 140• --<D— AUTOMATIC BALANCING VALVE -140------ HOT WATER CIRCULATING 14D' —0----C— RUNNING TRAP -T TEMPERED WATER HB HOSE BIBB -T----- TEMPERED WATER CIRCULATING --I WH WALL HYDRANT -CS--- COLD SOFT WATER Zf FH FIRE HYDRANT -HS---- HOT SOFT WATER V.C.P. VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE -HS----- HOT SOFT WATER CIRCULATING C.I. CAST IRON —F— FIRE LINE I.E. INVERT ELEVATION G GAS LINE H.F.F. BELOW FINISHED FLOOR —A— COMPRESSED AIR LINE „ PLUMBING RISER NUMBER —V— VACUUM LINE —DX OXYGEN LINE -0Q DOWNSPOUT NOZZLE —D— CONDENSATE LINEI ®R➢ ROOF DRAIN/OVERFLOW ROOF ➢RAIN TERMINAIF SLEEVE FLUSH WITH FIN/SHED WALL SURFACES SEAL OR CAULK SLEEVES THRU FIRE WALLS 1N SMOKE TIGHT MANNER AND TO MEET FIRE RA 77NG OF WALL (REFER TO ASTM E-814) STANDARD WEIGHT STEEL PIPE SLEEVE OF SIZE TO PASS PIPE AND INSULA770N, PLUS GAP AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. (25 GA. SPLIT WALL SLEEVE ALSO ACCEPTABLE) PIPE AND INSULATION TO BE CENTERED IN SLEEVE. DO NOTI L SUPPORT PIPE FROM SLEEVE FINISHED ESCUTCHEON PLATE FLUSH AGAINST WALL AND OF SIZE TO COMPLE7EL Y COVER OPENING FINISHED WALL SURFACE CONCEALED PIPING PIPING EXPOSED TO VIEW N07F PROVIDE FOR ALL MASONRY WALLS AND FIRE RATED WALLS PIPE SLEEVE AT INTERIOR WALLS Y / SET 7HERMOSTAT AT 710 F I I 2 112" DEEP GALVANIZED STEEL (22 GAUGE MIN.) DRIP PAN WITY ALL SEAMS SOLDERED WATERTIGHT I I � PLATFORM ABOCEILING GWB I I I I I I �ALTERNAIF MOUNTING: IF WALL MOUNTED SHELF IS REQUIED USE SHELF AND BRACKET OF WELDED I I STEEL CONSTRUCTION, SECURE SHELF TO WALL STRUCTURE IN A MANNER EQUAL TO PLUMBING FIXTURES I I I I I I I I I I NOT TO SCALE HW SUPPL Y VACUUM RELIEF VAL VE CW SUPPL Y CHECK VALVE \ BALL OR GA 7E VALVE (TYP) �112" THREADED ROD SECURED TO STRUC7URE ABOVE �-1/2" THREADED ROD SECURED �TO STRUCTURE ABOVE \ UN/ON (TYP.) \1 WA TER HEA TER ASME PRESSURE & I TEMPERA TURE RELIEF j� VAL VE ' `DRAIN VAL VE ' `RELIEF VALVE DISCHARGE I PIPED FULL SIZE TO 2" HUB DRAIN, 3/4 " MIN. J_ROU7E 1 " DRAIN LINE TO 2" HUB DRAIN Q NOTE: /F SHELF IS REQUIRED PLEASE USE HOLDR17F 50—SWHP—WM QUICKSTAND WATER HEATER PLATFORM OR AN EQUAL PRODUCT NOTE: REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR AN MOUNTING PLA 7FORM DETAIL 6EI% RAL Al APPLICABLE TO THIS DETAIL: A. SET MOUNTING HEIGHT AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. B. SHELF SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED TO SUPPORT THE WATER HEATER CAPACITY INDICATED. SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR LOCATION. '� WATER H EATER DETAI L NOT TO SCALE N07E.• LOCATE WATER HEATER CONTROLS SO THAT THEY MAY BE EASILY ACCESSED VIA REMOVAL OF FUTURE ACT CEILING TILE. REFER TO RCP FOR MORE /NFORMA TION. PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE FINAL CONNECTIONS MANUFACTURER Mark DESCRIPTION HW CW V W MODEL NUMBER WC-1 WATER 1.6 GALLONS PER FLUSH, FLOOR MOUNTED, BOTTOM OUTLET, 12" — 3/8" 1 1/2" 3" AMERICAN CLOSETS ROUGH —IN, WIDE SIDE OF TOILET TRIP LEVER, 3/8" CHROME PLATED STANDARD: BRASS TUBING, PRESSURE ASSISTED TANK, 25 PSI MINIMUM WORKING CADET PRESSURE, COLOR: WHITE 2467.016 WATER COMMERCIAL DUTY, EXTRA HEAVY WEIGHT, INJECTION MOLDED SOLID OLSONITE: 95SSCT CLOSET PLASTIC, LARGE MOLDED BUMPERS, STAINLESS STEEL POSTS, SEAT SELF—SUSTAINING, CONCEALED STAINLESS STEEL CHECK HINGE HOLDING SEAT IN ANY RAISED POSITION UP TO 11 DEG. BEYOND VERTICAL, OPEN FRONT, LESS COVER, COLOR: WHITE SUPPLIES CHROME PLATED LEVER TYPE 1/4 TURN BALL ANGLE STOP VALVE S-1 SINK SINGLE BOWL, 18 GAUGE TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL, COVED 1/2" 1/2" 1 1/4" 1 1/2" ELKAY: CORNERS, HIGHLIGHTED SWIRLED SATIN FINISH, SELF RIMMING, BOTTOM LUSTERSTONE ONLY PADS SOUND DEADENING MATERIAL, SINGLE FAUCET HOLE, REAR LRAD0252155 CENTER DRAIN PLACEMENT, 25" X 21 1/4" X 5 1/2" SINK SINGLE HOLE, SINK MOUNTED, SOLID BRASS CONSTRUCTION, CHROME KOHLER: FAUCET PLATED FINISH, 1.5 GPM AT 60 PSI, SINGLE LEVER HANDLE, TWO FORTE FUNCTION PULL—OUT SPRAY HEAD, ADA COMPLIANT K-10433—CP SUPPLIES CHROME PLATED ANGLE STOPS WITH LOOSE KEY HANDLE, CHROME PLATED FLEXIBLE BRASS RISER, INSULATE ALL EXPOSED WATER LINES AND VALVES SINK WASTE POLISHED TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL BODY WITH BASKET STRAINER, ELKAY: LK35 1 1/2" 17 GAUGE CHROME PLATED ADJUSTABLE BRASS P—TRAP WITH CLEANOUT PLUG, FITS 3 1/2" OPENING, 1 1/2" NICKEL PLATED BRASS TAILPIECE, RUN PARALLEL AND AS TIGHT TO WALL AS POSSIBLE, INSULATE ALL EXPOSED WASTE LINES LAV-1 LAVATORIES WALL HUNG, VITREOUS CHINA, OVAL BOWL, REAR OVERFLOW, 3/8" 3/8" 1 1/4" 1 1/4" KOHLER: SELF —DRAINING DECK AREA, CONCEALED WALL HANGAR, BRENHAM RECTANGULAR SHAPED LAVATORY, SINGLE CENTERED FAUCET HOLE, K-1997-1R SOAP DISPENSER HOLE ON THE RIGHT, ADA COMPLIANT, 34" TOP OF LAVATORY TO FINISHED FLOOR, COLOR: WHITE LAVATORY SINGLE LEVER HANDLE, SOLID BRASS FABRICATED BODY, METAL GRID KOHLER: FAUCET STRAINER, 0.5 GPM AERATOR, 3/8" COMPRESSION FITTING SUPPLY JULY HOSES, ADA COMPLIANT K-97283-4 LAVATORY CHROME PLATED ANGLE STOPS WITH LOOSE KEY HANDLE, CHROME SUPPLIES PLATED FLEXIBLE BRASS RISER, INSULATE ALL EXPOSED WATER LINES AND VALVES LAVATORY GRID DRAIN STRAINER, 1 1/4" OFFSET TAILPIECE, 1 1/4" 17 GAUGE WASTE CHROME PLATED ADJUSTABLE BRASS P—TRAP WITH CLEANOUT PLUG, 1 1/4" CHROME PLATED BRASS WASTE TO WALL LAVATORY ADA COMPLIANT, CHINA WHITE, ANTI—BACTERIA/FUNGAL, MOLDED TRUEBRO: PROTECTIVE VINYL, P—TRAP COVER, TWO ANGLE VALVE AND SUPPLY COVERS, 5" 103 E—Z PIPE OFFSET TAILPIECE WHEEL CHAIR STRAINER COVER PLUMBEREX: COVERS X4444 FMS-1 FLOOR MOP MOLDED STONE, PLAIN CURBS, ONE PIECE 24"X24"X10" SQUARE 1/2" 1/2" 1 1/4" 2" FIAT: MSB-2424 SINK BASIN, WITH TILING FLANGE FLOOR MOP WALL MOUNTED HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICE FAUCET EXTENDING 9 FIAT: 830 AA SINK 3/8" FROM BACK OF WALL FLANGE, VACUUM BREAKER, CHROME FAUCET PLATED, 3/4" HOSE THREAD ON SPOUT, PAIL HOOK, ADJUSTABLE WALL BRACE, FLAT STAINLESS STEEL STRAINER SUPPLIES 1/2" HOT AND COLD WATER WITH CONCEALED STOP WITH WHEEL HANDLE, 1/2" CHROME PLATED FLEXIBLE BRASS RISER WASTE DRAIN SHALL BE INTEGRAL STAINLESS STEEL COMBINATION FLAT STRAINER AND LINT BASKET, FACTORY INSTALLED STAINLESS STEEL DRAIN BODY, CAST IRON P—TRAP ACCESSORIES 24" LONG X 3" WIDE STAINLESS STEEL MOP BRACKET WITH THREE RUBBER GRIPS, 36" HOSE WITH HANGER INSTALL PER PDI STANDARDS AND MANUFAC7URER S INS TRUC77ONS PDI SIZE PIPE SIZE FIXTURE UNIT LOAD A 1/2" 1-11 B 3/4" 12-32 C 1" 33-60 D 1-1/4" 61-113 E 1-1/2" 114-154 F 2" 155-330 TYPICAL GAS PIPING CONNECTION DETAIL 4 NOT TO SCALE FIXTURE UNIT TABULATION FIXTURE COLD HOT VALVE WATER CLOSET 10 -- TANK WATER CLOSET 5 -- URINAL 5 -- LAVATORY/SINK 1.5 1.5 JANITOR'S SINK 3 3 SHOWER/BATHTUB 2 2 IF HORIZONTAL BRANCH IS LESS THAN 20' LONG, PROVIDE ONE WHA AT END OF LINE /F BRANCH IS GREATER THAN 20' LONG, PROVIDE ANOTHER WHA /N M/ODLE, EACH SIZED FOR HALF THE FIXTURE UNITS T OR COLD WA TER SUPPL Y PTO FIXTURES U T FIXTURES J TO FIXTURES PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE FINAL CONNECTIONS MANUFACTURER Mark DESCRIPTION MODEL NUMBER HW CW V W GF-1 GENERIC 1/2" DOMESTIC COLD WATER CONNECTION FOR COFFEE MAKER, — FIXTURE: PROVIDE DUAL CHECK VALVE FOR CARBONATED BEVERAGE MACHINES COFFEE (WATTS SD-2 OR EQUAL), PROVIDE BACKFLOW PREVENTION IN MAKER ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL REQUIREMENTS IN AN ACCESSIBLE LOCATION, COORDINATE THE LOCATION AND SIZE OF ALL PLUMBING CONNECTIONS WITH KITCHEN CONNECTION PLANS, MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS, AND LOCAL REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO ROUGH —IN. MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENTS NECESSARY TO PROVIDE A FULLY FUNCTIONING FIXTURE 3"FD-1 FLOOR STANDARD STRAINER, COATED CAST IRON, TWO—PIECE BODY, DOUBLE — — 1 1/2" 3" JR SMITH: DRAIN DRAINAGE FLANGE, ADJUSTABLE EXTENSION AS REQUIRED BY 2010—NB APPLICATION, ADJUSTABLE COLLAR WITH SEEPAGE SLOTS, INVERTIBLE ZURN: Z415B NON —PUNCTURING MEMBRANE CLAMP, FLASHING CLAMP WITH 24"X24" 4 LB. LEAD FLASHING FOR FLOOR DRAINS INSTALLED ABOVE SLAB ON GRADE, BOTTOM OUTLET, OUTLET CONNECTION METHOD SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH PIPING MATERIALS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS, POLISHED NICKEL BRONZE FINISH, 5" DIAMETER ROUND STRAINER, VANDAL —PROOF SECURED TOP, 1/2" TRAP PRIMER CONNECTION WCO-1 WALL ACID RESISTING COATED CAST IRON CLEANOUT TEE, COUNTERSUNK — — — SEE J.R. SMITH: 4710 CLEANOUT BRONZE PLUG, ROUND STAINLESS STEEL SECURED ACCESS COVER, PLANS ZURN: Z1446 VANDAL —PROOF FASTENERS TP-1 TRAP PRESSURE ACTIVATED TRAP PRIMER, BRASS CONSTRUCTION, PISTON — 1/2" — — PRECISION PRIMER OPERATED, ADJUSTMENT FOR VARIABLE PRESSURES, INSTALL TRAP PRODUCTS: PRIMER A MINIMUM OF 12" ABOVE THE TRAP BEING SERVED, PROVIDE P1-500 AIR GAP FITTING WITH 1/2" MALE NPT INLET FITTING AND 1/2" FEMALE OUTLET FITTING, FOUR TRAP APPLICATION TRAP COPPER BODY DISTRIBUTION UNIT, 4 — 3/8" FPT BRASS DISCHARGE PRECISION PRIMER FITTINGS, 1/2" MALE NPT COMPOSITE INLET, PROVIDE PLUGS AS PRODUCTS: DISTRIBUTION REQUIRED BY APPLICATION DU-4 UNIT WF-1 WATER JUNDERCOUNTER WATER FILTER, COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH — 1/2" — — GE: GXRLQR FILTER ICHARLES SCHWAB. *NOTE: PROVIDE SUBMITTALS FOR ARCHITECT/ENGINEER REVIEW. PROVIDE MANUFATURER'S STANDARD CATALOG PAGES AND DATA SHEETS FOR PRODUCTS, INCLUDING MATERIALS, FABRICATION DETAILS, DIMENSIONS, AND FINISHES. TANK TYPE ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS MARK LOCATION OPERATING WEIGHT (LBS) SIZE (IN) STORAGE CAPACITY (GALLONS) RECOVERY (GPH 0 100 DEG F RISE) ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER MODEL REMARKS DIA I H KW VOLT PH HWH-1 MOP SINK 350 21-3/4 0-7/ 30 24 3 208 1 AO SMITH DEL-20 THERMAL EXPANSION TANKS MARK LOCATION SERVICE MAXIMUM ACCEPTANCE (GALLONS) WORKING PRESS. (PSI) MINIMUM ACCEPTANCE (GALLONS) APPROX. SIZE MANUFACTURER MODEL REMARKS DIA (IN) LENGTH (IN) ET-1 MOP SINK DOM. HW 0.9 150 2.1 8 14 AMTROL ST-5—C 1,2,3 REMARKS: 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST PRE —CHARGE OF EXPANSION TANK TO EQUAL THE INCOMING WATER PRESSURE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 2. TANK SHALL BE ASME RATED. 3. THE TANK PROVIDED SHALL MEET THE MINIMUM SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE CAPACITY IN ALL CASES. TO FIXTURES PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS BY SIOUX CHIEF, PRECISION PLUMBING PRODUCTS, WATTS OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT W17H PISTON AND 0—RING CONSTRUCTION, HAVING PDI OKWH-201, ASSE ;#1010 AND ANSI fA112.26.1M CER77FICA770N. INSTALL IN HORIZONTAL OR VERTICAL POSI770N, BUT NEVER UPSIDE DOWN INSTALL IN LINE WITH WATER FLOW DIREC77ON IF POSSIBLE. SIZE THE UNITS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND/OR PER THE TABLES SHOWN ABOVE. 3 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS NOT TO SCALE 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 SHEET LEAD FLASHING MOP IN WITH ROOFING MATERIAL- N z ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 TURN LEAD DOWN INTO STACK (CANNOT RESTRICT FLOW OF AIR) VENT CAP ROOFING INSULA77ON ROOF CONSTRUCTION _H SLEEVE ROOF CONSTRUCTION MIN. 12" AS REQUIRED (PROVIDE FIRE RATED CAULKING KHEN REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES) —INCREASER (WHEN REQUIRED) EVENT STACK OR STACK VENT HUB & SPIGOT TYPE PIPE SHOWN NO —HUB ALSO APPLICABLE VENT TERMINATION LEAD FLASHING NOT TO SCALE 3" MIN. ROOF TOP UNIT INTEGRAL ROOFTOP UNIT CONDENSATE DRAIN. CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPE SIZE SHALL BE NO LESS THAN DRAIN CONNEC77ON ON UNIT. OPEN TO ATMOSPHERE REFER TO SPECIRCA77ONS FOR CONDENSATE MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS CONDENSATE LINE SHALL RUN ON ROOF TO THE NEAREST ROOF DRAIN AT A SLOPE OF NO LESS THAN 1/8" PER FOOT. REFER TO PLUMBING PLANS FOR ROUTING, SIZE, AND DISCHARGE LOCA77ON OF CONDENSATE ROOFTOP UNIT CONDENSATE TRAP NOT TO SCALE 13 14 15 16 17 18 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com Schnackelngin engineers,, New Yoh . Miami . O maha n Las Angeles m Seatlle d z 0 " t 0 a 9 N 0 E 9 d a 0 a a 9 P a 0 " 0 0 9 N a 9 NELSON chades s 0 2 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 a N IM L 1191 H G F E 10 C FE F.11 SECTION 22000 - PLUMBING GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section supplements oil sections of the Specifications for Division 22 and shall apply to oil phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the Contract Documents, or required to provide a complete installation of approved plumbing systems. B. The Drawings, General Conditions and General Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section and the other Sections of DMsion 22 of the specifications. Where conflicts arise between these documents, the more stringent provision will be applicable. subject to the interpretation of the Engineer. C. Furnish all labor, material, services, and skilled superAsion necessary for the construction, erection, installation, connections, testing, and adjustment of oil materials and plumbing equipment specified herein, or shown or noted on the Drawings, and its delivery to the Owner, complete in all respects and ready for use. D. Products furnished but not installed under this section: 1. Where plans indicate fixtures or equipment will be furnished by this Contractor for installation by other Contractors, this Contractor shelf furnish all such equipment, complete in all respects and ready for installation. 2. Drawings, instructions, and manuals supplied with equipment furnished under Division 22, but installed under other Divisions shut be carefully preserved and turned over to the installing Contractor. E. Products installed but not fumished under this section: 1. Where plans indicate fixtures or equipment will be furnished by others, this Contractor shalt provda all rough -in and supplies and shall connect such equipment to the plumbing systems. 2. Drawings, instructions, and manuals supplied with equipment furnished under separate Divisions but installed under Division 22 shall be carefully preserved and turned over to the Architect. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. "Work" is hereby defined as, "The construction and services required by the Contract Documents whether completed or partially completed and includes oil labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The work may constitute the whole or a part of the er?ject." B. "Fumish is hereby defined as, "To supply and deliver, unload, and inspect for damage. . C. "Install" is hereby defined as, 'To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean. connect. and place into operation into the work." D. "Provide" is hereby defined as, "To furnish and install." E. "Connect" is hereby defined as, "To bring service to the equipment and make final attachment including necessary switches, outlets, boxes, terminations, etc." F. "Concealed" is hereby defined as, "Hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, shafts, hung ceilings, embedded in construction, in crawl spaces, or buried." G. "Exposed" is hereby defined as, "Not installed underground nor concealed as defined by the Seecifications.' H. 'Drawings is hereby defined as, "All plans, details, equipment schedules, diagrams, sketches, etc. issued for the construction of the work." 1. Subgrade Elevations: 4 inches below finish grade elevations indicated on drawings, unless otherwise indicated. J. Finish Grade Elevations: 4 inches above subgrocle elevations indicated on drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Perform work in accordance with the applicable Building Code, Electrical Code, Fire Code, Mechanical Code, Plumbing Code, Energy Code, and all other applicable codes, amendments, and ordinances. Also perform all work in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) including Fire Morshol(s). B. Perform work in accordance with Landlord requirements, including any Tenant Criteria Manuals and Lease Exhibits. where applicable. C. Perform work in accordance with the applicable utility companies servng the project. Make oil arrangements with the utility companies for proper coordination of the work. D. Recognized Standards: Design, manufacture, testing and method of Installation of all apparatus and materials furnished under the requirements of these Specifications shall conform to the latest publications or standard rules of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (I.I.L.), American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), and National Electrical Code NEC). E. The Contract Documents shall take precedence where the Contract Documents exceed code, Landlord, utility, or recognized standards requirements. 1.04 PERMITS AND FEES A. Permits, licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the work under this Contract shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless otherwise indicated. B. All fees and scheduling associated with obtaining an accurate water flow test shall be at the Contractor's expense. 1.05 CONTRACT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor is responsible to obtain, fully understand, and coordinate the work with the complete set of Contract Documents. Any required corrections, including all associated costs, arising from issues caused by the Contractor's failure to understand and/or coordinate the work with the complete set of Contract Documents ore the Contractor's sole responsibility. B. Work under these sections is diagrammatic unless indicated otherwise and Is intended to convey the scope of work and indicate the general arrangement of piping, equipment, and accessories. Follow these drawings in laying out the work and verify spaces for the installation of these materials and equipment. Wherever a question exists as to the exact intended location of pipe, sprinklers, or equipment, obtain instructions from the Architect before proceeding with the work. C. Notify the Architect/Engineer for resolution if a discrepancy is discovered within the Contract Documents. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect/Engineer of discrepancies shall result in the resolution becoming the Contractor's responsibility and subject to the Architect/Engineer's reAew and possible rejection. Should the Architect/Engineer reject a discrepancy resolution of which they were not notified, the Contractor is fully responsible to correct the installation, including all associated costs, until approval of the installation is given by the Architect/Engineer. 1.06 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Verify all existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Any existing conditions indicated in the Contract Documents are based on information drawings provided by others and possibly limited field verification. The Contractor sholl adjust for actual field conditions at no additional expense to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall visit the project site, review existing conditions against the Contract Documents, and familiarize himself with the work prior to bidding and start of the work. By signing the Contract, the Contractor acknowledges the site visit has been completed and the existing conditions are accepted. D. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of major discrepancies in writing so the appropriate modifications to the design can be mode without delay to the project. The Contractor assumes full responsibility of adjusting for discrepancies of which the Architect is not informed. F. The Owner sholl hove first salvage right on oil demolished equipment and materials. The Contractor sholl dispose of all demolished equipment and materials the Owner rejects. G. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer of field discrepancies in writing so the appropriate modifications to the design can be made without delay to the project. The Contractor assumes full responsibility of adjusting for discrepancies of which the Arch itect/Engineer is not informed. H. Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made by using materials and methods to suit the actual conditions. 1. Where existing conditions ore shown to be removed. by means of a hatched pattern, on the Drawings, this Contractor shall perform all work required for removal. Existing pipe run -outs Shall be removed all the way back to moins and copped using appropriate methods. J. Where existing work is to be modified, it shall be done in conformance with these specifications. Materials used shall be some as existing except where specified otherwise. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Furnish the Architect/Engineer shop drawing portfolios containing names of manufacturer and cut sheets of equipment to be used on the project. Use manufacturer's specification sheets identified by number indicated on drawings or schedules. Indicate catalog number on the cut sheets. As applicable, provide construction data, weight and dimensional data, performance data and listing data as part of the shop drawing submittal. Provdie shop drawings for: 0. Plumbing fixtures and equipment. b. Plumbing materials and accessories. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve dato and ratings. 2. Submittals ore reviewed only for general compliance with the Contract Documents. Dimensions, quantities and details ore not checked during submittal review. Review of the submittals does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing all materials, equipment and accessories necessary for a complete and operational system meeting the requirements of the project and the intent of the Contract Documents. The responsibility for coordination of substituted materials and equipment lies solely with the substituting Contractor. 3. Approval shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors on the shop drawings. 4. If the shop drawings deviate from the contract documents, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the deviations in writing accompanying the shop drawings, including the reasons for the deviotions. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and tog numbering. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions and spare parts lists. D. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. a. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience. Approved by manufacturer. C. Products: 1. Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 2. Listed and classified by the local Department of Buildings and furnished with an acceptance number, where applicable. 3. Listed and classified by the Landlord's and/or Owner's insurance carrier, where applicable. D. All equipment and components Shall be free of all rust/corrosion or any 'Asible damage. All items not complying with this requirement sholl be replaced without any change in the Contract amount. E. Equipment performance and accessories shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and specified herein. Inclusion in both locations is not a prerequisite to inclusion in the Contract. Equipment and accessories specified in either location shall be included in the Contract. Provide all necessary accessories and connections as required for a complete, functional system, including all required components reasonably inferred to as necessary although such components may or may not be specifically indicated in the Contract Documents. F. Code or utility company requirements shall supersede any conflicting requirements of this section. G. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on actual materials used; Compaction Density Test Reports. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place. S. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. E. Equipment: Protect equipment from physical damage by storing off site until the project Is ready for immediate installation. Provide temporary caps on all pipes to prevent debris from entering the pipe. 1.10 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE A. Additional warranty and guarantee terms in excess of this requirement are specified within the individual sections of Division 22. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters and packaged water heating systems. C. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for pumps. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The manufacturers listed are listed to set minimum standards for quality, design, and functionality. The products of other manufacturers may be submitted, at the Contractor's option, during shop drawing review unless indicated otherwise. The products of other manufacturers shall meet or exceed all requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor accepts all responsibility for costs and coordination issues arising out of the substitution of materials or equipment, and the coordination of such substitutions with all other contractors and subcontractors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Examine the Contract Documents as a whole for the work of other trades. Coordinate all work accordingly. B. Work lines and established heights shall be in strict accordance with architectural drawings and specifications insofar as these drawings and specifications extend. Verify all dimensions shown and establish all elevations and detailed dimensions not shown. C. Promptly report to the Architect any delay or difficulties encountered in the installation of the work. which might prevent prompt and proper installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of others. Failure to so report sholl constitute on acceptance of the work of other trades as being fit and proper for the execution of this work. D. Plan, toy out, and coordinate the work with all trades well enough in advance so that it proceeds with a minimum of Interference to work that has not been completed and work that is in progress. Inform all trades of openings required for the work and provide all special frames, sleeves, and anchor bolts required. The fire suppression system layout may be altered to suit the conditions, prior to the installation of any work and without additional cost to the Owner. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. E. Wherever pipe runs in or above ceilings or walls, the Contractor shall arrange the run of pipe in such a monner that it does not interfere with grilles, diffusers, outlet boxes, luminaires, or other ceiling mounted items. F. Install systems, materials and equipment to provide for maximum headroom, where no ceiling height is established or indicated on the Drawings. Maintain access to equipment requiring service when selecting mounting elevations. C. Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to building lines where exposed to View, unless otherwise indicated. H. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractoes responsibility. The Plumbing Contractor shall pay for all extra cutting and patching made necessary by his failure to properly direct such work at the correct time. 1. Perform oil work in conformity with the Contract Documents and afford other trades reasonable opportunity for the execution of their work. Properly connect and coordinate this work with the work of other trades at such time and in such a manner as not to delay or interfere with their work. J. Manufacturer's instruction sheets shall be followed explicitly in the installation of all equipment. Where manufacturer's instruction sheets conflict with requirements of these specifications or the Drawings, such conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for clarification. K. All roofing penetrations shall be flushed and weather sealed by the roofing manufacturer's authorized roofing contractor at this Contractor's expense. This Contractor sholl contract with the factory authorized roofing contractor for the specific roofing system applicable to this Project. The use of on unauthorized roofing contractor may result in removal and replacement of the penetration systems at this Contractor's expense. L Although all such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. M. Verify and coordinate all requirements and installation details of all materials and equipment that are to be furnished under other Divisions and installed or connected under Division 22 prior to rough -in. Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. As such, the Contractor is responsible to: 1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer"s instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. 2. Determine connection locations and requirements. 3. Sequence rough -in of plumbing connections to coordinate with installation of equipment. 3.02 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Prepare coordination drawings to a scale of 1/4"=l'-O" or larger detailing major elements, components, and systems of plumbing equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space Is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following: 1. Indicate the proposed locations of conduits, equipment, and materials. Include the following: 0. Clearances required for maintaining Code required working space. b. Equipment connections and support details. C. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. d. Fire -rated wall and floor penetrations. a. Sizes and location of required concrete pods and bases. f. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction. 9. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to Indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on the Drawings. B. Verify all pipe locations and sizes in field prior to fabrication or installation. C. Verify all equipment locations in field prior to installation. Coordinate final locations with all trades. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install all pipe, equipment, and accessories to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide tests as necessary to establish the adequacy, quality, safety, completed status, and suitable operation of each system. Tests shall be conducted under the supervision of the Architect. B. Install all equipment, d"ces, pipe, and materials securely and in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with all applicable standards and codes. C. Install all equipment, pipe, and materials plumb and level and align and adjust for satisfactory operation. D. Install all equipment, pipe, and materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. E. Inspect all equipment, pipe, and materials for defects. 3.06 ERECTION A. Rigging: 1. The Plumbing Contractor shall arrange for all labor and equipment required for the proper installation of the plumbing equipment in the locations indicated on the Drawings. Where crone rental or other erection is required, such costs shall be included In the Plumbing Contract, unless specific arrangements are made with the General Contractor to cover these costs. B. Supplemental Framing: 1. Provide the design, fabrication, and erection of supplementary structural framing required for attachment of hangers or other devices supporting plumbing equipment. Provide framing members of standard rolled steel shapes, A-36 steel. Provide members welded to structural members equal to the specification for the main structural member. Provide "simple beam" type froming with end connections welded or bolted for shear loads. Use cantilevers when detailed or specifically approved by the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer's approval is required for location of supplementary framing. Use only certified welders. Design framing members for their actual loads, with allowable stresses specified by AISC, without excessive deflection and with consideration for rigidity under vibration, in accordance with standard structural practices. Show on shop drawing supplementary framing, including design loads, member size and location. 3.07 CUTTING. PATCHING, AND PIERCING A. Cutting of openings and installation of sleeves or frames through walls and surfaces shall be done in a neot workmanlike manner. Openings sholl be cut only as large as required for the installation; sleeves and/or frames installed flush with finished surfaces and grouted in place. Surfaces around openings shall be left smooth and finished to match surrounding surface. B. Obtain written permission of the Architect/Engineer before cutting or piercing structural members. Use craftsmen skilled in their respective trades for cutting, fitting, repairing, patching of plaster, and finishing of materials including carpentry work, metal work or concrete work required for this work. C. Do not weaken walls. partitions. or floors with cutting. Holes required to be cut in floors must be drilled without breaking out around the holes. The Architect/Engineer will determine suitability of patching and/or refinishing requirements. D. The Plumbing Contractor is responsible for patching of oil openings resulting from the installation or removal of plumbing equipment or materials. E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. F. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Subcontractors. G. Fire and Smoke Partition Penetrations: The Contractor shall familiarize himself with all fire rated construction and install his work so as to maintain the integrity of the fire code rating. Maintain rating of fire rated and smoke rated construction. Seal annular space around conduits. For fire and smoke rated floors, walls and partitions, use UL listed material that maintains fire rated wall and floor integrity. 3.08 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. Clean plumbing parts to remove harmful materials. B. Clean exposed surfaces of all pipe, equipment, and accessories of all dirt, debris, splatter, and other deleterious materials. Follow the manufacturer's recommenclations for cleaning as applicable. C. Repair or replace damaged pipe, equipment, and accessories, as directed by and to the satisfaction of the Architect, where marring or disfigurement has occurred. All pipe, equipment, and accessories shall be new. 3.09 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Upon completion, the entire system shall be tested under operating conditions. 1. All equipment shall be tested under service conditions and proven to operate properly and noiselessly. 2. All additional tests as required throughout this Specification shall be completed with results reported back to the Architect/Engineer for review. B. Operate all equipment, after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation and correct deficiencies as required. C. Inspection: 1. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor sholl obtain certificates of inspection and approval from oil City and State Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 3.10 PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Project Record Documents: At project closeout, provide one printed copy and one electronic copy of project record drawings to the Owner. Information contained on project record drawings shall include, as a minimurn,: 1. Actual locations of all pipe, equipment, accessories, etc. 2. Actual pipe sizes and elevations. 3. Actual routing of all underfloor or below grade piping. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: At project closeout, submit to the Architect two copies of descriiptive literature, maintenance and operation data for all piping, equipment, accessories, and materials used. Include maintenance procedures, intervals, and parts list of each item Installed under this contract. Include all manufacturer's guarantees and warranties. END OF SEC11ON SECTION 220501 - TRENCHING AND BACKFILL FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Backfilling and compacting for utilities inside and outside the building. 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where designated; Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing; Prevent contamination; Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials. C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. D. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. E. Code requirements sholl supercede any conflicting requirements of this section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on -site; Graded; Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. B. Structural Fill: Subsoil excavated on -site; Graded; Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. C. Granular Fill - Gravel: Pit run stone: free of shale, clay, friable material and debris. D. Granular Fill - Pea Gravel: Natural stone; free of clay, shole, organic matter. E. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; free of silt, clay, loom, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter. F. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on -site; Select; Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter; Acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5; Containing a minimum of 4 percent and a maximum of 25 percent inorganic matter. PART 3 EXECU-nON 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities and construction that remains and protect from damage. 3.02 TRENCHING A. Notify Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected work in area until notified to resume work. B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. F. Remove large stones and other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. G. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd measured by volume. H. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re -use from site. 1. Stockpile excavated material to be re -used in area designated on site. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT A. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater then requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Until ready to bockfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. Fill up to finish grade or slab elevations unless otherwise indicated. B. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. C. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. D. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. E. Thrust bearing surfaces: Fill with concrete. F. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated: Under paving, slabs-on-grode, and similar construction: 97 percent of maximum dry density, At other locations: 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3.05 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. Utility Piping, Conduits, and Duct Bank: Bedding: Use granular fill; Cover with general fill; Fill up to finish grade elevation; Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density. C. Over Subdrainage Piping at Foundation Perimeter and Under Slabs: Drainage fill and geotextile fabric; Cover drainage fill with general fill; Fill up to finish grade elevation; Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus I inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167. ASTM D2922, or ASTM D3017. B. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D 1557 ("modified Proctor"), or AASHTO T 180. C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. 3.08 CLEAN-UP A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile. B. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water. C. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water. END OF SECTION SECTION 220516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flexible pipe connectors; Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - COPPER PIPING A. Manufacturer: Mercer Rubber Company, Metraflex Company. B. Inner Hose: Bronze; Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze; Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 450 degrees F; Joint: As specified for pipe joints; Size: Use pipe sized units; Maximum offset: 1 inch on each side of installed center line; Application: Copper piping. 2.02 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - STEEL PIPING A. Manufacturer: Mercer Rubber Company, Metraflex Company. B. Inner Hose: Pressure Rating: 125 psi and 450 degrees F; Joint: As specified for pipe joints; Size: Use pipe sized units; Maximum offset: 1 inch on each side of installed center line; Application: Steel piping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association) Standards. C. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to vibration isolated equipment. Provide line size flexible connectors. D. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated otherwise. E. Anchor pipe to building structure where indicated and as required to control detrimental movement of piping. Provide pipe guides so movement is directed along axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on connections or apparatus. F. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction of piping. Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing joints, or approved expansion joints where required. G. Contractor may substitute grooved piping for Vibration isolated equipment instead of flexible connectors. Grooved piping need not be anchored. END OF SECTION SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Positive displacement meters. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Manufacturers: Dwyer Instruments, Inc; FMC Technologies; Venture Measurement Company, McCrometer; Moeller Instrument Co., Inc; Omega Engineering, Inc. 2.02 POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT METERS (LIQUID) A. AWWA C700, positive displacement disc type suitable for fluid with bronze case and cast iron frost -proof, breakaway bottom cap. hermetically sealed register, remote reading to AWWA C706. B. Meter: Bross body turbine meter with magnetic drive register; Accuracy. 1-1/2 percent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. ProAde instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. C. Install positive displacement meters with isolating volves on inlet and outlet. Provide full line size valved bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters unless prohibited by local utility company. END OF SECTION SECTION 220529 - NON -PENETRATING ROOFTOP HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe supports; Fixed anchor supports; Accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Miro Industries Inc. 2.02 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. Supports and Hangers - General: Provide with bases that rest on the roof membrane and that have: Gently rounded edges to prevent damage to roof membrane; 1 inch high raised edges; Drainage ports to prevent ponding; Carbon black additive in polycarbonate, when used, for UV stabilization; Provide loose fit aluminum pipe strop on all supports, specifically designed for the support models below. Straps shall be loose fitting to prevent pipe from being displaced from the support stand but without restricting movement for expansion and contraction. B. Fixed Height Pipe Stands: Polycarbonote resin bases; 1-1/2-inch Nominal Pipe: "U"-shaped cradle; 1-1/2 inch ID maximum pipe capacity, 1-9/10 inch OD maximum pipe capacity, 1-1/2 inch additional height per spacer, maximum 3 spacers; total load up to 80 lb; 6 by 6 inch base (Model 1.5); 3-Inch Nominal Pipe: Self-lubricating polycarbonate roller supported by glass filled nylon roller rod in "U"-shoped cradle; 3 inch ID maximum pipe capacity, 3-7/8 inch DO maximum pipe capacity, 2 inch additional pipe clearance per spacer. maximum 3 spacers; total load up to 100 lb; 7-1/2 by 7-1/2 inch base (Model 3-R-2 or 3-R-4); 4-Inch Nominal Pipe: Self-lubricating polycortionate roller supported by glass filled nylon rod; 4 inch maximum pipe capacity, 5 inch OD maximum pipe capacity, total load up to 125 lb; 7-1/2 by 7-1/2 inch base (Model 4-R); 5-Inch Nominal Pipe: Self-lubricating polycarbonate roller supported by glass filled nylon rod; 5 inch maximum pipe capacity, 6 inch OD maximum pipe capacity, total load up to 150 lb; 9 by 15-1/2 inch base (Model 5-R). C. Strut -Type Supports: Single base with two threaded rods supporting hot dipped galvanized horizontal channel strut; Size: 12 inch strut 1-5/8 by 13/16 inch, pipe clearance variable up to 7 inch (Model 12 Base Strut ; Size: 16 inch strut 1-5/8 by 13/16 inch, pipe clearance variable up to 7 inch ?,Model 16 Base Strut); Base: Polycarbonate resin; total load up to 125 lb; 7-1/2 by 10 inch or 9 by 15-1/8 inch base. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Support Pads: 15-3/4 by 19-3/4 inch square, 1/8 inch thick, flexible PVC with carbon black additive for UV stabilization. B. Deck Plates: Square metal deck plate with curved up edges, to spread load and protect roof membrane; Thickness: 18 gauge; Material: Hot dip galvanized; Size: 12 x 12 inch square; total load up to 200 lb (Model DP-12); Size: 18 x 18 inch square; total load up to 400 lb (Model DP-18); Size: 24 x 24 inch square; total load up to 800 lb (Model DP-24). C. Rollers: Roller 3: 3 inch sturdy polycortionote roller, shaft 5/8 inches, end diameter 1-7/8 inches. Roller surface has a 3 inch radius orch. Maximum load capacity may not exceed 150 lbs; Roller 5: 5 inch sturdy polycortionote roller, shaft 5/8 Inches, end diameter 2-7/16 Inches. Roller surface has a 5 inch radius arch. Maximum load capacity may not exceed 150 lbs. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Determine that roof structure, roof insulation, and roof membrane are structurally adequate to support weight of pipe, duct, conduit, and supports and hangers. B. Install supports and hangers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install supports at maximum spacing of 10 feet unless closer spacing is required due to weight of pipe or conduit contents or greater spacing is specifically allowed by manufacturer; space and adjust to support an equal amount of weight; do not exceed manufacturer's recommended load limits. D. Remove roofing aggregate from area 2 inches larger than support base; comply with roofing manufacturer's requirements to maintain roofing warranty. E. Install an additional sheet of roofing material, support pod, or deck plate beneath each support base. F. Support Pods: Remove rock, aggregate, dirt and excess dust from area to be covered by pod; Apply support pod on cleaned area; Center bases on top of support pods. G. Deck Plates: Required for loads greater than 100 pounds per support; Locate centered under bases of pipe supports and hangers; Remove rock, aggregate, dirt and excess dust from an area 2 Inches larger than deck plate; Install with curved edges up. H. Pipe Supports: Center beneath pipe so that pipe is located squarely over and through cradle or hanger. Set pipe in support without dropping or causing undue impact. 1. All roofing penetrations shall be flashed and weather sealed by the roofing manufacturer's authorized roofing contractor at this Contractor's expense. This Contractor shall contract with the factory authorized roofing contractor for the specific roofing system applicable to this project. The use of an unauthorized roofing contractor may result in removal and replacement of the penetration systems at this Contractor's expense. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After system startup, correct any deficiencies that arilse, including but not limited to, improper location or position, improper seating or level on the roof, lack of roof pods or deck plates, inadequate operation, and as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Vibration Isolators. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Isolation Technology, Inc.; Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.; Mason industries. 2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Restrained Open Spring Isolators: Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for load carrying capacity, Spring Mounts: ProAde with leveling devices, minimum 0.25 inch thick neoprene sound pads, and zinc chromate plated hardware; Sound Pods: Size for minimum deflection of 0.05 inch; meet requirements for neoprene pad isolators; Restraint: Provide heavy mounting frame and limit stops; For Exterior and Humid Areas: Hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. B. Spring Hanger: Springs: Minimum horizontal stiffness equal to 75 percent vertical stiffness, with working deflection between 0.3 and 0.6 of maximum deflection. Color code springs for load carrying capacity, Housings: Incorporate neoprene isolation pad meeting requirements for neoprene pad isolators or rubber hanger with threaded insert; Misalignment: Capable of 20 degree honger rod misalignment; For Exterior and Humid Areas: Hot dipped galvanized housings and neoprene coated springs. C. Neoprene Pad Isolators: Rubber or neoprene waffle pads; Hardness: 30 durometer; Thickness: Minimum 1/2 inch; Maximum Loading: 50 psi; Rib Height: Maximum 0.7 times width; Configuration: Single layer. D. Rubber Mount or Hanger: Molded rubber designed for 0.4 inch deflection with threaded insert. E. Glass Fiber Pods: Neoprene jacketed pre -compressed molded glass fiber. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install In accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied, adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal. C. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers to nearest flexible pipe connector. D. ProAde flexible connections on all piping connections to equipment. E. Selection of type, thickness and deflection of Vibration isolation shall be by the Vibration control manufacturer based on the specific equipment type and size, as scheduled on the Drawings and indicated below. END OF SECTION SECTION 220595 - FIRE STOPPING FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping materials; Firestopping of all penetrations and interruptions to fire rated assemblies. whether indicated on Drawings or not, and other openings indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements; Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or FM or tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 or ASTM E 119 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating Equal to F Rating and that meets all other specified requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc; 3M Fire Protection Products; Specified Technologies, Inc. B. Elostomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single or multiple component Silicone elostomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant; conforming to the following: Durability and Longevity: Permanent; Color: Manufacturer's standard color. C. Foam Firestoppping: Single or multiple component foam compound; conforming to the following: Durability and Longevity. Permanent; Color: Manufacturees standard color. D. Filbered Compound Firestopping: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non -asbestos fibers; conforming to the following: Durability and Longevity: Permanent; Color: Manufacturer's standard color. E. Fiber Packing Material: Mineral or ceramic fiber packing insulation; conforming to the following: Durability and Longevity. Permanent. F. Firestop, Devices: Mechanical device with incombustible or silicone elostomer filler and sheet stainless steel locket, collor, and flanged stops; conforming to the following: Durability and Longevity. Permanent; suitable for pedestrian traffic or vehicular traffic where necessary. G. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows; conforming to the following: Durability and Longevity: Permanent. H. Prilmers, Sleeves, Forms, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material. B. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. B. Do not cover installed firestopping until Inspected by authority having jurisdiction. C. Install labeling required by code. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials. END OF SECTION SEC71ON 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Plumbing piping insulation; Domestic hot and tempered water piping; Domestic cold water piping; Cooling condensate drain piping insulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. B. The Contractor may use any of the following insulating/jacketing materials, at his option. provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected insulating/jocketing material is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. 2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers: Knauf Insulation; Johns Manville Corporation; Owens Coming Corp; CertainTeed Corporation. B. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible; `K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F; Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F; Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; semi -rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket; 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F; Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F; Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kroft paper with gloss fiber yam, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M of 0.02 perm -inches. E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation. F. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C 195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. G. Fibrous Glass Fabric: Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight; Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density; Weave: 5x5. H. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color; Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: Viinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, block color; Outdoor Breather Mastic: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mostic, compatible with insulation, block color. K. Insulating Cement: ASTM C 449/C 449M. 2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer: Armacell International; B. insulation: Preformed flexible elostomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C 534 Grade 1; use molded tubular material wherever possible; Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F; Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F; Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. C. Elostomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. 2.04 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. 1. Manufacturers: Knauf Fiber Glass; Johns Manville Corporation; Owens Corning Corp; CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color; Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F; Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F; Moisture Vapor Permeability'. 0.002 Perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M; Thickness: 10 mil; Connections: Brush on welding adhesive; Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation. B. ABS Plastic: 1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color; Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F; Maximum Servce Temperature of 180 degrees F; Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.012 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M; Thickness: 30 mil.; Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) formed aluminum sheet; Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet; Finish: Embossed; Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch lops; Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner; Metal Jacket Bonds: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum; Metal Jacket Bonds: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel. D. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTIA A 666, Type 304 stainless steel; Thickness: 0.010 inch; Finish: Smooth; Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least Asible locations. D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal lops and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic; Insulate fittings, joints, and volves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor borrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation. G. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, Insulate flanges and unions at equipment. H. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory -applied or fleld-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal lops and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples; Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 1. Inserts and Shields: Application: Piping 2 inches diameter or larger; Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts; Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket; Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of some thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated; Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. J. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, fire top penetrations to meet local code requirements. K. Pipe Exposed in Fimished Spaces (less than 10 feet above finished floor): Finish with Aluminum, Stainless Steel, ABS or PVC jacket and fitting covers. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. The Contractor may use any of the following insulating materials, at his option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State, local authorities and utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected insulating material and thickness with all State and local codes and utility company requirements is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. B. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot and Tempered Water Supply and Recirculation: 0. Glass Fiber Insulation: All Pipe: Thickness: I inch. b. Flexible Elostomeric Cellular Foam Insulation: Pipe Size Range: First 8 feet of pipe from fixture, up to 1 1/4 inch: Thickness: 1/2 inch.; All Other Pipe: Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Domestic Cold Water: a. Gloss Fiber Insulation: Pipe Size Range: All Sizes; Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Flexible Elostomeric Cellular Foam Insulation: Pipe Size Range: All Sizes; Thickness: 1/2 Inch. C. Cooling Systems: 1. Cold Condensate Drains: 0. Glass Fiber Insulation: Pipe Size Range: All Sizes; Thickness: 1/2 inch. b. Flexible Elostomeric Cellular Foam Insulation: Pipe Size Range: All Sizes; Thickness: 1/2 inch. END OF SECTION SECTION 220720 - PIPING SAFETY COVERS PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping Safety Covers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Truebro, Inc. 2.02 PIPING INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Provide products that comply with the following: Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA), Article 4.19.4; ANSI/ICC A117.1, Ameriican National Standard for Accessible Buildings and Facilities; Requirements of applicable building code. B. Piping Safety Covers: Truebro Lav-Guard; Characteristics: Three-piece molded assembly, minimum 1/8 inch wall thickness, with internal ribs to provide air space between piping and piping insulation jacket, molded to receive manufacturer's snap -clip fasteners; Vinyl Material: Impact -resistant and stain -resistant molded closed -cell anti -microbial vinyl compound, UV-stuble, non -fading, non yellowing; having the following performance characteristics: Burning Characteristics: 0 seconds Average Time of Burning (ATB), 0 mm Area of Burning (AEB), when tested in accordance with ASTM D 635; Thermal Conductivity. K-volue 1.17. when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177; Indentation Hardness: 60, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240, using Type A durometer: Trap Assembly Cover: Three-piece assembly, with removable clean -out nut enclosure; Angle Stop Covers: Formed with hinged cap for access to valve without requiring cover removal; Configurations: In accordance with manufacturer's product data for project piping configurations indicated on Drawings; Color: China White, gloss finish; pointable; Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard re -usable snap -clip fasteners; wire -tie fasteners not permitted PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping configurations ore correct type for piping cover component configurations specified. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products of this section In accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 3.03 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Do not allow damage to installed products by subsequent construction activities; protect products until Substantial Completion. Replace any damaged products prior to occupancy. END OF SECTION SECTION 221005 - PULIMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems: Sanitary sewer, interior, Domestic water, interior; Natural gas, interior. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 The Contractor may use any of the following piping materials. at his option, provided the selected material meets with the approval of all State and local authorities and utility company requirements. Verification of compliance of the selected piping material with local requirements is the sole responsibility of the installing Contractor. Verify the use of plastic piping systems with the local jurisdiction. Non-metallic piping systems may not be used in any return air plenum ceiling spaces. No exceptions. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cost Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 service weight; Fittings: Cost iron; Joints: Hub -and -spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets or lead and oakum. B. ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2751. ASTM F 628, ASTM D2661, or ASTM D2751; Fittings: ABS; Joints: Solvent welded with ASTM D 2235 cement. 2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cost Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74, service weight; Fittings: Cost iron; Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets, or load and oakum. B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight; Fittings: Cost iron; Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp -and -shield assemblies. 2.04 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, hard drawn; Fittings: ASME B16.18, cost copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze; Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. B. Ductile Iron Pipe: AAWA C151/A21.51; Fittings: Ductile or gray iron, standard thickness; Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber gasket with 3/4 inch diameter rods. 2.05 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M). Type L (B), Drown (H); Fittings: ASME B16.18, cost copper olloy or ASME 816.22, wrought copper and bronze; Fittings: Cast iron, coated; Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder; Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings. 2.06 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 black; Fittings: 3" and larger shall be ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought steel welding type. Threaded fittings may be used on piping 2 1/2" and smaller, except where noted on the drawings or required by code to be welded; Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.11. B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A) or L (B) annealed; Flittings: ASME 816.26, cost bronze; Joints: Flared. 2.07 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under: Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions; Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets; Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings: Housing: Malleable iron clamps to engage and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction, and expansion; steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe; Sealing gasket: "C" shape composition sealing gasket. D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. 2.08 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: Conform to MSS SP-58; Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring; Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis; Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cost iron hook; Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp; Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp; Floor Support: Cast Iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support; Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. B. Plumbing Piping - Water and Gas: Conform to MSS SP-58; Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring; Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis; Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis; Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cost iron pipe roll, double hanger; Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods; Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll; Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cost iron hook; Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp; Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cost iron pipe roll; Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp; Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cost iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support; Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cost iron adjustable pipe saddle. locknut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support; Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron pipe roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support; Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.09 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: Conbraco Industries; Nibco, Inc; Milwaukee Valve Company. B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MISS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass bull, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle, solder or threaded ends. 2.10 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Manufacturers: Hammond Valve; Crone Co; Milwaukee Valve Company. B. Construction 1-1/2 Inches and Larger MSS SP-67, 200 psi CWP, cost or ductile iron body, nickel -plated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends, extended neck, 10 position lever handle. C. Provide gear operators for valves 8 inches and larger, and chain -wheel operators for valves mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.11 FLOWCONTROLS A. Manufacturers: ITT Bell & Gossett; Griswold Controls; Taco. Inc. B. Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet, temperature and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet. C. Calibration: Automatically control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 3.5 psi. 2.12 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Manufacturers: Amtrol Inc; Cla-Val Co; Watts Regulator Company. B. Up to 2 Inches: MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends. C. Over 2 Inches: MSS SP-85. cost iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diophrogm and seat disc, flanged. 2.13 RELIEF VALVES A. Pressure Relief: Manufacturers: Clo-Val Co; Henry Technologies; Watts Regulator Company-, AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and spring% automatic, direct pressure actuated. B. Temperature and Pressure Relief., Manufacturers: Cla-Val Co; Henry Technologies; Watts Regulator Company, AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F, capacity ASME (BPV IV) certified and labeled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturees instructions. B. Provdis non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to wolls. D. install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. G. ProAde clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. H. Locate all valves and control elements in accessible areas wherever possible to avoid access doors. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed or located in accessible areas. Provide calling access doors for access to all valvNiss and control elements located above inaccessible ceiling areas. ProAde minimum 12 x 12 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 Inch for shut off valves only. Provide rated access doors where installed in fire rated construction. Review locations prior to fabrication. 1. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than the maximum local frost depth cover. Install tracer wire on all plastic piping outside the building. J. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. K. All roofing penetrations shall be flashed and weather sealed by the roofing manufacturer's authorized roofing contractor at this Contractor's expense. This Contractor shall contract with the factory authorized roofing contractor for the specific roofing system applicable to this Project. The use of an unauthorized roofing contractor may result in removal and replacement of the penetration systems at this Contractor's expense. L All sanitary vent system terminations shall be a minimum of ten feet from any fresh air intake and twenty-five feet on medical facilities (hospitals, clinics, etc.) M. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. N. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. 0. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. P. Point all exterior above grade piping with a minimum of two coats of point, color to match roof or wall surface to which it is attached; Copper pipe Apply vinyl etch primer immediately following cleaning. EXT 5.5A Atkyd: Viinyl Wash Primer MPI #80, Alkyd MPI #8, 9 or 94. Semi -gloss; Steel pipe: Apply alkyd metal primer immediately following cleaning. EXT 5.1D Alkyd: Alkyd Metal Primer MPI #79, Alkyd MPI # 94, semi -gloss; Plastic pipe: Apply olkyd bonding primer immediately following cleaning. EXT 6.8B Alkyd: Bonding Primer MPI #17 or 69, Alkyd MPI #8, 9 or 94. Q. Excavate, bedding and backfill shall be in accordance with applicable sections of this Specification. R. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood, unless of the ventless design and approved by the local jurisdiction and the local utility company regulates. S. The use of sanitary tee fittings will not be permitted. Utilize wye fittings in lieu of tee fittings for all intersections of drainage piping. T. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, masonry walls and floors. Seat and fire stop pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. All penetrations through footings and floors shall be sealed water tight. U. Whereever piping is located within 1.5 Inches of the nearest edge of studs, joists, rafters or similar members, provide minimum 0.062 inch thick steel protective shield plates extending 2" above and below the pipe being protected. Shield plates may be omitted on cost iron piping only. V. Inserts: Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork; Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams; Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches; Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface; Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through -bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slob. W. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Install in accordance with ASME B31.9, ASTM F 708, and MSS SP-89; Support horizontal piping as scheduled; Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work; Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow; Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe; Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping NELSON 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonwoddwide.com Schmickel engineers, New Yek s Miami s Omahas � "alas z Seame s Honch, OW-51114M WAwadwadmicinii ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supewision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design proliessional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 Mof A 0 141 0 ID ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 00100/22 PERMIT BID LANDLORD REVIEW CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS I LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC �011`11 OP 4-05" ww, GREGORY ROY SCHNACKEL _/ONAL Date: 10111122 COA A- 0407 005J57 PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB Charlottesville IBS 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 PROJECT #: 22.0000289.00 SHEET INFORMATION PUJMBM SPECIFIMMINS DRAWN BY: SRH REVIEWED BY: GRS SCALE: As noted MU M 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 3 4 5 0 7 0 0 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 17 N M L J H G F E u C independently of connected horizontal piping; Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers; Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping; Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed; Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. B. Install ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. C. Install globe, ball, or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. D. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment. E. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps. F. Provide plug or gas service rated ball valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. G. Provide plug or gas service rated ball valves in propane gas systems for shut-off service. H. Provide automatic flow controls valves in water recirculating systems where indicated. I. Provide spring loaded check valves when located on the discharge of pumps. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Interior Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points. 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: 1. Metal Piping: a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches: Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft; Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches. b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches: Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft; Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch. C. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches: Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft; Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch. d. Pipe size: 4 inches to 6 inches: Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft; Hanger rod diameter: 5/8 inch. 2. Plastic Piping: a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 6 inches: Maximum hanger spacing: 6 ft; Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch. END OF SECTION SECTION 221006 - PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Drains; Cleanouts; Backflow, preventers; Water hammer arrestors; Thermostatic mixing valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Manufacturers: Conbroco Industries; Watts Regulator Company, Zurn Industries, Inc. 2.02 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company, Watts Regulator Company, Zurn Industries, Inc. B. Water Hammer Arrestors: Stainless steel or copper construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 2O1, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range 34 to 250 degrees F and maximum 150 psi working pressure. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor for a completely flush installation. E. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, drink mixing stations, interior and exterior hose bibbs and all other locations required by Codes. F. Pipe relief from backflow, preventer to nearest drain. G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping to all fixtures and equipment. END OF SECTION SECTION 223000 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water Heaters; Commercial electric water heaters; Circulators. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER HEATER MANUFACTURERS A. A.O. Smith Water Products Co.; Rheem Manufacturing Company. 2.02 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Type: Factory -assembled and wired, electric, vertical or horizontal storage as specified. B. Performance: Maximum working pressure: 150 psig; Equipment performance and accessories shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and specified herein. Inclusion in both locations is not a prerequisite to inclusion in the Contract. Equipment and accessories specified in either location shall be included in the Contract. Provide all necessary accessories and connections as required for a complete, functional system. C. Electrical Characteristics: As indicated on the Drawings; Verify that proper power supply is available prior to ordering equipment. Verify proper voltage, phase and current rating of power supply and inform Engineer of any deviations prior to order, connection of equipment or start-up. Responsibility for verification of proper power supply voltage and any product returns or damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor. D. Tank: Glass lined or copper lined welded steel; ASME labeled pressure vessel when required by code, 4 inch diameter inspection port, thermally insulated with minimum 2 inches polyurethane encased in corrosion -resistant steel jacket; baked -on enamel finish. E. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature range from 60 to 180 degrees F, flanged or screw -in nichrome elements, high temperature limit thermostat. F. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, magnesium anode, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve and heat trap fittings for hot and cold water connections; Water connections: Brass; Dip tube: Crosslinked polyethylene (PEX) or brass; Drain Valve; Anode: Magnesium; Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ASME labeled. G. Controls: Ventilated control cabinet, factory -wired with solid state progressive sequencing step controller, fuses, magnetic contactors, control transformer, pilot lights indicating main power and heating steps, control circuit toggle switch, electronic low-water (probe -type) cut-off, high temperature limit thermostat, flush -mounted temperature and pressure gages. H. Heating Elements: Flange -mounted immersion elements; individual elements sheathed with Incoloy corrosion -resistant metal alloy, rated less than 75 Watts per square inch. 2.03 IN -LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS A. Manufacturers: Armstrong Pumps Inc; ITT Bell & Gossett; Sterling Fluid Systems; Taco, Inc.. B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure; Impeller: Bronze; Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings; Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat; Drive: Flexible coupling. C. Performance: Equipment performance and accessories shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and specified herein. Inclusion in both locations is not a prerequisite to inclusion in the Contract. Equipment and accessories specified in either location shall be included in the Contract. Provide all necessary accessories and connections as required for a complete, functional system; Electrical Characteristics: As indicated on the Drawings; Verify that proper power supply is available prior to ordering equipment. Verify proper voltage, phase and current rating of power supply and inform Engineer of any deviations prior to order, connection of equipment or start-up. Responsibility for verification of proper power supply voltage and any product returns or damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and complying with conditions of certification, if any. B. Provide concrete equipment bases for all floor mounted plumbing equipment. C. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping, gas venting, and electrical work as applicable to achieve operating system. D. Pumps: 1. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings. 2. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve and balancing valve on discharge. 3. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation, are non -overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve. 4. Verify that proper power supply is available prior to ordering equipment. Verify proper voltage, phase and current rating of power supply and inform Engineer of any deviations prior to order, connection of equipment or start-up. Responsibility for verification of proper power supply voltage and any product returns or damage resulting from incorrect connections shall rest with this Contractor. 5. Refer to vibration isolation requirements specified in Vibration Isolation section of this Specification. END OF SECTION SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. All plumbing fixtures as scheduled on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough -in schedule for particular fixtures. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. B. Install each fixture using brass angle ball stop valves for hot and cold water connections as applicable. Non-metallic valves or non -ball valve type stops will not be accepted. C. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with specified stops, B reducers, and escutcheons. D. Install components level and plumb. E. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers, wall supports and bolts. F. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant, color to match fixture. G. Solidly attach floor mounted water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. H. Install fixtures and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and in accordance with the ICC (IPC) or UPC. I. When fixtures require both hot water and cold water supplies, provide the hot water supply to the left of the cold water supply. J. Install off -the -floor supports to conform to ASME A112.6.1M. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough -in and installation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. A 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations. B. Repair or replace damaged products before date of Substantial Completion. 3.07 FIELD INSPECTION A. Continue inspection during installation and testing. B. Correct or replace all rejected equipment prior to installation. END OF SECTION ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 NELSOA 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com khnwkel engineers, New Yoh • Miami • Omaha • Las Angeles • Seatlle • Honshu BOOZ81490 wwttdmtdoLom C&dlff SCHWAS ISSUE INFORMATION ISSUED FOR CLIENT REVIEW 00/00/22 PERMIT BID LANDLORD REVIEW CONTRACTOR SHALL BUILD ONLY FROM SETS STAMPED "CONSTRUCTION SET" HEREIN REVISIONS Q1 LANDLORD COMMENTS 10/11/22 NELCO ARCHITECTURE, INC. il,xT H OF `/ Z GREGORY ROY SCHNACKEL > e .0 1596/ O S/ONAL E Dote: 10/11/22 COA -0407 005357 PROJECT INFORMATION CHARLES SCHWAB Charlottesville IBS 220 Twentyninth Place Suite S20 Charlottesville, VA 22901 PROJECT #: 22.0000289.00 SHEET INFORMATION PLILAWS tK3 MCFMTKM DRAWN BY: SRH REVIEWED BY: GRS SCALE: As noted Mill 2 3 4 5 M 7 M 0 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2 3 4 5 0 7 0 0 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 N COMcheck Software Version 4.1.5.5 Mechanical Compliance Certificate Project Information Energy Code: 90.1 (2016) Standard Project Title: Charles Schwab Location: Charlottesville, Virginia Climate Zone: 4a Project Type: Alteration M Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor: 220 Twentyninth Place Gregory Schnackel Suite S20 Schnackel Engineers Charlottesville, VA 22901 3035 South 72nd Street Omaha, NE 68124 (402) 391-7680 Mechanical Systems List Quantity System Type & Description 1 RTU-1 Heating: 1 each - Central Furnace, Gas, Capacity = 120 kBtu/h L Proposed Efficiency = 80.00% Et, Required Efficiency: 80.00 % Et (or 781y.AFUE) Cooling: 1 each - Split System, Capacity = 72 kBtu/h, Air -Cooled Condenser, Air Economizer Proposed Efficiency = 11.00 EER, Required Efficiency: 11.00 EER + 12.7 IEER Fan System: RTU-1 -- Compliance (Motor nameplate HP method) : Passes Fans: FAN 1 Supply, Constant Volume, 2400 CFM, 1.5 motor nameplate hp, 0.9 fan efficiency grade SYSTEM VERIFICATION REQUIRED. 1 HWH-1 Electric Storage Water Heater, Capacity: 20 gallons No minimum efficiency requirement applies SWH COMPLIANCE REQUIRED. K J H G F E u C Mechanical Compliance Statement Compliance Statement: The proposed mechanical alteration project represented in this document is consistent with the building plans, specifications, and other calculations submitted with this permit application. The proposed mechanical systems have been designed to meet the 90.1 (2016) Standard requirements in COMcheck Version 4.1.5.5 and to comply with any applicable mandatory requirements listed in the Inspection Checklist. ,� GregoryR. SchnackelR. Schnackel ��/�/Lf ctober 10, 2022 Name - Title Signature r�TH 0f ate Adz r GREGORY ROY y' r "NAM > A No. 0315% N* Project Title: Charles Schwab Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Report date: 10/10/22 Page 3 of 14 HVAC equipment efficiency ; Efficiency:_ ; Efficiency:_ ;❑Complies ;See the Mechanical Systems list verified. Non-NAECA HVAC i j❑Does Not ;for values. equipment labeled as meeting Observable 90.1. ;❑Not ❑Not Applicable Stair and elevator shaft vents ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. have motorized dampers that ❑Does Not automatically close. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable Outdoor air and exhaust systems ❑Complies Requirement will be met. have motorized dampers that ❑Does Not -- automatically shut when not in ❑Nat Observable use and meet maximum leakage ❑Not Applicable rates. Check gravity dampers where allowed. Enclosed parking garage ❑Complies Requirement will be met. ventilation has automatic ❑Does Not contaminant detection and ❑Not Observable capacity to stage or modulate ❑Not Applicable fans to 50% or less of design capacity. Ventilation fans >0.75 hp have ❑Complies Requirement will be met. automatic controls to shut off fan ❑Does Not when not required. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable 6.4.3.8 ; Demand control ventilation ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. IME611 provided for spaces >500 ft2 and ❑Does Not people/1000 ft2 occupant ❑Not Observable ;>25 density and served by systems ❑Not Applicable with air side economizer, auto :modulating outside air damper !control, or design airflow >3,000 I cfm. DX cooling systems >= 75 kBtu/h ❑Complies :Requirement will be met. (>= 65 kBtu/h effective 1/2016) ❑Does Not and chilled -water and :See the Mechanical Systems list []Not Observable for evaporative cooling fan motor hp values. ❑Not Applicable > = 'Adesigned to vary supply fan airflow as a function of load and comply with operational requirements. Insulation exposed to weather ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. _ _� protected from damage. ❑Does Not Insulation outside of the conditioned space and associated ❑Not Observable with cooling systems is vapor ❑Not Applicable retardant. HVAC ducts and plenums R- R- ;❑Complies :Requirement will be met. insulated per Table 6.8.2. Where❑Does Not ducts or plenums are installed in ;❑Not Observable or under a slab, verification may Applicable need to occur during Foundation❑Not Inspection. HVAC piping insulation thickness. _ in. _ in. ;❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. Where piping is installed in or ;❑Does Not under a slab, verification may need to occur during Foundation ;❑Not Observable Inspection. j❑Not Applicable 1 IHigh Impact (Tier 1) MMedium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Charles Schwab Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Report date: 10/10/22 Page 7 of 14 COMcheck Software Version 4.1.5.5 Inspection Checklist Energy Code: 90.1 (2016) Standard Requirements: 100.0% were addressed directly in the COMcheck software Text in the "Comments/Assumptions" column is provided by the user in the COMcheck Requirements screen. For each requirement, the user certifies that a code requirement will be met and how that is documented, or that an exception is being claimed. Where compliance is itemized in a separate table, a reference to that table is provided. 4.2.2, :Plans, specifications, and/or❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. 6.4.4.2.1, calculations provide all information❑Does Not 6.7.2 IPR211 ;with which compliance can be ;determined for the mechanical❑Not Observable ;systems and equipment and ',❑Not Applicable ; ;document where exceptions to the ;standard are claimed. Load :calculations per acceptable :engineering standards and ;handbooks. 4.2.2, :Plans, specifications, and/or❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. 7.7.1, :calculations provide all information❑Does Not 10.4.2 :with which compliance can be []Not Observable IPR311 ;determined for the service water ;heating systems and equipment and❑Not Applicable ; ;document where exceptions to the I standard are claimed. Hot water ;system sized per manufacturer's ;sizing guide. Plans, specifications, and/or❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. calculations provide all information❑Does Not with which compliance can be determined for the electrical systems :❑Not Observable and equipment and document where❑Not Applicable ; exceptions are claimed. Feeder connectors sized in accordance with approved plans and branch circuits sized for maximum drop of 3%. 4.2.2, ;Plans, specifications, and/or❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. 9.4.3, 9.7 :calculations provide all information j❑Does Not 1PR411 :with which compliance can be :[-]Not Observable: ;determined for the interior lighting :and electrical systems and equipment ;❑Not Applicable jand document where exceptions to j :the standard are claimed. Information I provided should include interior :lighting power calculations, wattage of ;bulbs and ballasts, transformers and (control devices. 6.7.2.4 Detailed instructions for HVAC❑Complies !Requirement will be met. IPR511 :systems commissioning included on :❑Does Not !the plans or specifications for projects❑ Not Observable; >=50,000 ft2. ❑Not Applicable Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) No Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Charles Schwab Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Report date: 10/10/22 Page 4 of 14 Thermally ineffective panel ❑Complies :Requirement will be met. surfaces of sensible heating ❑Does Not panels have insulation >= R-3.5. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable Ducts and plenums having ❑Complies Requirement will be met. pressure class ratings are Seal ❑Does Not Class A construction. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable Electrically operated DX-DOAS ❑Complies Requirement will be met. units meet requirements per ❑Does Not Tables 6.8.1-15 or 6.8.1-16. ❑Nat Observable I ❑Not Applicable Ductwork operating >3 in. water ❑Complies Requirement will be met. column requires air leakage ❑Does Not testing. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable Dehumidification controls ❑Complies I Requirement will be met. provided to prevent reheating, ❑Does Not recooling, mixing of hot and cold ❑Not Observable airstreams or concurrent heating and cooling of the same ❑Not Applicable airstream. Humidifiers with airstream ❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. mounted preheating jackets have ❑Does Not preheat auto -shutoff value set to activate when humidification is ❑Not Observable not required. ❑Not Applicable Humidification system dispersion —Complies :Requirement will be met. tube hot surfaces in the ❑Does Not airstreams of ducts or air - handling units insulated >= R- ❑Not Observable 0.5. ❑Not Applicable Preheat coils controlled to stop ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. _ heat output whenever ❑Does Not mechanical cooling, including ❑Not Observable _ economizer operation, is active. ❑Not Applicable - -_- Units that provide ventilation air ❑Complies Requirement will be met. to multiple zones and operate in ❑Does Not _= conjunction with zone heating ❑Not Observable and cooling systems are prevented from using heating or ❑Not Applicable _-- heat recovery to warm supply air above 60°F when representative - building loads or outdoor air temperature indicate that most _ zones demand cooling. Motors for fans >= 1/12 hp and ❑Complies :Requirement will be met. < 1 hp are electronically- ❑Does Not commutated motors or have a ❑Not Observable minimum motor efficiency of 70%. These motors are also ❑Not Applicable speed adjustable for either balancing or remote control. 1 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) ON Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Charles Schwab Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Report date: 10/10/22 Page 8 of 14 protection and snow/ice system sensors for future [ion to controls. Additional Comments/Assumptions: s Not Observable Requirement will be met. 1 JHIgh Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Charles Schwab Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Report date: 10/10/22 Page 5 of 14 Parallel -flow fan -powered VAV air ❑Complies :Requirement will be met. terminals have automatic ❑Does Not controls to a) turn off the ❑Not Observable terminal fan except when space heating is required or if required ❑Not Applicable for ventilation; b) turn on the terminal fan as the first stage of heating before the heating coil is activated; and c) during heating for warmup or setback temperature control, either operate the terminal fan and heating coil without primary air or reverse the terminal damper logic and provide heating from the central air handler through primary air. Required minimum outdoor air ❑Complies :Requirement will be met. rate is the larger of minimum ❑Does Not outdoor air rate or minimum ❑Not Observable exhaust air rate required by Standard 62.1, Standard 170, or ❑Not Applicable applicable codes or accreditation standards. Outdoor air ventilation systems shall comply with one of the following: a) design minimum system outdoor air provided < 135% of the required minimum outdoor air rate, b) dampers, ductwork, and controls allow the system to supply <= the required minimum outdoor air rate with a single set -point adjustment., or c) system includes exhaust air energy recovery complying with Section 6.5.6.1. Multiple zone VAV systems with ❑Complies :Requirement will be met. DOC of individual zone boxes ❑Does Not have static pressure setpoint ❑Not Observable 'See the Mechanical Systems list for reset controls. values. ❑Nat Applicable --= HVAC pumping systems with >= ❑Complies :Requirement will be met. 3 control values designed for ❑Does Not _= variable fluid flow (see section ❑Not Observable details). ❑Not Applicable Exhaust air energy recovery on ❑Complies :Requirement will be met. [ME5611 ;systems meeting Tables 6.5.6.1- ❑Does Not 1, and 6.5.6.1-2. ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable Conditioned supply air to space ❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. with mechanical exhaust <= the ❑Does Not greater of criteria of supply flow, ❑Nat Observable required ventilation rate, exhaust ❑Not Applicable flow minu the available transffer air (see section details). Kitchen hoods >5,000 cfm have ❑Complies :Requirement will be met. make up air >=50% of exhaust ❑Does Not air volume. ❑Not Observable ❑Nat Applicable 1 IHigh Impact (Tier 1) MMedium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Charles Schwab Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Report date: 10/10/22 Page 9 of 14 Additional Comments/Assumptions: ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. William F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 1 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Charles Schwab Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Report date: 10/10/22 Page 6 of 14 Approved field test used to ❑Complies :Requirement will be met. evaluate design air flow rates ❑Does Not and demonstrate proper capture ❑Not Observable and containment of kitchen exhaust systems. ❑Not Applicable Unenclosed spaces that are ❑Complies Requirement will be met. heated use only radiant heat. ❑Does Not ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable 6.5.9 ;Hot gas bypass limited to: <=240 ❑Complies Requirement will be met. [ME3511 ;kBtu/h - 15%>240 kBtu/h - 10% ❑Does Not ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable Service water heating equipment ❑Complies meets efficiency requirements. ❑Does Not []Not Observable ❑Not Applicable Heating for vestibules and air ❑Complies ,Requirement will be met. curtains with integral heating ❑Does Not include automatic controls that ❑Not Observable shut off the heating system when ❑Not Applicable outdoor air temperatures > 45F. Vestibule heating and cooling systems controlled by a thermostat in the vestibule with heating setpoint <= 60F and cooling setpoint >= 80F. Doors separating conditioned ❑Complies :Requirement will be met. space from the outdoors have ❑Does Not controls that disable/reset ❑Not Observable heating and cooling system when ❑Not Applicable open. Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 High Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) Project Title: Charles Schwab Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Report date: 10/10/22 Page 10 of 14 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com Schnackel eng d d z 0 n r E 0 i; m 9 n m D d a E 9 a 0 z a 9 N P a O N 0 9 N a 3 m NELSON iC&dlff n 04.6 tas t 9 2 3 4 5 7 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PI NI MI LI KI JI At least 50% of all 125 volt 15- and❑Complies ;Exception: Space type is not private office, open office, or 20-Amp receptacles are controlled by❑Does Not computer classroom. an automatic control device. :[-]Not Observable ; ❑Not Applicable New buildings have electrical energy []Complies ; Requirement will be met. use measurement devices installed. I❑Does Not Where tenant spaces exist, each Observable tenant is monitored separately. In❑Not buildings with a digital control system❑Not Applicable ; the energy use is transmitted to to control system and displayed graphically. Automatic control requirements❑Complies !Requirement will be met. prescribed in Table 9.6.1, for the I❑Does Not appropriate space type, are installed. I Observable I Mandatory lighting controls (labeled❑Not Applicable as'REQ') and optional choice controls❑Not ; (labeled as'ADD1' and 'ADD2') are implemented. Independent lighting controls installed❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. per approved lighting plans and all❑Does Not manual controls readily accessible and: :[_]Not Observable visible to occupants. ❑Not Applicable ; 9.4.1.1f :Daylight areas under skylights and❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. [EL13]1 :roof monitors that have more than❑Does Not 1150 W combined input power for ; :❑Not Observable :general lighting are controlled by iphotocontrols.❑Not Applicable ; 9.4.1.3 ;Separate lighting control devices for❑Complies !Requirement will be met. [EL4]1 ;specific uses installed per approved I❑Does Not lighting plans.❑Not Observable I ❑Not Applicable 9.6.2 ;Additional interior lighting power❑Complies ;Requirement will be met. [EL811 allowed for special functions per the❑Does Not ;approved lighting plans and 'is❑Not ;automatically controlled and Observable; ;separated from general lighting.❑Not Applicable j Electric motors meet requirements❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. where applicable. j❑Does Not I:[ --]Not Observable ❑Nat Applicable Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 1HIgh Impact (Tier 1) Mmedium Impact (Tier 2) in Low Impact (Tier 3) Thermostatic controls have a 5 °F❑Complies ,Requirement will be met. deadband.❑Does Not :[-]Not Observable ❑Not Applicable Temperature controls have setpoint❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. overlap restrictions.❑Does Not ❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable ; HVAC systems equipped with at least❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. one automatic shutdown control.❑Does Not ❑Not Observable I ❑Not Applicable Setback controls allow automatic❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. restart and temporary operation as :❑Does Not required for maintenance. :[-]Not Observable ; ❑Not Applicable Air economizer has a fault detection❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. and diagnostics (FDD) system (see❑Does Not details for configuration and❑Not operational requirements). Observable; ❑Not Applicable When humidification and❑Complies !Requirement will be met. dehumidification are provided to a❑Does Not zone, simultaneous operation is prohibited. Humidity control prohibits❑Nat Observable I the use of fossil fuel or electricity to❑Not Applicable ; produce RH > 30% in the warmest zone humidified and RH < 60% in the coldest zone dehumidified. Furnished HVAC as -built drawings❑Complies !Requirement will be met. submitted within 90 days of system❑Does Not acceptance.❑Not Observable j❑Not Applicable Furnished O&M manuals for HVAC I❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. systems within 90 days of system❑Does Not acceptance. ;❑Not Observable ❑Not Applicable ;An air and/or hydronic system❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. [FI9]1 balancing report is provided for HVAC :❑Does Not ;systems serving zones >5,000 ft2 of ; ❑Not Observable I ;conditioned area. ❑Nat Applicable ; 6.7.2.4 ; HVAC control systems have been❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. IFI1011 :tested to ensure proper operation, ❑Does Not calibration and adjustment of controls.❑Not Observable; 1 ❑Not Applicable j Public lavatory faucet water ;❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. temperature <=110'F.❑Does Not ❑Not Observable ; -- -❑Not Applicable Furnished as -built drawings for❑Complies ,Requirement will be met. electric power systems within 30 days :❑Does Not of system acceptance. ❑Not Observable: ❑Not Applicable j 1 IHigh Impact (Tier 1) M Medium Impact (Tier 2) No Low Impact (Tier 3) Furnished0&M instructions for ;❑Complies :Requirement will be met. d equipment to the I❑Does Not ner or designated;❑Not Observable; tive. ❑Not Applicable 9.2.2.3 ; Interior installed lamp and fixture ❑Complies ;See me Interior Lighting fixture schedule for values. [FI18)1 lighting power is consistent with what❑Does Not ;is shown on the approved lighting ❑Not Observable; ;plans, demonstrating proposed watts ;are less than or equal to allowed❑Not Applicable j ;watts. 9.4.4 :At least 75% of all permanently❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. [F120]1 hnstalled lighting fixtures in dwelling ❑Does Not ;units have >= 55 Im/W efficacy or a❑Not >= 45 Im/W total lumina:re efficacy. Observable; j❑Not Applicable j Elevators are designed with the❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. proper lighting, ventilation power, and❑Does Not standby mode. ❑Nat Observable ; ❑Not Applicable First 8 ft of outlet piping in❑Complies ; Requirement will be met. nonrecirculating storage system, or I❑Does Not j branch piping connected to Observable I recirculated, heat traced, or❑Not impredance heated piping is ❑Not Applicable ; insulated. Additional Comments/Assumptions: 1 JHIgh Impact (Tier 1) Medium Impact (Tier 2) Low Impact (Tier 3) Is Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Project Title: Charles Schwab Report date: 10/10/22 Project Title: Charles Schwab Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 11 of 14 Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculat:on Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 12 of 14 Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculation Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck Page 13 of 14 Data filename: V:\Energy_Calculat:on Data Files\COMcheck V4.1.5.5\220318.cck H GI FI EI DI CI BI AI Report date: 10/10/22 Page 14 of 14 ECS Mid -Atlantic, LLC staff has reviewed these plans and supporting documents under my direct supervision. It is my professional judgment that (a) the plans were designed and presented as outlined by the provisions of the 2018 Virginia Construction Codes, and (b) the engineered systems and/or construction features are deemed to be compliant with the relevant codes and regulations. ECS recommends to Building Department Staff that they be Approved for Code Compliance. This certification does not relieve the registered design professional(s) of record and other parties of their responsibilities for the design or construction of the project. Wlliam F. Hinson, Jr., PE, CBO Plans Examiner and Professional -in -Charge DPOR License # 0402021900 201 E. 4th. Street, Suite 1700 Cincinnati, OH 45202 www.nelsonworldwide.com Schnackel engineers, New Yoh 0 Miami s Omahas Las Angeles m Seatlle d a s z 0 E 0 3 9 0 0 9 n m D N a 0 E 9 a 0 z a 9 N P a O N 6 0 0 9 N a 3 m ss NELSON C&dlff s Honshu 0 ss 0 tas ss ss t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18